JP2020099833A5 - - Google Patents

Description

Amusement machine

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines execute a performance to notify the player of the judgment result when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, and whether the game is valid or not. However, if the result of the hit determination is a hit, there is a game in which a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed.

JP2012-217766A

However, as an effect to suggest the result of the hit/miss judgment, further interest in the game has been demanded.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, the determination means capable of performing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the display means is specified. when said identification information for indicating the determination result is displayed, has a privilege granting means advantageous benefits to the player is given, a possible dynamic display the identification information in a predetermined operation pattern of Dynamic display means, variable means that can be changed to a first state and a second state different from the first state, and variable control for changing the variable means based on a predetermined variable pattern can be executed. A variable control means, the gaming machine, as an effect pattern for indicating the determination result of the determination means, the operation pattern of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, An effect pattern including the variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means can be determined based on at least the determination result of the determination means 1, and the variable means is in the first state. It is possible to make the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means more difficult to visually recognize in the second state than in a certain case, and the variable control means sets the identification information. The variable means can be changed in a variable manner included in the effect pattern even when is not dynamically displayed .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the determination means capable of executing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the determination result specific to the display means are displayed. If the identification information for indicating is displayed, it has a privilege granting means advantageous benefit is provided to the player, and a dynamic display, dynamic display unit the identification information in a predetermined operation pattern Variable means for changing the first state and a second state different from the first state, and variable control means capable of executing variable control for changing the variable means based on a predetermined variable pattern. The gaming machine has, as an effect pattern for indicating the determination result of the determination means, the operation pattern of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the variable control means. An effect pattern including the variable pattern of the variable unit to be executed can be determined based on at least the determination result of the determination unit 1, and more than in the case where the variable unit is in the first state, In the case of the second state, it is possible to make the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means difficult to visually recognize, and the variable control means displays the identification information dynamically. Even in the state where it is not, it is possible to change the changing means in a changing manner included in the effect pattern .

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. It is a perspective front view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of a winning opening unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a base member and a 1st electric accessory. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a drive unit. (A) And (b) is a side view of a drive unit and a 1st electric accessory. (A) And (b) is a front view of a drive unit and a 1st electric accessory. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 500 in the XVII-XVII line of FIG. 10 (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is a side view of a 1st electric accessory and a drive unit. 18A is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XXa-XXa of FIG. 18A, and FIG. 20B is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XXb-XXb of FIG. 18B. is there. (A) And (b) is a side view of a 1st electric accessory and a drive unit. 21A is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in the range XXIIa of FIG. 21A, and FIG. 21B is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in the range XXIIb of FIG. 21B. (A) is a front perspective view of a left wing member, and (b) is a front perspective view of a right wing member. FIG. 24A is a front view of the winning opening unit, and FIG. 24B is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. 27A is a top view of the winning opening unit, and FIG. 27B is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 27A and 27B are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit in the range XXVIII of FIG. 27B. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in the range XXIX of FIG. 30A is a front view of the decorative symbol display device, and FIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device taken along line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. It is an exploded perspective front view of a decorative pattern display device. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a decorative symbol display device. (A) is a front view showing the inner reel in a developed state, and (b) is a front view showing the outer reel in a developed state. It is sectional drawing of the decorative symbol display device in the XXXIV-XXXIV line of FIG. 30 (a). It is a partially expanded view of the decorative symbol display device in the range XXXV of FIG. 36A is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and FIG. 36B is a sectional view of the rotating member taken along line XXXVIb-XXXVIb in FIG. It is a front view of a segment display device. It is an exploded view of a segment display device. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a 2nd segment unit, (b) is a rear view of a 2nd segment unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a 2nd segment unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a 2nd segment unit. FIG. 43A is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit taken along the line XLV-XLV in FIG. It is a side view of a base member. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd segment unit in the XLVII-XLVII line of FIG. 42 (a). It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a displacement member, (b) is a side view of a displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a displacement member. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement member taken along the line LIII-LIII in FIG. It is a front view of a displacement member. It is a front view of a segment display device and a decorative pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram of a segment display device and a decorative pattern display device. (A) to (c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a side view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57(a). (A) is a side view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57(a). (A) is a side view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57(a). It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. 64A is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 64B is a sectional view of the rotating member taken along line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64A. It is sectional drawing of the decorative pattern display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. 66A is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and FIG. 66B is a sectional view of the outer reel unit taken along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66A. It is sectional drawing of the decorative pattern display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. 68A is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and FIG. 68B is a sectional view of the rotating member taken along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. 68A. It is sectional drawing of the decorative pattern display apparatus in 5th Embodiment. 70A is a partially enlarged view of the annular member, and FIG. 70B is a sectional view of the annular member taken along the line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 70A. It is sectional drawing of the decorative pattern display apparatus in 6th Embodiment. 72A is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and FIG. 72B is a sectional view of the rotating member taken along line LXXIIb-LXXIIb in FIG. 72A. 73A is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and FIG. 73B is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit taken along the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 73A. (A) is a front view of the rotating member in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotating member. (A) to (c) are side views of the drive unit and the first electric accessory. (A) to (c) are front views of the drive unit and the first electric accessory. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the drive unit in 8th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of a 1st electric accessory and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st electric accessory and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the drive unit in 9th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of a 1st electric accessory and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st electric accessory and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the displacement member in 10th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of a displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a displacement member. It is a sectional view of an up-and-down displacement unit. (A) And (b) is a partial enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit in the range XCI of FIG. It is a schematic diagram of the vertical displacement unit in 11th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a top view of the winning a prize unit in a twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning a prize unit in the XCVb-XCVb line of Drawing 95 (a). (A) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XCVIb-XCVIb of FIG. 96(a). (A) is a perspective front view of the left wing member in 14th Embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of a right wing member. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 98(a), and (c) is FIG. 98(b). FIG. 8 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right wing member taken along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc of FIG. (A) is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. 99. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the game board, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along the line Cb-Cb in FIG. 100(a). FIG. 101A is a front view of a first electric auditors product and a drive unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 101B is a cross section of the first electric auditors product and the drive unit 8530 taken along the line CIb-CIb in FIG. 101A. FIG. 101C is a sectional view of the first electric accessory and the drive unit taken along the line CIc-CIc of FIG. 101B. (A) And (b) is a side view of the 1st electric accessory and drive unit in a 17th embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along the line CVb-CVb in FIG. 105(a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the decorative pattern display apparatus in 18th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is the front view which developed the inner reel. It is the front view which developed the outer reel. (A) is a figure showing an example of a reel display at the time of normal in the example of the 1st control, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display contents during time saving. (A) is a figure showing an example of the lottery result during the time saving in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content showing the remaining time saving number. It is the figure which showed the display contents during the production of the special reach 1 in the example of a 1st control. (A) is a figure showing the display contents of the reel display during the production of the special reach 2 in the first control example, and (b) shows the display contents of the reel display when the jackpot is achieved from the special reach 2. It is the figure shown. (A) is a figure showing the display contents when the condition of special reach 3 in the first control example is satisfied, and (b) shows the display contents of reel stop display of the first variation of special reach 3. It is a figure. It is a figure showing the display contents of the reel display of the second variation of special reach 3. It is a timing chart showing the operation contents of various devices at the time of the pseudo continuous production in the first control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters in a 1st control example, a special symbol reservation sphere storage area, a special symbol reservation sphere execution area, and a normal symbol reservation sphere storage area. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the first control example, and (b) is a ROM in the main control device 110 in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the 1st hit type selection table set, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed the 2nd hit random number table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in a 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller in a 1st control example, (b) was set in the fluctuation pattern selection table, It is the figure which showed the fluctuation pattern table for big hits typically, (c) is the figure which shows the deviation pattern table for normal (normal), (d) is the deviation pattern for probability (probability change) It is the figure which showed the table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example, and (b) shows the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is set in the variation pattern selection table. FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing a fluctuation pattern table for long fluctuations. (A) is the figure which showed typically the symbol operation table set to ROM of the audio lamp controller in the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the special production scenario table set to ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the symbol group storage area set to ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a stop setting process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a through gate passage process executed by an MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing reel operation confirmation processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the state setting process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern selection process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining number display process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing an operation control process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing an outer reel control process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing an inner reel control process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a displacement member control process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing a stop symbol setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the normal stop design setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the time saving stop symbol setting process performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the audio output device in the 2nd control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram of an electric configuration of a display control device in a second control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining back surface BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically various images created based on a drawing list. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of variable display layer 1 in the 2nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of variable display layer 2. 8 is a timing chart showing the relationship between BGM and stop sound corresponding to the variation pattern A in the second control example. 9 is a timing chart showing a relationship between BGM corresponding to a variation pattern B and a stop sound in a second control example. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the second control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection 2 table set to ROM of the main controller in a 2nd control example, (b) was set in the fluctuation pattern selection table. FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing a deviation (probability change) variation pattern 2 table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, and (b) shows the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the BGM classification selection table set to ROM of the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example, (b) is the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a stop sound selection table set in the ROM of FIG. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of an audio output device in the second control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the audio output device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the audio|voice setting process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 8 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process according to the present invention. 9 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing according to the present invention. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command processing. 11 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 7 is a flowchart showing an error command process performed. 9 is a flowchart showing a display image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 8 is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. 8 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example, and (b) is a command executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the interruption processing. 9 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a BGM correction process executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a voice setting process executed by an MPU in the voice output device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the audio|voice setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio|voice output device in the example of another of a 2nd control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, FIG. 1 to FIG.
3, as a first embodiment, the present invention is a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply "pachinko machine").
In this case, one embodiment in the case of being applied to 10) will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 4, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 18 serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 4 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

On the inner frame 4, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (gaming ball) flows down on the front surface of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In addition, in the inner frame 4, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a are played on the game board 1
A firing rail (not shown) or the like for guiding to the front area of No. 3 is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided.
And are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, front and rear doors are provided with metal hinges 19 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 serves as an opening/closing axis. 5 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with a decorative resin part, an electric part, or the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and its upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Also, on the upper surface of the upper plate 17, the frame button 2
Two are provided. This frame button 22 is, for example, when changing the mode of the effect displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 (see FIG. 2), or when changing the effect content of super reach. It is operated by a person.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 5c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and during a jackpot or reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right-side illumination portion 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. (See 2)
A certificate or the like attached to the pachinko machine is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 10
When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in the state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the ball, the ball is lended in accordance with the operation. Be seen.
Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium),
As long as there is a balance on the card or the like, the lending balls are supplied to the upper plate 17. Return button 43
Is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not needed in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central part of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, and a firing stop switch 51 for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation.
b, a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the rotational operation amount (rotational position) of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance, and the like are incorporated. When the player turns the operation handle 51 clockwise, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the turning operation amount. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to many nails (not shown) for guiding balls and windmills, rails 76, 77, general winning opening 63, first
It is configured by assembling the winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc., and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). To be The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot visually see various structures arranged from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60.
The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided on the game board 13. It is fixed by tapping screws from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
At the inner position of the outer rail 77, similarly to the outer rail 77, an arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and divided by two rails 76, 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided,
The area where the fired sphere flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. The tip portion of the inner rail 76 (Fig. 2
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left part of the) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

The first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side in the front view (lower left side in FIG. 2) of the game area. First
The symbol display devices 37A and 37B are to be displayed according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, if the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while if the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in positive change, shortening time, or normal by a lighting state, or by indicating whether it is changing or not by a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the ordinary jackpot or a symbol that is out of sync with the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the 7-segment display device gives a big hit round. Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of L
The ED is configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is carried out when a prize is awarded to either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the jackpot type judged here, 15R probability variation jackpot,
4R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit are prepared. First symbol display device 37A, 3
7B not only shows whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, but in the case of a big hit, a symbol according to the jackpot type is shown.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the 15 rounds jackpot, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot", after the jackpot of maximum 15 rounds,
It is a big hit that shifts to a low probability state and becomes a time saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

Also, the "high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily wins the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" refers to a state when the probability of big jackpot is not in progress, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that during the probability variation. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) in the “low probability state” is a state where the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 140. It is a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, the state of the game which is neither a sudden change nor a short time (
It is a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

During probability change and shortening of working hours, not only the winning probability of the 2nd symbol is increased, but also the 2nd winning a prize hole 14
The time for which the first electric accessory 520 associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and a longer time is set compared to the normal time. When the first electric auditors product 520 is in the opened state (opened state), as compared with the case where the first electric auditors product 520 is in the closed state (closed state), the second winning port 140
It becomes easy for the ball to win. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or during shortening of time, the opening time of the first electric auditors product 520 associated with the second winning port 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit Therefore, the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the shortening of time, and the second winning opening 1
At least one of the time for which the first electric accessory 520 associated with 40 is opened and the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is opened per hit may be changed. In addition, the time during which the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning port 140 is opened during the probability change or the shortening of time, or 1
The number of times of opening the first electric auditors product 520 at each hit may not be changed, and only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal case.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a first winning opening 64 and a second winning opening 64.
With one of the winning openings 140 (starting winning) as a trigger, the first symbol display device 37A,
While synchronizing with the variable display in 37B, a segment display device 600 and a decorative symbol display device 800 that perform variable display of the third symbol, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of the ball of the first through gate 66. A configured second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer circumferences of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. The segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be visually recognized from an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 of this embodiment are the main controller 1
While the display of the game state accompanying the control of 10 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. And a displacement operation. Instead of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800, for example, a liquid crystal display may be used to display the game state.

The second symbol display device, the display symbol every time the ball passes through the first through gate 66 (second symbol (
(Not shown)) The variable display is performed by alternately turning on the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if the result is off, in the second symbol display device, after the variable display of the third symbol, "
The symbol "x" is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is the first electric accessory 52 attached to the second winning opening 140 when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol “◯”).
0 is activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

The time required for variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual.
Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the first electric auditors product 520 of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the shortened working hours.

It should be noted that, during probability change or shortening of time, the winning probability is increased, and
Also by other methods such as increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 520, if the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is displayed. The time may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than the normal during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time of the first electric accessory 520 and the number of times of opening may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board can pass through, out of the balls emitted to the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the second
A winning lottery for the symbols is carried out. After winning lottery, the variable display is displayed on the second symbol display device,
If the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" will be displayed as the variable display stop symbol,
If the result of the winning lottery is out, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also illuminated. Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the segment display device 600 and the decorative design display device 800.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37A,
37B, a part of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). .. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting positions of the through gates are not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, to the right of the first winning opening 64 in front view, a second winning opening 140 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 140, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 (because of the turning on of the second winning opening switch). Big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In the present embodiment, the first
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same, but the ball is won in the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls to be paid out when the number of prize balls to be paid out is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball has been won to the second winning port 140, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball has been won to the first winning port 64. To 3
The number of prize balls to be paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 140 may be set to five.

The first winning combination 520 is attached to the second winning opening 140. This first electric accessory 520
Is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state (reduced state), which makes it difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, the first through gate 6
As a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed by the passage of the ball to 6, when the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric auditors product 520 is in the open state (enlarged state). Then, the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 140.

As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is high during the probability change and during shortening of the working hours, compared to during normal operation.
Moreover, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
Is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change or during shortening of the working time, the time during which the first electric accessory 520 is opened is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning port 140, as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins the second winning opening 140. However, when the jackpot is a big jackpot, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 140 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 520 like the second winning opening 140, and the ball is always ready for winning.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. The ball so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hit”).
), it is more advantageous for the player to win the big hit lottery by winning the first winning opening 64 and aim for the big hit.

On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, by passing a ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric auditors product 520 associated with the second winning port 140 is likely to be opened, and the second winning port 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the second winning port 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the first through gate 66 is passed. The first electric auditors product 520 is opened and the second winning port 140 is won.
It is more advantageous for the player to aim for an R probability variation jackpot.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a sudden change, in a short time, or in a normal state). How to
It can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10,
When the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of one of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a big hit stop pattern While turning on the symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 6 which is normally closed
5a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening/closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis.
It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins into the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times in a special game state. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example, It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. The ball that flows down the game area and has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is the first out opening 7.
1 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114, the payout controller 111 and the launch controller 112, the power supply 115, and the card unit connection board 1
16 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Board box 100~
Reference numeral 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are housed therein.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Also,
A sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the seal unit or seal,
It is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 11
2 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. RAM 203
Besides, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, by the MPU201, jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3
7A, 37B, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the setting of the display in the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800, and the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. Work area where values are stored (
Work area). The RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 and holds data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.
All the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B,
A solenoid including a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, a large opening opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side around the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a, and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory. 209 is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detection sensor S and the rotational position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1.
A RAM erasing switch circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the reference numeral 15 is connected, and the MPU 201 outputs signals from the various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erase signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has the same size as the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
A stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which various flags, counters, I/O and other values are stored. have. The RAM 213 is a pachinko machine 10
Even after the power is shut off, a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to retain (backup) data, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also receives a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like.
1 is input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112, when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, sets the sphere launching unit 112 to have a launching strength of the sphere according to the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51.
It controls a. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (
On condition that it is not operated), the firing solenoid is excited in correspondence with the rotational operation amount (rotational position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51. ..

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation) Display) and display control device 114 such as notice production
The display mode settings of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, which are performed in FIG. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 in which a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data are stored, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. I/O port 2
The main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the unit 25. The other device 228 includes drive motors KM1, KM2, KM3.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines and determines the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110. The display mode is notified to the display control device 114 by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800.
To change the mode displayed in, or to change the effect contents during super reach,
Instruct the display control device 114. When the display mode is changed, in order to display the decoration according to the changed display mode on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, information about the changed display mode is included. The back image change command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. The display control device 114 displays various decorations on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 controls the segment display device 60 from the display control device 114.
0 and a command (display command) indicating the display content of the decorative symbol display device 800 is received.
In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, a voice corresponding to the display contents is output from the voice output device 226. In addition, the lamp display device 227 is controlled to be turned on and off according to the displayed contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the segment display device 600, and the decorative pattern display device 800, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, in the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. It is for controlling the display of the variation effect of the third symbol. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby displaying the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 and the voice output device 226. The output can be combined.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3).
RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided with the reference). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 is an AC 2 which is supplied from the outside.
It takes in a voltage of 4 volts and switches such as various switches 208 and solenoids 20.
Generates a 12 volt voltage for driving a solenoid such as 9 and a motor, a 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and generates these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage. A required voltage is supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is used by the MPU of the main controller 110 when power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
201 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 2
No. 51, even after the voltage of DC stable 24V is less than 22V, the output of the voltage of 5V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, becomes the normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. Is configured to maintain. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a schematic configuration of the game board 13 will be described. Figure 5 is the game board 1
3 is an exploded perspective front view of FIG. Note that FIG. 13 illustrates a state in which the winning opening unit 500 is disassembled from the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 5, the winning opening unit 500 is formed by partitioning two rails 76 and 77 that are set up on the front surface of the game board 13 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails. The opening 13a formed below the region is inserted from the front side and arranged. The detailed structure of the winning opening unit 500 will be described later.

Next, the schematic configuration of the operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9.
FIG. 6 is a perspective front view of the operation unit 300. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 300. 8 and 9 are front views of the operation unit 300.

It should be noted that in FIG. 8, a state in which the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 disposed on the segment display device 600 are retracted to both upper and lower sides is shown in FIG. The state in which the displacing member 670 provided is extended to the upper and lower central positions is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the operation unit 300 includes a rear case 40 formed in a box shape.
0, and the decorative pattern display device 800, the segment display device 600, and the decoration unit 700 are housed in the inner space of the back case 400.

The rear case 400 includes a bottom wall portion 401 that is substantially rectangular in a front view, and an outer wall portion 402 that is erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 401 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 401a having a rectangular shape in a front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 401, and the segment display device 6 is opened through the opening 401a.
00 is arranged from the back side of the back case 400.

Three decorative pattern display devices 800 are arranged side by side in the opening 401a of the bottom wall portion 401 of the rear case 400 in the left-right direction. The decorative symbol display device 800 is provided with an inner reel unit 810 and an outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 31) that are rotationally displaced in the vertical direction, and are decorated on the outer peripheral surfaces of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. It is configured so that the player can visually recognize the manner in which the design changes (rotates). The detailed description of the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described later.

The segment display device 600 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 401 of the rear case 400, and
The decorative pattern display device 800 is covered. A predetermined gap is formed between opposing base members 660 (see FIG. 49) of the decorative symbol display device 800, and the decorative symbol display device 800 is arranged between the gaps, so that the player side The decorative pattern display device 800 is visible.

Further, the segment display device 600 is provided with a displacement member 670 (see FIG. 49) that is displaceable in front of the gap between the facing members of the base member 660 described above, and the displacement member 670 is disposed in the decorative symbol display device 800. By displacing it to the front, it is possible to form an effect form in which the decorative symbol display device 800 is invisible from the player side. A detailed description of the segment display device 600 will be given later.

The decoration unit 700 is formed in a box shape having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a segment display device 600.
A pair is provided above and below. The decoration unit 700 is formed of a transparent resin material, and the shape thereof is formed in a shape imitating the logo, title, or the like of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, an LED board that emits light is disposed inside the decoration unit 700, and is formed so that the player can emit light.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10 to FIG. 29, the winning opening unit 500 will be described in detail. First, the configuration of the winning opening unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13.

FIG. 10A is a front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 10B is a rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 500,
FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 13 shows a base member 510.
5 is an exploded perspective view of a first electric accessory 520. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the winning opening unit 500 is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 (
5), a first electric accessory 520 rotatably supported inside the base member 510, and a drive for applying a driving force to the first electric accessory 520. The unit 530 is mainly provided and formed.

The base member 510 includes a front base 511 disposed on the front side and the front base 511.
It is formed by fastening a back base 512 arranged at a predetermined interval.

The front base 511 is formed of a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and is also formed of a transparent resin material. The front base 511 includes a first projecting portion 511a that projects rearward from an upper end of a central portion in the left-right direction and a second projecting portion 5 that projects rearward from a lower end in the central portion in the left-right direction.
11b and a third protrusion 511b that protrudes from the second protrusion 511b at a position separated by a predetermined gap in the left-right direction.
The protrusion 511c is mainly provided and formed.

Also. The front surface of the front base 511 is disposed at a position visible from the player side, and a pattern is formed on the front surface by unevenness.

In the first protrusion 511a, a first electric accessory 520 described later is in a closed state (the wing members 520L, 5L).
A plate member for preventing game balls from being delivered to the second winning opening 140 formed in the back base 512 when the tip of 20R is positioned above the rotation shaft (shaft member JB1). Is.

That is, the first projecting portion 511a is formed in an upper part between the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closed state, and the distance between the first electric accessory 520 and the first projecting portion 511a is the diameter of the game ball. Is set smaller than.

In addition, the first projecting portion 511a is formed such that the upper surface thereof is inclined downward from the substantially central position in the left-right direction toward both left and right ends. As a result, the game ball sent to the upper portion of the first protrusion 511a can be rolled (falled) downward by rolling the upper surface thereof.

The second projecting portion 511b is formed so as to project in a horizontally long rectangular shape from the back surface side of the front base 511, and the vertical position of the upper end surface thereof is below the bottom surface of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512. Is set. In addition, the second projecting portion 511b is a standing portion 511b1 standing upright in front of the second winning opening 140 of the back surface base 512, engaging portions 511b2 projecting from both left and right ends of the standing portion 511b1, and a bottom surface portion. And a recessed portion 511b3 that is recessed in.

In addition, a base member 511f including an LED that emits light is provided below the standing portion 511b1 on the second protrusion 511b. The LEDs of the base member 511f are arranged so as to emit light upward. Therefore, the LED can emit light around the second winning opening 140.

The standing portions 511b1 are formed so as to stand upward from the upper end of the second projecting portion 511b, and two standing portions are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and their standing tips are connected to each other. Further, the standing portion 511b1 is formed such that the upper surface thereof is inclined downward toward the second winning opening 140 (rear side), and the vertical position of the end portion on the second winning opening 140 side is the second winning opening 140. The height is set to match the bottom of the. Therefore, the game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 can be rolled to the second winning opening 140 side. Therefore, the game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 is the second winning opening 1
You can enter 40.

Further, the connecting portions of the standing portions 511b1 that are arranged in parallel are formed in a shape in which the circumferential center position is recessed downward. As a result, the game ball sent to the upper portion of the standing portion 511b1 is set to the standing portion 511.
It is easy to stay at the center position of b1 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball sent to the upper portion of the standing portion 511b1 can be quickly switched to the second winning opening 140 side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent to the upper portion of the standing portion 511b1 from colliding with the game ball to be sent later and being pushed outward, and to easily enter the game ball into the second winning opening 140. it can.

The engagement portion 511b2 is a portion that engages with left and right wing members 520L and 520R described later, and is formed to project from the left and right sides of the base end portion of the standing portion 511b1 toward the center of a shaft support portion 511d described later.

The recessed portion 511b3 is a recess for forming a space for inserting a driver when the front base 511 and the back base 512 are fastened. Thereby, the recessed portion 511b3
A screw can be inserted into the through hole 511b4 formed through the side surface on the back side of the.

The third projecting portion 511c is a plate member that rolls the game ball into the first out opening 71 formed in the back surface base 512, and is formed at two locations on the back surface base 512 with the second winning opening 140 interposed therebetween. It is formed adjacent to both outer sides of the 1-out port 71 in the left-right direction. In other words, the third projecting portion 511c is formed at a position separated from the second projecting portion 511b and the first out port 71 in the left-right direction by the left-right dimension.

The bottom surfaces of the third protrusions 511c are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the adjacent first outlets 71 (toward the center of the front base 511 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 10A)), The lowermost position is set higher than the bottom surface of the first outlet 71. Therefore, the game ball sent to the upper portion of the third protruding portion 511c can be rolled toward the first out opening 71 to be inserted into the first out opening 71.

Two shaft support parts 511d are formed to project in an annular shape from the back surface side of the front base 511, and two shaft support parts 511d are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 10A) with the standing part 511b1 interposed therebetween. .. The inner diameter of the shaft support portion 511d is formed to be larger than the diameter of a shaft member JB1 described later.
Therefore, the shaft member JB1 can be inserted into the shaft support portion 511d.

The back base 512 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body having a shape larger than that of the front base 511 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the player can directly visually recognize the front surface of the rear base 512 that does not overlap the front base 511 in the front-rear direction.

In addition, since the front base 511 is formed of a transparent material, the front base 511 is located forward.
In the overlapping portion of, the rear base 512 can be visually recognized through the front base 511. Further, the player can visually recognize the game ball sent between the facing of the back base 512 and the front base 511 through the front base 511.

The back base 512 is formed on both sides of the first winning opening 64 formed at the upper end on the front side, the second winning opening 140 formed below the first winning opening 64, and the second winning opening 140. The first out opening 71 and the general winning opening 63 formed above the first out opening 71 on the right side in front view.
And is mainly formed.

The first winning opening 64 is recessed downward from the upper end of the front base 511 at a substantially central position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 10A), and protrudes in both front and rear directions along the recessed edge. It is formed. In addition, the front protruding tip (front side of FIG. 10A) is closed by the plate member.

The concave shape of the first winning opening 64 is formed to have a size through which a game ball can be inserted inside,
The bottom surface (the inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is formed so as to be inclined toward the back surface. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 can be sent to the back side of the game board 13.

The second winning opening 140 is formed through the lower side of the first winning opening 64 in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 10A). The second winning opening 140 is formed in a square shape having a size larger than the diameter of the game ball in a front view. Therefore, the game ball can be sent to the back side of the game board 13 via the second winning opening 140. In addition, the second winning opening 140 includes recesses 140a that are recessed on the left and right inner side surfaces.

The recess 140a is curved and recessed around the axis of the shaft hole 512a. Thereby, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, can be housed inside thereof. That is, the inside of the second winning opening 140 allows the game ball to pass therethrough and the projections 523L and 523R are inserted therethrough.

The shaft holes 512a are recessed from the front side to the rear side on both left and right sides of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 512. The shaft hole 512a is a groove into which a shaft member JB1 described later is inserted,
It is formed in a circular shape having a diameter larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1.

The first outlet 71 is formed so as to penetrate the right and left sides of the second winning opening 140. First Out Exit 7
Reference numeral 1 is a hole for collecting a game ball that has flowed through a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a width dimension in the up-down direction (short direction). It is set larger than the diameter of. Further, the bottom surface (the inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) of the first out port 71 is formed so as to be inclined toward the back surface side. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first outlet 71 is a game board 1
Can be thrown to the back side of 3.

A guide wall 512b that is connected to the bottom surface of the first outlet 71 and projects toward the front is formed. The guide wall 512b is a member for receiving a game ball flowing down in the game area on its upper surface and sending it to the first outlet 71, and its upper surface is formed to incline downward toward the back side.

Further, a plurality of ribs extending in the front-rear direction are arranged in parallel on the bottom surface (lower surface) of the guide wall 512b. Thereby, the rigidity of the guide wall 512b can be improved. As a result, it is possible to prevent the guide wall 512b from being damaged when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the upper surface of the guide wall 512b.

Fastening of the front base 511 and the back base 512 is performed by the above-described through hole 511b4 and a fastening hole 512c penetratingly formed in the back base 512 at a position corresponding to the through hole 511b4. That is, in a state where the front base 511 and the back base 512 are combined in the front-rear direction, a driver is inserted into the recessed portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511 and the screw is fastened to the fastening hole 512c through the through hole 511b4. You can do that.

The first electric accessory 520 is a left wing member 520L arranged on the left side of the second winning opening 140 in front view.
And the right wing member 520R arranged on the right side in front view are formed as one unit.

The left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R have bulging portions 524L and 524R described later.
Of the left wing member 520L except for the bulging portions 524L and 524R, since the other members are formed symmetrically with respect to the second winning opening 140. A detailed description of the member 520R is omitted.

Further, the left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R are driven by a solenoid 531 of a drive unit 530, which will be described later, in a first state (closed state) in which a corner portion on the far side from the through hole 521L is positioned upward in the gravity direction, Displacement is possible in a second state (open state) in which a corner portion on the far side from the through hole 521L is displaced to a position separated to the outer side in the left-right direction of the second winning opening 140, and the first state is specified unless otherwise specified. I shall explain. Further, the opposing side surfaces of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R in the first state will be described by giving reference numerals of the side surfaces 526L, 526R.

The left wing member 520L is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The left wing member 520L has a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction in the lower end portion in the direction of gravity, a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521L, and from the vicinity of the through hole 521L to the back side. Side projection 523L and through hole 5
A recessed portion 525L recessed in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end surface on the 21L side, and a side surface 526L.
It is mainly provided with a bulging portion 524L protruding from the shaft member JB1 inserted into the through hole 521L. A detailed description of the bulging portion 524L will be described later.

The shaft member JB1 is a cylindrical bar member formed of a metal material. The shaft member JB1 is a shaft that rotatably holds the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, and has a through hole 521L.
The outer diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the.

The axial length of the shaft member JB1 is formed to be substantially the same as or slightly shorter than the distance from the recessed tip end surface of the shaft hole 512a to the rear surface side of the front base 511. Therefore, when the front base 511 and the back base 512 are assembled, one end of the shaft member JB1 (the back base 51
The shaft member JB1 is attached to the front base 511 and the rear base by inserting the other end (the end on the front base 511 side) into the shaft support 511d while inserting the other end (the end on the front base 511 side) into the shaft hole 512a. And 512.

The left wing member 520L has a front base 511 and a rear base 512 that have a dimension in the front-rear direction.
It is set to be smaller than the distance dimension between the facing and. Therefore, when the front base 511 and the rear base 512 are assembled, the wing member 520L can be rotatably held between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 by inserting the shaft member JB1 into the through hole 521L. ..

The recess 522L is formed by being recessed from the front side around the axis of the through hole 521L, and the recess dimension is set to be smaller than the protruding distance of the shaft support 511d. Further, the distance dimension from the axis of the through hole 521L of the recess 522L to the inner peripheral surface is set to be larger than the radius dimension of the shaft supporting portion 511d from the outer peripheral surface.

Therefore, when the wing member 520L is arranged between the front base 511 and the back base 512 facing each other, it is possible to prevent the front surface of the wing member 520L and the back surface of the front base 511 from contacting with each other, and the wing member 520L and the front surface. The ground contacting portion with the base 511 is used as the concave portion 522L and the shaft supporting portion 5.
It can be 11d. Therefore, the ground contact between the wing member 520L and the front base 511 can be partially performed. As a result, when the wing member 520L is rotated by driving the solenoid 531 described later, the resistance acting on the wing member 520L can be reduced and the wing member 520L can be easily rotated.

Further, since the shaft support 511d can be housed inside the recess 522L, the front base 5
It is possible to reduce the distance dimension between the facing surface 11 and the back base 512. As a result, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the winning opening unit 500 can be reduced.

Here, conventionally, there has been a gaming machine in which the shaft member JB1 is fitted in the through hole 521L of the wing member 520L.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to fit the shaft member JB1 into the through hole 521L,
When the wing member 520L is damaged, it is necessary to replace the wing member 520L and the shaft member JB1 when replacing the parts. Therefore, there is a problem that the cost of parts becomes high.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shaft member JB1 has the through hole 5 formed in the wing member 520L.
It is only inserted inside 21L, and wing member 520L and shaft member JB1 can be disposed in winning opening unit 500 as separate bodies. Therefore, only the wing member 520L can be replaced when the wing member 520L is damaged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cost of parts from increasing.

Further, as described above, the fastening of the front base 511 to the back base 512 can be performed from the front side of the front base 511. Therefore, when the wing member 520L is damaged, with the winning opening unit 500 attached to the game board 13, the rear base 512 to the front base 5 are attached.
11 can be removed. As a result, it is possible to easily replace the components of the wing member 520L.

That is, when removing the front base 511 from the back side of the back base 512, the game board 1
The front base 511 needs to be removed from the back base 512 after removing the winning opening unit 500 from 3, but since the front base 511 is formed so as to be removable from the front side, the front base 511 can be easily removed. be able to. As a result, it is possible to easily replace the components of the wing member 520L.

Here, if the front base 511 is made removable from the front side of the back base 512, the heads such as screws for fastening the front base 511 and the back base 512 become visible from the player side (front side), and the player can By visually recognizing the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the back base 512, the interest of the player may be impaired.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fastening of the front base 511 and the back base 512 is performed using the space of the recessed portion 511b3 formed in the front base 511. That is, by inserting the driver diagonally from the lower side of the front base 511 into the recessed portion 511b3, the through hole 5
A screw can be fastened to the fastening hole 512c via 11b4. Therefore, the through hole 511
Even when the front base 511 is located on the front side of b4, the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be fastened by inserting the driver diagonally into the recessed portion 511b3. Therefore, the heads such as the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be difficult to see from the player side (front side). As a result, the player has a front base 511 and a back base 512.
By visually recognizing the head of the screw that fastens and, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled.

Further, normally, the decorative symbol display device 800 and the segment display device 600 which are visible through the opening formed in the central portion of the game board 13 are set to the height of the player's eyes. Therefore, the winning opening unit 500 is arranged below the eye level of the player. As a result, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the rear base 512, and the player can see the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the rear base 512. Can be suppressed.

Since the front base 511 is made of a transparent resin material, the head of the screw can be visually recognized through the front base 511. However, as described above, the front base 511 has unevenness on the front side. Since the pattern is formed, light can be emitted in the other direction due to the difference in the plate thickness. This makes it possible to blur the head of the screw that is visible through the front base 511. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled.

Next, a detailed description of the drive unit 530 will be given with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. Figure 1
FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 530. 15(a) and 15(b),
It is a side view of a drive unit 530 and a first electric accessory 520. 16(a) and 16(
b) is a front view of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520.

15(a) and 16(a) show the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, and FIGS. 15(b) and 16(b) show the first electric component. The state in which the accessory 520 is located in the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 14, the drive unit 530 includes a solenoid 531 and its solenoid 5
31, a sliding member 532 connected to the sliding member 532, a rotating member 533 connected to the sliding member 532, and a first case member 534 in which the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are displaceably arranged inside. And a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534.

The solenoid 531 includes an electric wire inside, and a main body portion 531a that generates an electromagnetic force when electric power is applied to the electric wire, a movable body 531b slidably disposed inside the main body portion, and a movable body thereof. And an engaging portion 531c attached to the front end portion thereof.

The main body portion 531a is formed into a prismatic shape that is long in the front-rear direction, and an electric wire is arranged inside. On the front surface side of the main body portion 531a, a recessed portion that is recessed on the back surface side is formed, and inside the recessed portion, a movable body 531b formed in a cylindrical shape is disposed.

The movable body 531b is made of a metal material, and can be slid to the back side (inside the main body portion 531a) by applying electric power to the electric wire of the main body portion 531a to generate an electromagnetic force.

The engaging portion 531c is attached to the end of the movable body 531b opposite to the main body portion 531a. The engaging portion 531c is formed in a disk shape having an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b, and its axis is arranged so as to be substantially linear with the axis of the movable body 531b.

The engaging portion 531c is inserted into an engaging groove 532a2 of the sliding member 532 described later. Accordingly, the sliding member 532 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 15A) with the displacement of the movable body 531b.

The sliding member 532 is formed in a substantially E shape in a top view, and the connecting portion 5 extending in the left-right direction.
32a and two first protrusions 532 that are provided on the front side from both left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a.
b, and a second protrusion 532c that is located between the two first protrusions 532b and that is provided so as to protrude on the front side is mainly formed.

The sliding member 532 is formed so that the dimension of the connecting portion 532a in the left-right direction is smaller than the dimension of the inner peripheral surface of the first case member 534, which will be described later, in the left-right direction. This allows
The sliding member 532 can be housed and arranged inside the first case member 534.

The connecting portion 532a is formed on both the left and right sides of the base end of the second protrusion 532c, a recess 532a1 recessed on the back side, an engagement groove 532a2 connected to the front side of the recess 532a1 and recessed from the top side. And a cut portion 532a3 to be formed.

As described above, the concave portion 532a1 has the engaging portion 5 of the solenoid 531 in the engaging groove 532a2.
It is a recess that suppresses the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a when the 31c is inserted. That is, the concave portion 532a1 is formed in an arc shape whose concave surface is larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b. Thereby, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531
Can be suppressed from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a.

The engagement groove 532a2 is formed so as to be connected to the front surface side of the recess 532a1, and the recessed depth from the upper surface side in the direction of gravity is set to be larger than the diameter of the engagement portion 531c. The width dimension of the engagement groove 532a2 in the left-right direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the engagement portion 531c, and the width dimension in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as or equal to the thickness dimension of the engagement portion 531c in the front-rear direction. It is formed to be larger than the thickness dimension of the portion 531c in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the engagement groove 532a
The engaging portion 531c can be inserted into the inside of 2.

The cut portion 532a3 is a cut for facilitating elastic deformation of the sliding member 532 when the later-described first protrusion 532b is connected to the rotating member 533, and as described above, the second protrusion 53 is formed.
It is formed on both left and right sides of the base end of 2c and is cut and formed toward the back side.

The first protrusion 532b includes an engagement hole 532d formed so as to penetrate therethrough in the left-right direction. Engagement hole 53
2d is formed in a long hole shape that is long in the front-rear direction, and is provided with a first opening 532d1 recessed downward from the front end in the gravity direction and a recess downward from the rear end toward the gravity direction. Second opening 53
2d2 and mainly formed. The detailed description of the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2 will be described later.

The engagement hole 532d is set such that the vertical width dimension in the front-rear center portion (portions other than the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2) is larger than the vertical width dimension of the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 described later. To be done. As a result, the protrusion 5 is formed inside the engagement hole 532d.
33b can be arranged.

The second protrusion 532c is formed between the two first protrusions 532b as described above, and is formed so as to project from the front side. In addition, the second protrusion 532c includes a standing wall 532c1 that is erected downward on the tip side opposite to the connecting portion 532a. In addition, the standing wall 532c1
The detailed description of is described later.

The rotating member 533 is a plate-like body formed in a substantially L shape in a side view, and is separated by a predetermined width in the left-right direction.
They are arranged side by side, and the opposite ends on one end side are connected by a connecting portion 533a. The gap between the two plate-shaped members of the rotating member 533 facing each other is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 533 (between the two plate-shaped members facing each other).

Further, the width dimension in the left-right direction of the rotating member 533 (dimension between the facing sides of the outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is set smaller than the dimension between the facing sides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. It Thereby, the rotating member 533 can be arranged between the first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532 facing each other.

The rotating member 533 is a rotating shaft 533 that protrudes to the left and right in the left-right direction from a bent portion that is substantially L-shaped in side view.
c, a protrusion 533b that protrudes from the one end of the side view substantially L-shaped to the left and right sides, and a drive portion 533d formed by being recessed at the other end of the side view substantially L shape. It is formed in preparation for.

The rotating shaft 533c is formed so as to project to both the left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance dimension between the protruding tip surfaces thereof is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Further, the protruding size of the rotating shaft 533c is set to be larger than the thickness size of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the rotary shaft 533c is received inside the recessed portion 534a of the first case member 534, which will be described later, and the second case member 535 is assembled to the first case member 534, whereby the rotary member 533 is separated from the first case member 534 and the first case member 534. It can be held in a rotatable state with respect to the two case members 535.

The protrusions 533b are formed on both the left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance dimension between the protruding tip surfaces is the distance between the left and right outer side surfaces of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. The size is set to be almost the same. Further, the protrusion size of the protrusion 533b is set to be larger than the width dimension of the first protrusion 532b in the left-right direction. Therefore, by inserting the protrusion 533b into the engagement hole 532d of the first protrusion 532b, the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be connected.

The connection between the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be performed by elastically deforming the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532 to the left and right to widen the facing portion of the two first protrusions 532b. it can. In this case, since the slit 532a3 is formed in the sliding member 532 as described above, it is possible to easily widen the space between the two first protrusions 532b facing each other. As a result, the rotation member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be easily connected.

Further, the distance dimension between the opposing inner side surfaces of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction is
The distance dimension is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the outer surfaces of the protrusion 532b facing each other, or the first protrusion 532
It is set to be slightly larger than the distance dimension between the opposing outer surfaces of b. Accordingly, when the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are arranged inside the first case member 534, the first protrusion 532b can be restrained from elastically deforming outward in the left-right direction. As a result, disconnection of the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be suppressed.

The drive portion 533d is formed by recessing from the front side toward the back side. Drive unit 533d
Can accommodate the protrusions 523L and 523R of the wing member 520L inside. That is, the drive unit 533
The dimension d is set to be larger than the protrusions 523L and 523R in the vertical direction. Drive unit 533
By accommodating the protrusions 523L and 523R in d, it is possible to displace the first electric accessory 520 between the first state and the second state in accordance with the displacement of the drive unit 533d. The first electric accessory 52
A detailed description of the displacement of 0 will be described later.

The first case member 534 is formed in a generally square shape in a front view having an opening inside, and is formed to extend in the front-rear direction. The first case member 534 is formed with a cutout on the lower side of the back side, and the second case member 535 can be arranged in the cutout portion.

The first case member 534 is mainly provided with a recess 534a that is recessed on the front side in a notch portion on the back side, and an upright portion 534b that is upright on the bottom surface on the inner peripheral side.

As described above, the recess 534a is a recess that accommodates the rotary shaft 533c of the rotary member 533 inside, and is provided in a shape larger than the diameter of the rotary shaft 533c. Therefore, the rotating shaft 53
By assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534 in a state where 3c is housed inside, the rotating member 533 can be arranged inside the first case member 534.

The standing portion 534b is formed such that the lower inner peripheral surface of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512 and the standing tip surface thereof are set at the same height, and is extended to the back surface and inclined downward. To be done.
As a result, in the state where the drive unit 530 is arranged on the back surface of the back surface base 512, the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 140 rolls on the upper surface of the standing portion 534b and the second case member 5
Can be thrown to 35.

The second case member 535 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle in a front view, and is formed on the back surface side with a predetermined thickness. The second case member 535 has a through hole 535a formed to penetrate therethrough in the vertical direction.
Equipped with.

The through hole 535a is formed such that the inner diameter is larger than the diameter of the game ball, and as described above, the game ball sent to the second case member 535 by rolling with the upper portion of the standing portion 534b is passed through the through hole 5.
It is possible to send the ball downward through 35a. As a result, it is possible to collect the game balls that flow down the game area and enter the second winning opening 140.

Next, the displacement of the first electric accessory 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.

As shown in FIGS. 15A and 16A, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is arranged around the movable body 531b. At the same time, it is extended to the front side (left side in FIG. 15A) by the urging force of an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the main body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a.

In this case, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is provided on the rear side of the engagement hole 532d (the second opening 53).
2d2 side). In addition, the position of the center of gravity of the rotating member 533 is located between the drive unit 533d and the rotating shaft 533c in a side view. That is, the rotary member 533 includes the rotary shaft 53.
The rotational force in the direction of pushing the drive unit 533d downward is constantly applied around the axis of 3c.

Therefore, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is provided on the back side of the engagement hole 532d (the second opening 533).
Even in the state of being located on the d2 side), the second opening 533d2 can be stagnant at the upper portion thereof without being guided inside (the lower side of the engagement hole 532d (lower side of FIG. 15A)).

Further, since the drive unit 533d is pushed downward, the respective protrusions 523L, 523R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R housed inside the drive unit 533d are pushed downward. As a result, the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are in a state in which the corners on the far side from the through holes 521L, 521R are located above the through holes 521L, 521R (first state (see FIG. 16A)). It

As shown in FIGS. 15B and 16B, when power is applied to the main body portion 531a of the solenoid 531, the movable body 531b is moved to the main body portion 53 by the electromagnetic force generated in the main body portion 531a.
It is drawn inside 1a.

Therefore, with the displacement of the movable body 531b, the sliding member 532 coupled to the tip side of the movable body 531b is slid and displaced rearward (right side in FIG. 15B). As described above, since the rotating member 533 is always in the state in which the rotational force in the direction of pushing down the driving portion 533d is applied around the axis of the rotating shaft 533c, the engaging hole 532d of the sliding member 532 is formed. The projection 533b housed inside the inner side of the second opening 533d2 slides inside the second opening 533d2 without being caught by the base end portion of the second opening 533d2.

At the displacement end position of the movable body 531b, the protrusion 533b that slides inside the second opening 533d2 comes into contact with the end portion on the front side (first opening 532d1 side) of the engagement hole 532d, and the rear side (FIG. 15). (B) Right side). In this case, since the protrusion 533b is rotationally displaced about the axis of the rotation shaft 533c, the protrusion 533b can be housed inside the first opening 532d1. That is, the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the protrusion 533b.

Further, since the rotating member 533 rotates about the axis of the rotating shaft 533c, the driving portion 533d can be displaced upward (upward in FIG. 15B). As a result, the wing member 520L has a through hole 521L,
By rotating about the axis of 521R, the corners on the far side from the through holes 521L and 521R are displaced to the left and right outside (second state (see FIG. 16B)).

On the other hand, the displacement from the second state to the first state is performed by cutting off the supply of electric power to the main body portion 531a of the solenoid 531. As a result, the electromagnetic force generated in the main body portion 531a disappears, so that the main body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a are arranged around the movable body 531b.
The movable body 531b is moved toward the front side (see FIG. 1) by the urging force of an urging spring (not shown) interposed between
5(a) left side). As a result, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced to the position in the first state.

As described above, since the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the protrusion 533b, the concave depth of the first opening 532d1 to the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 15B) is smaller. It is formed deeper toward the back side (right side in FIG. 15B).

As a result, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the second state to the first state, the base end portion of the first opening 532d1 collides with the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533, and the protrusion 533b moves in the gravity direction. Can be easily displaced.

Next, the operation of the second protrusion 532c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17(a)
And FIG.17(b), the winning opening unit 50 in the XVII-XVII line of FIG. 10(a).
It is sectional drawing of 0. 17A, the first electric auditors product 520 is located in the first state, and FIG. 17B shows the first electric auditors product 520 in the second state. ..

As shown in FIG. 17A, when the first electric accessory 520 is set to the first state, the far corners of the through holes 521L, 521R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R form the first protrusion 511a. It is placed in the vicinity. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the left and right wing members 5 are
It is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down between the facing 20L and 520R.

In addition, as described above, the solenoid 531 is mounted on the movable body 531 from the inside of the main body portion 531a.
b is overhanging. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engagement portion 531c) is positioned on the front side (left side in FIG. 17A). That is, the upright wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is arranged near the second winning opening 140.

In this case, the standing tip of the standing wall 532c1 (the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 17A))
To the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed on the first case member 534 is
It is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, even if the first electric accessory 520 is damaged and the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is bulged forward, the game ball can be flown between the left and right wing members 520L and 520R facing each other. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 140 and rolling. That is, the game ball that rolls on the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 slides the game ball 5
The rolling of the game ball can be stopped by colliding with the standing wall 532c1 of 32. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is damaged, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the store side is disadvantageous even if the player continues to play the game.

In the present embodiment, the sensor device SE1 that detects that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 140 is arranged in the flow path of the game ball of the second case member 535. Therefore, in order to detect that the game ball has passed through the inside of the second winning opening 140, it is necessary to roll the game ball to the second case member 535. Therefore, by stopping the rolling of the game ball inside the first case member 534, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from detecting that the game ball has entered the second winning port 140.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17B, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the far corners of the through holes 521L, 521R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are more than those in the first state. Is also separated from the first projecting portion 511a, and the separated distance is made larger than the diameter of the game ball.
As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area is moved to the side surface 52 of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R.
6L, 526R can be received and rolled to the second winning opening 140. That is, the first
When the electric accessory 520 is set to the second state, it is possible to easily insert the game ball into the second winning opening 140.

Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 has the movable body 531b inside the main body portion 531a.
Is in a retracted state. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engagement portion 531c) is positioned on the back side (right side in FIG. 17B). That is, the standing wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is arranged at a position further away from the second winning opening 140 than in the first state.

In this case, the standing tip of the standing wall 532c1 (the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 17B))
To the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed on the first case member 534 is
It is set larger than the diameter of the game ball.

Thus, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the left and right wing members 520L,
By displacing 520R, it is possible to easily enter the game ball flowing down the game area into the second winning opening 140, and the game ball entered into the second winning opening 140 is formed on the first case member 534. The installation portion 534b can be rolled to send the ball to the second case member 535.

Furthermore, since the displacement direction of the standing wall 532c1 can be slid and displaced in a direction substantially corresponding to the rolling direction of the game ball entered in the second winning opening 140, the wing member 520L, When the 520R is opened by being damaged (or by a fraudulent act), the standing wall 53
It is possible to prevent the game ball stopped by colliding with 2c1 from being pushed out to the side opposite to the rolling direction due to the displacement of the standing wall 532c1. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is moved to the solenoid 53.
When the game ball is opened by the drive of 1, and the game ball can be inserted into the second winning opening 140, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being blocked by the second winning opening 140. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is opened, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the inside of the second winning opening.

Next, referring to FIGS. 18 and 19, the first electric accessory 520 is caused by the player's cheating,
The case where the first state is displaced to the second state will be described. FIG. 18A and FIG. 18B are front views of the winning opening unit 500. 19A and 19B are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530.

18(a) and 18(b), in order to facilitate understanding, the front base 51
1 is transparently illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 19A, the first electric auditors product 520 and the drive unit 530 in the first state are illustrated, and in FIG. 19B, only the first electric auditors product 520 is displaced from the first state. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, when the first electric auditors product 520 in the first state is forcibly displaced to the second state only by the player's cheating (goto act). The protrusions 523L and 523R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are arranged in the second opening 53 of the engaging hole 532d.
It is displaced inside 2d2. That is, since the space in which the protrusions 523L and 523R can be displaced is formed, it is possible to prevent the first electric accessory 520 from being damaged when the first electric accessory 520 is forcibly displaced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20A and FIG. 11B, the displacement of the standing portion 523c1 when the first electric auditors product 520 is displaced due to the player's cheating will be described. Figure 20 (a)
FIG. 20 is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XXa-XXa of FIG. 18A, and FIG. 20B is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XXb-XXb of FIG. 18B. ..

As shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B, when the first electric accessory 520 in the first state is forcibly rotated by the urging action of the player, the solenoid of the drive unit 530. 531
The positions of the sliding member 532 and the sliding member 532 are not displaced, and only the first electric accessory 520 and the rotating member 533 are rotationally displaced.

As described above, when the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state, the standing wall 532c.
The distance dimension L1 from the standing tip (the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 20A)) of 1 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed on the first case member 534 is It is set smaller than the diameter.

Here, conventionally, a second winning opening 140 in which a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members 520L and 520R arranged so as to sandwich the second winning opening 140, and a pair of these wing members. 5
Driving means (solenoid 531) that opens and closes by applying a driving force to the 20L and 520R.
) And a pair of wing members 520L and 520 by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531).
When R is opened, it is arranged at an allowable position that allows the game ball to enter the second winning opening 140, and the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is closed by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531). A gaming machine is known that includes a restricting unit arranged at a restricting position for restricting the entry of a game ball into the second winning opening 140.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated,
For example, after the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is forcibly opened from the outside, the restricting means can be displaced from the restricting position to the allowing position, so that the game ball is illegally inserted into the second winning opening 140. There was a problem that the effect of regulating the was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the standing wall 532 is provided when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is closed or when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is opened from the outside.
Since the arrangement of c1 is formed so as to be maintained at the restricted position, it is possible to suppress the standing wall 532c1 from being displaced to the allowable position. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from being illegally entered into the second winning opening 140.

That is, the state in which the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed or the pair of wing members 520L
, 520R opened from the outside, the sliding member 532 is operated to move the standing wall 532c.
The distance dimension L3 from the standing tip of 1 (the end portion on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 20(b))) to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed on the first case member 534 is It is set smaller than the diameter. Therefore, the first electric accessory 520 may cause the second winning hole 140
Even if it is possible to send the game ball to, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 140 and rolling. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 can be collided with the standing wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532 to stop the rolling of the game ball. As a result, when the first electric auditors product 520 is brought into the second state (the game ball can be sent to the second winning port 140) by the player's cheating, the game ball is illegally sent to the second winning port 140. It is possible to easily regulate what is entered.

Further, in this case, since the standing wall 532c1 that prevents the game ball from entering the second winning opening 140 can be formed continuously with the sliding member 532 that displaces the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, the second There is no need for a separate member for restricting illegal entry into the winning opening 140.
Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and the increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a case where the second protrusion 532c is further pushed to the back side when the first electric auditors product 520 is brought into the second state due to the player's cheating will be described. .. 21A and 21B are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 22A shows a drive unit 530 in the range XXIIa of FIG.
22B is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit 530 in the range XXIIb of FIG. 21B.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, inside the second opening 532d2, the front side (see FIG.
) A protrusion 532d3 protruding from the inner surface on the left side) is formed. Further, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is formed with a cutout portion 533b1 formed by cutting the outer peripheral surface in a side view.

The protrusion 532d3 and the cutout portion 533b1 are formed in a shape having a corresponding outer diameter. That is, the protruding shape of the protrusion 532d3 and the cutout shape of the cutout portion 533b1 are substantially the same in a side view.

Therefore, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is pushed to the back side from the state shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 22(a) in which only the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state by the fraudulent act. Then, the protrusion 532d3 is housed inside the cutout portion 533b1, and the displacement is restricted to the rear surface side of the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532). As a result, when the first electric auditors product 520 is brought into the second state by the player's cheating, the game ball is inserted into the second winning port 140 and the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is inserted. It is possible to prevent the ball from rolling and being sent.

In addition, in the present embodiment, one of the side surfaces of the protrusion 532d3 is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the back side (see FIG. 22A). As a result, the protrusion 532d3 is replaced by the cutout 5
It is possible to make it difficult for the protrusion 532d3 to slip out of the cutout portion 533b1 when it is inserted into the inside of 33b1.

That is, since the side surface of the protrusion 532d3 is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear side toward the upper side, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is further rear side in the state where the protrusion 532d3 is inserted into the cutout portion 532b1. The direction of the force that acts on the contact surface between the protrusion 532d3 and the cutout portion 532b1 when the force that pushes in is applied can be the direction in which the protrusion 532d3 enters the inside of the cutout portion 532b1. Therefore, when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted inside the notch 533b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be made difficult to slip out from the notch 533b1. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state by the player's cheating, the game ball is set to the second state.
It is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the winning opening 140 and rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 to be sent.

In other words, the driving force of the drive means (solenoid 531) is applied to the pair of wing members 520L, 52.
A transmission mechanism for transmitting to 0R is provided, and the transmission mechanism is driven by the driving force (solenoid 531) to have an open slide position (position shown in FIG. 17B) and a closed slide position (position shown in FIG. 17A). And a pair of wing members 520L, 520L that are slidably displaced between the sliding member 532 and the sliding member 532 that is rotated to the open rotation position by the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position.
20R and a rotary member 533 that is rotated to a closed rotational position by sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the closed sliding position to close the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, and the standing wall 532c1 is a sliding member. 532, and when the sliding member 532 is slid and displaced to the open slide position, the standing wall 532c1 is placed in the allowable position, and when the sliding member 532 is slid and displaced to the closed slide position, the standing wall 532c1 is slid and displaced. When the rotation member 533 is arranged at the open rotation position with the sliding member 532 arranged at the closed position and the regulation member 532c1 arranged at the regulation position, the rotation member 533 and the sliding member 532 engage with each other. As a result, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position is restricted, so that the game ball is the second winning opening 14
It is possible to easily control illegally entering 0.

That is, when the pair of closed wing members 520L and 520R is illegally forcibly opened from the outside, the rotating member 533 is rotated to the open rotating position with the sliding member 532 arranged in the closing slide position. To be done. In such a state, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position is regulated by engaging the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532,
The restricting means can be maintained at the restricting position (it is possible to prevent the restricting means from being forcibly displaced from the outside to the allowance position). As a result, even if the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is forcibly released from the outside and the game ball is passed through between the pair of wing members 520L, 520R,
It is possible to regulate that the game ball enters the second winning port 140 by the regulation means.

Further, one of the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 is provided with the engaging hole 532d and the other is provided with a protrusion 533b so that the protrusion 533b slides along the engaging hole 532d. The sliding displacement of the member 532 is transmitted, the rotating member 533 is rotated, and the projection 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engaging hole 532d, so that the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to release the regulation while achieving downsizing.

That is, means for restricting the slide displacement of the slide member 532 to the open slide position by utilizing the engaging hole 532d and the projection 533b for transmitting the slide displacement of the slide member 532 to the rotating member 533 to rotate the slide member 532 is provided. Since it can be formed and it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another place, the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, by adopting a structure in which the protrusion 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engagement hole 532d, it is possible to make unauthorized access to the engagement portion from the outside difficult, and the regulation (engagement) is released accordingly. It can be difficult.

Next, referring to FIGS. 23 and 24, the bulging portions 52 of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R.
The 4L and 524R will be described in detail. 23A is a front perspective view of the left wing member 520L, and FIG. 23B is a front perspective view of the right wing member 520R. 24(a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 24(b) is XXIVb-XXI of FIG. 24(a).
It is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line Vb.

23(a) and 23(b), the left-right direction in perspective is reversed between FIG. 23(a) and FIG. 23(b). Further, in FIG. 24A, the front base 511 is transparently illustrated. Further, in FIG. 24B, the front base 511 that is transparently viewed in FIG. 24A is illustrated as being opaque. Further, in FIG. 24B, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are
The rolling direction of the game ball rolling around is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the reference numeral of the virtual line KS1. Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction thereof is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the bulging portion 524L formed on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end portion on the side of the through hole 521L and at the front side (arrow F in FIG. 24(b)).
It is formed so as to be continuous with the end face of (side). On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R formed on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is formed at the end portion on the side of the through hole 521R and at the back side (FIG. 24(b)).
It is formed so as to be continuous with the end face on the arrow B side).

That is, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L and the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 24(b)).

Furthermore, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are formed with a first region that is continuous from the tip end side to the base end side of the wing members 520L and 520R, and have a size that does not abut the game ball guided in the first region. The bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed, and the side surfaces 526L and 5 of one wing member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R.
The first region of 26R and the first region of the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the other wing member (the other of the wing members 520L, 520R) are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R. It is placed at different positions in different directions.

In addition, the bulging portion 524L has an end portion on the far side from the through hole 521L on the front side (FIG. 24(b)).
It is formed so as to be inclined toward the through hole 521L from the lower side) toward the rear side (upper side in FIG. 24B). On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R is formed such that the end portion on the far side from the through hole 521R is inclined toward the through hole 521R side from the rear surface side to the front surface side.

Next, referring to FIGS. 25 and 26, the side surfaces 526 of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R.
A case where a game ball is sent to L, 526R will be described. 25A and 25B are sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. 26(a) and 26(b) are sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

25(a), 25(b), 26(a) and 26(b) are shown in FIG. 24(b).
It corresponds to the sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 in FIG. Further, FIG. 25(a) and FIG. 25(b)
), the transition state of the game ball when the game ball is sent from both sides of the first electric accessory 520 is sequentially illustrated. In FIG. 26A and FIG. 26B, the transition state of the game ball when the game ball is delivered to only the left wing member 520L is sequentially illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b), when game balls are sent to both sides of the first electric accessory 520, the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R roll. The game ball to be played can be rolled to different positions in the front-rear direction by the bulging portions 524L and 524R.

More specifically, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed by being connected to the front end surface. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L rolls on the back surface side by rolling on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L.

In this case, in the bulging portion 524L, the end portion on the far side from the through hole 521L is on the front side (see FIG.
(b) The lower side) is inclined toward the through hole 521L side from the rear side (upper side in FIG. 25(b)), so when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L comes into contact with the bulging portion 524L, It is possible to prevent the rolling of the game ball from being stopped due to the increased resistance to the rolling direction.

On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R is formed by being connected to the rear end surface. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R rolls on the front side by rolling on the side surface 526R while contacting the bulging portion 524R.

In this case, in the bulging portion 524R, the end portion on the far side from the through hole 521R is on the back side (see FIG.
b) From the upper side) to the front side (lower side in FIG. 25B), the through hole 521R is formed so as to be inclined, so when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R comes into contact with the bulging portion 524R, It is possible to prevent the rolling of the game ball from being stopped due to the increased resistance to the rolling direction.

Therefore, the game ball rolling on the left wing member 520L side can be moved to the back side, while the game ball rolling on the right wing member 520R side can be moved to the front side. As a result, when the game balls are sent from both the left and right sides, it is possible to suppress the frontal collision of the game balls sent from the left and right.

Here, conventionally, the game ball has a ball entrance (second prize hole 140) formed so that the game ball can enter, and a guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and the displacement. A gaming machine including a guide member (first electric accessory 520) that is formed as possible is known. As the guide member, for example, a pair of wing members (wing members 520L, 520R) which have a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the entrance and are arranged so as to sandwich the entrance and rotatably supported at the base end side. ) Is illustrated.

In addition, the first groove is provided on the entire guide surface (side surfaces 526L and 526R) of the one wing member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R), and the guide surface (side surfaces 526L and 526R) of the other wing member is provided. Disclosed is a technique of providing the second grooves on the entire surface of each. According to this technique, the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions, so that the guide surface (the side surface 526L, 52) of the one wing member (one of the wing members 520L, 520R).
6R) and the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L and 526R) of one of the wing members (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R), respectively, even when the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled), the game balls are different from each other. Direction (one side is the glass plate side and the other side is the game board side). Therefore, each of these game balls can be smoothly inserted into the second winning opening 140.

However, the conventional technique described above has a problem that the game ball cannot be sufficiently biased. In addition, the game ball entering from one side of the guide member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) passes through the guide surface (side surfaces 526L and 526R) and the other side of the guide member (
The wing members 520L and 520R may pass through the other), and in this case,
Since the game ball is not inserted into the ball entrance (the second prize hole 140), there is a problem that the player's interest is lost.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is a pair of bulging portions formed so as to be capable of contacting the game ball rolling from the side surfaces 526L, 526R, protruding from the side surfaces 526L, 526R. 524L and 524R, and the pair of bulging portions 524L and 524R are side surfaces 526L.
, 526R are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided, so that the game balls guided (rolled) along the side surfaces 526L, 526R are bulged portions 524L, 524.
By abutting on R, such a game ball can be surely biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the entrance.

In addition, the pair of bulging portions 524L and 524R are arranged at different positions along the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided, whereby the pair of wing members 52.
The game ball entered from one side of 0L, 520R can be brought into contact with the bulging parts 524L, 524R. Therefore, one side of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (the wing members 520L, 520R
A game ball that has entered from one of the two wing members 520L and 520R (the wing member 52).
It is possible to suppress the passage through either 0L or 520R). As a result, the player's interest can be improved by allowing the game ball to enter the ball entrance.

Further, the first electric accessory 520 is formed as a pair of wing members 520L, 520R which are arranged with the second winning opening 140 interposed therebetween and whose base end side is rotatably supported.
524R is projected from the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, respectively, and the bulging portions 524L, 524R and the other wing of the one wing member 520L, 520R of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R. Swelling portion 52 of the members 520L and 520R
Since 4L and 524R are arranged at different positions along the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided, the game balls to be guided (rolled) along the side surfaces 526L and 526R are arranged. By abutting the bulging portions 524L and 524R, it is possible to surely bias such a game ball. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning opening 140, and it is possible to suppress ball clogging.

In addition, the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the one wing member 520L and 520R and the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the other wing member 520L and 520R have side surfaces 526L and 526, respectively.
One of the wing members 520L is arranged at a position orthogonal to the direction along which the game ball is guided (the direction from the front end side to the base end side of the wing members 520L and 520R).
, 520R side 526L, the game ball that has entered the 526R is the other wing member 520L,
When the side surfaces 5.26L and 526R of the 520R are reached, the game ball can be brought into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the other wing members 520L and 520R. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball entering the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the one wing member 520L, 520R from passing through the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the other wing member.
As a result, the game ball can be inserted into the second winning opening 140 to improve the player's interest.

In other words, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed in the left and right wing members 520L and 520R at different positions in the front-rear direction, the game balls rolled from the left and right are moved to different positions in the front-rear direction. Can be moved. Therefore, when the game ball is sent from both the left and right sides, it is possible to suppress the frontal collision of the game ball sent from the left and right. As a result, it can be suppressed that it takes time to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 140.

That is, by setting the collision positions of the game balls to different positions in the front-rear direction on the left and right, FIG.
As shown in (), the left-side game ball that is moved to the back side is back side (FIG. 25 (
b) Easy to bounce to the upper side). On the other hand, the game ball on the right side closer to the front side is likely to bounce back to the front side (lower side in FIG. 25B) due to the collision.

Therefore, one of the game balls (which rolls the left wing member 520L in this embodiment) can be easily inserted into the second winning port 140, and the other game ball can be bounced back to the front side to cause a collision. When doing, it is possible to prevent the game ball from separating from the second winning opening 140 too much. Therefore, it is possible to speed up the entry of the second game ball into the second winning opening 140 later into the second winning opening 140. As a result, when the game balls are sent to the left and right sides of the first electric accessory 520, it is possible to shorten the time taken for the game balls on both sides to enter the second winning opening 140, and the progress of the game is smoothed. You can proceed.

Further, since the bulging portions 524L, 524R project from the side surfaces 526L, 526R at a position closer to the base end side (through hole 521 side) than the tip end side of the wing members 520L, 520R, they are guided to the side surfaces 526L, 526R. It is possible to secure a rollable area until the game ball to be contacted with the bulging portions 524L and 524R. Therefore, by that amount, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the rolling speed of the game ball and smoothly enter the second winning opening 140.

Furthermore, the bulging portions 524L, 524R are provided so as to project from the side surfaces 526L, 526R at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the wing members 520L, 520R, so that the bulging portions 524L, 524R.
It is possible to prevent the course of the game ball that is abutted against 24R and is biased from returning to the course before the bias before reaching the front of the entrance (the end of the guide surface). That is, it is possible to easily send the game ball from the side surfaces 526L and 526R to the entrance port while being biased.

Further, as described above, the side surfaces 526L, 526R are formed with the first area that is continuous from the tip side to the base end side of the wing members 520L, 520R, and are not in contact with the game ball guided in the first area. Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed to have the size
When the game ball that has entered in 1 rolls in the first region, it is possible to avoid the rolling speed of the game ball from decreasing, and it is possible to smoothly enter the second winning opening 140.

In this case, one of the pair of blade members 520L, 520R (the blade member 520L,
The first region of the side surfaces 526L and 526R on either one of the 520R) and the other wing member (on either side).
Since the first regions of the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the wing members 520L, 520R) are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R. , One wing member (one of wing members 520L and 520R)
Region of the side surfaces 526L, 526R and the other wing member (wing members 520L, 52
Even when the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) in the first regions of the side surfaces 526L and 526R in either (0R or the other), the respective game balls can be biased in different directions from each other. 2 It is possible to smoothly enter the winning hole 140.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the left and right wing members 520L, 520R
When the game ball is sent to one of the two, the other left and right wing members 520L, 520R
By abutting the game ball on the bulging part 524L or the bulging part 524R, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the other left and right wing members 520L, 520R and falling from the tip thereof. it can.

More specifically, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed by being connected to the front end surface. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L rolls on the back surface side by rolling on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L can be brought closer to the bulging portion 524R side formed on the right wing member 520R.

In other words, the bulging portions 524L, 524 formed on the left and right wing members 520L, 520R.
Since R is formed at different positions in the front-rear direction, the left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520 is formed.
The left wing member 520L or the right wing member 5 is a game ball that rolls one of R to the second winning opening side.
It is possible to roll (shrink) to a position that coincides with the bulged portions 524L and 524R formed on the other side of 20R in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball is rolled (closed) to the back side and substantially coincides with the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. It can be positioned. On the other hand, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball is rolled (closed) to the front side and substantially coincides with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction. It can be positioned.

Thereby, when the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on either the side surface 526L or the side surface 526R is high, the game ball is the side surface 52 of the other left wing member 520L or right wing member 520R.
It is possible to suppress riding on the 6L and 526R.

Here, the conventional winning hole unit 500 includes the side surfaces 526L and 526 of the first electric accessory 520.
Since R is formed on a smooth surface, the game ball sent from one of the first electric accessory 520 rides on the other wing member 520L, 520R and flows down from the tip of the other wing member 520L, 520R. There was a problem that the ball was sent to.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction in the first electric accessory 520, respectively, the game ball rolled from one wing member It is possible to roll the wing portions 524L and 524R formed on the other wing member to a position that substantially coincides with the front-rear direction. Therefore, by causing the game ball that rolls one of the wing members 520L and 520R to collide with the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the other wing member 520L and 520R, the game ball will have a side surface 526L of the other wing member 520L and 520R. Ride on 526R and wing members 520L, 5
It is possible to prevent the ball from being thrown into the game area from the tip of 20R.

Next, the recessed portion 525L and the engaging portion 511b2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. 27A is a top view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 27B is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 27A. 28(a) and 28(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 27(b). Note that in FIG. 28A, the first electric accessory 520
Is in the first state, and FIG. 28B shows the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the engaging portion 511b2 formed on the second projecting portion 511b of the front base 511 has recessed portions 525L and 52L of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, respectively.
It is placed inside the 5R.

Further, in the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the bulging portion 524L of the recessed portions 525L and 525R are formed.
, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) side end portions are brought into contact with each other (see FIG. 28A), and in the second state, the engaging portions 511b2 and the bulging portions of the recessed portions 525L, 525R. 524
The L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) side and the opposite end are brought into contact with each other.

That is, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state or from the second state to the first state, the engagement portion 511b2 is brought into contact with the end portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R. By doing so, the displacement amount can be regulated.

Further, in the first state, the rotational force acting about the axis of the through holes 521L, 521R is due to its own weight, the corner portions of the wing members 520L, 520R far from the through holes 521L, 521R are on the second winning opening 140 side. It is supposed to rotate. Therefore, the engaging portion 511b2 and the recessed portion 525L
, 525R are in contact with the ends on the side of the bulged portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R), the wing members 520L, 520R can be prevented from rotating under their own weight, and the wing members 520L, 520R can be suppressed. It can be held in the first state.

In the first state, the bulging portion 524L of the recessed portions 525L and 525R is formed in the engaging portion 511b2.
, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) side end portions are brought into contact with each other, so that the wing members 520L, 5
The side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the 20R can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2. Therefore, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed, the rigidity of the abutting portion can be increased, so that the wing members 520L and 520R can be prevented from being damaged by coming into contact with the engaging portion 511b2.

That is, in the present embodiment, the base member 5 that rotatably supports the wing members 520L and 520R.
10, the base member 510 includes an engaging portion 511b2 that restricts rotation of the wing members 520L and 520R by contacting the wing members 520L and 520R.
Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the wing members 520L and 520R are brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of 10, the breakage of the wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. That is, the bulging portions 524L, 5
Since 24R is a portion projecting from the wing members 520L, 520R (side surfaces 526L, 526R), the portion of the wing members 520L, 520R where the rigidity is relatively high is set to the base member 51.
Since it can be used as a stopper for abutting against the 0 engaging portion 511b2, the wing member 52 is correspondingly used.
Damage to 0L and 520R can be suppressed.

Further, the bulging portions 524L, 524R are formed such that the side surfaces thereof are substantially flush with the side surfaces of the wing members 520L, 520R on the base end side, and in the closed state, the wing members 520L, 520R have a substantially flat surface on the base end side. The side surfaces of the bulged portions 524L and 524R that are integrally formed are at least the base member 510.
Since it is abutted against the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, the portion (the side surface of the bulging portions 524L and 524R) far from the rotation shaft (through holes 521L and 521R) is engaged with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510.
The reaction force input from the engaging portion 511b2 to the wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced by the amount of contact with the wing members 520L and 520R. Therefore, damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. In addition, for example, the protruding tip surfaces of the bulged portions 524L and 524R may be connected to the engaging portion 511 of the base member 510.
Compared with the case of abutting against b2, the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510 is connected to the second winning opening 1
It can be separated from 40, and a space serving as a flow path to the second winning opening 140 can be secured. In addition to the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the side surfaces of the wing members 520L and 520R on the base end side may be in contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510. In this case, it is possible to reduce the surface pressure and further suppress damage to the wing members 520L and 520R.

When the wing members 520L and 520R are closed, the bulging portions 524L and 524R are arranged below the upright portion 511b1 formed on the front base 511 (downward in FIG. 28A).
In other words, the standing portion 511b1 is arranged between the bulging portions 524L and 524R facing each other.

Here, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are arranged at positions where the facing distance between the side surfaces 526L, 526R in the closed state is a facing distance larger than the diameter of the gaming ball so as not to sandwich the gaming ball. In this case, when the bulging portions 524L and 524R are provided so as to project from the side surfaces 526L and 526R, the bulging portion 52 is arranged so that the game ball is not caught between the bulging portions 524L and 524R.
It is necessary to dispose the pair of wing members 520L, 520R further apart by the protruding height of 4L, 524R, which increases the space required for disposing the pair of wing members 520L, 520R.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the closed state, the standing portion 511b1 is provided between the bulging portions 524L and 524R facing each other, and the pair of wing members 520L and 520R has the bulging portion 524L when viewed in the rotation axis direction. , 524R is not formed in the area of the side surface 526L, 526R facing the gap is larger than the diameter of the game ball, the bulging portion 524L, 524R the facing distance is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, The space required for disposing the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be suppressed.

That is, even when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R start to close (even when the transition to the closed state is started) while the game ball is being guided (rolled) on the side surfaces 526L and 526R, the bulging portion 524.
Since the standing portion 511b1 is positioned between L and 524R facing each other, the game ball is bulged out 524L,
It is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the bulging portions 524L and 524R by discharging from between the facing portions of 524R. The game ball discharged from the facing portion of the bulging portions 524L and 524R by the standing portion 511b1 is the side surface 526L, 5 in the region where the bulging portions 524L and 524R are not formed.
Where 26R is located between the facings, the facing distance at such a position is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball is not caught (see FIG. 27(a)). As a result, the facing distance between the bulging portions 524L and 524R can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the space required for disposing the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. In other words, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be arranged in a space equivalent to the space required for disposing the conventional product in which the bulging portions 524L, 524R are not projectingly provided on the side surfaces 526L, 526R.

On the other hand, in the second state, the rotational force acting about the axis of the through holes 521L521R is due to its own weight, the corners far from the through holes 521L, 521R of the wing members 520L, 520R rotate downward in the direction of gravity. To be done. Therefore, the engaging portion 511b2 and the recessed portions 525L and 525R
By contacting the bulging portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) side and the end portion on the opposite side, it is possible to suppress the wing members 520L, 520R from rotating by their own weight, and at the same time, wing members 520L, 520R Can be held in the second state.

Therefore, the drive unit 533d and the protrusion 5 that regulate the displacement of the wing members 520L and 520R are described above.
23L and 523R, it can be performed in a place other than the drive unit 533d and the protrusion 523L.
, 523R can be prevented from being damaged. Therefore, since it is not necessary to form a large component in order to increase the rigidity of the rotating member 533, the rotating member 533 can be downsized. As a result, the drive unit 530 can be downsized.

In the open state, the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 is located below the lower ends of the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the gravity direction and above the lower end of the second winning port 140 in the gravity direction. The game ball guided to 526R can be sent to the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1, and by rolling the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1, it can be entered into the second winning opening 140 (FIG. 28(b )reference).

Further, as described above, the wing members 520L, 520R side (second
A base member 511f including an LED that emits light is arranged on the winning opening 140 side). FIG. 28
As shown in (a), in the first state, the recessed portions 525L and 525R are located on the lower side in the gravity direction. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED of the base member 511f emits the wing members 520L and 520R.
It can be easily made incident on the inside.

That is, by irradiating the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R with LED light, the wing member 5
It is possible to prevent the light of the LED from being reflected on the outer surfaces of 20L and 520R. As a result, it is possible to easily make the light enter the inside of the wing members 520L and 520R. Therefore, the wing members 520L, 52
The amount of light emitted from the inside of 0R to the player side can be increased. As a result, the wing members 520L and 520R can be easily made visible to the player even when the front base 511 formed of the transparent material amount is interposed.

Further, when the wing members 520L, 520R are in the second state shown in FIG. 28(b), the recessed portions 525L, 525R are substantially at the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L, 521R. .. Therefore, the game ball sent to the front side of the second winning opening 140 can be easily illuminated by the LED of the base member 511f.

That is, since the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R are located at substantially the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L and 521R, the gap between the facing first electric accessory 520 can be increased. .. Therefore, the game ball sent to the front side of the second winning opening is the base member 511.
It can be easily illuminated by the LED of f. As a result, even when the front base 511 made of a transparent material is interposed, the player can easily see the game ball inserted into the second winning opening 140.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, an arrangement mode of the winning opening unit 500 on the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 29 is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the range XXIX of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 29, the winning opening unit 500 is arranged with a predetermined gap from the inner edge of the inner rail 76.

Inside the lower end portion of the inner rail 76, a first outlet 71 for collecting the game balls flowing down the conventional game area is formed. Therefore, the lower end portion of the inner rail 76 is curved with a curvature larger than the curvature of the entire inner rail 76 in order to easily collect the game balls.
6a is formed.

Therefore, the winning opening unit 500 and the inner rail 76, the lower end portion of the inner reel (curved portion 76).
The gap is enlarged in the portion (where a is formed). As described above, the winning prize unit 5
The front base 511 and the rear base 512 of 00 are fastened by inserting a driver or the like obliquely from below the front base 511 into the recessed portion 511b3.

The through hole 511b4 is formed in the second projecting portion 511b formed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the front base 511. Therefore, the through hole 511b4 is formed above the bending portion 76a (upward in FIG. 29).
Can be located at. Therefore, when a driver or the like is obliquely inserted into the recessed portion 511b3 from below the front base 511, the winning opening unit 500 formed by the curved portion 76a.
Since it is possible to use the gap between the front base 511 and the rear base 51 from the front side of the game board 13.
Easy to put on and take off from 2.

Further, the inside of the recessed portion 511b3 can be made hard to be seen by the player by the inner rail 76, so that the player can see the screws or the like for fastening the front base 511 and the back base 512, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Next, the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 36.

First, the configuration of the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. 30(a) is a front view of the decorative symbol display device 800, and FIG. 30(b) is FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the decorative symbol display device 800 in the XXXb-XXXb line of (a). Figure 31
FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative symbol display device 800, and FIG. 32 is a decorative symbol display device 80.
It is an exploded perspective rear view of 0. FIG. 33(a) is a front view showing the inner reel 811 developed,
FIG. 33B is a front view of the outer reel 821 developed.

As shown in FIGS. 30 to 33, the decorative symbol display device 800 includes an inner reel unit 810 configured to be rotatable, an outer reel unit 820 accommodating a part of the inner reel unit 810, and an inner reel unit 810. And a housing unit 880 that houses the outer reel unit 820 therein, a drive motor KM1 that is attached to the housing unit 880 and drives the inner reel unit 810 to rotate, and a housing unit 880 that is attached to the outer reel unit 82.
A drive motor KM2 for rotationally driving 0 and a backlight unit 830 arranged inside the inner reel unit 810 are mainly provided and formed.

The inner reel unit 810 includes a substantially cylindrical inner reel 811 penetrating left and right, a rotating member 812 disposed on one end side (left side in FIG. 30A) of the opening of the inner reel 811, and an inner reel 811. It is formed by including an annular member 813 disposed on the other end side (right side in FIG. 30A) of the opening.

The inner reel 811 is formed by winding a strip-shaped sheet made of transparent resin along the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 33( a ), the inner reel 811 has decorative patterns arranged at equal intervals with the longitudinal direction being the vertical direction. In addition, each of the inner reels 811 of the three decorative symbol display devices 800 arranged side by side has a different arrangement of the decorative symbols.

The rotating member 812 connects a hub 812a formed in a substantially disc shape, a rim 812b formed in a substantially annular shape having a larger diameter than the hub 812a, an outer peripheral surface of the hub 812a and an inner peripheral surface of the rim 812b. And the spokes 812c are formed.

The hub 812a and the rim 812b have their axes formed in the same straight line, and are arranged at different positions in the axial direction. Therefore, the spokes 812c are formed to be inclined in the axial direction toward the radially outer side of the hub 812a.

The rim 812b is a portion to which one end side of the inner reel 811 is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof, and is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the inner reel 811. In other words, the circumferential distance dimension of the outer peripheral portion of the rim 812b is set to be substantially the same as the longitudinal dimension of the unfolded inner reel 811. Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be arranged (attached) on the outer peripheral surface of the rim 812b without a gap.

The hub 812a is arranged inside the inner reel 811. That is, the hub 812a and the rim 81
The spokes 812c connecting the 2b are formed so as to be inclined toward the other end (annular member 813 described later) of the opening of the inner reel 811 as it goes radially inward. This allows
The hub 812a can be arranged inside the inner reel 811. Also, the spokes 812c
Is formed of a plurality of rod-shaped bodies extending from the rim 812b to the hub 812a, and includes an inner opening 812c1 that opens between the spokes 812c that are circumferentially adjacent to each other.

The position of the hub 812a in the axial direction is substantially the same as the center position of the inner reel 811 in the left-right direction. As a result, a space closer to the ring member 813 than the hub 812a can be secured. A drive motor KM1 that applies a rotational driving force to the inner reel unit 810 is connected to the hub 812a.

The thickness dimension of the drive motor KM1 in the axial direction of the inner reel 811 is approximately half the axial dimension of the inner reel 811. As described above, the position of the hub 812a in the axial direction is substantially the same as the center position of the inner reel 811 in the left-right direction, and the hub 812a is located on the inner side of the other end (annular member 813) of the opening of the inner reel 811. Since the space is formed, most of the drive motor KM1 can be arranged inside the inner reel 811. As a result, the inner reel unit 81
0 and the size of the drive motor KM1 in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the inner reel 811) can be reduced.

Further, the drive motor KM1 has a rotation shaft arranged in a straight line coaxial with the shaft of the hub 812a.
That is, the shaft of the hub 812a is connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor KM1. As mentioned above,
Since the axis of the hub 812a and the axis of the rim 812b are arranged on the same straight line, the drive motor K
The rotation of M1 allows the inner reel 811 to rotate about the axis of the inner reel 811. As a result, the pattern decorated on the inner reel 811 can be visually recognized by the player as a mode in which it is vertically displaced.

The annular member 813 is formed in an annular shape having an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the rim 812b. The inner peripheral surface of the annular member 813 on the other end side (the right side in FIG. 30A) of the opening of the inner reel 811 is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof.

Here, since the inner reel 811 is formed from the transparent resin sheet as described above,
Relatively low rigidity. Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, it may be deformed by the centrifugal force of the rotation, wind pressure, or the like, and it may not be possible for the player to accurately recognize the symbol decorated around the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inner reel 811 has the rim 81 of the rotating member 812 on one end side.
Since 2b is connected and the circular ring member 813 is connected to the other end side, when the inner reel unit 810 rotates, it is difficult for the inner reel unit 810 to be displaced by its centrifugal force or wind pressure. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, the pattern decorated around the inner reel 811 can be accurately recognized by the player.

Further, since the inner reel 811 can be formed from a sheet, the inner reel 81 is correspondingly formed.
The load of 1 can be reduced. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor KM1 when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally driven can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to smoothly start the rotation of the inner reel unit 810.

The outer reel unit 820 includes an outer reel 821 formed in a cylindrical shape and the outer reel 82.
A spoke 82 that connects a hub 823 formed in a disk shape having a diameter smaller than 1 to the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 on one end side (left side in FIG. 30A) and the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.
And 2 are mainly formed.

The inner diameter of the outer reel 821 is larger than the outer diameter of the inner reel 811, and the width dimension in the axial direction is larger than the axial dimension of the inner reel 811. The inner reel 811 is made of a transparent resin material and has a predetermined thickness in the radial direction. It should be noted that a pattern is decorated on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811, and a description will be given later of the decoration mode.

The hub 823 is arranged such that its axis is coaxial with the outer reel 821, and also the outer reel 821.
Is arranged at a substantially central position in the axial direction. Further, the hub 823 is connected to a drive motor KM2 that applies a rotational driving force to the outer reel unit 820.

The spokes 822 are formed so as to be inclined in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 toward the radially outer side of the hub 823, whereby the spokes 822 and one end of the openings of the outer reel 821 (see FIG. 3).
It is possible to form a space with 0 (a) left side). Further, the spokes 822 are the hub 8
It is formed of a plurality of rod-shaped bodies extending from 23 to the edge portion 824, and has an opening portion 822a that opens between the spokes 822 that are adjacent in the circumferential direction.

In the drive motor KM2, the thickness dimension of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction is approximately half the axial dimension of the outer reel 821. As described above, the hub 823 has a position in the axial direction,
Since the space is formed substantially at the center of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction and a space is formed at one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 (left in the left-right direction in FIG. 30A), most of the drive motor KM2 is driven by the outer reel 821. Can be disposed inside the. As a result, the dimensions of the outer reel unit 820 and the drive motor KM2 in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the outer reel 821) can be reduced.

The accommodation unit 880 is formed in a box-shaped body having an opening on the front side, and can accommodate the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 therein. The accommodation unit 880 includes a pair of left and right side wall portions 881 and an upper wall portion 8 disposed at an edge portion between the pair of side wall portions 881 facing each other.
82, the lower wall portion 883, and the back wall portion 884.

The side wall portion 881 is formed of a plate-shaped body having a substantially rectangular shape in a side view, is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the outer drum in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 30A), and is in the front-back direction (FIG. 30B). It is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the outer drum in the left-right direction.

A drive motor KM2 for driving the outer reel unit 820 is disposed on the side wall portion 881 on the right side (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the left side in front view (the left side in FIG. 30A), and the right side in front view (see FIG.
A drive motor KM1 for driving the inner reel unit 810 is disposed on the left surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the right side). That is, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are
The side wall portion 881 is rotationally displaced.

Further, the side wall portion 881 includes a bulging portion 881a that bulges in a curved shape corresponding to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 on the side surface on the front side. This makes it possible to prevent light emitted from the backlight unit 830, which will be described later, from leaking out from the left and right outer sides of the inner reel 811.

Further, the side wall portion 881 is formed of a metal material. Thereby, the rigidity of the accommodation unit 880 can be increased. In addition, by being formed of a metal material that is generally higher in thermal conductivity than a resin material, heat generated inside the accommodation unit 880 can be discharged to the outside of the accommodation unit 880. As a result, heat is stored inside the accommodation unit 880,
It is possible to prevent the parts from breaking.

The upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883 are plate members that form the upper and lower side surfaces of the accommodation unit 880, and the edge portion and the lower portion (FIG. 30(b)) of the upper portion (FIG. 30(b) upper portion) of the side wall portion 881. And the edges of the lower part).

The width dimension of the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction of FIG. 30A) is formed smaller than the width dimension of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction (axial direction). As a result, the distance dimension between the side wall portions 881 facing each other can be secured, and the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be arranged between the facing sides.

In addition, the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883 are formed with a plurality of through holes that radially penetrate the axis of the outer reel 821. Thereby, the fluidity of air between the inside and the outside of the accommodation unit 880 can be improved. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from accumulating inside the accommodation unit 880, and to prevent the components from being broken by the heat of the accommodation unit 880.

The rear wall portion 884 is a plate member that forms the side surface on the rear surface side of the accommodation unit 880, and is arranged along the edge portion on the rear surface side (right side in FIG. 30B) of the side wall portion 881.

The rear wall portion 884 is formed with an opening 884a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position that intersects the axis of the outer reel 821 in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 30B), and left and right end portions where the opening 884a is formed. And a standing portion 884b that is bent and stands on the front side.

The width dimension of the opening 884a in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30A) is formed to be larger than the width dimension of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer reel 821 from colliding with the back wall portion 884 when the outer reel 821 is moved (swayed) in the front-rear direction due to the inertial force or vibration of the rotation operation.

That is, when the outer reel 821 is moved (swayed) in the front-rear direction due to the inertial force and vibration of the rotation operation, a part of the rear side (right side in FIG. 30B) of the outer reel 821 is opened 884a. Can be inserted inside. As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer reel 821 from colliding with the back wall portion 884.

Further, the opening 884a can improve the fluidity of air inside and outside the accommodation unit 880. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from staying inside the accommodation unit 880, and to prevent parts from being broken by the heat of the accommodation unit 880.

Here, an opening 884 larger than the width of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction is formed in the rear wall portion 884.
When a is formed, the rigidity of the back wall portion 884 on both the left and right sides of the opening 884a becomes low. Therefore, the back wall portion 884 may be bent.

Further, in this case, it is conceivable to increase the rigidity of the rear wall portions 884 on both the left and right sides of the opening 884a by increasing the distance between the opposed side wall portions 881, but by increasing the distance between the opposed surfaces,
There is a problem that the unit of the decorative pattern display device 800 itself becomes large.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, standing portions 884b are formed on the left and right sides of the back wall portion 884 at the position where the opening 884a is formed. As a result, the rigidity of the back wall portion 884 can be increased. As a result, the back wall portion 884 can be prevented from bending.

Further, in the present embodiment, the back wall portion 884 is formed of a metal material, and the distance dimension from the left and right end portions of the opening 884a to the left and right end portions of the back wall portion 884 is sufficiently small. Therefore, the deformation rate of the plastic deformation when forming the left and right ends of the back wall portion 884 can be increased. As a result, rigidity can be increased.

The backlight unit 830 is a unit that emits light from the inner side of the inner reel 811 in order to make it easier for the player to recognize the symbol of the inner reel 811, and is arranged inside the front face of the inner reel 811.

The backlight unit 830 is formed in an arc shape in a side view, and the axis of the arc is the inner reel 8
It is arranged coaxially with the axis of 11. The width dimension of the backlight unit 830 in the axial direction is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension of the inner reel 811 in the axial direction.

The length L4 in the circumferential direction of the backlight unit 830 on the inner reel 811 side is formed to have a length corresponding to three symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811 described later.

Further, the backlight unit 830 has a concave portion 831 formed on the outer peripheral surface thereof so as to be concave inward in the radial direction.
Are arranged side by side in the circumferential direction. Therefore, partition plates 832 that are erected on the outer side in the radial direction of the backlight unit 830 are formed between the recesses 831.

A base member 833 including an LED that emits light is disposed on the radially inner side surface of each recess 831, and the LED can emit light toward the radially outer side of the backlight unit 830.

Electric power can be independently supplied to each base member 833, and the inner reel 811 can partially emit light. In this case, since each base member 833 is arranged in a region (recess 831) surrounded by four sides, the light emitted from the LED of the base member 833 is incident on the front region of another base member 833. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be easily made to partially emit light.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the symbols decorated on the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 will be described. FIG. 33(a) is a front view of the inner reel 811 developed, and FIG.
[Fig. 8] is a front view of an outer reel 821 developed.

As shown in FIG. 33A, on the inner reel 811, a plurality of symbols are drawn at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33). The dimension L5 in the circumferential direction of one symbol is set to one-third the length L4 in the circumferential direction of the backlight unit 830, as described above (L5×3=L4).

Further, the inner reel 811 is formed of a material that can transmit light as a whole. In particular, the portion of the design (for example, the display of "7") has a higher light transmittance than the margin portion around the portion. Therefore, the LEDs of the backlight unit 830 arranged inside the inner reel 811
By irradiating the light from the LED, the light of the LED can be transmitted through the inner reel 811, and the pattern portion can be made to stand out. Therefore, if the LED of the backlight unit 830 is set to the light emitting state, even if the outside light (the light inside the store or the light from other LEDs arranged in the pachinko machine 10) is not applied to the inner reel 811, The pattern can be visually recognized by the player.

In the present embodiment, 10 symbols of 5 types are continuously drawn in the circumferential direction, and the segment display device 600, which will be described later, allows the player to visually recognize at most 3 symbols. As described above, each decorative symbol display device 800 is decorated with a different array of symbols, which allows the player to visually recognize a maximum of nine symbols.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 displays 3×3 symbols by the inner reel 811, so that three parallel lines in the horizontal direction and two diagonal lines in the diagonal direction, two effective lines for jackpots are set in total. To be done. By stopping the inner reel 811 so that three "7" symbols are lined up on any one of the activated lines, it is possible to teach the player of the occurrence of the jackpot state.

As shown in FIG. 33B, the outer reel 821 includes a non-decorative surface 821a which is not decorated and a non-transmissive surface 821b which is decorated so as not to transmit light.

The non-decorated surface 821a is allowed to transmit light because it is not decorated. That is, by forming the outer reel 821 from a transparent material (a transparent resin material in this embodiment), the non-decorative surface 821a that allows light to pass through is formed. The non-decorative surface 821a may be formed so as to be able to transmit light, and may be, for example, a semi-transparent decoration that allows transmission of light.

In the decorative symbol display device 800, the outer reel unit 820 is rotated so that the non-decorative surface 821a.
By directing the player to the player side, the player can visually recognize the symbol of the inner reel 811 arranged inside the outer reel 821. That is, the player can visually recognize the symbol of the inner reel 811 through the non-decorative surface 821a of the outer reel 821.

The non-transmissive surface 821b is made non-transmissive by providing a black decoration on the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 (on the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 33B). Further, the non-transmissive surface 821b is formed such that the length thereof in the circumferential direction (the length in the vertical direction in FIG. 33B) is equal to or more than three symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811.

As described above, in the present embodiment, three symbols of the inner reel 811 can be displayed on the player side. Therefore, the length of the non-transmissive surface 821b in the circumferential direction is set to be three symbols or more to be decorated on the inner reel 811, and thus the outer reel unit 820 is rotated to rotate the outer reel 82.
By disposing the non-transparent surface 1 on the player side, the inner reel 811 can be made invisible from the player side.

The length of the non-transmissive surface 821b in the circumferential direction is the pattern 3 decorated on the inner reel 811.
However, the length of the inner reel 811 is not limited to one, and a length in the circumferential direction that makes the decoration of the inner reel 811 invisible to the player may be formed. That is, it is sufficient that the non-transmissive surface 821b is formed by the circumferential length of the inner reel 811 that is visible from the player side.

In addition, the non-transmissive surface 821b includes a transmissive region 821b1 that can partially transmit light and a design 821b2 that is decorated with the design.

The transmissive region 821b1 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 33) when viewed from the front. The transmissive area 821b1 is a portion for performing 7-segment display by being combined with the segment display device 600 described later, and the light transmitted through the inner reel 811 can be partially transmitted to the player side. This makes it possible to form a part of a 7-segment display which will be described later.

The symbol 821b2 is formed with a circumferential length corresponding to three of the symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811, and the outer reel so that three symbols 821b2 of each decorative symbol display device 800 are aligned in parallel in the horizontal direction. By stopping 821, it is possible to teach the player of the occurrence of the big hit state.

Further, as described above, the periphery of the symbol 821b2 is non-transparent, so that the player can make the inner reel 811 invisible. Therefore, it is possible to stop the symbols on the inner reel 811 on the activated line while performing an effect in which three symbols 821b2 are aligned. Therefore, the outer reel 8
By the rotation effect of 21, the player can watch the outer reel 821 and then watch the inner reel 811 almost at the same time when the effect of the outer reel 821 ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled.

Next, referring to FIGS. 34 to 36, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 8
20 will be described. 34 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device 800 taken along line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative symbol display device 800 in the range XXXV of FIG. 36A is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 812, and FIG. 36B is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 812 taken along the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb in FIG. 36A.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, a predetermined gap is formed between the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 facing each other. In addition, a predetermined distance is provided between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge portion 824 that projects radially toward one end side (left side in FIG. 34) of the opening of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820. A gap is formed.

The hub 812a of the rotating member 812 is provided with a protrusion 812a1 that protrudes toward the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a (in the present embodiment, formed on an extension line of the spoke 812c (see FIG. 36)). The protrusion 812a1 is formed in a mountain shape whose both sides are inclined in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Therefore, by rotating the inner reel unit 810, wind can be generated by the protrusion 812a1.

Here, conventionally, a first reel (outer reel unit 820) that is rotatably formed,
The first reel (outer reel unit 820) is provided with a second reel (inner reel unit 810) that is arranged substantially concentrically inside and is rotatably formed (that is, a double reel structure is provided). A game machine is known. There is also known a technique of removing dust adhering to the display surface of the reel by cleaning the reel by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and following the rotation of the rotating member. There is.

However, the double reel structure has a problem that cleaning is difficult. That is,
In the double reel structure, a space is provided between the outer reel (first reel (outer reel unit 820)) and the inner reel (second reel (inner reel unit 810)) for disposing the above-mentioned rotary brush. Therefore, the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel and the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

That is, since the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is formed narrow, in order to remove the dust (dust) entering and sticking between the opposed surfaces, the decorative pattern display It is difficult to clean because the device 800 needs to be disassembled.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the protrusion 812a1 allows the air to be pushed out to generate wind when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated. The pushed-out air (wind) collides with the edge portion 824 of the outer reel 821 facing each other, so that the air (wind) flows into between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

In this case, the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 facing each other is made narrower than the space on the inner peripheral side of the edge portion 824 and the hub 812a, so that air is applied to the edge portion. 824
Also, the flow can be made to flow from the space on the inner peripheral side of the hub 812a to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. As a result, it is possible to blow away dust (dust) attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust to be attached. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, in the present embodiment, the outer reel unit 820 has the outer reel 82 formed in a cylindrical shape.
1, and an edge portion 824 protruding radially inward from one axial side of the outer reel 821,
The inner reel unit 810 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the outer surface of the inner reel unit 810 faces the inner surface of the outer reel 821 at a predetermined interval, and the inner reel unit 810 extends radially inward from one axial side of the inner reel 811. And a hub 812a whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the edge portion 824 at a predetermined distance, and the protrusion 812a extends from the outer surface of the hub 812a toward the inner surface of the edge portion 824.
1, the projection 812a1 is displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a to generate wind pressure, and the wind pressure is used to generate the inner surface of the outer reel 821. The air between the inner reel 811 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be made to flow. Thus, the dust can be removed by the flow of air, and the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral surface can be cleaned.

Here, when an opening is formed in at least one of the edge portion 824 and the hub 812a or when a part in the circumferential direction is partially divided, a space between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a is formed. The wind pressure generated by the displacement of the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction escapes from the opening portion and the divided portion, so the wind pressure is weakened, and the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 flows accordingly. Hard to let

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the edge portion 824 and the hub 812a are formed to have an annular shape in the axial direction and have a surface that is continuous in the circumferential direction, so that the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a are formed. The wind pressure generated by displacing the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction can be increased. Therefore, the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be easily made to flow accordingly. As a result, the protrusion 81 is formed between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a.
The air pressure generated by the circumferential displacement of 2a1 can be used to facilitate the flow of air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811.

Further, the protrusion 812a1 partially narrows the facing portion between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820 in the circumferential direction of the inner reel 811. Therefore, the protrusion 812a1 can easily change the atmospheric pressure between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820 facing each other. Therefore, it is possible to easily generate the wind by utilizing the change in the atmospheric pressure, and the wind is caused to flow between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 to face each other. It is possible to blow away dust (dust) attached to the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust to be attached. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

More specifically, air has a property of flowing from a high atmospheric pressure to a low atmospheric pressure side.
By narrowing the gap between the protruding tip of No. 1 and the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820, the atmospheric pressure can be partially increased. Therefore, the inner reel 811 is less likely to change in atmospheric pressure.
The air pressure in the space between the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is lower than the air pressure between the protruding tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. As a result, it is possible to easily send air to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, and to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. it can.

Furthermore, since the atmospheric pressure between the protruding tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 can be increased, the protrusion 812a1 may be displaced toward the edge 824 or the edge 824 may be displaced (wobbled) toward the protrusion 812a1. Can be suppressed.

Also, the spokes 822 supporting the edge portion 824 and the spokes 81 supporting the hub 812a.
Since the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1 are formed in 2c, the air between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a is discharged to the outside through the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1. It can be exhausted (or air can be drawn in from the outside between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a). That is, the flow resistance of the air can be reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a can be easily flowed (flowed out or flowed in) correspondingly. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the circumferential displacement of the standing portion between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a is utilized to make the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 different. The air between can be made to flow easily.

Further, a protrusion 812a1 is erected on a hub 812a (crotch edge 824) of the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820), and a spoke 822 (or a spoke 812c) of the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810). Since at least the outer opening 825 (or the inner opening 812c1) is formed in the outer opening 825, it is possible to easily exert the effect of reducing the flow resistance by inhaling (or exhausting) air through the outer opening 825. That is, by rotating one of the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 in which the protrusion 812a1 is erected, the other one in which the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 is formed is stopped. The resistance of air flow (exhaust or intake) through the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 can be reduced.

The outer reel 821 is formed to be inclined (expanded) slightly outward in the radial direction from the edge portion 824 (one end) side to which the spokes 822 are connected to the other end side. Therefore, the air flowing from one end side between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be easily sent to the other end side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of air flowing between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 from being stopped, and to prevent dust on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. Can be suppressed.

Further, the inclination angle θ1 of the spoke 812c from the axis of the inner reel 811 to the outside in the radial direction is made larger than the inclination angle θ2 of the spoke 822c from the axis of the outer reel 821 to the outside in the radial direction (
θ1>θ2). Therefore, when the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 are rotationally displaced to a position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 34) that overlaps in the axial direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 34), the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 face each other outward in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 34). The dimensions in between are increased.

Therefore, by rotationally displacing one or both of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 are different due to the difference in the distance between the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 facing each other. It is possible to easily generate a wind heading between the inner peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface.

More specifically, the distance between the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 facing each other is increased toward the outside in the radial direction of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. Therefore, when the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 are rotationally displaced so as to overlap each other in the axial direction, the atmospheric pressure is generated between the facing portions of the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 in the radially inner portions of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. To be raised.

As described above, air has a property of flowing from a high pressure to a low pressure. Therefore, it is possible to form a flow of air from the radially inner portion toward the radially outer portion. That is, it is possible to form a flow of air from the axial side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 toward the facing side between the hub 812a and the edge portion 824. Therefore, air can be easily sent to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Further, since at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to be light-transmissive, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810 along the circumferential direction, Through the outer reel unit 820, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the fluctuation of the symbol accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. In this case, the inner reel unit 810
The protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the outer reel unit 820, that is, the protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 whose rotation frequency is larger than that of the outer reel unit 820. In the effect produced by the rotation of the unit 810, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811. That is, in the double reel structure, cleaning can be facilitated.

By rotating the inner reel unit 810, the player does not operate as the timing for cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 (the game ball is not launched into the game area). It is preferable to perform this when the pachinko machine 10 is in the standby state. In this case, since the inner reel unit 810 is rotated at a high speed in order to generate the wind, it is possible to attract the interest of the player by changing the design of the inner reel 811.

Further, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 may be cleaned while performing the effect of rotationally displacing the non-transmissive surface 821b of the outer reel 821. In this case, since the player makes the inner reel 811 invisible, the player can perform the cleaning without making the player visually recognize the cleaning state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. Further, since it can be performed in the game state, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be cleaned even when the game continues for a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of dust such as dust on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 during the game.

Next, the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 63.
First, the configuration of the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is a front view of the segment display device 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded view of the segment display device 600.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the segment display device 600 includes a vertical displacement unit 600L arranged on the left side in front view, and a vertical displacement unit 600R arranged on the right side in front view.
Vertical displacement unit 600C disposed between the left and right vertical displacement units 600L and 600R
Are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and the connecting member 601 is fastened and fixed from the back side.

Since the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R have almost the same configuration, the vertical displacement units 600C and 600R will be described below by describing only the vertical displacement unit 600L disposed on the left side in front view. Detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41.
FIG. 39(a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 39(b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit 600C. 40 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

40 and 41 show a mode in which the first segment unit 610, the second segment unit 620, and the displacement unit 650 are disassembled.

As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, the vertical displacement unit 600L includes a displacement unit 650 configured to be displaceable, and a first segment unit 6 disposed on the left and right of the displacement unit 650.
10 and the second segment unit 620 are provided.

The first segment unit 610 is a unit that can display one segment in the left-right direction, and the second segment unit 620 is a unit that can display two segments in the left-right direction. is there. Further, since the first segment unit 610 is formed by halving the second segment unit 620 in the left-right direction, only the second segment unit 620 will be described below.
The reference numerals in the configuration of the second segment unit 620 are similarly given to the first segment unit 610.

The vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R are formed such that the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 are arranged differently from each other.
In 0C, the second segment unit 620 is disposed only on the right side when viewed from the front, and the vertical displacement unit 610 is
As for R, the second segment unit 620 is disposed on the right side of the front view.

Therefore, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display one segment on the left side in front view and two segment display on the right side in front view. Also, the vertical displacement unit 600C is
Two segments can be displayed only on the right side when viewed from the front. Further, the vertical displacement unit 600
L can display one segment only on the right side when viewed from the front. That is, one vertical segment can be formed on the left and right sides of each vertical displacement unit 600L, 600C, 600R.

Next, the second segment unit 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. 42 (
42A is a front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG.
It is a rear view of 20. 43 is an exploded perspective front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG.
FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit 620.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, the second segment unit 620 includes a light transmitting member 621 arranged on the front side, a partition member 622 arranged on the back surface of the light transmitting member 621, and a partition member 622. Mainly includes a plurality of diffusing members 623 arranged on the back surface of the substrate, a base member 624 arranged between the plurality of diffusing members 623, and reflecting members 625 arranged on both sides of the base member 624. Formed.

The light transmitting member 621 is formed of a semitransparent light transmitting resin material through which light can pass. The light transmissive member 621 mainly includes a light transmissive portion 621a formed in a plate shape of an arc that is convex toward the front side, and a flat surface portion 621b that is formed so as to be continuous above and below the light transmissive portion 621a. R.

The light transmitting portion 621a includes a standing wall 621a1 that is erected on the back side from the left and right ends, a fastening portion 621a2 that projects annularly from the upper and lower ends on the back side, and a vertical direction at the front-side left-right center position. Is mainly provided with a decorative portion 621a3 that is recessed on the back surface side.

The standing wall 621a1 is formed so as to stand from the left and right ends of the light transmitting portion 621a to the back side. The dimension of the standing walls 621a1 facing each other is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension of the partition member 622 described later in the left-right direction. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is disposed on the back surface side of the light transmitting portion 621a, the partition member 622 can be restricted from moving left and right.

The fastening portion 621a2 is a protrusion that forms a hole for fastening a reflection member 625 described later with a screw, and is formed in an annular shape so as to project from the back surface side of the light transmission portion 621a. Therefore, the fastening portion 621a2
The reflection member 625 can be fastened by screwing the tip of the screw to the inner edge of the.

As described above, the decorative portion 621a3 is continuously recessed in the vertical direction at the left-right center position of the light transmitting portion 621a. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the light transmitted through the left side in the front view from being reflected from the inside of the decorative portion 621a3 and emitted from the right side in the front view. It should be noted that a detailed description of the light transmitted through the decorative portion 621a3 will be described later.

The flat surface portion 621b is a plate member for fastening to a base member 660 of the displacement unit 650 described later. The flat surface portion 621b is formed in a plate-shaped body having substantially the same front view shape as the base member 660, and by fastening a screw through the flat surface portion 621b, the displacement unit 650 and the second segment unit 620 are fastened. can do.

Further, an elastic piece 621b1 is formed on the flat surface portion 621b so as to project to the opposite side. The elastic pieces 621b1 are formed so as to project from the opposing side surfaces of the flat surface portions 621b formed in a pair of upper and lower sides, and also project in a curved shape that is convex toward the front side. Further, the elastic piece 621b1 is formed in a curved shape having a radius smaller than that of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the protruding tip thereof is the displacement unit 65.
The decorative pattern display device 800 disposed inside 0 is in contact with the upper wall portion 882 or the lower wall portion 883. Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the decorative symbol display device 800 are rotationally driven, it is possible to suppress the decorative symbol display device 800 from vibrating.

The partition member 622 is formed of a resin material that does not easily transmit light, and is formed in a curved plate state in a side view. The partition member 622 has a curved outer peripheral surface whose radius is equal to that of the light transmitting portion 6.
The radius of the inner peripheral surface of 21a is set to be substantially the same, and the width in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 42) is set to be smaller than the width of the light transmitting portion 621a in the vertical direction. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the partition member 622 can be arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the light transmitting portion 621a in a grounded state.

Further, the partition member 622 has a first recessed portion 622a that is recessed from both left and right (left and right) end surfaces toward the center in a front view, and a first recessed portion 622a that is recessed from the upper and lower (upper and lower) end surfaces toward the center. It is mainly provided with a second recessed portion 622b that is provided and a protruding portion 622c that protrudes from the left-right center position on the back side.

Two first recessed portions 622a are formed side by side in the vertical direction on both left and right sides. That is, the first recessed portions 622a are formed at four positions on the partition member 622.

The second recessed portion 622b is formed by recessing from both upper and lower ends. The dimension of the second recessed portion 622b facing each other at the recessed tip end is set to be substantially the same as the vertical separation distance of the fastening portion 621a2 formed on the light transmitting member 621. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is disposed on the back surface side of the light transmission member 621, by inserting the fastening portion 621a2 inside the second recessed portion 622b,
It is possible to prevent the partition member 622 from moving in the vertical direction.

The protruding portion 622c is formed at the center of the partition member 622 in the left-right direction and extends in the up-down direction. The projecting portion 622c includes a recess 622c1 that is recessed in the projecting tip surface. The width dimension of the recess 622c1 in the left-right direction is formed larger than the thickness dimension of the base member 624 described later. Therefore, when disposing the base member 624 on the partition member 622, the recess 62
The tip side of the base member 624 can be inserted inside 2c1. As a result, when the base member 624 is arranged, the base member 624 can be positioned and the base member 624 can be restrained from moving in the left-right direction.

The diffusing member 623 is made of a white turbid resin material, and can diffuse light that enters the inside. The diffusion member 623 is formed in a curved plate shape in a side view, and has an outer peripheral portion (
The radius of the front side) is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral portion (back side) of the partition member 622.
Therefore, the diffusion member 623 can be arranged on the back surface side of the partition member 622 in a state of being grounded.

Further, two diffusion members 623 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and two diffusion members 623 are arranged at a predetermined distance on the left and right sides. That is, four diffusion members 623 are arranged on the back surface side of the partition member 622.

The width dimension of the diffusing member 623 in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as the facing dimension of the standing wall 621a1 of the light transmitting member 621 and the protruding portion 622c of the partition member 622. Accordingly, when the diffusing member 623 is arranged on the back side of the partition member 622, it is possible to suppress the diffusing member 623 from moving left and right.

The diffusing member 623 is formed by including a protrusion 623a that protrudes to the front side and a recess 623b that is recessed on the back side of the protrusion 623a.

The projecting portion 623a is formed to project at a position corresponding to the first recessed portion 622a of the partition member 622 disposed on the front side of the diffusion member 623, and is arranged in a state of being inserted inside the first recessed portion 622a. Is set up. Accordingly, when the diffusion member 623 is arranged on the back side of the partition member 622, it is possible to prevent the partition member 622 from shifting in the left/right and up/down directions.

Further, the protruding distance of the protruding portion 623a is set to be smaller than the thickness dimension of the partition member 622. That is, the protrusion 623a and the rear surface of the light transmitting member 621 are provided with a predetermined gap therebetween (see FIG. 45).

The recessed portion 623b is provided on the side opposite to the protruding portion 623a (on the back surface side of the diffusion member 623), and the protruding portion 62 is provided.
It is formed by recessing in a shape slightly smaller than the shape of the front view 3a. Is formed. Accordingly, the thickness of the plate of the diffusion member 623 can be made substantially constant, and the distortion when the diffusion member 623 is molded can be suppressed. Further, since the recessed portion 623b is formed in a shape slightly smaller than the protruding portion 623a, the area on the back surface side of the end portion of the protruding portion 623a can be increased. Therefore, the amount of light incident on the diffusing member 623 from the LED 624a, which will be described later, can be increased at the end portion of the protruding portion 623a. As a result, it is possible to make the mode of light visible to the player through the diffusion member 623 clear (clear), and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

The base member 624 is formed of a crescent-shaped plate whose front side is curved, and includes an LED 624a that irradiates the side surface with light. The radius of the arc of the base member 624 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the recessed leading end surface of the recess 622c1 formed in the partition member 622. Therefore, the base member 62
4 is arranged on the back surface of the partition member 622, the base member 624 is placed in the recess 6 of the partition member 622.
By inserting inside 22c1, it is possible to prevent the base member 624 from being displaced in the left-right direction.

A plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged on both left and right side surfaces of the base member 624, and their irradiation directions are
It is perpendicular to the side surface of the base member 624. That is, the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 624a is
Left and right direction. It should be noted that a detailed description of the irradiation of light from the LED 624a will be given later.

The reflecting members 625 are arranged one on each of the left and right sides of the base member 624. Reflecting member 6
25 is formed of a white resin material, and is formed in a convex arc shape on the front side. The radius of the arc of the reflecting member 625 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the diffusing member 623. Accordingly, when the reflecting member 625 is disposed on the back side of the diffusing member 623, the reflecting member 625 and the diffusing member 623 can be in a grounded state.

The reflecting member 625 is formed in a plate-like body that is separated from the base member 624 in the left-right direction from the rear surface side to the front surface side, and the inclined portion 625a inclined from the rear surface side to the front surface side and the inclined portion 625a. A plurality of recesses 625b are formed on the front side of the recess in the vertical direction, and a wall portion 62 is formed at the upper end, the lower end and the middle of the recess 625b so as to project toward the front.
5c and mainly formed.

The front side of the inclined portion 625a is a reflection surface 625a1 that reflects the light of the LED 624a of the base member 624 to the front side, and is formed to be inclined by approximately 60 degrees with respect to the side surface of the base member 624.
As described above, since the light irradiation direction of the LED 624a is perpendicular to the side surface of the base member 624, the reflective surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined with respect to the side surface of the base member 624. The light emitted from can be reflected to the front side. Note that L
The manner in which the light of the ED 624a travels will be described later.

The recessed portion 625b is formed by recessing in a convex curved shape on the back side. Further, the recess 625b is formed at a position corresponding to the LED 624a of the base member 624, whereby the amount of light of the LED 624a visually recognized by the player via the diffusion member 623 can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the progress of the light emitted from the LED 624a of the second segment unit 620 will be described in detail. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 taken along the line XLV-XLV in FIG. Note that, in FIG. 45, a part of the aspect of the light emitted from the LED 624a is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line. Further, the outer shape of the decorative symbol display device 800 arranged on the left and right rear surfaces of the second segment unit 620 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 45, since the reflecting surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a and the reflecting surface 625a1 intersect at an acute angle), The reflection direction of can be outward. In this case, since the reflecting member 625 is formed of a plate member having a substantially constant thickness, the side opposite to the reflecting surface 625a1 (the back side of the reflecting member 625).
The space of can be enlarged. As a result, the end of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be arranged on the back side of the second segment unit 620.

Here, rotation (decorative pattern display device 800) that is rotatably formed and a plurality of which are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval, and at least one of which is arranged along between the plurality of rotating cylinders. The portion is provided with a light-transmissive decorative member (light-transmissive member 621) and a substrate (base member 624) disposed on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light-emitting means (LEDs 624a) are mounted. There is known a gaming machine in which a board is arranged in a posture in which a surface on which the means is mounted is made substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. According to this gaming machine, not only the space between the rotating drums can be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also the pattern of the light emitted from the light emitting means which has passed through the decorative member is formed (displayed) on the surface of the decorative member, It is possible to perform an effect in which the player can visually recognize the design of the decorative member together with the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the substrate is arranged in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member, the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently reflected on the back surface of the decorative member. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of rendering is insufficient. On the other hand, if the decorative member (the area excluding the pattern) is enlarged while the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means is small, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum is hindered.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the light transmitted from the LED 624a is transmitted to the light transmitting member 62.
Since the reflection member 625 that reflects the light to the back surface of the first member is provided, even when the base member 624 is arranged in a posture in which the surface on which the LED 624a is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the light transmission member 621,
It is possible to widen the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED 624a to the back surface of the light transmission member 621. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a can be increased by that amount, and the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a can be made larger, the area excluding the pattern can be made smaller, so that the light transmitting member 621 can be obtained.
A sense of unity with the decorative pattern display device 800 can be formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the light transmitting member 621 is located on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800, and has an outer edge up to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 in a front view. Since it is formed to extend, the axial end surface of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (hard to be visually recognized). Further, since the pattern of the light transmitting member 621 formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the LED 624a and the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be brought closer to each other, the light transmitting member 621 It is possible to easily form a sense of unity with the decorative pattern display device 800.

Further, the reflection member 625 connects the surface of the base member 624 on which the LED 624a is mounted and the back surface of the light transmission member 621, thereby forming a pattern on the region of the base member 624 where the LED 624a is mounted and the light transmission member 621. Since the back surface of the reflection member 625, which surrounds the area to be formed, is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 as it goes from the light transmission member 621 to the base member 624, the light emitted from the LED 624a. While the size of the pattern formed (displayed) is secured, the back surface of the light transmission member 621 is brought close to the outer peripheral surface of the decorative pattern display device 800, and the decoration pattern display device 800 is provided on the back surface of the light transmission member 621. It is possible to make it enter the back side (the decorative pattern display device 800 is brought close to the base member 624). As a result, the axial end surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (hard to be visually recognized), and the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative symbol display device 800 can be used.
It is easy to form a sense of unity with.

Further, since the LEDs 624a are mounted on both the one side surface and the other side surface of the base member 624, the light emitted from the LEDs 624a mounted on the one side surface and the other side surface are mounted. The light transmitting member 62 has a different pattern depending on the light emitted from the LED 624a.
1 can be independently formed (displayed).

In this case, the base member 624 arranged between the decorative pattern display devices 800 arranged side by side
Can be set to one. Therefore, the space required for disposing the base member 624 can be suppressed, and thus the decorative pattern display device 800 can be inserted into the rear side of the rear surface of the light transmission member 621 (
The decorative pattern display device 800 can be brought close to the base member 624). As a result, the axial end surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (hard to be visually recognized), and a sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily formed.

Further, as described above, the reflection surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a and the reflection surface 625a1 intersect at an acute angle), and The reflection direction of can be outward. Thereby, (the reflecting surface 625a1 is
The reflective member 625 can be made smaller (as compared to when it is inclined at an acute angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624). Therefore, the space on the back side of the second segment unit 620 can be secured accordingly. As a result, since the second segment unit 620 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be arranged close to each other, the sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily formed.

Next, the relationship between the LEDs 624a and the recesses 625b will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 46 is a side view of the base member 624. FIG. 47 shows the XL of FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the 2nd segment unit 620 in a VII-XLVII line.

As shown in FIG. 46, the LED 624a is formed in a square shape in a side view, and light can be emitted from the entire area of the square. The LEDs 624a are arranged at intervals of an inclination angle θ1 in the circumferential direction around an axis that is substantially the same as the bending axis on the front side of the base member 624. This allows the LED 624
The heat accumulated in the base member 624 due to the irradiation of a can be dispersed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the base member 624 from partially heating up and damaging the LED 624a.

In the present embodiment, eight LEDs 624a are dispersed and arranged in the circumferential direction. Also, LE
The D 624 a is arranged so that one side of the light emitting surface formed in a square shape is along the tangential direction of the curved shape of the base member 624.

Here, a substrate (base member 62) on which a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 624a) are conventionally mounted is mounted.
4) and a transmissive member (light transmissive member 621) that transmits the light emitted from the light emitting means, and the transmissive member (the light transmissive portion 621a of the light transmissive member 621) is formed to be curved, and A gaming machine is known in which the light emitting means is arranged along the curve of the transparent member. In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals in the front view of the transmissive member. That is, the curved lines (arcs) formed by the plurality of light emitting means are equally spaced along the direction of the line segment (string) connecting both ends. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem in that the distribution of heat generated by the light emitting means is uneven because the distance between adjacent light emitting means is narrowed in some of the plurality of light emitting means. Therefore, heat is likely to concentrate on some of the light emitting means, and the life is likely to be shortened.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the LEDs 624a are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the interval between the adjacent LEDs 624a in each LED 624a can be made constant, and the LED 62a.
The heat distribution generated by 4a can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from concentrating on some of the LEDs 624a and improve the life of each LED 624a.

As shown in FIG. 47, one recess 625b is formed on the back side (right side of FIG. 47) of each LED 624a. Further, the separation distance X1 from one end side (lower end portion) in the vertical direction of the one concave portion 625b to the other end side (upper end portion) is set to be the same.

Here, as described above, the LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at the inclination angle θ1. Therefore, the vertical distance between the LEDs 624a is narrower in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46) than in the vertical direction. Therefore, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting member 625 and emitted to the player side increases toward the vertical center (the vertical center becomes darker), which allows the player to see the light uniformly. There was a problem that I could not do it.

In other words, when a plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction) along the curve of the light transmitting portion 621a, the plurality of LEDs 624a are unequal in the front view of the light transmitting portion 621a. Will be arranged in. That is, in the front view of the light transmitting portion 621a, a region where the interval between the LEDs 624a is narrow and a region where the LED 624a is wide are formed. Therefore, the distribution of the light amount becomes non-uniform along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a reflection member 625 that reflects the light emitted from the LED 624a toward the light transmission portion 621a is provided, and the reflection member 625 is divided into a plurality of recesses 625b corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 624a. And the light transmitting portions 62 of the plurality of recesses 625b.
Since the partition widths of 1a in the front view are set to be substantially the same, the light amounts of the recesses 625b visually recognized in the front view of the light transmitting portion 621a can be made substantially the same. As a result, a plurality of LEDs 624
The distribution of the light amount along the arrangement direction of a can be made uniform.

That is, the separation distances X1 from one end side (lower end portion) to the other end side (upper end portion) in the vertical direction of one concave portion 625b are set to be the same, respectively, so that the player is irradiated by one LED 624a. The areas of the light emitted to the side can be made substantially the same in the vertical direction. Therefore, the amount of light emitted to the player side can be suppressed from increasing toward the center in the vertical direction. As a result, the player can visually recognize the light uniformly.

Further, since the light emitting surface of the LED 624a is formed in a rectangular shape (square) in front view, for example,
Compared with the case where the light emitting surface has a circular shape, the diffusibility of light can be secured (light can be emitted in a wider angle), so that the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in one recess 625b.

The light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encapsulates the LED chip. Therefore, the light-emitting surface having a rectangular shape in front view means that the front-view shape of the encapsulating resin (the front-view shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin) is rectangular.

Further, at least a part of the plurality of LEDs 624a has one side of the light emitting surface on which the light transmitting portion 621a is formed.
Since the light is emitted from the LED 624a, it is easy to uniformly diffuse the light emitted from the LED 624a along the curve of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, it is possible to make the distribution of the amount of light that is visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 621a uniform.

Further, the concave portion 625b is formed as a curved surface facing the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a and recessed to the side away from the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the light emitting surface of the LED 624a is the light transmitting portion 6a.
21a and the concave portion 625b face each other, so that the base member 624 does not face the light transmitting portion 621a.
Can be arranged in an orthogonal posture. That is, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the unit including the light transmitting portion 621a, the base member 624, and the reflecting member 625. In this case, the LED 624
Since the concave portion 625b is arranged in such a manner as to surround the light emitted from the light emitting surface of a from the direction orthogonal to the traveling direction of the light, the light reflected by the concave portion 625b is evenly distributed to the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. It can be made incident. As a result, it is possible to make the distribution of the amount of light that is visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 621a uniform.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, an aspect of light emitted by the LED 624a will be described. FIG. 48 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 48, LED6
The light emitted by 24a is shown by a chain double-dashed line and is also shown by adding a reference numeral to the irradiation area SR1.

As shown in FIG. 48, by emitting light from the LED 624a, the first segment unit 61
0 is irradiated with light from two irradiation regions SR1 arranged in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 48). In addition, the second segment unit 620 is irradiated with light from the irradiation regions SR1 arranged in 2×2 vertically and horizontally. The irradiation area SR1 of the second segment unit 620 is formed on the left and right sides of the light transmitting member 621 with the decorative portion 621a3 interposed therebetween.

Therefore, by the irradiation area SR1 of the first segment unit 610 and the left side of the irradiation area SR1 of the second segment unit 620, it is possible to display the left and right sides of the number in the 7-segment display. The upper and lower sides and the center of the numbers in the 7-segment display will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the displacement unit 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.
49 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Note that FIGS. 49 and 50 show a state in which the displacement unit 650 of the vertical displacement unit 600L is disassembled.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the displacement unit 650 includes a pair of left and right base members 660, a displacement member 670 that is rotatably supported by the base members 660, and is disposed on the base member 660. The drive means 680 for transmitting the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670 is mainly provided.

The base member 660 is formed of a pair of plate members on the left and right sides of a shape having a space larger than the decorative pattern display device 800 described above in the center. Further, the base member 660 on the left side in front view is provided with the first segment unit 610 on the front side, and the base member 660 on the right side in front view is provided with the second segment unit 620 on the front side. It should be noted that the base members 660 are disposed on the left, right, up, down, left, and right, and in the present embodiment, only the base member 660 on the left side in front view will be described, and the description on the base member 660 on the left side in front view will be omitted.

The base member 660 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction in side view, and includes a protruding portion 661 that is convexly curved and protrudes from the side surface on the front side toward the front side. In addition, the base member 66
Reference numeral 0 indicates a through hole 662 that is inserted into one end (upper end) in the vertical direction and through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 is inserted, and a connecting rod 681 that is installed in both ends (lower end) in the vertical direction. Insertion hole 66
3, a recess 664 in which a displacement member 670 described later is axially supported, a sliding groove 665 formed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the recess 664, and an engagement protruding above and below the recess 664 to the venue. And a portion 666.

The radius of the projection tip of the protrusion 661 is set smaller than the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the reflection member 625 described above, and the bending axis of the protrusion 661 is set substantially on the same straight line as the bending axis of the reflection member 625. Therefore, when the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 are arranged on the base member 660, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 661 and the reflection member 625 from coming into contact with each other, and the heat of the base member 624 is opposed to each other. Intrusion between the facing base members 660 can be suppressed. As a result, the decorative pattern display device 8 arranged inside the opposing base member 660.
It is possible to prevent the drive motors KM1 and KM2, which rotate and drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, from being broken due to the temperature rise of 00.

The through hole 662 is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 and the gear 682 connected to the shaft are inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is formed larger than the outer shape of the gear 682 and smaller than the main body of the drive motor KM3. Is set. Therefore, the drive motor KM3 can be arranged on the base member 660 with the gear 682 connected to the drive motor KM3. The drive motor KM3
Are attached to the base member 660 from the side between the opposed base members 660.

The through holes 662 are holes into which the connecting rods 681 of the driving means 680 to be described later are inserted, and are formed larger than the outer shape of the connecting rods 681, and are formed at the upper and lower ends of the base member 660.

The recess 664 is formed by forming a circular recess from the facing side of the base member 660 toward the outside. The recess 664 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 described later. As a result, the connecting protrusion 671b can be inserted and disposed inside the recess 664.

The sliding groove 665 is inserted into the displacement member 67 by inserting the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670.
0 and the driving means 680 arranged outside the pair of base members 660 can be connected. Also,
The displacement of the displacement member 670 can be guided by setting the connection protrusion 671b inserted in the sliding groove 665. Therefore, the displacement member 670 can be displaced smoothly.

The engaging portion 666 is formed on the opposite side of the base member 660, with its tip having a gap larger than the diameter of one end of the torsion spring SP1 described later and the opposite side surface of the base member 660.
As a result, one end of the torsion spring SP1 can be engaged with the engaging portion 666.

The displacement members 670 are arranged in a pair of upper and lower sides in opposite directions. The displacement member 670 is formed of an extending member 671 whose one end is axially supported by the base member 660, and a decoration unit 672 connected to the other end of the extending member 671.

The extending members 671 are formed in a substantially L-shaped plate shape, and a pair of the extending members 671 are disposed in the right and left opposite directions. The extension member 671 has a shaft support hole 671a penetrating in the left-right direction at one end on the long side, a connecting projection 671b protruding left and right outside at a substantially central position in the length direction on the long side, and a shaft supporting hole 6 from the side surface on the long side.
It is mainly provided with a protrusion 671d protruding in the circumferential direction of 71a and an elastic member 671f made of an elastic material and arranged on the side surface of the extending member 671.

The shaft support hole 671a is a hole into which the collar C is inserted, and its inner diameter is formed larger than the outer diameter of the collar C. Therefore, while inserting the collar C into the shaft support hole 671a, the collar C
The displacement member 670 can be rotatably connected to the base member 660 by fastening and fixing the inside of the recess 664 of the base member 660 with a screw.

Further, the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 are arranged coaxially, and the collar C is inserted into the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 and fastened and fixed to the base member 660. The displacement member 670 is coaxially rotatably arranged.

Further, the left and right extending members 671 are formed with bulging portions 671a1 bulging outward in the left-right direction around one shaft support hole 671a. The outer diameter of the bulging portion 671a1 is the base member 660.
Is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the concave portion 664. The bulging portions 671a1 are arranged on the left and right outer sides of the pair of displacement members 670.

That is, in the present embodiment, since the bulging portion 671a1 is formed in the shaft support hole 671a on the right side of the displacement member 670 arranged on the upper side, the shaft support hole 67 on the right side of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side is formed.
1a is placed inside the bulging portion 671a1. On the other hand, the shaft support hole 671 on the left side
In a, since the bulging portion 671a1 is formed in the shaft supporting hole 671a on the left side of the displacing member 670 arranged on the lower side, the shaft supporting hole 671a on the left side of the displacing member 670 arranged on the upper side is bulged. 67
It is placed inside 1a1 (see FIG. 49).

Thus, the collar C allows the bulging portion 671a1 to be inserted into the recess 664 when the displacement member 670 is disposed on the base member 660. As a result, the shaft support hole 6 of the displacement member 670 is
When a force is applied in the radial direction of the shaft of the shaft 71a, the outer peripheral surface of the bulging portion 671a1 and the inner peripheral surface of the recess 664 contact each other, so that damage to the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C can be suppressed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the pair of displacement members 670 are disposed coaxially with the base member 660, so that the axial length of the collar C is lengthened accordingly. Therefore, the displacement member 6
When a force acts on the rotary shaft of 70 in the radial direction, a large force tends to act on the rotary shaft. Therefore, when the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C is easily damaged, the bulging portion 67
By abutting 1a1 and the recess 664, it is possible to retain the force acting in the radial direction on the rotation axis of the displacement member 670. As a result, it is possible to prevent the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C from being damaged.

The protrusion 671d is formed with a through hole 671d1 penetrating in the longitudinal direction on the longitudinal side of the extending member 671. The through hole 671d1 is a hole into which the torsion springs SP1 and SP2 described later are inserted, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2.

The elastic member 671f is arranged on the side surface of the extending member 671 on the side closer to each other of the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair, which will be described later. Further, when the upper and lower extending members 671 are arranged at positions close to each other, the side surfaces of the elastic members 671f are in contact with each other. Accordingly, it is possible to absorb the impact when the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced to positions close to each other.

The drive unit 680 is a unit that transmits the power of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670.
The drive means 680 is a gear 682 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3, a large-diameter gear 683 that meshes with the gear 682, a rod-shaped body, and one end thereof is connected to a side surface of the large-diameter gear 683.
A first link member 684 whose other end is connected to the displacement member 670, a connecting rod 681 for transmitting power to the opposite side via the base member 660, and a cam member 685 which is connected to the connecting rod 681 and rotates. And a second link member 686, which is formed into a rod-like body and has one end rotatably connected to the cam member 685 and the other end connected to the displacement member 670.

The gear 682 is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3 as described above, and is rotated by the rotation of the drive motor KM3.

The large-diameter gear 683 is formed in a circular shape in a side view, and includes a gear surface 683a formed on a tooth surface meshing with the gear 682, and a projection 683b projecting in an annular shape on the side surface in the rotation axis direction. Formed. Since the gear surface 683a of the large-diameter gear 683 meshes with the gear 682,
It is rotated by rotating the gear 682. That is, the drive motor KM3 is rotated and driven to rotate.

The protrusion 683b is formed in an annular shape so that its axis is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the large diameter gear 683. Therefore, when the large-diameter gear 683 is rotationally displaced, the protrusion 683b is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotation axis thereof.

The first link member 684 is formed in a rod-shaped body, and has insertion holes 684a and 684b formed in both ends thereof so as to penetrate therethrough in the left-right direction.

The insertion hole 684a is a hole into which the protrusion 683b of the large-diameter gear 683 is inserted.
The inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of b. The projection 683b is inserted into the insertion hole 684a, and the tip of the projection 683b is fastened with a screw having a head outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684a, whereby the first link member 684 can be rotated to the large-diameter gear 683. Can be connected in a state.

The insertion hole 684b is a hole into which the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 671b. The first link member 684 can be rotated to the displacement member 670 by inserting the connection protrusion 671b into the insertion hole 684b and fastening the tip of the connection protrusion 671b with a screw having a head outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b. Can be connected in a simple state.

Therefore, when the large diameter gear 683 is rotated via the gear 682, the protrusion 683b is rotationally displaced about the rotation axis of the large diameter gear 683 with the rotational displacement of the large diameter gear 683. The first link member 684 connected at one end is displaced, and the first link member 684 is displaced.
Displacement member 670 connected to the other end of is displaced.

One end of the connecting rod 681 is inserted into the insertion hole 663 of the base member 660 arranged on the left side in front view, and is internally fitted to the rotary shaft portion of the large diameter gear 683. On the other hand, the other end of the connecting rod 681 is connected to the cam member 685. Therefore, by the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3, the connecting rod 681 rotates and the cam member 685 rotates.

The cam member 685 is formed in a circular shape in a side view, and the connecting rod 681 is fitted in the shaft portion thereof. In addition, the cam member 685 has a projection 685a that protrudes outward in an annular shape from the side surface in the axial direction.
Equipped with. The protrusion 685a is formed in an annular shape so as to project, and its axis is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the cam member 685. Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotationally displaced, the protrusion 685a rotationally displaces on a circle centered on its rotation axis.

The second link member 686 is formed in the same shape as that of the first link member 684 that is laterally inverted. The second link member 686 has insertion holes 686a and 686b at both ends in the longitudinal direction.

The insertion hole 686a is a hole into which the protrusion 685a of the cam member 685 is inserted.
The inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of a. The protrusion 685a is inserted into the insertion hole 686a, and the tip of the protrusion 685a is fastened with a screw having a head outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 686a, whereby the second link member 686 can be rotated to the cam member 685. You can connect with.

The insertion hole 686b is a hole into which the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 671b. The second link member 686 can be rotated to the displacement member 670 by inserting the connection protrusion 671b into the insertion hole 686b and fastening the tip of the connection protrusion 671b with a screw having a head outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b. Can be connected in a simple state.

Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotated via the connecting rod 681, the protrusion 685a is rotationally displaced about the rotation axis of the cam member 685 with the rotational displacement of the cam member 685, and one end of the protrusion 685a is displaced. The second link member 686 to be coupled is displaced, and the second link member 68 is displaced.
The displacement member 670 connected to the other end of 6 is displaced.

That is, the displacement member 670, the first link member 684, and the second link member 686 are displaced. Here, since the operation of the first link member 684 and the operation of the second link member 686 are synchronized via the connecting rod 681, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 670 from tilting when it is displaced. As a result, the displacement member 670 can be smoothly displaced.

Next, the displacement member 670 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. 51 (
51A is a front view of the displacement member 670, and FIG. 51B is a side view of the displacement member 670. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 670. FIG. 53 shows LII of 51(a).
It is sectional drawing of the displacement member 670 in a I-LIII line.

As described above, the displacement member 670 is formed by including the extending member 671 that is rotatably supported by the base member 660 and the decoration unit 672 that is connected to the extending member 671.

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the extending member 671 includes a plate-shaped connecting portion 671c on the short side (the connecting side of the decoration unit 672). Extension members 67 arranged in a pair on the left and right
Steps 671c1 that partially project in a stepwise manner on the surfaces of the connecting portions 671c that face each other.
Is formed. The step portions 671c1 are formed alternately on the left and right, and the step portions 671c1 are in a state of being meshed with each other with a predetermined gap. Thereby, a dimensional error can be absorbed when the extension member 671 is molded.

The decoration unit 672 is a unit that includes an LED that emits light inside and that emits light to the player side. The decoration unit 672 includes a back cover 673 arranged on the back side, a front cover 676 covering the back cover 673 and arranged on the front side of the back cover 673,
A base member 674 disposed between the rear cover 673 and the front cover 676 facing each other, and a diffusion member 675 and a lens member 677 disposed between the base member 674 and the front cover 676 are mainly formed. To be done.

The back cover 673 is formed in a plate-like body having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and the connecting portion 671c of the extending member 671 is fastened to the back side. Thereby, the decoration unit 672 and the extension member 671 can be fastened.

The back cover 673 is made of a resin material that does not easily transmit light (impermeable).
The back cover 673 is provided with a reflecting portion 673a which is formed by recessing on the back side at a position facing a diffusing member 675 described later.

The reflection portion 673a is formed in the lower edge portion of the back cover 673 in the left-right direction, and the inner surface thereof is coated with white, which has high light reflectance. Accordingly, the light emitted to the inner side of the reflection portion 673a can be reflected inside the reflection portion 673a and emitted to the diffusion member 675 side.

The front cover 676 is formed so that its front view shape is substantially the same as the shape of the back cover 673, and is arranged so as to cover the front side of the back cover 673. Further, the front cover 676 is formed of a resin material that can transmit light, and can emit light emitted from the first LED 674a and the second LED described later to the front side (player side).

The base member 674 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body smaller than the back cover 673 in a front view. On the front side of the base member 674, a first LED 674a that is arranged side by side in the lower edge in the left-right direction and irradiates the diffuser 675 side with light, and is arranged above the first LED 674a, and the lens member 677 receives light. And a second LED 674b for illuminating

The first LED 674a is disposed at a position facing the upper end of the diffusion member 675, and
The base member 674 is arranged so that light can be emitted downward. Thereby, the first LED 674a
It is possible to suppress the light emitted from the light from entering the lens member 677 described later. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to distinguish the light emitted to the front side via the diffusion member 675 and the light emitted to the front side via the lens member 677, and the interest of the player is impaired. Can be suppressed.

The second LED 674b is disposed above the first LED 674a. Therefore, the diffusion member 6
The light of the second LED 674b can be made incident on the lens member 677 arranged on the upper part of 75.

The diffusing member 675 is formed of a plate-shaped member having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and is arranged at the lower end of the front cover 676 on the back surface side. The diffusing member 675 is formed of a white turbid resin material capable of diffusing the light incident inside. As a result, the light emitted from the first LED 674a and incident on the diffusion member 675 can be diffused to make the light uniform throughout and emitted to the front side (player side).

The lens member 677 is formed of a plate-shaped member having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and is arranged at the upper end portion on the back side of the front cover 676. The lens member 677 is formed of a transparent resin material and has a plurality of protrusions on the back side (not shown). This makes it easier for the light emitted from the second LED 674b to enter the inside by the protrusion on the back side. As a result, the second LED 67
Even if the amount of light emitted from 4b is reduced, the light can be made incident on the lens member 677, and the light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a mode of light emitted by the first LED 674a to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676 will be described. FIG. 54 is a front view of the displacement member 670. In FIG. 54, the area of the light emitted to the player side by the first LED 674a is 2
The irradiation area SR<b>2 is denoted by the reference numeral as well as the dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 54, the area of the light emitted to the player side by the first LED 674a is
The lower end of the decoration unit 672 (front cover 676) has a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction. Since the displacement member 670 is disposed at both upper and lower ends of the vertical displacement unit 600L, the displacement member 67
With 0, the irradiation region SR2 is formed at a position separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Therefore,
By the irradiation regions SR2 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, it is possible to display the numbers above and below the 7-segment display.

Next, the 7-segment display displayed by the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is a front view of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. 55 and 56 show a state in which the transparent area 821b1 of the outer reel 821 is rotated toward the player, and
The irradiation region SR1, the irradiation region SR2, and the transmission region 821b1 are illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 55, two irradiation regions SR1 formed by the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 are formed side by side in the vertical direction and six in the horizontal direction. It is said that it is in a state.

The irradiation region SR1 is formed as one set of four in a manner that the decorative pattern display device 800 is sandwiched therebetween, and the three sets are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. An irradiation region SR2 is arranged vertically between the one set of irradiation regions SR1, and a transmission region 821b1 is arranged at an intermediate position in the vertical direction. Therefore, 7
By the irradiation areas SR1 and SR2 and the transmissive area 821b1 of the book, it is possible to display numbers by 7-segment display.

As described above, three sets of four irradiation regions SR1 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, so that a 7-segment display is formed in each set. That is, three 7-segment displays are arranged side by side in the left-right direction.

Therefore, the 7-segment display arranged side by side in the left-right direction can be displayed as a number as an effective line for the jackpot lottery of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, all the 7-segment displays are displayed as the "7" segment). By this, not only the jackpot display by the decorative pattern display device 800 described above but also the jackpot display by the 7-segment display can be performed. As a result, since the player can visually recognize a plurality of display forms, the interest of the player can be improved.

Here, the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 6 of the segment display device 600.
Since the light transmitting portion 621a of 20 is formed to be curved in a convex shape on the front side, when the player visually recognizes the 7-segment display, the display in the vertical center portion close to the player becomes large, The display at both ends in the vertical direction far from the player becomes smaller. Therefore, there is a problem in that it is impossible for the player to clearly see the display of the numbers by 7 segments.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the width dimension in the left-right direction of the 7-segment display is sequentially increased from the center position in the vertical direction toward the upper and lower ends. As a result, it is possible to uniformize the display by the 7 segments at the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower central positions as a whole. As a result, the player can clearly see the display of the numbers by the seven segments.

Further, in the 7-segment display formed on both the left and right sides, the central portion in the vertical direction is formed to be inclined toward the central side in the horizontal direction. This allows the player to clearly see the 7-segment display formed on the left and right sides.

That is, the player's viewpoint is normally located at the center position in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10. Also,
The segment display device 600 is arranged at the center position of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the player's viewpoint is located in front of the 7 segments displayed in the center. Therefore, as the left and right sides are separated from the player's viewpoint, the 7-segment display is viewed by the player in a curved manner due to the curved shapes of the light transmitting portions 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620. Since the central portion in the vertical direction of the 7-segment display is formed to be inclined toward the central portion in the left-right direction, the 7-segment display is difficult to be visually recognized from the player's viewpoint in a curved manner. As a result, the player can clearly see the 7-segment display.

Next, a displacement mode of the displacement member 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60.
57(a) to G01(c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 58 (
a), FIG. 59(a) and FIG. 60(a) are side views of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 58(b), FIG. 59(a) and FIG. 60(b) are FIG. 57(a). LVIIIb-LVII
It is sectional drawing of the up-down displacement unit 600L in Ib line.

57(a), 58(a), and 58(b), a state in which the displacement member 670 is arranged in the retracted state is shown, and FIGS. 57(b), 59(a), and 59 are shown. FIG. 57B shows a state in which the displacement member 670 is arranged in the intermediate state, and FIGS. 57C, 60A, and 60
In b), a state in which the displacement member 670 is arranged in an extended state is shown.

Further, the retracted state of the displacement member 670 is a state in which the upper and lower displacement members 670 are separated from each other vertically and outwardly, and the protruding state of the displacement member 670 is the upper and lower displacement members disposed. The state where the member 670 is in contact with the upper and lower intermediate positions, and the intermediate state of the displacement member 670 is
The displacement member 670 is disposed between the retracted state and the extended state.

As shown in FIGS. 57A and 58, at the position where the displacement member 670 is in the retracted state,
The displacing member 670 arranged above (upper in FIG. 57) of the pair of the upper and lower parts is configured such that the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are located above, so that the shaft support hole 671a is rotated. As a result, the decoration unit 672 is positioned above.

Further, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged above
P1 has the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1).
It is considered to be the base end part of. Therefore, the biasing force applied by the torsion spring SP1 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the decoration unit 672 is arranged on the displacement member 670 on the upper side in the gravity direction.

On the other hand, the displacing member 670 arranged in the lower part (lower part in FIG. 57) of the pair of upper and lower parts is arranged such that the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are located in the lower part, so that the shaft supporting hole 6
The decoration unit 672 is positioned below with the rotation axis 71a as the rotation axis.

Further, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged below.
The engagement position of P2 with the through hole 671d1 is the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1).
It is considered to be the base end part of. Therefore, the biasing force applied by the torsion spring SP2 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily displace the decoration unit 672 to the displacement member 670 upward in the gravity direction.

In the retracted state, an opening is formed between the decorative units 762 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, and the decorative pattern display device 800 arranged inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. In this case, as described above, three symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player side in the vertical direction.

When a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM3 from the state shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 58, the large diameter gear 683 and the cam member 685 are rotated. Thereby, the first link member 6
The 84 and the second link member 686 are displaced to a substantially central position in the vertical direction of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Therefore, the insertion holes 684b, 6 of the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are formed.
The displacement member 670 connected to 86b is rotationally displaced about the shaft support hole 671a, and the displacement member 670 of FIG.
) And the state shown in FIG. 59 to the state shown in FIGS. 57(c) and 60.

As shown in FIGS. 57B and 59, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the intermediate position, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above is displaced.
The engagement position of P1 with the through hole 671d1 is an intermediate position on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased by the deformation of the torsion spring SP1, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than that of the retracted state by the amount of changing the engaging position.

Further, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side.
Similar to the P2 torsion spring SP1, the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 is the other end side (through hole 67).
It is an intermediate position on the side inserted into 1d1). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 can be reduced by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP2, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be less than that of the retracted state by the amount of changing the engaging position.

In the intermediate state, an opening smaller than that in the retracted state is formed between the decorative units 762 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, and the decorative pattern display device 800 arranged inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. .. In this case, one symbol displayed on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player side.

Therefore, from the retracted state in which three symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811 are displayed vertically,
The displacing member 670 is in an intermediate state in which one drawing side to be displayed on the inner reel 811 is displayed in the vertical direction.
By displacing, a plurality of effect modes can be formed, and the player's interest can be improved. In addition, by making one drawing side to be displayed on the inner reel 811 up and down, one symbol can be noticed to the player. Therefore, it is possible to clarify the portion to be noticed, and thus it is easy for the player to visually recognize the effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

As shown in FIGS. 57(c) and 60, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the retracted position, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above is displaced.
The engagement position of P1 with the through hole 671d1 is the tip position on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP1, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than that of the intermediate engagement position by the amount of changing the engagement position.

Further, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side.
Similarly to the torsion spring SP1, the engagement position of the P2 with the through hole 671d1 is the other end side (the through hole 6).
71d1 (the side inserted into 71d1). Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP2, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than that of the intermediate engagement position by the amount of changing the engagement position.

That is, the biasing force of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2 can be made non-linear with the displacement of the displacement member 670. As a result, depending on the displacement position of the displacement member 670, the required biasing force is applied to the torsion spring SP1.
, SP2 can be easily applied. As a result, the energy required to drive the drive motor KM3 can be minimized.

In the projecting state, the decorative unit 672 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 is brought into contact with the vertical displacement unit 600L at an intermediate position in the vertical direction. In this case, the decorative unit 672 is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 800, and the decorative symbol display device 8 is arranged from the player side (front side).
The display of 00 can be made invisible.

Therefore, by displacing the displacement member 670, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are rotationally displaced, and then the displacement member 670 is displaced to the intermediate state or the retracted state, so that the symbols are aligned to the player ( You can easily give a sense of expectation. As a result, the interest of the player can be increased.

In the above embodiment, the case where the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced by the same amount has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the two drive motors KM3 is rotationally driven. By doing so, it is also possible to displace the upper and lower displacement members 670 arranged in a pair to the position of the intermediate state or the extended state on only one side.

Further, the maximum displacement amount of the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair in the upper and lower direction is not set at the intermediate position, but can be displaced beyond the position shown in FIG. That is, the pair of displacement members 6
It is displaceable up and down with 70 abutting.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. 61 to 63 are schematic diagrams of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 61 to 63, transition states of the displacement member 670 are sequentially illustrated.

61 to 63, the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side of the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive unit for driving the displacement member 670 are suffixed with U, and
In the following description, the reference numeral D is added to the end of the reference numerals of the displacement member 670 and the driving means for driving the displacement member 670, which is disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIG. 61, the vertical displacement unit 600L includes an extension member 671 of the displacement member 670.
Are arranged on both left and right sides. The pair of extension members 671 are a driven side to which the driving force of the driving motor KM3 is transmitted via the connecting rod 681 and a driving side to which the driving force of the driving motor KM3 is transmitted by the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683. It is connected to either one.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the vertically arranged displacement members 670 are displaced, the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIG. 63, by displacing both of the displacement members 670 in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 62, it is possible to displace the decorative units 672 in the vertical direction with the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 in contact with each other. ..

Here, a first displacing member (decoration unit 672U) and a first displacing member (decoration unit 672U), which are arranged so as to be opposed to each other and are displaceable in respective directions approaching or separating from each other, and displaceable in the same direction with the opposite sides being in contact A gaming machine including two displacement members (decoration unit 672D) is known. According to such a gaming machine, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are brought close to the position where the opposite sides come into contact with each other, so that the object located on the back side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member (for example, , The liquid crystal display device and the effect member) and by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the direction in which they are separated from each other, the shielding is released in accordance with the displacement, and the object can be viewed. Can be performed. In addition, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced in the same direction (for example, reciprocal displacement in one direction and the other direction) in a state where the opposite sides are in contact with each other, thereby maintaining the shielding of the target object. It is also possible to perform an effect (an effect that focuses on the operation of releasing the shielding) before the shielding is released.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to bring the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact with each other due to the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance of the constituent members, and between the opposing sides. There is a problem that a gap may be formed in the. If a gap is formed between the opposite sides, the player can visually recognize the target object on the back side through the gap, and the effect of production is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the base member 660 and the drive unit 6 that movably supports the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D on the base member 660, respectively.
80U and drive means 680D, and the support mode of the drive means 680U is the decoration unit 67.
To one side of the facing side of the decoration unit 672D, which is biased to one side of the facing side of 2U and abuts on one side of the facing side of the decoration unit 672U, which is opposite to the other side of the facing side of the decoration unit 672D. Since the support mode of the drive unit 680D is biased, the support mode of the drive unit 680U and the support mode of the drive unit 680D are opposite to each other in the state where the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other ( The center of one side and the other side of the opposite sides can be biased to the side rotated by 180°. As a result, the decoration unit 67
The opposing sides of 2U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be prevented from being formed between the opposing sides (see FIG. 63).

In the present embodiment, since the number of constituent members is different between one side and the other side (both sides in the left-right direction),
The driving force transmitted to the left and right of the decoration unit 672 is different, and the driving unit 680U and the driving unit 680D may face their high rigidity side (low side) to the low rigidity side (high side) of the other party. it can. Therefore, in a state in which the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving unit 680U and the driving unit 680D each push the opponent (advance) on the side with high rigidity and the side with low rigidity. Then, you can form a state of accepting (retracting) the other party. As a result, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 6
The opposite sides of 72D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be suppressed from being formed between the opposite sides.

The drive unit 680U includes a drive motor KM3U that generates a drive force and a decoration unit 672U.
A pair of extension members 671U connecting the base member to the base member, and a first link member 684U and a second link member 686U configured to respectively transmit the driving force of the drive motor KM3U to the pair of extension members 671U and have different configurations. The driving means 680D includes a driving motor KM3D that generates a driving force, a pair of extending members 671U that connects the decoration unit 672D to the base member 660, and a driving motor KM3U that drives the pair of extending members 671U. The second link member 686D and the first link member 686D that respectively transmit forces and have different configurations
Since the link member 684D is provided, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D
It is possible to easily bring the opposite sides into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

That is, in a state in which the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving unit 680U and the driving unit 680D are, for example, on the side where the driving force is large or the timing at which the driving force is transmitted is ahead. A state can be formed in which the opponent is pushed in (moved forward) and the opponent is received (retracted) on the side with a small driving force or the side where the driving force is transmitted later. As a result, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be suppressed from being formed between the opposing sides.

Further, the extending member 671U and the extending member 671D are formed to have substantially the same length, one end side is connected to the decoration unit 672U or the decoration unit 672D, and the other end side is coaxially rotated with the base member 660. The decoration unit 672U is supported as much as possible.
Also, when the decorative unit 672D is reciprocated in the same direction while contacting the facing sides thereof, it is possible to easily maintain the state where the facing sides are in contact even when utilizing the bias of the support mode.

Further, the extending member 671U or the extending member 671D is provided with an elastic member 671f formed of a rubber-like elastic material, and when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with their opposite sides, the elastic members are elastic. Since the body is interposed between the extending member 671U and the extending member 671D in an elastically compressed state, the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D reciprocate in the same direction while abutting their opposing sides against each other. In this case, even when the bias of the support mode is used, it is possible to easily maintain the state where the opposite sides are in contact with each other.

In addition, as described above, the drive unit 680U drives the drive motor KM3U that generates a drive force, drives the drive motor KM3U, and mounts the decoration unit 672U on the base member 6.
The drive means 680D includes a pair of extension members 671U connected to the 60 and two torsion springs SP1 that apply different biasing forces to the pair of extension members 671U, and a drive motor KM3D that generates a drive force. A pair of extension members 671D that are driven by the drive motor KM3D and connect the decoration unit 672D to the base member 660; and two torsion springs SP2 that apply different biasing forces to the pair of extension members 671D. Since it is provided, the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be suppressed from being formed between the facing sides.

That is, in a state in which the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving unit 680U and the driving unit 680D respectively push the opponent (move forward) on the side having a large urging force and attach it. The side with less power can form a state of accepting (retracting) the opponent. As a result, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 6
The opposite sides of 72D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be suppressed from being formed between the opposite sides.

Note that the two torsion springs SP1 may have the same configuration as each other. That is, the positions to which the biasing force is applied are different from each other, or the elastic deformation amounts are different from each other, so that the biasing forces applied to the pair of extending members 671U may be different from each other. The same applies to the two torsion springs SP2.

Further, the drive unit 680U includes a drive motor KM3U that generates a drive force, a pair of extension members 671U that are driven by the drive motor KM3U and that connect the decoration unit 672U to the base member 660, and the pair of extension members. 671U and a first urging member for applying an urging force to one of the 671U, and the drive means 680D is a drive motor KM3D for generating a drive force.
And a pair of extension members 671D that are driven by the drive motor KM3D and that connect the decoration unit 672D to the base member 660, and a second biasing force that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of extension members 671D. Since the member is provided, the facing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be prevented from being formed between the facing sides.

That is, in a state where the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D respectively push the opponent (move forward) on the side to which the biasing force is applied, for example. On the side where the urging force is not applied, it is possible to form a state of accepting (retracting) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be suppressed from being formed between the opposing sides.

As described above, one leg is formed as a torsion spring and one leg is connected to the extending member 671U and the other leg is connected to the base member 660.
Since the torsion spring SP1 that applies a biasing force in the direction of approaching the decoration unit 672D is provided, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced in the direction of approaching the decoration unit 672D, the extension member 67 is provided.
The driving force of the drive motor KM3U required to rotate 1U can be assisted by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1. Therefore, for example, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced from the retracted position separated from the decoration unit 672D to the contact position where it contacts the decoration unit 672D from the stopped state, the displacement can be started smoothly.

In this case, as the extending member 671U is rotated in the direction of bringing the decorative unit 672U closer to the decorative unit 672D, one leg of the torsion spring SP1 and the connecting position of the extending member 671U or the other leg of the torsion spring SP1 are connected. Since at least one of the connecting positions with the base member 660 is separated from the winding portion, the distance from the winding portion to the position where the force is applied becomes longer, so that the decoration unit 672U is attached closer to the decoration unit 672D. You can weaken your power. Therefore, for example, when the decoration unit 672U brought close to the decoration unit 672D is stopped, the displacement can be surely stopped, so that damage due to a collision can be suppressed. Further, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction while the opposite sides are in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed, so the displacement speed of the reciprocal displacement is increased. It is possible to improve the effect.

On the other hand, a torsion spring formed as a torsion spring, one leg of which is connected to the extending member 671D and the other leg of which is connected to the base member, which applies a biasing force in a direction to bring the decorative unit 672D closer to the decorative unit 672U. The extension member 671D is provided with the spring SP2, and as the extension member 671D is rotated in the direction of bringing the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other of the torsion spring SP2. Since at least one of the connecting positions of the leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the torsion spring SP
The torsion spring SP2 has the same effect as that of 1. In particular, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction while the opposite sides are in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed in both sides, which is particularly effective. Further, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are at the same height (arranged at the position in the gravity direction), and the contacting position between them is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the gravity direction and the distance between them. When the (retracted position) is the lowest position (or highest position) in the gravity direction, the configurations of the torsion spring SP1 and the torsion spring SP2 are particularly effective.

Since the decoration unit 672U is brought closer to the decoration unit 672D due to the upward displacement in the gravity direction, the decoration unit 6 is moved to the lower side in the gravity direction.
The urging force in the direction of displacing 72U upward in the direction of gravity can be increased (that is, the decoration unit 6
The urging force in the direction in which the decoration unit 672U is displaced upward in the direction of gravity can be weakened as 72U is positioned upward in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced (raised) from the stopped state toward the upper side in the direction of gravity, the displacement (raised) can be smoothly started, and when the raised decoration unit 672U is stopped. The displacement can be surely stopped not only by the action of gravity but also by weakening the biasing force. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage due to the collision with the decoration unit 672D. On the other hand, when stopping the decoration unit 672U displaced (lowered) downward in the direction of gravity, the biasing force is increased to counteract the action of gravity to continue the downward movement. You can As a result, the decoration unit 672U can be reliably stopped.

A torsion spring SP2 that is formed as a torsion spring and has one leg connected to the extending member 671D and the other leg connected to the base member 660 to apply a biasing force in a direction of separating the decoration unit 672D from the decoration unit 672U. Since the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U by the upward displacement in the gravity direction, when the decoration unit 672D is displaced in the direction away from the decoration unit 672U, that is, the decoration unit 672D is moved in the gravity direction. When it is necessary to displace (raise) against the extension member 671
The driving force of the drive motor KM3D required to rotate U can be assisted by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2. Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the extending member 671D is rotated in the direction of bringing the decorative unit 672D closer to the decorative unit 672U, one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the connecting position of the extending member 671D or the other leg of the torsion spring SP2 are connected. Since at least one of the connection positions with the base member 660 is separated from the winding part, the distance from the winding part to the position where the force is applied becomes longer, so that the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U (gravitational direction). The urging force in the upward direction) can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the opposite sides being in contact with each other, the driving force necessary for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed, and thus the displacement speed of the reciprocal displacement Can be increased, and the effect of production can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the rotating member 2812 of the second embodiment will be described. In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the protrusion 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 is formed in a mountain shape that inclines on both sides along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a has been described. The formed protrusion 2812a is formed in a curved hemisphere. The same parts as those of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

64A is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 2812 according to the second embodiment.
64B is a sectional view of the rotating member 2812 taken along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64A. Note that FIG. 64(a) corresponds to FIG. 36(a).

As shown in FIG. 64, the outer reel unit 820 is attached to the hub 812a of the rotating member 2812.
2812a1 that protrudes toward the edge portion 824 side is formed. The protrusion 2812a1 serves as the hub 8
It is formed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of 12a.

The protrusion 2812a1 is curved and formed in a bowl shape. As a result, the inner reel unit 8
When 10 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the pushed out air (wind) collides with the edge portion 824 of the outer reel 821 facing each other, and thereby flows into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. As a result, it is possible to blow away dust (dust) attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust to be attached. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Further, since the protrusion 2812a1 of the second embodiment is curved and formed in a bowl shape, the rigidity thereof can be made higher than that of the protrusion 812a1 of the first embodiment. As a result, the inner reel unit 81
0 or when the outer reel unit 820 is rotationally driven and wobbles and the tips of the protrusions 2812a1 come into contact with the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820, damage to the protrusions 2812a can be suppressed.

Next, the outer reel unit 820 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. In the first embodiment described above, the case where the protrusion 812a1 is formed on the rotating member 812 has been described, but in the second embodiment, the protrusion 3824a is formed on the edge portion 824. In addition,
The same parts as those in the above-described respective embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the third embodiment, and FIG.
) Is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 66(b) is an L part of FIG. 66(a).
It is sectional drawing of the outer reel unit 820 in a XVIb-LXVIb line.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, at the edge 824 on the extension line of the spoke 3822 of the outer reel unit 820, a protrusion 382 protruding toward the rotating member 812 of the inner reel unit 810.
4a is formed. The protrusion 3824a is on the outside of each spoke 3822 (on the outer reel 821 side).
Formed at the end.

The protrusions 3824a are formed so that both sides are inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821.
Therefore, by rotating the outer reel unit 820, air can be pushed out and wind can be generated. Further, the pushed out air (wind) collides with the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 facing the inner reel unit 810 to flow into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. As a result, it is possible to blow away dust (dust) attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust to be attached. As a result, the inner reel 811
It is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Next, the rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. In the first embodiment, the protrusion 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 is the hub 81
The case where the protrusions 4812a formed on the rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment are inclined with respect to the radial direction of the hub 812a has been described, although the case where the protrusions 4812a are formed on both sides along the circumferential direction of 2a has been described. It is formed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

67 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG.
68B is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 4812, and FIG. 68B is the LXVI of FIG. 68A.
It is sectional drawing of the rotating member 4812 in a IIb-LXVIIIb line.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the hub 812a of the rotating member 4812 is formed with a protrusion 4812a1 protruding toward the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit. The protrusions 4812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

The protrusion 4812a1 is formed in a rectangular shape in a side view, and is arranged in the longitudinal direction and the hub 812a.
Is formed so as to intersect with the radial direction of. That is, the protrusion 4812a1 is formed so as to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end of the hub 812a toward the radially inner end thereof. Also,
The inclination direction is formed so as to be inclined toward the normal rotation direction side of the inner reel unit 810.

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. In addition, the pushed out air (wind) has an edge portion 824 of the outer reel 821 facing the air.
When the outer reel 821 collides with the outer reel 821, the inner reel 811 flows into the space between the outer reel 821 and the outer reel 821.
As a result, it is possible to blow away dust (dust) attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust to be attached. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Further, the protrusion 4812a1 of the fourth embodiment is formed so as to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end portion of the hub 812a toward the radially inner end portion thereof, and the inclination direction thereof is the normal rotation of the inner reel unit 810. Since it is on the direction side, it is possible to easily generate wind by the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, since at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to be light-transmissive, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810 in the circumferential direction, Through the outer reel unit 820, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the fluctuation of the symbol accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. In this case, the inner reel unit 810
The protrusion 4812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the outer reel unit 820, that is, the protrusion 4812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 whose rotation frequency is larger than that of the outer reel unit 820. In the effect produced by the rotation of the unit 810, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811.

Next, an inner reel unit 5810 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. In the first embodiment, the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are
The case where the outer reel unit 820 is formed so as to incline toward the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as it extends radially outward has been described. However, in the fifth embodiment, the spokes 5812c of the inner reel unit 5810 extend radially outward. Accordingly, the outer reel unit 820 is formed so as to incline to the side opposite to the edge portion 824. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is a sectional view of a decorative symbol display device 800 according to the fifth embodiment. Figure 70 (a
) Is a partially enlarged view of the annular member 813, and FIG. 70B is LXXb- of FIG. 70A.
It is sectional drawing of the annular member 813 in a LXXb line. In the decorative pattern display device 800 according to the fifth embodiment, the backlight unit 830 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the inner reel unit 5810 in the fifth embodiment is
The spokes 812c of the rotating member 5812 are formed so as to incline toward the side opposite to the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they extend radially outward. Therefore, the outer reel unit 820
The inclining direction of the spokes 822 and the inclining direction of the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are symmetrical.

In addition, the edge portion 8 of the outer reel unit 820 of the annular member 813 of the inner reel unit 5810.
A protrusion 5813a is formed so as to project on the surface facing the 24 (see FIG. 70). Protrusion 5813
A plurality of a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the annular member 813.

The protrusion 5813a is formed in a mountain shape that is inclined on both sides along the circumferential direction of the annular member 813. Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. In addition, the pushed out air (wind) is directed to the edge 8 of the outer reel 821 facing the air.
By colliding with 24, it flows into between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel. As a result, it is possible to blow away dust (dust) attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust to be attached. As a result, the inner reel 8
It is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of 11 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Here, when the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 800, the spaces between them (the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are opposed to each other). Since the air cannot be sufficiently sent to the space), the drive motors KM1 and KM2 that drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 cannot be cooled sufficiently, and the drive motors KM1 and KM2 fail. I was afraid.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the protrusion 5813a can generate a flow of air flowing between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel, so that the flow of the air is increased. Thereby, it is possible to easily inhale air from the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 800.
Therefore, air can be sent to the space between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. As a result, since the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be cooled, it is possible to suppress the failure of the drive motors KM1 and KM2.

Next, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. In the first embodiment, the case where the protrusion 812a1 is formed only on the inner reel unit 810 has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the protrusion 681 is formed.
2a1 and 6824a are formed on the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 71 is a sectional view of a decorative symbol display device 800 according to the sixth embodiment. Fig. 72 (a
) Is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 6812, and FIG. 72( b) is LXXI of FIG. 72( a ).
It is sectional drawing of the rotating member 6812 in the Ib-LXXIIb line. 73(a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 73(b) is LXXIII of FIG. 73(a).
It is sectional drawing of the outer reel unit 820 in the b-LXXIIIb line.

As shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812 is provided with a protrusion 6812a1 protruding toward the edge 824 side of the outer reel unit 820. Protrusion 2812a1
Are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. The protrusion 6812a1 is formed in a mountain shape whose both sides are inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

A protrusion 6824a that protrudes toward the hub 812a side of the rotating member 6812 is formed on the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 6824a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821. The protrusion 6824a is formed in a mountain shape whose both sides are inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821.

The protrusion 6812a1 is formed radially inside the rotating member 6812 with respect to the protrusion 6824a. This can prevent the protrusion 6812a1 from colliding with the protrusion 6824a when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated.

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, the protrusion 6
Wind can be generated by the 812a1 and the protrusion 6824a. That is, the wind can be generated by rotating either the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820.

Further, in this case, the air pushed out to either the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a can be made to collide with the other one of the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a, so that the flow of air can be further regulated. Therefore, the flow of the air flowing between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel can be accelerated. This allows
It is possible to blow away dust (dust) attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust to be attached. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, since the protrusion 8624a and the protrusion 6812a are erected at different positions in the radial direction on the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a, the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810 is erected. Edge 824, whichever is rotated
The wind pressure can be generated by displacing the protrusions 8624a and 6812a in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the ridge and the outer surface of the hub 812a. Therefore, in the effect produced by the rotation of the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811.

An inclined surface is formed on the surfaces of the projection 6812a1 and the projection 6824a that face each other in the radial direction. Thereby, the air resistance when the air flows in the radial direction can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to easily blow off the dust (dust) attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust to be attached.

Furthermore, the circumferential spacing of the protrusions 6812a1 and the circumferential spacing of the protrusions 6824a are formed at different intervals. This makes it possible to shift the position where the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction. Therefore, the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824
By overlapping with a in the radial direction, it is possible to disperse a plurality of positions where the air is compressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation speeds of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 from being slowed down because the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction and the air is compressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77, a rotating member 7533 of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the first electric accessory 520 is symmetrically driven in the same manner is described, but in the seventh embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is driven differently on the left and right. It The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, a detailed description of the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment will be given with reference to FIG. FIG. 74(a) is a front view of the rotating member 7533 according to the seventh embodiment.
b) is a side view of the rotating member 7533.

As shown in FIG. 74, the rotating member 7533 has two plate-shaped bodies formed in a substantially L shape in a side view arranged side by side with a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and has a connecting portion 533a between the opposing ends on the one end side. Are formed by being connected. Further, the plate-shaped members disposed at the left and right ends are substantially L in the side view shape.
The left and right bending angles that are bent into a letter are arranged differently. In the seventh embodiment, the L-shaped bending angle of the plate-shaped body formed on the left side in front view is set to be larger than the L-shaped bending angle of the plate-shaped body formed on the right side in front view.

Therefore, the drive portion 7533d formed by being recessed on the other end side (the left side in FIG. 74(b)) of the rotating member 7533 is formed at different positions in the vertical direction on the left and right. Further, the driving portion 7533d is
The recessed width (vertical width on the left side in FIG. 74(b)) is formed larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 523 formed on the first electric accessory 520, and the protrusion 523 can slide inside the drive portion 7533d. Is formed.

In addition, the width dimension of the rotation member 7533 in the left-right direction when viewed from the front (the dimension between the facing sides of the outer surfaces of the two plate-shaped bodies) is smaller than the dimension between the facing sides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. Is set. Thereby, the rotating member 533 can be arranged between the first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532 facing each other.

Further, in the front view, the rotating member 7533 is set such that the dimension between the opposing left and right plate members is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 7533 (between the two plate members facing each other).

The rotating member 7533 is a rotating shaft 53 that protrudes from the bent portion having a substantially L shape in a side view to the left and right sides.
3c, a protrusion 533b that protrudes from the one end side of the side view substantially L-shape to the left and right sides, and a drive portion 7533d that is formed by being recessed at the other end side of the side view substantially L shape. It is formed in preparation for.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75 to FIG. 76, a drive mode of the first electric accessory 520 of the seventh embodiment will be described. 75(a) to 75(c) are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. 76(a) to 76(c) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520.

75(a) and 76(a), the first state of the first electric accessory 520 is shown in FIG.
) And FIG. 76(c) show the second state of the first electric accessory 520 as shown in FIG. 75(b) and FIG. 76(b).
Shows the states in which the first electric accessory 520 is located between the first state and the second state. 75 and 76, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(a), the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is
When the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is pushed to the front side (left side in FIG. 75(a)) when the main body 531a projects from the inside, the drive portion 7533d is positioned downward.
As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the first state with the protrusion 523 being pushed downward.

In this case, a gap is formed between the inside of the right driving portion 7533d and the upper side of the protrusion 523R of the right wing member 520R (upper side of FIG. 75(a)). This allows the protrusion 523R to move to the driving unit 753.
The center of gravity of the right wing member 520R is switched to the left side in front view with respect to the rotation axis (through hole 521R) while the right wing member 520R is in the first state by being pushed down to a certain position by 3d, and the right wing member 5 is moved.
It is formed by rotating 20R to the first state by its own weight.

Further, the inside of the left driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the protrusion 523L of the left wing member 520L (see FIG. 7).
5(a) lower side), a gap is formed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b), the movable body 53 of the solenoid 531
When the 1b is retracted into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is retracted to the back side (right side in FIG. 75(b)), and the drive section 7533d is lifted upward. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by pushing the protrusion 523 upward.

In this case, as described above, in the first state, a gap is formed between the inside of the left driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the protrusion 523L of the left wing member 520L (lower side of FIG. 75(a)). When the rotating member 533 is rotated (the driving portion 533d is lifted), the engagement between the left driving portion 7533d and the protrusion 523L is delayed by the amount of the clearance. Therefore, the right wing member 520
The start of displacement of R to the second state is made earlier.

Then, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is further retracted into the main body portion 531a through the states shown in FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b), the rotating member 533 is rotated to the rotation end position. Therefore, the drive portion 7533d of the rotating member 533 is lifted upward,
The first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state shown in FIGS. 76(c) and 76(c).

In this case, a gap is formed between the inside of the left driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the protrusion 523R of the right wing member 520R (lower side of FIG. 75(c)). This allows the protrusion 523L to be driven by the drive unit 7.
In the middle of pushing the left wing member 520L to the second state by pushing it up to a certain position by the 533d, the center of gravity of the left wing member 520L is switched to the left side in front view with respect to the rotation shaft (through hole 521L), and the left wing member 520L is moved by its own weight. It is formed by rotating to the first state.

In addition, the inside of the right drive unit 7533d and the lower side of the protrusion 523R of the right wing member 520R (see FIG. 7).
5(a) lower side), a gap is formed.

Therefore, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the first state to the second state, the right wing member 5
20R can be started first, and the left wing member 520L can be displaced to the second state later than the right wing member 520R.

The displacement from the second state shown in FIGS. 75(c) and 76(c) to the first state shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(c) is the above-described displacement from the first state to the second state. However, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 5
20L can be started earlier, and the right wing member 520R can be displaced to the first state before the left wing member 520L.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a case where a game ball enters the winning opening unit 500 of the seventh embodiment will be described. 77(a) and 77(b) are sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

77(a) and 77(b) correspond to the sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 of FIG. 24(b). Further, FIGS. 77A and 77B show a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is being displaced from the second state to the first state.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), the first electric accessory 520 moves from the second state to the first state.
When displaced to the state, the left wing member 520L is started first and the right wing member 52 is
The displacement of 0R to the first state is slower than that of the left wing member 520L.

That is, the state in which only the right wing member 520R of the first electric accessory 520 is opened can be instantaneously formed. At this time, when the game ball is entered from the right wing member 520R side, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is bulged to the front side (lower side in FIG. 77(a)). Be guided to. Therefore, the game ball can be easily collided with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L.

Since the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end portion on the front side, the bulging portion 524
It is easy to bounce the game ball that collides with L to the back side. Therefore, the game ball entered from the right wing member 520R can be easily introduced into the second winning opening 140.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the first state, the bulging portion 5
By making the displacement of the left wing member 520L on the side where 24L is formed on the front side and the right wing member 520R on the opposite side after the left wing member 520L, a game that is entered during the displacement to the first state The ball can be smoothly sent to the second winning opening 140.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the timing at which one of the pair of blade members 520L and 520R (one of the blade members 520L and 520R) is arranged at a position forming a closed state and the other blade member. Since the timing of (the other of the wing members 520L, 520R) being arranged at the position forming the closed state is different, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (the side surface 526).
(L, 526R), it is difficult to pinch the game ball between them, and the pair of wing members 520L, 52
The facing interval of 0R can be narrowed. Therefore, the space required for disposing the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be suppressed.

Next, the rotating member 8533 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 82. In the above-described first embodiment, the second projection 532 that restricts the entry of the game ball into the sliding member 532.
Although the case where c is formed has been described, in the eighth embodiment, the rotation member 8533 is formed with the second projection 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 8530 according to the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 78, the drive unit 8530 of the eighth embodiment includes a solenoid 531 and
A sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 8533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and a first case in which the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 are displaceably arranged inside. A member 534 and a second case member 536 attached to the back surface side of the first case member 534 are mainly provided and formed.

The sliding member 8532 is formed in a substantially E shape in a top view, and has a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction and two first connecting portions 532 protruding from the left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a to the front side. Protrusion 53
2b and a third protrusion 532e that is located in the middle of the two first protrusions 532b and that protrudes from the front side are mainly formed.

The dimension of the sliding member 8532 in the left-right direction of the connecting portion 532a is determined by the first case member 53.
It is formed smaller than the dimension of the inner peripheral surface of No. 4 facing each other in the left-right direction. Accordingly, the sliding member 8532 can be housed and arranged inside the first case member 534.

The third protrusion 8532e is located above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533, which will be described later, so that the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the second state can be restricted. That is, the lower end surface of the third protrusion 8532e is formed above the connecting portion 533a when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state.

The rotating member 8533 is formed by arranging two plate-like members formed in a substantially L shape in a side view in the left-right direction with a predetermined width therebetween and connecting the opposing ends on one end side with a connecting portion 533a. It The gap between the two plate-shaped members of the rotating member 8533 facing each other is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 8533 (between the two plate-shaped members facing each other).

In addition, the width dimension in the left-right direction of the rotating member 8533 (dimension between the facing sides of the outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is set smaller than the dimension between the facing sides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. It Accordingly, the rotating member 8533 can be arranged between the first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532.

The rotating member 8533 includes a rotating shaft 53 that protrudes to the left and right in the left and right directions from a bent portion that is substantially L-shaped in a side view.
3c, a protrusion 533b protruding from both ends in the left-right direction from one end of the side view substantially L-shaped, and a drive portion 533d formed by being recessed at the other end of the side view substantially L-shaped, The second projection 8533e is provided mainly so as to project from the center position in the left-right direction of the portion 533a to the front side.

The second protrusion 8533e is formed in a rod shape extending to the front side, and includes a standing wall 8533e1 that is bent downward and erected at the protruding tip end portion thereof. The standing wall 8533e1 is formed to be curved in a convex shape toward the front side in a side view, and its bending axis is set coaxially with the axis of the rotating member 8533.

Next, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81.
79(a) and 79(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. 80A and 80B show a first electric accessory 520 and a drive unit 530.
FIG. 81(a) and 81(b) are sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

79 and 80 show a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are seen transparently. 79(a), 80(a) and 81(a), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state is shown in FIG. 79(b), 80(b) and 81. (
In b), the state where the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state is illustrated. Furthermore, FIG.
1(a) and FIG. 81(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is replaced by the main body portion 531.
In the state where the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is protruded from the front side (see FIG. 79(a)).
It is pushed to the left side to bring the drive unit 533d to the lower position. This makes the first
The electric accessory 520 is brought into the first state in which the protrusion 523 is pushed downward.

Further, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body portion 531a, the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is located below. In this case, the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 82(a)) from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the standing wall 8
533e1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b and being sent to the second case member 535.

Further, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body portion 531a, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is located above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is operated to be displaced to the second state, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 is restricted by the third protrusion 8532e.

In other words, the driving force of the drive means (solenoid 531) is applied to the pair of wing members 520L, 52.
The transmission mechanism includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting to 0R. The transmission mechanism is driven by the driving force (solenoid 531) to open slide position (position shown in FIG. 79(b)) and close slide position (position shown in FIG. 79(a)). And a pair of wing members 520L that are slid between the sliding member 8532 and the sliding member 8532 that is slid to the open slide position to be rotated to the open rotation position.
, 520R are opened and the sliding member 8532 is slid to the closed slide position to be rotated to the closed rotation position so that at least the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be closed, and the standing wall 8533e1 is provided. Are arranged on the rotating member 8533, and when the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the open rotation position, the standing wall 8533e1 is arranged at the allowance position, and when the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the closing rotation position, the standing wall 8533e1 is arranged. Are arranged in the regulation position, the sliding member 8532 is arranged in the closing slide position, and the rotating member 853 is arranged.
In the state where 3 is arranged in the closed rotation position, the rotation of the rotation member 8533 to the open rotation position is restricted by the engagement of the rotation member 8533 and the sliding member 8532. It is possible to easily control illegal entry into the winning opening.

That is, from the state in which the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed, for example, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is illegally forcibly opened from the outside, or the rotating member 8533 is directly operated to operate the rotating member. Even when the 8533 is rotated to the open position, the rotation member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 are engaged with each other, so that the rotation of the rotation member 8533 to the open rotation position is restricted. Therefore, the standing wall 8533e1 is restricted. Can be maintained in position (ie standing wall 8
It is possible to prevent the 533e1 from being forcibly displaced from the outside to the allowable position. as a result,
It is possible to regulate that the game ball is illegally entered into the entrance by the standing wall 8533e1.

In addition, the third protrusion 8532 projected from the sliding member 8532 (or the rotating member 8533).
e and the sliding member 8532 (or the rotating member 8533) so that the third protrusion 8532e can be engaged with
), the third protrusion 8532e is projected along the direction of the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532, so that the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 is utilized.
Engagement and disengagement of the third protrusion 8532e and the connecting portion 533a can be switched, and the structure can be simplified.

The engaging portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533) with which the third protrusion 8532e can abut, and a hole or a recess (where the third protrusion 8532e can be inserted). It may be a hole formed in one of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533 or a concave portion formed in a recess). That is, it is sufficient that the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position can be restricted by the third protrusion 8532e contacting the connecting portion 533a. In this case, it is preferable that the connecting portion 533a be a hole or a recess. The third protrusion 8532e is the connecting portion 5.
The space required for disposing the third protrusion 8532e can be suppressed by the amount of the third protrusion 8532e that is inserted into the connecting portion 533a, and the third protrusion 8532 can be inserted into the connecting portion 533a.
This is because e can be shielded from the outside, and it is difficult to illegally access the third protrusion 8532e from the outside.

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is retracted inside the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is retracted to the back side (right side in FIG. 79(b)), and the drive unit 533d is moved upward. Is displaced. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 has the protrusion 533.
The second state in which b is pushed up is set.

Further, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled inside the main body portion 531a, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is located on the rear surface side of the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, the restriction on the rotation of the rotating member 8533 is released. as a result,
By rotating the rotating member 8533, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced.

Therefore, the drive portion 533d of the rotation member 8533 rotates toward the closed rotation position and the open side contact portion 8533d1 that abuts and opens the pair of wing members 520L and 520R when rotated toward the open rotation position. Since the closing side contact portion 8533d2 that abuts and closes the pair of wing members 520L and 520R when being performed, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members 520L and 520R from being forcibly opened from the outside and rotate. It is possible to make unauthorized access to the member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside difficult.

That is, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening, the closing side contact portion 8533d2 of the rotating member 8533 is pressed by the wing members 520L and 520R, and the rotating member 8533 is moved to the open rotation position. I try to rotate towards. In this case, according to the present invention, the rotation of the rotary member 8533 to the open rotation position can be restricted by the engagement between the rotary member 8533 and the sliding member 8532. Contact part 8
It can be regulated by 533d2. That is, the wing member can be restrained from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members 520L and 520R from being forcibly opened from the outside, and it is difficult to make an unauthorized access to the rotating member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside.

When the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled inside the main body portion 531a, the rotation member 8533 is rotated, so that the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 is rotated from the tip of the upright wall 8533e1. The distance dimension L7 to (see FIG. 82(b)) is made larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 140 is placed in the standing portion 534.
It is possible to roll the upper end surface of b and send the ball to the second case member 535.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a case where the first electric accessory 520 is damaged will be described. Fig. 82
FIG. 82A and FIG. 82B are sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. Note that FIG. 82(a)
82(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. In addition, FIG. 14A illustrates a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, and FIG. 14B illustrates a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. ..

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), the protrusions 534L and 534R of the first electric accessory 520 are broken from the base end due to fraudulent acts, deterioration over time, etc., and the first electric accessory 520 becomes the first When the state is changed to the second state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body portion 531a, so that the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned below. It Therefore, the standing wall 8533e1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b and being sent to the second case member 535.

Therefore, the state where the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is closed or the pair of wing members 520
Since the arrangement of the standing wall 8533e1 can be maintained at the regulation position in a state where the L and 520R are opened from the outside, the standing wall 8533e1 can be suppressed from being displaced to the allowable position. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from being illegally entered into the second winning opening 140.

That is, the state in which the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed or the pair of wing members 520L
, 520R opened from the outside, the sliding member 8532 is operated to move the standing wall 853.
The first case member 53 from the standing tip of 3e1 (the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 20B)).
The distance dimension L6 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed in 4 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the first electric accessory 520 may cause the second winning opening 1
Even if it is possible to send the game ball to 40, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 140 and rolling. Therefore, it is possible to stop the rolling of the game ball by colliding the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 against the standing wall 8533e1 of the sliding member 8532. As a result, when the first electric auditors product 520 is brought into the second state (the game ball can be sent to the second winning port 140) by the player's cheating, the game ball is illegally sent to the second winning port 140. It is possible to easily regulate what is entered.

Further, in this case, since the standing wall 8533e1 that makes it impossible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 140 can be formed continuously with the sliding member 8532 that displaces the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, the second There is no need for a separate member for restricting illegal entry into the winning opening 140. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and the increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the second projection 8533e and the second thereof that regulate the entry of the game ball
Since the third protrusion 8532e that suppresses the displacement of the protrusion is integrally formed with the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532, the number of parts of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced.

Next, the drive unit 9530 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 87. In the eighth embodiment, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is the main body portion 531.
It has been described that the movement of the first electric accessory 520 is restricted when the first electric accessory 520 is extended.
In the ninth embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is movable when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body portion 531a. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 9530 according to the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, the drive unit 8530 of the ninth embodiment includes a solenoid 531 and
A sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 9533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and a first case in which the rotating member 9533 and the sliding member 8532 are displaceably arranged inside. A member 534 and a second case member 536 attached to the back surface side of the first case member 534 are mainly provided and formed.

The rotating member 9533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies formed in a substantially L shape in a side view in parallel with a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and connecting the opposing ends on one end side with a connecting portion 533a. It The gap between the two plate-shaped members of the rotating member 9533 facing each other is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 9533 (between the two plate-shaped members facing each other).

Further, the width dimension in the left-right direction of the rotating member 9533 (dimension between the facing sides of the outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is set smaller than the dimension between the facing sides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. It With this, the rotating member 9533 can be arranged between the first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532.

The rotating member 9533 is a rotating shaft 53 that protrudes to the left and right in the left and right directions from a bent portion that is substantially L-shaped in side view.
3c, a protrusion 533b that protrudes from the one end side end of the side view substantially L shape to both left and right directions, a projecting portion 9533d that protrudes to the front side at the other end side end of the side view substantially L shape, and a connecting portion. The second protrusion 8533e is provided mainly so as to protrude from the center position in the left-right direction of the 533a to the front side.

The protruding portion 9533d is formed by protruding from the end portion on the front side, and its upper portion (see FIG.
a) Upper part) The side face is set to a length with which the projections 523L and 523R of the wing members 520L and 520R can come into contact.

Next, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86.
84A and 84B are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. 85(a) and 85(b) show a first electric accessory 520 and a drive unit 530.
FIG. 86(a) and 86(b) are sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

84 and 85 show a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are seen transparently. Further, in FIGS. 84(a), 85(a) and 86(a), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state is shown in FIGS. 84(b), 85(b) and 86. (
In b), the state where the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state is illustrated. Furthermore, FIG.
6(a) and FIG. 86(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is replaced by the main body portion 531.
When the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is projected from the front side (see FIG. 84(a)).
It is pushed to the left side, and the protruding portion 9533f is positioned below. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the first state in which the protrusion 523 is pushed downward.

In the ninth embodiment, an urging spring (not shown) is arranged on the rotating shaft of the first electric accessory 520, and the urging force of the urging spring causes the first electric accessory 520 to move toward the first state. A biasing force that rotationally displaces is constantly applied. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the second state by a force other than the drive of the solenoid 531 (for example, the swing of the pachinko machine), it is possible to prevent the first electric accessory 520 from remaining in the second state.

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is retracted inside the main body portion 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is retracted to the back side (right side in FIG. 79(b)) and the protruding portion 9533f is moved upward. Is displaced to. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 has the projection 53
3b is in the second state in which it is pushed upward.

In this case, the protruding portion 9533f and the projections 523L and 523R of the first electric accessory 520 are always in contact with each other, so that the first electric accessory 520 can be maintained in the second state.

In addition, by moving the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from the main body portion 531a and displacing the protruding portion 9533f downward from the second state, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring. It is displaced to the 1 state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a case where the first electric auditors product 520 is illegally operated will be described. 87(a) and 87(b) are sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. Note that FIG.
7(a) and FIG. 87(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Also, in FIG. 87(a), the first
In the state in which the electric power accessory 520 is in the first state, the first electric power accessory 520 is in the second state in FIG. 87(b).
The respective states are shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body portion 531a, the first electric accessory 520 is operated by the player's cheating. When the first state is changed to the second state, only the first electric accessory 520 is rotationally displaced.

Therefore, the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second projection 8533e is positioned below, so that the gaming ball rolls on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b by the standing wall 8533e1.
It is possible to prevent the ball from being delivered to the case member 535.

This (in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a)
In this case, as described above, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is located above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the standing wall 8533e1. As a result, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage to the store side due to the illegal act of the player.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the second projection 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball and the third projection 8532e that suppresses the displacement of the second projection are the rotation member 9533 and the sliding member 8.
Since the driving unit 9530 is integrally formed with the driving unit 532, the number of parts of the driving unit 9530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the first electric auditors product 520 from being broken by a player's cheating. As a result, it is possible to suppress the loss on the store side due to the cheating by the player.

That is, in the ninth embodiment, an urging spring that urges the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closing direction is provided, and the rotating member 9533 rotates the pair of wing members 5 when being rotated toward the open rotation position.
20L, 520R is provided with a protruding portion 9533f that is opened, and when the rotation member 9533 is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are closed by the urging force of the urging spring. When the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is forcibly released from the outside illegally, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are not brought into contact with the rotating member 9533, and the external force by such forced opening acts on the rotating member 9533. Can be avoided. As a result, damage to the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, the rotating member 9533, or the sliding member 8532 can be suppressed.

The biasing means for constantly applying the biasing force for rotationally displacing the first electric accessory 520 to the first state side is a spring (torsion) for biasing the pair of wing members 520L, 520R in the closing direction by the elastic recovery force. Examples thereof include not only springs and coil springs, but also magnets that urge the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closing direction by the attraction force.

Next, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is displaced non-linearly small (or large) in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member 670, but in the tenth embodiment, the rotating member 10678 is displaced. By doing so, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is changed.
The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the displacement member 10670 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. 88A is a front view of the displacement member 10670 according to the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 88B is a side view of the displacement member 10670. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 10670.

As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment is the extension member 6
71, the extension member 10671 arranged to face the extension member 671, the decoration unit 672 connected to the extension member 10671 and the extension member 671, and the extension member in a rotatable state. The rotary member 10678 provided is mainly provided.

The extending member 10671 is formed in a substantially L shape in a front view, has a shaft support hole 671a penetrating in a left-right direction in a front view at an end portion on the long side, and protrudes left and right outside at a substantially central position in the long side on the long side. The connecting protrusion 671b and the rotating shaft 10671e that is formed in a cylindrical shape on the shaft support hole 671a side of the connecting protrusion 671b are mainly provided.

The rotating member 10678 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a side view, and the extending member 10671 is arranged such that the longitudinal direction thereof intersects the longitudinal direction on the longitudinal side of the extending member 10671 at a right angle in a side view.
It is installed in.

The rotary member 10678 has a shaft support hole 10678a penetrating in the left-right direction and a through hole 10678 formed in one end in the longitudinal direction so as to penetrate in the circumferential direction of the shaft support hole 10671a of the extending member 10671.
b, and an inclined surface 10678c formed by cutting out a side surface on the other end side in the longitudinal direction.

The shaft support hole 10678a is a hole into which the rotary shaft 10671e of the extending member 10671 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotary shaft 10671e. Therefore, the rotating shaft 1067
By inserting 1e into the shaft support hole 10677a and screwing it to the rotating shaft 10671e, the rotating member 10678 can be rotatably disposed on the extending member 10671.

The through hole 10678b is a hole into which the torsion spring SP2 is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2.

Next, the operation of the rotating member 10678 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91.
FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 91(a) and 91(b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit 600L in the range XCI of FIG. 90.

Note that FIG. 90 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, FIG. 91(a) and FIG.
FIG. 91(b) shows a state in which the displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced.
Then, the cross section of the state where the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 contact each other is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 90, in the vertical displacement unit 600L in the tenth embodiment, the displacement member 670 is arranged on the upper side and the displacement member 10670 is arranged on the lower side, and the axes of the displacement members 670, 10670 are arranged. The shaft of the support hole 671a is arranged coaxially. That is, in the first embodiment, the lower displacement member 670 of the pair of displacement members 670 arranged upside down is changed to the displacement member 10670. The drive means for the displacement member 10670 is the same as the drive means for the displacement member 670 of the first embodiment, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 91, when the decoration units 672 of the displacement members 670 and 10670 disposed above and below are displaced in the directions toward each other, the extension members 671 and 10671 are brought closer to each other.

In the state where the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are in contact with each other as shown in FIG. 91B, the inclined surface 10678c of the rotating member 10678 is in contact with the side surface of the extending member 671. This allows
When the inclined surface 10678c is substantially parallel to the side surface of the extending member 671, the rotating member 1067 is provided.
8 is rotated about the shaft supporting hole 10678a (in FIG. 91(b), the rotating member 10678 is rotated counterclockwise about the shaft supporting hole 10678a).

Therefore, the through hole 10678b formed on the opposite side of the inclined surface 10678c and the shaft supporting hole 10678a is also rotated. By displacing the position of the through hole 10678b, the position where the through hole 10678b engages with the torsion spring SP2 is changed.

In the ninth embodiment, the position of the through hole 10678b is displaced from the end side of the torsion spring SP2 to the base end side. Therefore, the biasing force acting on the displacement member 10670 from the torsion spring SP2 can be increased.

Therefore, when the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are brought into contact with each other, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 that acts on the displacement member 10670 disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L can be increased. As a result, when the displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced while the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are in contact with each other, the contact of the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 can be prevented from separating.

Further, since the extending member 10671 on which the rotating member 10678 is disposed is the driven side (the side operated via the connecting rod 681) of the drive means 680 that drives the displacement member 10670,
When the driving force transmitted from the driving motor KM3 is smaller than that on the driving side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large-diameter gear 683), the displacement of the rotating member 10678 causes the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2. Can be increased to compensate for the insufficient driving force. As a result, it is possible to prevent the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 from coming into contact with each other.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92 to FIG. 94, the vertical displacement unit 11600 of the eleventh embodiment.
L will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force is transmitted from the left and right sides of the displacement member 670 has been described, but in the eleventh embodiment, the driving force is transmitted from only one side of the displacement member 11670. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals,
The description is omitted.

Further, in FIGS. 92 to 94, as in FIGS. 61 to 63, the vertical displacement unit 600L is used.
U is added to the end of the reference numerals of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side of the above and the driving means for driving the displacement member 670, and the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side of the vertical displacement unit 600L.
Also, a description will be given by adding a symbol D to the end of the symbol of the driving means that drives the displacement member 670.

The operation of the vertical displacement unit 11600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. 92 to 94 are schematic diagrams of the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment. 92 to 94, transition states of the displacement member 11670 are sequentially illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the vertical displacement unit 11600L according to the eleventh embodiment, the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is arranged on only one side. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the pair of extending members 671 symmetrically arranged on the displacement member 670 are provided in the eleventh embodiment.
The extending member 671 is provided in only one of them.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the driving means 680 is arranged on the driving side (the projection 683b of the large diameter gear 683).
Is formed only on the side), and the extending member 671 is connected to the driving means on the driving side. Therefore, the extending members 671 of the displacement member 11670 arranged in a pair in the vertical displacement unit 11600L are arranged upside down in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 93, when the vertically arranged displacement members 11670 are displaced, the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 11600L.

As shown in FIG. 94, by displacing the two in the same direction from the state of FIG. 93, it is possible to displace the decorative units 672 in the vertical direction with the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 in contact with each other.

In the case of the eleventh embodiment, since the extending member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is arranged on one side, the drive of the decorative unit 672 on the opposite side to the driving side is slowed, and a gap may be formed between the two decorative units 672. However, since the extending member 671 is disposed on the left and right opposite sides in the vertical direction, the end of the one decoration unit 672 on the side opposite to the driving side is arranged on the other decoration unit 67.
It can be pushed at the drive end of 2. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672.

In this case, it is preferable to delay the driving timing of the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672. By delaying the driving timing of the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672.

More specifically, the drive timing of the displacement member 11670 on the side opposite to the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672 is advanced, so that the drive-side end of the decoration unit 672 that was driven first is driven later. The end of 672 opposite the drive side can be extruded. On the other hand, the end of the decoration unit 672 that is driven first is opposite to the drive side of the decoration unit 672 that is driven later, with a stronger force. As a result, when the two displacement members 11670 are displaced while the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672.

Further, in the case of the eleventh embodiment, the displacement member 11670 (extension member 671) can be easily deformed by setting the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 on one side. Therefore, the driving timing of the displacement member 11670 on the opposite side to the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672 is accelerated, so that the displacement members 11670 (extending members 671) are deformed and the elastic force when the displacement returns. By utilizing, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the winning opening unit 500 of the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the front base 511 and the back base 51 of the winning opening unit 500.
Although the case where the thickness of 2 is formed to be substantially constant has been described, in the eleventh embodiment, the front base 51 is formed.
1 and the thickness of the back base 512 are partially changed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 95(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 according to the twelfth embodiment.
5B is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95A. In addition, in FIG. 95(a), the front base 511 is transparently illustrated, and in FIG. 95(b), the front base 511 is opaque. In addition, FIG.
24B, the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is shown by a chain double-dashed line together with the reference numeral of the virtual line KS1 as in FIG. Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction thereof is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIG. 95, the front base 511 is formed such that the thickness in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 95(b)) is partially different on the left and right with the second winning opening 140 interposed therebetween. That is, the second
A front side bulging portion 12511f that bulges rearward is provided on the upper right side of the winning opening 140.

In addition, the back surface base 512 is formed such that the thickness in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 95(b)) is partially different between the left and right sides with the second winning opening 140 interposed therebetween. That is, the back side bulging portion 12512d that bulges to the back side is provided on the upper left side of the second winning opening 140.

The front side bulging portion 12511f and the back side bulging portion 12512d are provided with a pair of wing members 520L,
It is formed outside the displacement area of 520R. Thereby, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R
Collision between the front side bulging portion 12511f and the back side bulging portion 12512d is suppressed.

Further, the front side bulging portion 12511f and the back side bulging portion 12512d have the ends thereof in the left-right direction (FIG. Direction) located outside. As a result, the game ball that may flow down from the upstream side of the first electric accessory 520 and be sent to the side surfaces 526L and 526R can be reliably collided with the front side bulging portion 12511f and the back side bulging portion 12512d. You can

The front side bulging portion 12511f is formed on a side surface facing the formation position of the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. In other words, the front side bulging portion 12511f is formed on the side surface located in the front-rear direction opposite to the front-rear direction forming position of the bulging portion 524R.

On the other hand, the back side bulging portion 12512d is formed on the side surface facing the formation position of the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction. In other words, the back side bulging portion 12512d is formed on the side surface located in the front-rear direction opposite to the formation position of the bulging portion 524L in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the game ball that flows down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 has the front side bulging portion 1251.
It can be guided to the back side by colliding with 1f. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is delivered to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, it can be brought close to the back side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R can be easily collided with the bulging portion 524R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can be collided with the back side bulging portion 12512d and guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is delivered to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, it can be brought close to the front side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L can be easily collided with the bulging portion 524L.

Therefore, the game ball guided (rolled) along the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L and 526R) is swollen with the game ball 52.
By contacting the 4L and 524R, it is possible to surely bias the game ball. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning opening 140, and it is possible to suppress ball clogging.

In addition, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one of the wing members (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) reaches the guide surface of the one of the wing members (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R) The game ball can be brought into contact with the protruding portion of the other wing member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the guide surface of the one wing member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) from passing through the guide surface of the other wing member. As a result, the player's interest can be improved by allowing the game ball to enter the ball entrance.

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, the game ball sent to the wing members 520L and 520R is caused to collide with the front side bulging portion 12511f and the back side bulging portion 12512d, so that the ball feeding speed can be reduced. Therefore, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the wing members 520L, 520R can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the impact when the bumps 524L and 524R collide, and it is possible to prevent the blade members 520L and 520R from being damaged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the winning opening unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The winning opening unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment is provided with a protrusion protruding between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 of the first embodiment facing each other. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 96(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 according to the thirteenth embodiment.
6B is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along line XCVIb-XCVIb in FIG. 96A. It should be noted that in FIG. 96(a), the front base 511 is shown transparently, and in FIG. 96(b), the front base 511 is shown opaque. Also, FIG.
In (b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is shown by a chain double-dashed line together with the reference numeral of the virtual line KS1 as in FIG. 24(b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction thereof is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIG. 96, the front base 511 is located on the left side of the second winning opening 140 and is located on the back base 51.
A protrusion 13511g protruding to the second side is formed. In addition, the back base 512 has a protrusion 13512e formed on the right side of the second winning opening 140 and protruding toward the front base 511.

The protrusion 13511g and the protrusion 13512e are formed outside the displacement region of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. As a result, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R and the protrusion 13511
Collision between g and the protrusion 13512e is suppressed.

The protrusion 13511g is formed on the side surface on the same side as the formation position of the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the protrusion 13512e is the bulge portion 524L of the left wing member 520L.
Is formed on the side surface facing the formation position in the front-back direction.

Thereby, the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 can be collided with the projection 13511g and guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is delivered to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball can be brought close to the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball that flows down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 to collide with the bulging portion 524R when being sent to the side surface 526R. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 520R from being damaged.

In addition, the game ball sent from the right side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526R of the wing member 520R does not collide with the projection 13511g formed above the wing member 520R and the side surface 52.
It will be sent to 6R. The game ball in this case can be guided to the back side by colliding with the bulging portion 524R when rolling the side surface 526R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the left upper side of the first electric accessory 520 can be guided to the back side by colliding with the protrusion 13512e. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down on the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is sent to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball can be moved to the back side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that flows down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 from colliding with the bulging portion 524L when being sent to the side surface 526L. As a result, it is possible to prevent the blade member 520L from being damaged.

In addition, the game ball sent from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526L of the wing member 520L does not collide with the projection 13512e formed above the wing member 520L and the side surface 52.
It will be sent to 6L. The game ball in this case can be guided to the front side by colliding with the bulging portion 524L when rolling the side surface 526L.

Therefore, the game ball guided (rolled) along the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L and 526R) is swollen with the game ball 52.
By contacting the 4L and 524R, it is possible to surely bias the game ball. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning opening 140, and it is possible to suppress ball clogging.

In addition, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one of the wing members (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) reaches the guide surface of the one of the wing members (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R) The game ball can be brought into contact with the protruding portion of the other wing member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the guide surface of the one wing member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) from passing through the guide surface of the other wing member. As a result, the player's interest can be improved by allowing the game ball to enter the ball entrance.

Furthermore, since the projection 13511g and the projection 13512e can reduce the number of game balls that collide with the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the wing members 520L and 520R, the wing member 520 can be reduced.
The durability of L and 520R can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, the wing members 14520L, 145 of the fourteenth embodiment.
20R (first variable device 14520) will be described. Wing member 1452 of the fourteenth embodiment
The 0L and 14520R are formed such that the bulged portions 524L and 524R have different width dimensions in the front-rear direction from the first embodiment. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

97(a) is a perspective front view of the left wing member 520L in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG.
FIG. 7B is a perspective front view of the right wing member 520R. FIG. 98(a) shows the winning opening unit 5
98 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 00, and FIG. 98(b) is XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 98(a).
FIG. 98C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member 520L taken along the line, and FIG. 98C is an XC view of FIG. 98B.
It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the right wing member 520R in a VIIIc-XCVIIIc line.

Note that, in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the perspective direction in the left-right direction is shown as left-right opposite. The cross-sectional view of FIG. 98(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 24(b). In FIG. 98(a), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 14526L, 14526R is shown by a chain double-dashed line together with the reference numeral of the virtual line KS1 as in FIG. 24(b). Furthermore, the virtual line K
The front direction of S1 is shown by the arrow F, and the back direction is shown by the arrow B.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the left wing member 14520L is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. Left wing member 14520
L is a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction and a through hole 521L at the lower end portion in the gravity direction.
A recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the circumference, a protrusion 523L protruding from the vicinity of the through hole 521L to the back side, and a recess 522L in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end surface on the side of the through hole 521L. 525L and a pair of blade members 14520L and 14520R in the closed state.
Side surface 14526L of the surface facing each other and the bulging portion 14 protrudingly formed on the side surface 14526L.
524L and mainly formed.

The side surface 14526L includes an inclined surface 14526L1 that is formed to incline upward from a substantially central position in the front-rear direction toward the back surface and a smooth surface 1452 that is formed from a substantially central position in the front-rear direction to the front surface side.
6L2 and.

The inclined surface 14526L1 is formed so as to incline downward from the back surface side (left side in FIG. 98(b)) toward the smooth surface 14526L2 side. Thereby, among the game balls sent to the side surface 14256L, the game balls sent to the inclined surface 14526L1 are smoothed by the downward inclination.
You can guide to the 2L2 side.

The bulging portion 14524L is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526L1 (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 98(b)). The width dimension of the bulging portion 14524L in the front-rear direction is the wing member 1452.
It is formed to be smaller than half the width in the front-rear direction of 0L. That is, the width of the bulging portion 15254L in the front-rear direction is smaller than the width of the bulging portion 14524L in the front-rear direction.

As described above, since the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526L1 among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L is rolled on the smooth surface 14526L2 side,
It is possible to reduce the probability that the game ball rolling on the side surface 14526L collides with the bulging portion 14524L.

On the other hand, the right wing member 14520R is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The right wing member 14520R includes a through hole 521R penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end in the direction of gravity, a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521R, and a vicinity of the through hole 521R to the back side. 523R protruding from the
And a recessed portion 525R recessed in the axial direction of the through hole 521R on the end surface on the side of the through hole 521R,
Side surfaces 1452 of the opposed surfaces of the pair of wing members 14520L and 14520R in the closed state.
6R and a bulging portion 14524R protrudingly formed on the side surface 14526R thereof.

The side surface 14526R includes an inclined surface 14526R1 that is formed to incline upward from a substantially central position in the front-rear direction and a smooth surface 1452 that is formed from a substantially central position in the front-rear direction to the front side.
6R2.

The inclined surface 14526R1 is formed to incline downward from the back surface side (the right side in FIG. 98(c)) toward the smooth surface 14526R2 side. Thereby, among the game balls sent to the side surface 14256R, the game balls sent to the inclined surface 14526R1 are smoothed by the downward inclination.
You can guide to the 2R2 side.

Further, the bulging portion 14524R is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526R1 (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 98(b)). The width dimension of the bulging portion 14524L in the front-rear direction is the wing member 1452.
It is formed to be larger than half the width in the front-rear direction of 0L. That is, the width in the front-rear direction of the inclined surface 14526R1 is made larger than the width in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 14524L. Therefore, the left wing member 1
The bulging portion 1 of the right wing member 14520R is wider than the width of the bulging portion 14524L of the 4520L in the front-rear direction.
The width of the 4524R in the front-rear direction is formed larger.

As described above, since the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526R1 among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526R of the right wing member 14520R is rolled on the smooth surface 14526R2 side,
The probability that the game ball rolling on the side surface 14526R collides with the bulging portion 14524R can be reduced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment is formed in such a manner that the game balls flow down from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 and are easily sent to the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the open wing members 520L, 520R. It More specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pair of wing members 520L,
The first through gate 66 for opening the 520R is arranged on the left side of the center frame 86, and is configured to hit the game ball toward the left side of the center frame 86 during the time saving and the probability change. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game board 13 flows down the left side of the game board 13 as a whole, and is sent to the side surfaces 14526L, 14526R from the left side of the first variable device 14520 (a pair of wing members 14520L, 14520R). It will be easier.

Therefore, compared to the right wing member 14520R, the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L
There was a problem that a lot of game balls were sent, the bulging portion 14524L of the left wing member 14520L was quickly worn, and the left wing member 14520L was easily broken.

In contrast, in the fourteenth embodiment, the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R have inclined surfaces 1452.
6L1, 14526R1 and the inclined surfaces 14526L1, 14526R1
The bulging portions 14524L and 14524R are formed on the bulging portion 14 on the side where many game balls are fed.
Since the 524L and 14524R are formed to be small in the front-rear direction, the wing member 1 on the side where a large number of balls are thrown
The bulging portion 1 is reduced by reducing the probability that the game ball collides with the bulging portion 14524L of the 4520L.
It is possible to prevent the wear of the 4524L from being accelerated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing members 14520L and 14520R on the side on which a large number of game balls are fed from being easily broken.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, the variable winning device 150 according to the fifteenth embodiment.
65 will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the case where the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed on the pair of wing members 520L and 520R has been described, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the bulging portions 15065b and 15065c are formed on the variable winning a prize device 65. To be done. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 99(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG.
) Is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. 99. Figure 100
(A) is a partial enlarged view of the game board 13, and FIG. 100(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line Cb-Cb in FIG. 100(a).

Note that FIG. 99(a) and FIG. 100(a) correspond to the partially enlarged view of FIG. In addition, FIG. 99 illustrates the closed state of the variable winning device 15065, and FIG. 100 illustrates the open state of the variable winning device 15065. Further, in FIG. 100(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surface 15065a is shown by a chain double-dashed line together with the reference numeral of the virtual line KS1 as in FIG. 24(b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction thereof is shown by an arrow B.

The closed state of the variable winning device 15065 means that the variable winning device 15 is formed in a plate state.
The plane of 065 is positioned substantially parallel to the plane on the front side of the game board 13, and the game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. On the other hand, the open state of the variable winning device 15065 means that the plane of the variable winning device 15065 is positioned substantially orthogonal to the plane of the front side of the game board 13, and the game ball flowing down the game area has a specific winning opening (large opening opening). ) It is a state that it is possible to enter the ball 65a.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the variable winning device 15065 is formed in a plate-like body that is long in the left and right, and is rotatably arranged with respect to the game board 13 with one end on the back side as an axis. Also,
The variable winning device 15065 is connected to a driving device (not shown) on the back side, and by applying a driving force to the driving device, the variable winning device 15065 can be displaced between a closed position and an open position. To be done.

Further, in the variable winning device 15065, two bulging portions 15065b and 15065c are formed to project on the side surface 15065a on the upper surface side in the opened state. Furthermore, the variable winning device 1506
The side surface 15065a of No. 5 is formed to be inclined downward from both left and right sides toward the center side. As a result, the game ball sent to the side surface 15065a can be rolled toward the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a to enter the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

The bulging portion 15065b is located on the left side of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a when viewed from the front, and is formed by being connected to the end surface on the front side in the open state (state of FIG. 100(b)). The bulging portion 15065c is located on the right side of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a in front view, and is formed by being connected to the end surface on the back side in the alveolar state (state of FIG. 100(b)).

That is, the bulging portion 15065b and the bulging portion 15065c are the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.
It is formed on both the left and right sides with the pinch in between and at different positions in the front-back direction. As a result, when the game balls are delivered to the left and right sides of the variable winning device 15065 in the open state, it is possible to prevent the game balls from colliding in front of the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a and bouncing to the left and right sides. ..

More specifically, the game ball sent to the left side of the side surface 15065a when viewed from the front collides with the bulging portion 15065b and is guided to the back side when rolled toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a side. It On the other hand, the game ball sent to the right side of the side surface 15065a in front view collides with the bulging portion 15065c and is guided to the front side when rolling toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a side.

Therefore, the position in the front-rear direction of the game ball fed from the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a is the bulging portion 1.
It can be displaced by the 5065b and the bulging portion 15065c. Therefore, the side surface 15
When the game balls are sent to the left and right sides of the 065a and the left and right game balls collide in front of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the rebounding (repulsing) direction can be the front-back direction. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the game ball into the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

Also, when the game ball is sent from one of the left and right sides 15065a, the bulge 15065
When the game ball rolls in the left-right direction on the front side of the side surface 15065a by displacing the front-back direction position by colliding the game ball with one of b or the bulging part 15065c, the bulging part 150
65b or the other of the bulging portion 15065c. As a result, the side surface 150
The game ball sent from one side of 65a can be prevented from rolling forward of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and coming out to the other side of the side surface 15065a.

The side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 is formed to have a width that is equal to or larger than the width of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, and is larger than the width of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. 15065b and 15065c are arranged at positions sandwiching the ball entrance in a front view, and are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (direction in which the game balls are guided along the side surface 15065a). Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolling) on the side surface 15065a into contact with the bulging portions 15065b and 15065c, the game ball can be surely biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

In addition, the one bulged portion 15065b, 15065c and the other bulged portion 15065b, 150
65c and the variable winning a prize device 15065 are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game balls are guided along the side surface 15065a).
When the game ball enters the side surface 15065a of 65 from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be brought into contact with either one of the pair of bulging portions 15065b and 15065c. Therefore, one side (or the other side) in the width direction to the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065.
It is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered from passing through the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 and flowing out from the other side in the width direction of the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065. As a result, the game ball can be inserted into the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a to improve the player's interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the engagement between the sliding member 8532 and the rotating member 8533 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the rotation member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can be engaged with each other by the contact between the upper surface of the connecting portion 533a and the third protrusion 8532e, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the connection is achieved. The third protrusion 16532e is formed in the recess of the portion 533a.
Is inserted. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 101A shows the first electric auditors product 520 and the drive unit 85 in the sixteenth embodiment.
Fig. 101(b) is a front view of Fig. 30, and Fig. 101(b) is a first view taken along line CIb-CIb in Fig. 101(a).
101C is a cross-sectional view of the electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530, and FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the 1st electric auditors product 520 and the drive unit 8530 in the CIc-CIc line|wire of (b).

As shown in FIG. 101, the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533 of the sixteenth embodiment is provided with a recessed portion 16533a1 recessed from the rear side toward the front side at a substantially central position in the left-right direction thereof. The recessed portion 16533a1 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in rear view.

Further, the third protrusion 16532e of the sliding member 8532 is formed to project at a position facing the above-described recessed portion 16533a1 in the front-rear direction. The front view shape of the third protrusion 16532e is formed in a horizontally long rectangle slightly smaller than the recessed portion 16533a1, and the tip is formed in a tapered shape.

As a result, when the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is closed, the recessed portion 16
The third protrusion 16532e may be housed inside the 533a1. As a result, the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can be engaged with each other.

Further, in this case, since the engaging portion is the recessed portion 16533a1, the third protrusion 16532e is formed.
Is inserted into the recessed portion 16533a1, the space required for disposing the third protrusion 16532e can be suppressed, and downsizing can be achieved, and the third protrusion 16532a1 is inserted into the recessed portion 16533a1. The protrusion 16532e can be shielded from the outside, and unauthorized access from the outside to the third protrusion 16532e can be made difficult.

Next, referring to FIGS. 102 to 104, the sliding member 1573 in the seventeenth embodiment.
2 will be described. In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the standing wall 532c1 is located on the upstream side of the sensor device SE1 arranged on the flow-down path of the game ball entering the second winning opening 140 has been described. In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged on the downstream side of the sensor device SE1 will be described. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the sliding member 17532 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. 102(a) and 102(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 17530 in the seventeenth embodiment. 103(a) and 103(b) are sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

In addition, in FIG. 102, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are transparently illustrated. 102(a) and 103(a), the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state, and in FIGS. 102(b) and 102(b), the first electric accessory 520 is in an open state. The respective states are shown. In addition, FIG. 102A and FIG.
17A and FIG. 17B, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the sliding member 17532 in the seventeenth embodiment is
The standing wall 17532c1 is formed so as to project from the lower side of the connecting portion 532a (lower side of FIG. 102(a)). The standing wall 17532c1 includes a standing wall 17532c1 whose tip is set to a position beyond the lower end surface of the second case member 535 and whose tip is bent toward the front side.

The standing length of the standing wall 17532c1 on the front side is set such that the upper and lower side surfaces are below the sensor device SE1 arranged in the second case member 535 when the first electric accessory 520 is closed. Set to the position length.

Further, the second case member 535 is formed with an opening 17535b which is formed by penetrating in the vertical direction (see FIG. 103(a)). The second protrusion 17532c is arranged in a state of being inserted inside the opening 17535b.

Further, the opening width of the opening 17535b in the front-rear direction is set to be larger than the slide width of the sliding member 17532 that slides in the front-rear direction (drive width of the solenoid 531). Accordingly, the sliding member 17532 can be slid in the front-rear direction with the second protrusion 17532c inserted in the opening 17535b.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is closed, the standing wall 17532c1 is positioned downstream of the sensor device SE1 and the game is played. The insertion of a ball can be regulated. On the other hand, when the first electric accessory 520 is opened, the standing wall 1
7532c1 is arrange|positioned rather than the opening (hole which detects passage of a game ball) of the sensor device SE1. Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is opened, the game ball can be inserted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, a case will be described in which the first electric accessory is forced into the second state due to the player's cheating. 104(a) and 104(b) show a winning opening unit 500.
FIG. Note that FIGS. 104A and 104B are similar to FIGS.
Each corresponds to the cross section of (b). Further, FIG. 104(a) illustrates the first electric accessory 520 in a closed state, and FIG. 104(b) illustrates the first electric accessory 520 in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is closed, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is forcibly opened by the player's cheating. When the first electric accessory 520 is opened, the longitudinal position of the sliding member 17532 is set to the same position as the closed state, as in the first embodiment.

Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is forcibly opened, the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged on the downstream side of the sensor device SE1. Therefore, the game ball in which the game ball is inserted from the second winning opening 140 is stagnant on the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1.

In this case, the distance from the sensor device SE1 to the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is set to a size that substantially matches the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball held on the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is always detected by the sensor device SE1. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can detect that the first electric auditors product 520 has been opened due to fraud by the sensor device SE1 detecting the game ball for a predetermined time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cheating of the player and notify the store operator of the cheating of the player.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment includes a sensor device SE1 that detects a game ball that has entered the second winning opening 140, and the standing wall 17532c1 has a regulated position downstream of the sensor device SE1. At the same time, since the game ball is regulated at a position where it can be detected by the sensor device SE1, for example, when the wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened and the game ball is illegally flown in from the ball entrance, the sensor device is detected. The state in which SE1 detects the game ball can be continued. Therefore, by judging whether the detection by the sensor device SE1 has continued for a predetermined time or longer, it is possible to detect that the game ball has been illegally flowed in.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, a rotating member 18812 of the eighteenth embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the protrusion 2812a1 formed on the rotating member 2812 has the hub 812.
Although the case where the protrusions 18812a1 are formed at a constant distance in the radial direction from the axis of a is described in the eighteenth embodiment, the protrusions 18812a1 are formed at different distances in the radial direction from the axis of the hub 812a.
The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 105(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 18812 in the eighteenth embodiment,
105B is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 18812 taken along the line CVb-CVb in FIG. 105A.

As shown in FIG. 105, the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 in the eighteenth embodiment is provided with a protrusion 18812a1 that protrudes in a hemispherical shape toward the edge 824 side (see FIG. 35) of the outer reel unit 820 that is arranged to face it. Have multiple.

The protrusion 18812a1 is formed such that the adjacent protrusion 18812a and the hub 812a have different radial distances from the axis. Thus, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the air flow generated by the first (the tip located on the rotation side) protrusion 18812a1 is directed to the second (the rotation rear side of the former protrusion 18812a1) protrusion 18812a1. It can be made to collide easily.
Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the airflow can be easily generated. As a result, air can be sent between the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 so as to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the relationship between the accommodation unit 880, the inner reel unit 810, and the outer reel unit 820 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment,
The case where the side wall portion 881 of the accommodation unit 880 is formed in a plate shape has been described, but the side wall portion 881 in the nineteenth embodiment has a plurality of openings. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

106(a) and 12(b) show a decorative pattern display device 800 according to the nineteenth embodiment.
FIG. In addition, in FIG. 106(a) and FIG. 106(b), the outer reel unit 82
The state where 0 is transited (rotational displacement) is shown in each figure. Further, in FIG. 106(b), the opening 19881d formed in the side wall portion 881 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 106(a), a plurality of openings 19881d penetrating in the left-right direction are formed in the side wall portion 881 (see FIG. 30(a)) arranged on the left side in the front view of the decorative symbol display device 800. To be done.

The openings 19881d are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction around the rotation axes of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. The formation angle of the adjacent openings 19881d is
Spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 and spokes 82 of the outer reel unit 820
The formation angle of 2 is set to be substantially the same. Further, the opening dimension of the opening 19881d in the circumferential direction is set to be smaller than the width dimension of the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 in the circumferential direction. As a result, as shown in FIG. 106A, by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812) are rotated.
c) can be located next to the opening 19881d. That is, the opening 19881d can be covered with the spoke 822 (or the spoke 812c) in a side view.

Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the inflow of air from the opening 19812c when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106(b), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812c) are arranged at a circumferential position different from the opening 19881d. be able to.

Accordingly, it is possible to allow the air to flow in from the opening 19812c when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotated. That is, by making the inflow path of the air shortest and reducing the air resistance, the air can easily flow into the decorative pattern display device 800 (the accommodation unit 880).

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated to perform an effect that is decorated on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and allows the player to visually recognize other symbols, the inflow of air from the opening 19881d is regulated. The display can be easily made visible to the player. On the other hand, when cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, intake air is allowed to flow from the opening 19881d to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. It can be done easily.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Is easily guessed.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced with or combined with part or all of the other one or more embodiments to configure a gaming machine.

In the first embodiment, the bulging portions 524L, 52 of the pair of left and right wing members 520L, 520R are arranged.
The case where the components other than 4R are formed symmetrically has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the wing members 520L and 520R may be formed on the rotating member 533 side so that the wing members 520L and 520R have the same shape. In this case, wing member 520L
, 520R can be formed of the same component, so by using common components, the wing member 520L,
The manufacturing cost of the 520R can be reduced.

Although the case where the inclined portion 625a of the reflecting member 625 is formed on the smooth surface has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sloped portion 625a may be curved and formed in a convex state on the light transmitting portion 621a side. In this case, the light reflected by the inclined portion 625a can be easily dispersed, and the light can be uniformly incident on the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, it is possible to make the distribution of the amount of light that is visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 621a uniform.

In the first and eleventh implementations described above, the case where the number of component parts arranged is different has been described as a mode in which the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one side and the other side (both sides of the decorative member) have different configured rigidity (dimensions, materials, etc. of the component members), and the driving force (size, magnitude, etc.) transmitted between the one side and the other side. (Transmission time, transmission timing, etc.), one side and the other side have different connection states of constituent members (for example, the number of connection parts, the amount of rattling of the connection parts, etc.), one side and the other side May differ from each other in easiness of displacement with respect to the other party (biasing force received from the urging means, gravity, resistance during displacement (slide or rotation), etc., or a combination thereof.

As a result, when the support state is biased to one side by the rigidity of the constituent members, the driving means 6
80U and the drive means 680D are arranged such that the side having a high rigidity (low side) of itself is the side having a low rigidity of the other party (
You can face the high side). Therefore, in a state where the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving unit 680U and the driving unit 680.
It is possible to form a state in which each of the D's pushes in (move forward) the opponent on the side of high rigidity and accepts (retracts) the opponent on the side of low rigidity. As a result, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be suppressed from being formed between the opposing sides.

Although the case where the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the closed state by the biasing spring has been described in the ninth embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by disposing a magnetic body inside the first electric accessory 520 and arranging a magnet on the front base 511 or the rear base 512, the magnetic force of the magnet displaces the first electric accessory 520 to the closed state. It may be something that causes it.

In the first and eleventh embodiments described above, the case where the number of component parts arranged is different has been described as a mode in which the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as an aspect in which the first link member 684U and the second link member 686U (the second link member 686D and the first link member 684D) are configured to be different from each other, the rigidity of the constituent members (dimensions of the constituent members, the number of arranged members) , Different materials, etc., different connection states of constituent members (for example, the number of connecting portions, the amount of rattling of the connecting portions, etc.), or a combination thereof. Due to the difference in these configurations, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the transmission timing are different, and the support modes of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D are biased to one side.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the standing wall 532c1 is formed so as to be slidable inside the first case member 534 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the inside of the main body portion 531a, the standing wall 532c1 may protrude from the inside of the second winning opening 140 to the front side. In this case, since it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the inside of the second winning opening 140, even if the wing members 520L and 520R are opened by fraud, the inside of the second winning opening 140 (standing Wall 53
It is possible to suppress the game ball being stagnated in front of 2c1). As a result, the player's cheating can be prevented.

In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, the case where the game ball is guided in the front-rear direction by changing the side surface shape between the front base 511 and the back base 512 is described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. ..

For example, magnets may be disposed inside the front base 511 and the back base 512, and the attraction force of the magnets may guide the game ball in the front-rear direction. This eliminates the need for narrowing the space between the front base 511 and the back base 512 facing each other, so that the game ball can be prevented from being sandwiched between the front base 511 and the back base 512 facing each other. In this case, the attraction force of the magnet is preferably such that the game ball cannot be held on the attraction surface of the magnet. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being attracted to the side surfaces of the front base 511 and the back base 512.

In the second and eighteenth embodiments described above, the plurality of protrusions 2 are formed on the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812.
Although the case where 812a1 and 18812a1 are formed has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of recessed grooves may be formed on the side surface of the hub 812a facing the edge portion 824. Also in this case, as in the second and eighteenth embodiments, the air flow can be generated by the uneven shape of the groove. As a result, the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 82
It is possible to send air between the opposing surfaces of No. 1 to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the variable winning device 15065 is arranged so as to be rotationally displaceable with respect to the game board 13 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the variable winning a prize device 15065 is arranged so as to be slidable in the front-back direction with respect to the game board 13, and in the closed state, the variable winning a prize device 15065 is set in a state of being immersed in the game board 13 and a game ball at a specific winning opening 65a. In the open state, the variable winning device 15065 may be projected to the front side of the game board 13 to allow the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 155. In the first control example, control processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment (controls relating to the game of the pachinko machine 10, operation control for the variable display device unit 80, light emission control of various lamps, etc.) Related processes). In this control example, by controlling the operation of the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, the 7-segment display unit 1600, and the displacement member 670, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed to the player in various display operation modes. Have control over. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that the player does not get tired of.

Further, in this control example, a double reel structure in which the outer reel 821 is provided so as to cover the inner reel 811 is provided, and further, as an area constituting the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, the inside (display surface of the inner reel 811) is provided. And a non-transmissive area 821a2 and 821a3 (see FIG. 109) that does not allow the inside (display surface of the inner reel 811) to pass through. With such a configuration, for example, the transparent area 821a1 of the outer reel 821 is located at a position facing the display window 880 for allowing the player to visually recognize the combination of the third symbols for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. By positioning it, the player can visually recognize the operation mode of the inner reel 811, and by positioning the non-transparent areas 821a2 and 821a3 of the outer reel 821, the operation mode of the inner reel 811 can be viewed by the player. Can be made invisible.

With such a configuration, a variety of reel displays can be executed in the area of the display window 880, the size of which is limited due to the structure of the pachinko machine 10, and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, by rotating the outer reel 821, it is possible to create a state in which the player cannot see the operation mode of the inner reel 811. Therefore, for example, the operation of positioning the inner reel 811 in the initial state can be performed. When performing or when you want to stop and display a specific symbol, the content of operation that is different from normal (is not set as an effect pattern (variation pattern)) (for example, twice the speed of an ordinary effect pattern) The operation content of the reel 811 is not visible to the player when the operation is performed by rotating the reel 811 at a speed of 1/3 of the normal effect pattern). You can Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, in the present control example, in addition to the reel display by the double reel structure described above, the 7-segment display using the segment display device 600 is also configured to notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol. Thereby, the player can be informed of the special symbol lottery result in more various display modes, and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, in this control example, the display method of the symbol (third symbol) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example displays the special symbol lottery result in a reel stop mode, unlike the conventional gaming machine which displays the special symbol lottery result using the liquid crystal screen. Is configured. In such a gaming machine, information other than the lottery result of the special symbol is used by using a liquid crystal screen like a conventional gaming machine, for example, continuous production in which the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher as it continues (for example, pseudo continuous production). Since there is no display area for notifying the player of the information indicating the number of times of execution, there is a problem that it is difficult to clearly inform the player of the process for continuous production. On the other hand, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is operated to change the display area visible to the player so that the player is informed of the process for continuous production (the number of executions of continuous production). I am configuring. As a result, even with a pachinko machine 10 that does not have a liquid crystal display device, the player can easily recognize the process of continuous production.

In this control example, the configuration for notifying the player of the continuous production process by changing the display area of the reel display is used, but the configuration of other configurations is used to inform the player of the continuous production process. You may comprise so that it may notify. Specifically, the color of the reel display (the color of the backlight that illuminates the reel display surface) can be changed or the sound effect during the reel operation can be changed according to the number of times the continuous production is executed. It may be configured.

Further, in this control example, in the pachinko machine 10, when the above-described continuous effect is executed, the display area of the reel display is gradually narrowed according to the number of times the continuous effect is executed. With such a configuration, the smaller the display area of the reel display for the player, the higher the expectation of the jackpot can be made, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand gaming machine. ..

In addition, by operating the displacement member 670 to narrow the display area of the reel display, the number of symbols stopped and displayed in the display area (the number of effective lines displaying the combination of symbols for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol) ) Is reduced, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol.

In the first control example, the time (variation time) from when the special symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed is varied according to the set game state. Specifically, in the gaming state where the special symbol lottery is likely to be executed (time saving state, probability variation state), it is easy to set a short variation time in order to increase the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed per unit time. In the gaming state where the lottery of symbols is difficult to be executed (normal state), a long variable time is easily set in order to reduce the period in which the lottery of special symbols is not performed (the period when the special symbols are not changed). doing.

In this control example configured in this manner, the speed of changing the third symbol displayed in the display area in the gaming state (normal state) in which a long variation time is likely to be set is slow (for example, 0.2 seconds) reel display To execute a 7-segment display with a high speed (for example, 0.05 seconds) for changing the symbol displayed in the display area in a game state (probably changing state, time saving state) in which a short fluctuation time is easily set. I am configuring. Thereby, even when a plurality of display methods with different variable speeds of the third symbol are used, the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is surely stopped and displayed after the lapse of a predetermined variation time. Can be made.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, a structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 107 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. It should be noted that FIG. 107 shows that, in addition to the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, a configuration with a reference numeral added to facilitate description of this control example is added. , And that the signs are different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 107, the variable display device unit 80 has a decorative symbol display device 800 and a 7-segment display portion 1600, and is configured to be able to inform the player of the special symbol lottery result by a different display method. ing. The decorative symbol display device 800 includes a left turning unit 800a, a middle turning unit 800b, and a right turning unit 800c, and each turning unit 800a to 800c has a double reel structure (FIG. 32). reference). A display window 880 is formed in the center of the game board 13 for allowing the player to visually recognize a part of the symbol (third symbol) stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 800.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol by the combination of the symbols (third symbol) stopped and displayed in the display window 880. In the following, in the area within the display window 880, that is, among the symbols (third symbol) stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 800, a region visible to the player is a symbol display region (also simply referred to as a display region). ). The details of the display symbols in the double reel structure of each of the rotating units 800a to 800c will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109.

Next, the 7-segment display unit 1600 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the display area of each of the rotary units 800a to 800c, and is used as a part of the 7 segment for displaying predetermined identification information. Specifically, it is configured by a rectangle (6 segments) of 1 horizontal segment and 2 vertical segments so as to form 6 segments out of 7 segments. The detailed contents of the light emitting member forming each segment are the same as those in the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 55), and will be omitted.

In the first control example, as the 7-segment display unit 1600, a left 7-segment display unit 1600a that covers the outer circumference of the left turning unit 800a, a middle 7-segment display unit 1600b that covers the outer circumference of the middle turning unit 800b, and a right turn. A right 7-segment display portion 1600c that covers the outer periphery of the moving unit 800c is provided, and three identification information (numbers) can be displayed as the third symbol using each of the 7-segment display portions 1600a to 1600c.

In addition, by combining the six segments included in the 7-segment display unit 1600 and the light emitting area 822 (see FIG. 109) displayed by the decorative pattern display device 800, one 7-segment (7-segment) is configured. Is configured as follows. With this configuration, the display area for reel display and the display area for 7-segment display can be overlapped. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed in a limited space. Detailed display contents (display contents of the third symbol) using the 7-segment display unit 1600 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111.

Further, on the outer edge of the display window 880 (7-segment display portion 1600), an LED (lightning bolt LED) 671 is arranged as a light emitting means capable of emitting light toward the display area of the reel display. The LEDs 671 are arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners of the display window 880, and a lightning LED 671a is provided on the lower left side of the display window 880 (lower left side when the front view of FIG. 107 is viewed) and a lightning LED 671b is provided on the upper left side. A lightning LED 671c is arranged on the lower right side and a lightning LED 671d on the upper right side.

When these lightning LEDs 671 are caused to emit light, light with high directivity is emitted toward a partial area of the display area of the reel display, and a composite pattern combined with the above-described partial stop displayed symbol is expressed. Is configured as follows. The detailed contents of the composite symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 114(a).

Next, with reference to FIG. 108 and FIG. 109, the display content of the display symbol (third symbol) that can be displayed by each of the rotating units 800a to 800c will be described. FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display symbol of the inner reel 811 of each turning unit 800a to 800c, and FIG. 109 is a schematic diagram showing the display symbol of the inner reel 811 of each turning unit 800a to 800c. It is a schematic diagram.

The left turning unit 800a has a double reel structure including a left inner reel 811a and a left outer reel 821a. The middle turning unit 800b includes a middle inner reel 811b and a middle outer reel 821b. The heavy reel structure is configured, and the right rotation unit 800c is configured with a double reel structure by the inner right reel 811c and the outer right reel 821c.

Here, a method of displaying a symbol (third symbol) using the turning units 800a to 800c will be briefly described using the left turning unit 800a. As described above, the left rotation unit 800a has a double reel structure including the left inner reel 811a and the left outer reel 821a, and a motor (not shown) that is a drive source for each reel. Is provided. Then, by supplying a current in a specific direction to the motor, the reel rotates forward (the direction in which the reel rotates from the top to the bottom in FIG. 107), and by supplying a current in a direction opposite to the specific direction. The reel is configured to rotate in the reverse direction (the direction in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top in the viewpoint of FIG. 107).

Further, in this control example, a motor MPU (not shown) is provided as drive control means for controlling the motor drive of each reel used in each of the rotating units 800a to 800c. This motor MPU is used to variably set the rotation direction and rotation speed of each motor, and executes drive control corresponding to various variable displays executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol. .. As described above, by controlling the motor drive control of each reel used in each of the turning units 800a to 800c by one motor MPU, it is possible to execute the operation control that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

First, the display symbol of the inner reel 811 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 shows a display surface member (display tape) having a display pattern (display pattern printed on the display surface) that can be displayed on each inner reel (inner left reel 811a, inner reel 811b, inner right reel 811c). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. In this control example, the display surface on the loop is formed by attaching the above-mentioned display surface member along the outer peripheral surface of each inner reel.

Therefore, for example, when the left inner reel 811a is rotated in the forward direction (the direction in which the display symbol moves from top to bottom within the display window 880 (see FIG. 107)), it is printed on the display surface member. The display pattern is displayed in the display window 880 while changing from the bottom to the top. Then, next to the display design (the top in the display of FIG. 108, the blue 7 design R1 in the case of the left inner reel 811a) printed on the top of the display surface member, the bottom of the surface member is printed. The display symbol (the bottom in the display of FIG. 108, a part of the combination symbol R3 in the case of the left inner reel 811a) is displayed.

Next, the display symbol printed on the display surface member of each inner reel will be specifically described. On the left inner reel 811a of the left turning unit 800a, a jackpot that is most advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot A (see FIG. 120(b))) is displayed as a display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. A blue 7 symbol R1 corresponding to a combination of symbols for indicating that the player has won, and a red 7 symbol R2 corresponding to a symbol combination for indicating that the player has won the jackpot, and a specific display area. When stopped and displayed, the left combination symbol R3a, which is a part of the combination symbol R3 in which the execution condition of the special effect can be satisfied, and the special symbol lottery result are disadvantageous results (for example, missing) to the player. And a danger pattern R4 corresponding to a combination of symbols for indicating are printed on at least the reel display surface.

The blue 7 symbol R1 and the red 7 symbol R2 are symbols printed on the inner reels 811 respectively, and when they are stopped and displayed at predetermined positions on the inner reels 811 (when they are stopped and displayed in a line), It shows that you have won the jackpot of special symbols. In this control example, it is possible to set a plurality of jackpots with different privilege amounts (for example, the number of prize balls and a gaming state set after the jackpot game is finished), and the jackpot which is advantageous to the player is won. In this case, the stop display mode (combination of symbols) indicating that the blue 7 symbol R1 has been won as a jackpot is displayed in a stopped state (per blue 7). Further, when the big hit is won regardless of the type of the big hit, the stop display mode (combination of symbols) indicating that the red 7 symbol R2 has been won is displayed as stop (per red 7).

In other words, in the case of a blue 7 hit, it is possible to inform the player in advance (by the time the jackpot game is started) that the advantageous jackpot has been won, so the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind. Can be done. Also, when the red 7 hits, the player is only notified that the jackpot has been won, so the details of the jackpot game (the number of rounds) and the gaming state set after the jackpot game are finished. It is possible to make a jackpot game while expecting to be advantageous to the player.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present control example, the blue lamp 7 is stopped by the voice lamp controller 113 based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 that includes the information indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. Although it is configured to determine whether to display or stop displaying the red 7 hit, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the player operates the frame button 22 which is the operation means, the blue 7 hit May be configured to change the stop display ratio per blue 7 when the condition that the stop display is possible (the big hit that wins the player is won) is established. Note that the variable ratio here means that the stop display ratio per blue 7 is 0%, that is, the state where blue 7 per is not stopped and displayed, or the stop display ratio per blue 7 is 100%, that is, blue 7 It is a concept that includes a state in which the hit is always stopped and displayed.

The combination symbol R3 is not a symbol for indicating a special symbol big hit, but a suggestion symbol capable of suggesting and predicting the degree of expectation of a big hit by combination with the lightning LED 671 arranged on the variable display device unit 80. Is. Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 114(a), only when the combination symbol R3a of the left inner reel 811a and the combination symbol R3b of the right inner reel 811c are stopped and displayed at a predetermined position, The special effective line is set as an effective line for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, and the special effective line is easily set when the jackpot is won.

With such a configuration, a symbol (blue 7 symbol R1 or red 7 symbol R2) for indicating the jackpot win is displayed in a stopped manner on a predetermined activated line for variable display using the inner reel 811. In addition to the game of watching whether or not there is a game, it is possible to perform a game of watching whether or not the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the symbol variation display. it can.

Further, in the present control example, the symbol printed on the inner reel 811 (combination symbol R3) and the lightning bolt LED 671 arranged on the variable display device unit 80 can be combined to give an indication of the expected degree of jackpot winning. It is configured to be possible. In addition, when the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position, the combination symbol R3 and the lightning LED 671 are integrally expressed, so that the display pattern of the combination symbol R3 and the shape of the lightning LED 671 (light emitting aspect) It is configured to be related to and. Thereby, the player can visually recognize that the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed at the predetermined position, and thus an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

The danger symbol R4 is a symbol printed only on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c, and is configured as a suggestion symbol for indicating the degree of expectation of jackpot winning, like the combination symbol R3 described above. .. When the danger symbol R4 is stopped and displayed on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c in a predetermined array (for example, an array that is one row above), and the chance symbol R5 is stopped and displayed on the inner reel 811b, the specification is made. The variable display mode is executed. That is, unlike the combination design R3, the danger design R4 is a suggestion design capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of jackpot winning by using only the design printed on the inner reel 811.

In the present control example, the special symbol is displayed as a stop by the third symbol for notifying the result of the special symbol by the combination of symbols stopped and displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, and during the variation time of the special symbol. When a stop display (including a temporary stop display that swings to the extent that the player can recognize that it is a stop display), a stop display of a suggestion symbol for suggesting the jackpot expectation degree of the special symbol being executed Becomes

In this way, when the inner reel 811 is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) during the change period of the special symbol, the symbols (for example, blue 7 symbol R1, red 7 symbol R2) showing the lottery result of the jackpot symbol are stopped and displayed. Instead of (temporary stop display), the suggestion symbol (for example, combination symbol R3, danger symbol R4) is configured to be stopped (temporary stop display), so the inner reel 811 during the changing period of the special symbol The stop display (temporary stop display) can be prevented from being erroneously recognized as the stop display of the third symbol.

Here, both the stop display of the third symbol and the stop display of the suggestion symbol are set based on the lottery result of the special symbol executed by the main controller 110. Specifically, since it is set based on the result of the special symbol win/win lottery and the result of the variable lottery of the special symbol (lottery of the variation pattern), any symbol indicates the lottery result of the special symbol. It becomes a design for.

A total of 10 display symbols are printed on the left inner reel 811a. Here, since the inner reel unit 810 is configured to rotate in one rotation and 2 seconds, the left inner reel 811a serves as a display unit configured to change the display symbol every 0.2 seconds. In this control example, the inner left reel 811a, the inner inner reel 811b, and the inner right reel 811c included in the inner reel unit 810 are configured to rotate at the same fluctuating speed (1 second for 2 seconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the changing speed of each inner reel may be different. Further, for each inner reel, the time (acceleration period) required to reach a specific fluctuating speed (2 seconds per revolution) after the rotation is executed may be different, or a specific fluctuating speed (one revolution) The time (deceleration period) required to display the stop may be different from the state of rotating in 2 seconds. Further, the timing at which the rotation of each inner reel is started may be different.

In this way, by rotating each inner reel in various rotation patterns, the player is reminded that there is some law in the rotation pattern of each inner reel and the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. In addition, in this control example, in synchronization with the special symbol variation, the left inner reel 811a, the middle inner reel 811b, the right inner reel 811c is configured to perform variation (rotation) control and stop control, , Not limited to this, for example, of the symbols (third symbol) stopped and displayed in the last special symbol fluctuation, the stop position (stop display mode) of some symbols is the special symbol fluctuation of this time. When it is determined that it is the same as the stop display mode showing the variation result (lottery result), only the remaining inner reels are started to rotate without rotating the inner reel in which the stop display mode is displayed. It may be configured to.

Similarly, a total of 10 display symbols are printed on the inner right reel 811c. As the type of the printed design, the execution condition of the special effect can be satisfied when the display design of the left inner reel 811a is stopped and displayed in a specific display area in place of the left combination design R3a. The difference is that a right combination symbol R3b, which is a part of the combination symbol R3, is provided, and the other points are the same. For the same display symbol, the reference numeral and the description will be omitted.

In this control example, normally, after the rotation of the left inner reel 811a is stopped, the rotation of the right inner reel 811c is stopped. Therefore, when the right inner reel 811c is stopped and displayed, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the result of the special symbol lottery this time is a big hit (whether or not the reach state is reached).

Finally, the display symbol on the inner reel 811b will be described. In this control example, when the variable display for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is executed using the inner reel unit 810, the inner reel 811b is configured to be stopped last. Therefore, with respect to the display symbols printed on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c, a display symbol for indicating that the jackpot lottery result is out, and a specific variable display mode are executed. The difference is that a display pattern for informing that is added. The other display symbols are the same as the left inner reel 811a or the right inner reel 811c described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in this control example, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the special symbol using the three inner reels, the reel drive is stopped in the order of the left inner reel 811a, the right inner reel 811c, and the middle inner reel 811b. It is configured to let. Then, in the left inner reel 811a, the right inner reel 811c, and the inner inner reel 811b, among the plurality of display symbols stopped and displayed in the area (display area) visible to the player from the display window 880, A combination of symbols (third symbols) stopped and displayed in the area (effective line) is configured to notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol.

In this way, by displaying the three inner reels in a stopped order in a predetermined order, the player can easily know which inner reel is to be stopped and displayed next. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand. Note that the order in which the reels are stopped may be changed only when a predetermined condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when a special jackpot is won) is satisfied. This allows the player to be informed that there is a high probability that the jackpot is won when an operation different from the normal one is executed. In addition, in order to identify whether or not the reel operation is different from the normal one, the player needs to know the reel operation at the normal time. Therefore, even when the normal reel operation is performed, the reel operation is performed. It is possible to make the contents of the motion interesting.

Further, by using a configuration in which the three inner reels are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, when two reels among the left inner reel 811a, the right inner reel 811c, and the middle inner reel 811b are stopped, the two reels that have stopped Whether the display symbol showing that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit in a specific area for showing the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to one reel is stopped (hereinafter, referred to as reach state) It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in order to enhance the effect during variable display, the MPU for motor may be configured to perform different rotation operations for each of the left inner reel 811a, the right inner reel 811c, and the middle inner reel 811b. , For example, by controlling three reels to rotate in the forward direction and to reach the reach state and then to reversely rotate only the remaining reels, the player is informed of the reach state in an easy-to-understand manner. Alternatively, when the variable display this time is the reach state (there is a high possibility that the reach state is reached), all the inner reels are rotated in reverse from the time when the rotation of the three inner reels is executed. It may be configured such that the player can easily predict the lottery result of the current special symbol at the timing when the variable display is executed (the timing when none of the inner reels is stopped).

As described above, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 108, the display symbols are evenly printed on each of the left inner reel 811a, the middle inner reel 811b, and the right inner reel 811c. By rotating each of the inner reel 811a, the inner reel 811b, and the right inner reel 811c, the display symbol displayed in the player's visual recognition area (in the display window 880) is changed.

Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 110, a valid line is set in the display area in which the inner reel 811 of this control example is displayed, and the blue 7 symbol R1 and the red 7 symbol R2 are on the valid line. When any of the BAR symbols are arranged in a line, the jackpot game is executed. Further, when the combination symbol R3, the special symbol R6, etc. are stopped at a specific position, a special effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot game and the special effect are to be executed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the present control example, the display symbols are arranged at equal intervals, but the intervals may be arranged at uneven intervals. Specifically, a section in which a lot of display symbols are printed to show that the lottery result of the special symbol is a lottery result (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player, and most of the display symbols are printed. By providing a non-existing section, the intervals of the display symbols may be made uneven. This allows the player to predict the game result with an ambiguous sensation such as in which section the rotation of the inner reel 811 stops.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the display symbol of the outer reel 821 will be described. The display surface of the outer reel 821 used in this control example is roughly divided into three. Here, the display surface of the outer reel 821 will be described using the left outer reel 821a included in the left turning unit 800a. As described above, in this control example, the double reel structure is adopted, and the outer reel 821 is arranged so as to cover the display surface of the inner reel 811.

The contents of the display surface of the outer reel 821 will be described with reference to the left outer reel 821a. In combination with the left first area (transmissive area) 821a1 formed of a transmissive member capable of penetrating the inside and the segment display unit 1600. The left second area (segment area) 821a2 in which one 7 segment is formed, and the left third area in which a special display mode for informing the lottery result of the special symbol is formed on the display surface of the outer reel 821 (effect) Display area) 821a3.

As described above, the outer reel 821 is formed of a transmissive member in which only the first region of the respective regions (first region to third region) is visible. That is, in the double reel structure of the present control example, when performing variable display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by using the inner reel 811, the first area of the display surface of the outer reel 821 is displayed on the display window 880. The drive is controlled by the motor MPU so as to stop at the corresponding position.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily view the drive content (variable display mode) of the reel (inner reel 811) provided inside the double reel structure from the display window 880. it can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109, a left emission region 822a is formed at the vertical center of the left second region 821a2 over the entire width of the left outer reel 821a, and is combined with the left 7-segment display unit 1600a. By doing so, it is configured to form one 7 segment (see FIG. 110(b)). The left light emitting area 822a is controlled to emit light in conjunction with the light emitting display of the 7-segment display unit 1600, and has the same color as the six segments of the 7-segment display unit 1600 (including an error that is difficult for the player to identify). (Concept) is configured to emit light. Specifically, it is configured to transmit the same emission color as the emission color of the 7-segment display unit 1600 emitted from the backlight unit 830 (see FIG. 31) of the decorative pattern display device 800.

In addition, in the left second area 821a2, the portion other than the left light emitting area 822a is formed of a black non-transmissive member, and the player is left inside the left outer reel 821a. The reel 811a is configured not to be visible. Thereby, as the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 800, the variable display (7 segment display) using 7 segments can be executed by positioning the outer reel 821 in the second area.

In this control example, when the 7-segment display is executed, during the change time of the special symbol, the control is performed to turn on and off each of the seven segments at high speed, and the 7-segment display is stopped and displayed. Configured to perform a dynamic display that indicates that it has not been. In addition, the 7-segment display during dynamic display (7-segment display that repeatedly lights up and blinks at high speed) is configured to be controlled so as not to be mistaken for a specific symbol.

More specifically, in this control example, by controlling the seven segments to light up one by one, a dynamic display in which one illuminated segment appears to move in a circle Is configured to do. This allows the player to easily understand that the current dynamic display period is in progress, and the display mode of the 7-segment display during the dynamic display period is a display for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. It is possible to prevent misidentification as a design.

In other words, in the present control example, the 7-segment display unit 1600 is arranged around the decorative symbol display device 800, and the symbols for showing the lottery result of the special symbol according to the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 800 (the third symbol). It is configured to change the type of variable display mode in which (pattern) is variably displayed. Specifically, the variable display mode using the inner reel 811, the variable display mode using the outer reel 821, and the variable display mode using 7 segments can be easily switched, and each variable display mode can be changed. The displayed areas can overlap. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of variable display modes within a limited predetermined area, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109, in the left third area 821a3, a part of the symbol (the symbol imitating "7") for indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit is printed. When the motor MPU is drive-controlled to stop at the position corresponding to the display window 880, the left special display mode 823a printed on the left outer reel 821a and the middle special display printed on the middle outer reel 821b. The aspect 823b and the right special display aspect 823c printed on the right outer reel 821c are combined so that the special indication aspect simulating “7” is stopped and displayed.

With such a configuration, the player can be informed of the lottery result of the special symbol by using the display symbol having a size that occupies most of the display area in the display window 880, and thus the player is impacted. You can In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the present control example, when the variable display for notifying the lottery result of the special symbols is executed using the outer reels 821, the symbol rows of the respective outer reels 821 are aligned ( In the state shown in FIG. 109), the control for synchronizing and rotating each outer reel 821 is executed.

Although the display symbol of the outer reel 821 has been described above with reference to the left outer reel 821a, the display symbols of the middle outer reel 821b and the right outer reel 821c are the same as the left outer reel 821a (in the special symbol display mode. Since the only difference is the design), detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 110 to 115, the contents of the variable display executed by the variable display device unit 80 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 110(a), the variable display contents when the normal state is set as the game state will be described. FIG. 110A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable display using the inner reel 811 in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 110(a), normally, the display symbols of the inner reels (the left inner reel 811a to the right inner reel 811c) are displayed in the display window 880 so that three display symbols are vertically displayed. , As a valid line for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, the display symbol stopped and displayed in the upper part (the left inner reel 811a is the blue 7 symbol R1, the middle inner reel 811b is the blank symbol R7, and the right inner reel 811c is the right combination) A first line S1 having a symbol R3b) as an effective line, and a display symbol stopped and displayed in the middle section (left inner reel 811a is red 7 symbol R2, middle reel 811b is a special symbol R6, right inner reel 811c is blue 7). A second line S2 having a symbol R1) as an effective line, and a display symbol stopped and displayed in the lower part (a left inner reel 811a is a bar symbol, a middle inner reel 811b is a blank symbol R7, and a right inner reel 811c is a right combination symbol R3b. ) Is an effective line, and a third line S3 is formed.

Furthermore, the first diagonal line V1 having the lower stage of the left inner reel 811a, the middle stage of the middle inner reel 811b, and the upper stage of the right inner reel 811c as the effective lines, the upper stage of the left inner reel 811a, and the middle inner reel 811b. A second diagonal line V2 whose effective line is the middle stage and the lower stage of the right inner reel 811c is formed.

In other words, when the normal state is set as the game state, the display symbols that are stopped and displayed on the five effective lines (S1 to S3, and V1, V2) formed on the display surface of the variable display device unit 80. The player is notified of the special symbol lottery result by the combination of. Further, in the present control example, the number of target effective lines is made different depending on the stop position of the display symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(a), the upper stage position of the left inner reel 811a constitutes a part of two effective lines (the first line S1 and the second diagonal line V2), and the left inner reel 811a. The middle position is configured to form a part of one effective line (second line S2). Accordingly, when the first inner reel (for example, the left inner reel 811a) of each inner reel is stopped, the inner reel (for example, the right inner reel 811c) to be stopped next may be stopped at any position. A game can be played while predicting whether it is desirable. In addition, when some display symbols corresponding to a combination of display symbols for showing a lottery result advantageous to the player are stopped at a stop position forming a part of a plurality of effective lines, on a plurality of effective lines. Since the player can reach the reach state, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be increased.

Next, the variable display contents when the time saving state (probability change state) is set as the game state will be described with reference to FIG. 110(b). FIG. 110( b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600 during the time saving state. In the present control example, when the time saving state (probability change state) is set, the change pattern of the change time shorter than the normal state is easily set as the change pattern of the special symbol.

Then, in the time saving state (probability change state) in which the change pattern of the short change time is easily set, the 7-segment display is executed as the change display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. Thereby, even when the variation pattern of the short variation time is set, the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol can be reliably stopped and displayed after the lapse of the predetermined variation time.

As shown in FIG. 110(b), during the time saving state, the left second area (segment area) 821a2 of the left outer reel 821a, the middle second area (segment area) 821b2 of the middle outer reel 821b, and the right outer reel 821c. By locating each of the right second areas (areas for segments) 821c2 corresponding to the display window 880, the left 7-segment display portion 1600a, the middle 7-segment display portion 1600b, the right 7-segment display portion 1600a in the display area. Three 7-segments of 1600c are formed. FIG. 110(b) shows a state in which all the lightable areas are turned on in the 7-segment display, but each 7-segment display displays a display mode imitating the numbers “0” to “9”. It will be possible.

When the special symbol lottery result is started during this time saving state, each 7 segment is dynamically displayed, and in a display mode showing the special symbol lottery result after a predetermined period (variation time set in the variation pattern) has elapsed. The display symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in the present control example, as the display symbol for indicating that the special symbol lottery result is out of order, the display symbol in which the light emitting region 822 is caused to emit light is configured to be easily displayed.

To be more specific, this control example is configured to be able to display a display symbol imitating 10 kinds of numbers "0" to "9" as a 7-segment display symbol, and a special symbol lottery result If the display pattern is off, among the display patterns simulating the above-mentioned 10 types of numbers, the display patterns (“2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”) that caused the light emitting area 822 to emit light are displayed. , “8”, “9”) are easily set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the stop-displayed display symbol.

That is, of the seven segments used for the 7-segment display, one segment formed by using the outer reel 821 (light emitting area 822) is displayed with respect to the other six segments when the light is on (light is emitted). Are configured to be lit in the same color so that they are the same, but since the mode when extinguished (when not emitting light) is different from the other six segments, light emission when not emitting light is performed. It is possible to prevent the area 822 from being erroneously recognized as forming part of the display symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol.

More specifically, in this control example, the second region of the outer reel 821 is divided into a region that transmits the light emitted from the backlight unit 830 and a region that does not transmit the light, and a region that transmits the light is defined. The light emitting region 822 is formed by using the light emitting region 822, and the other region is formed by a non-transmissive member (black member) that does not transmit light. The light emitting area 822 is formed of a white member for transmitting the light of the backlight unit 830.

Therefore, the light emitting area 822 is an area formed of a white member surrounded by a black member. As a result, even when the backlight unit 830 is not lit, the non-transmissive light emitting region 822 is easily grasped, and as a result, a part of the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is formed. It is possible to prevent people from being mistaken for being present.

Then, using these three 7-segment, variable display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is executed for the player, and after the variation time of the predetermined period has elapsed, for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. The display symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, in this control example, after the time saving state is set as the game state, the period until the number of special symbol lottery reaches 100 times is configured to be the time saving state, and is executed during the time saving state. When the number of lottery for special symbols reaches a predetermined number, that is, when the number of remaining lottery for special symbols executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number, the remaining short time count (remaining lottery) is calculated using 7-segment. It is configured to display the number of times).

Next, with reference to FIG. 111(a), the display content of the third symbol displayed during the time saving (during the time saving) on the variable display device unit 80 will be described. In this control example, when the time saving state is set as the game state, the third symbol is variably displayed using the segment display unit 1600 of the segment display device 600. FIG. 111(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third symbol during the time saving. As shown in FIG. 111(a), the variation results are shown in the display mode of the 7-segment display of the symbols. In FIG. 111A, “7” is stopped and displayed on the left 7-segment display unit 1600a, “5” on the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b, and “6” on the right 7-segment display unit 1600c. As described above, in the display mode using 7 segments, since the symbols are variably displayed by the irradiation of the light provided in the backlight unit, it is possible to correspond to the variation pattern in which the variation time is short.

Here, the remaining short time count display will be described with reference to FIG. 111(b). FIG. 111(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the remaining short time count is displayed in the time saving state. .. As shown in FIG. 111(b), the remaining number of remaining hours is displayed on the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b. In this control example, when the remaining short time count is less than 5, the player is notified of the remaining short time count using 7-segment. As a result, it is possible to notify in advance of the period until the gaming state that is advantageous to the player (time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state) is ended, so that the time saving state suddenly ends and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to suppress giving.

In addition, in this control example, during the variable display period of the special symbol, first, the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 110(a)), and then the remaining time saving count is displayed. It is configured to be done. Then, so that the display symbol showing the same number as the number displayed as the remaining time reduction number is not displayed in the 7-segment displaying the remaining time reduction number, the display symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is set. I am configuring.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the display mode of the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol and the remaining short time count display indicating the remaining short time count different, so that the remaining time count for the player is shortened. The number of times can be reliably notified.

Further, in this control example, after the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is not necessary to display the remaining short time count display indicating the remaining short time count, that is, the special symbol big hit is won. If you do, because it is configured to set the display symbol regardless of the numerical value of the number of remaining time shortened to be displayed next, set the mode of the display symbol for indicating that you have won the jackpot without restriction You can Therefore, it is possible to set the display mode of the display symbol which is stopped and displayed according to the privilege (the size of the number of prize balls or the game state set after the big hit game end) given by the big hit.

In addition, in the present control example, as shown in FIG. 111(b), the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b is used to display the remaining time saving count, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the left 7 It is also possible to use the segment display unit 1600a or the right 7 segment display unit 1600c to display the remaining time reduction count. In this case, for example, if the left 7-segment display unit 1600a that is first stopped and displayed is used to display the remaining short time count, the game is performed with the remaining short time count displayed next being grasped in advance. By doing this, as the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the left 7-segment display section 1600a, when the same numerical value as the remaining short time count displayed next is stopped and displayed, the lottery result of this time is a big hit. It can be grasped in advance. In addition, the 7-segment display unit 1600 that displays the remaining time reduction count may be appropriately changed.

Further, as will be described later in detail, in this control example, the variable display of the special symbol and the remaining short time count display are configured to be displayed within one variable display period (including the symbol fixing time). In addition, the remaining short time count display is executed for a certain period (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the set variation time of the special symbol. Therefore, for example, when the variation time of the set special symbol is 2 seconds, the variation display of the special symbol of 1.5 seconds is performed regardless of whether or not the remaining short time count display is executed, and then 0.5 seconds. Although the remaining time short time display is executed, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 1 second, it is determined whether or not the remaining time short time display is executed, and if the remaining time short time display is not executed, it is 1 second. In contrast to executing the special symbol variation, if it is in the state of performing the remaining short time display, the shortening variation of 0.5 seconds is executed as the special symbol variation, and then the remaining short time display of 0.5 seconds is performed. Is configured to run. With this configuration, it is possible to perform both the variable display of the special symbol and the short remaining time display within one variable display period of the special symbol.

In the present control example, as described above, the variable display of the special symbol and the short remaining time display are both performed during one variable display period of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of It may be configured to execute the remaining short time display so as to stride over the special symbol variation. In this case, for example, the special symbol variable display is executed for a fixed time regardless of the set variable time, and the remaining time which is the difference between the period during which the variable display is executed and the set variable time is shortened. It is advisable to set it as the time for displaying the number of times. As a result, the variable display mode of the special symbol can be made constant, a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided, and the pattern of the variable display mode can be simplified. Can be reduced.

In addition, the display lower limit time for executing the remaining short time display is set, and the remaining time which is the difference between the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the set variation time is a predetermined time (for example, 0 .5 seconds), the remaining short time display may be executed over the period in which the next special symbol variation is executed. With this configuration, the player can be surely ascertained about the number of remaining time reductions. However, in this case, the variation of the special symbol is started while the remaining short time display is being executed, which makes it difficult for the player to grasp that a new special symbol variation is started. There is a problem. Therefore, the player is notified that the special symbol variation is started by blinking the area (in the example of FIG. 111(b), the left light emitting area 822a of the left inner reel 811a) which is not used for the remaining short time display. Alternatively, the player may be notified that the special symbol variation is started by changing the emission color of the display mode of the remaining short time display (the display mode imitating “4” in FIG. 111(b)). It is good to configure. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a new special symbol variation has been started while the remaining short time display is being executed.

When the above-described processing is executed, the following configuration may be specifically provided in the voice lamp control device 113. First, the variation time extraction means for extracting the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation from the information included in the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and the variation of the third symbol within the variation time of the special symbol variation. Setting means for setting the third symbol variation display time for executing the display and the remaining short time display time for executing the remaining short time display, the third symbol variation display time set by the setting means, and the variation time extraction means extracts. The calculation means for calculating the difference between the fluctuation patterns (change time), the lower limit judgment means for judging whether the time calculated by the calculation means is less than or equal to a predetermined lower limit time (for example, 1 second), and the lower limit judgment means. When it is determined that the remaining short time count display is not completed within the current fluctuation pattern period, the continuation flag is set to ON when it is determined that the time is equal to or less than the lower limit fluctuation time.

Then, the continuation flag is configured to be turned off at the timing when the remaining short time count display is finished, and in the state where the continuation flag is set on, that is, the remaining short time count display is executed. When a new variation pattern is set, it may be configured to set a variation start display mode for indicating that a new symbol variation is executed during the remaining short time count display.

Further, the setting means is configured to set a plurality of different times as the time to display the remaining short time count display, and even if the shortest remaining time is set among the plurality of different times, the remaining short time count display indicates the current variation pattern period. The continuation flag may be set to ON when it is determined that the end is not completed. Further, in the case where the time saving state is set, the third symbol variable display time set by the setting means is configured to be different depending on whether the remaining short time display is executed or not. When displaying the number of times, it may be configured so that the shorter third symbol variable display time is set more easily than when not displaying.

Further, in this control example, in the variation time of the special symbol, the period during which the special symbol is variably displayed (symbol variation period) and the period during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol fixing period) are included and described. However, the symbol variation period of the special symbol and the symbol determination period may be divided and controlled without being limited to this. In this case, for example, the remaining short time display period is set in advance to be the same as the symbol finalization period, and the third symbol variation display time that is longer than the symbol variation period is set, or the remaining short time display period is set. Is set in advance so that it is longer than the symbol fixing period, and when it is determined that the remaining short time count display cannot be executed during the symbol fluctuation period, it indicates that it does not end within this fluctuation pattern period Alternatively, the continuation flag may be set to ON.

In the present control example, when the variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600 (variable display by 7 segments) is executed, the symbol display mode for showing the third symbol is variably displayed, Without being limited to this, it is possible to variably display while changing the display mode (for example, the display mode in which only one segment is lit among the seven segments) different from the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. It may be configured to. With this configuration, when the 7-segment display unit 1600 is repeatedly turned on and off at high speed during the variable display of the third symbol, the particular third symbol is stopped and displayed by the afterimage of light. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a person is misunderstood.

In addition, as a variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600, the player visually recognizes a high-speed variable display period during which the player cannot visually recognize the individual symbol display modes that are variably displayed, and the individual symbol display modes that are variably displayed. Easy low speed fluctuation display period is set, and the high speed fluctuation display period is variably displayed in a display mode different from the third symbol, and the low speed fluctuation display period is variably displayed in a symbol display mode showing the third symbol. You may do it. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the sudden stop of the third symbol while suppressing the erroneous recognition that the third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the afterimage of light during high-speed fluctuation. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the variable display contents using the variable display of the inner reel 811 and the variable display of the segment display unit 1600 will be described. In this control example, as described above, the variable display of the third symbol executed using the inner reel 811, the variable display of the third symbol executed using the outer reel 821, and the segment display unit 1600 are used. The variable display of the third symbol to be executed is configured to be executable, and further, in association with one special symbol variable display, the above-mentioned plurality of devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, segment display) The variable display (mixed variable display) of the third symbol using the unit 1600) is configured to be executable.

Further, in the present control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the above-described mixed variable display is more easily executed than when it is a big hit. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of devices capable of variably displaying the third symbol, the player is expected to perform the variable display (mixed variable display) of the third symbol using the plurality of devices. In addition to being able to, it is possible to suggest to the player using a gorgeous effect (mixed variation display) that there is a high probability that the special symbol jackpot is won.

FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed in the mixed variable display (special reach 1) using the inner reel 811 and the segment display unit 1600. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 125, when the special reach 1 is set as the variation display mode of the third symbol, first, variation display (normal variation display) for rotating the inner reel 811 is executed. The special symbol lottery result is a big hit (hit) is temporarily stopped by the combination of the third symbol indicating that it is not (including a slight swing state to the extent that the player thinks it has stopped). After that, the displacement member 670 is changed to a position (fourth position) that covers the entire display surface of the inner reel 811, and the displacement member 670 is changed to the initial position (first position) again. The effect mode shown in 112 is displayed.

In the effect mode shown in FIG. 112, the third symbol indicating “7” is stopped and displayed on the left 7-segment display unit 1600 and the right 7-segment display unit 1600c, and the inner reel 811b is in the arrow direction (from top to bottom). Is rotating towards. In this state, the left outer reel 821a and the right outer reel 821c are controlled so that the second area corresponding to the 7-segment display unit 1600 (the area where the inner reel 811 is not visible to the player) is located in the display window 880. Only the inner and outer reels 821b are controlled such that the first area in which the player can visually recognize the inner reel 811 is located in the display window 880.

By performing different operation control depending on the effect mode performed on the three outer reels 821 in this way, mixed variation display can be performed. Then, in the inner reel 811b, the third symbol imitating "7" is stopped and displayed in any of the display areas displayed in the display window 880, so that the special symbol lottery result of this time is a big hit. To inform the player.

That is, according to the effect mode shown in FIG. 112, even if the third symbol imitating “7” is stopped and displayed at any of the upper position, the middle position, and the lower position of the inner reel 811b, it is a big hit. Since the effect (variable display) is executed, it is possible to easily inform the player that the effect that is likely to be a big hit is being executed.

In addition, with respect to the effect mode shown in FIG. 112, only the corresponding displacement member 670 (middle displacement member 670b) may be varied so as to vary the display area of the inner reel 811b. The third design imitating "7" displayed on the segment display unit 1600 is made to emit red or blue, and the color of the third design of the inner reel 811b showing that the jackpot is won is configured to be limited. May be.

Next, the variable display content using the outer reel 821 will be described with reference to FIG. 113. In the present control example, as the effect during the variable display using the inner reel 811, the special reach 2 effect of rotating the outer reel 821 can be executed. This special reach 2 effect is an effect in which the symbols of the left outer reel 821a, the inner outer reel 821b, and the right outer reel 821c that constitute the outer reel 821 are synchronized and rotated.

FIG. 113( a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect contents of the special reach 2. As shown in FIG. 113(a), the outer reel 821 slowly rotates in the forward direction while the inner reel 811 rotates in the high speed in the forward direction (speed of 1/3 of the rotation speed of the inner reel 811), The effect in which the special display mode 823 is gradually displayed in the display area in the display window 880 is executed. Since the third area in which the special display mode 823 is printed is a non-transparent area in which the inner reel 811 cannot be visually recognized, the display area of the inner reel 811 becomes gradually narrower depending on the rotation status of the outer reel 821, and the outer reel 821 is displayed. When the display is stopped while the inner reel 811 is completely covered, as shown in FIG. 113(b), a display symbol indicating that the jackpot is won is displayed.

In FIGS. 113(a) and 113(b), while the inner reel 811 is rotating at high speed in the forward direction, the outer reel 821 is slowly rotated in the forward direction, so that the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 is increased. In the above, the example of effect in which the special display mode (823a, 823b, 823c) displayed in the third area (821a3, 821b3, 821c3) of the outer reel 821 is interlockedly rotated so as to be pushed out, is not limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the inner reel 811 and the rotation direction of the outer reel 821 may be opposite to each other. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the inner reel 811 is rotating at a speed faster than before.

113(a) and 113(b) show an example in which the outer reel 821 is driven in one direction at a constant rotation speed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, shown in FIG. 113(a). From the above state, the outer reel 821 is controlled so that the rotation direction thereof is the reverse direction (direction opposite to the forward direction), or the outer reel 821 does not stop in the state shown in FIG. The rotation may be continued. In this case, after passing through the state shown in FIG. 113(b) rather than the speed at the time of shifting (rotating) from the state shown in FIG. 113(a) to the state shown in FIG. 113(b), It is preferable that the speed until the state of FIG. 113(a) is reached is increased again. As a result, it is possible to relatively lengthen the period that makes it seem that the special display mode is stopped and displayed in the display window 880.

In addition, in the present control example, as described with reference to FIG. 113, the reels constituting the outer reel 821 (the left outer reel 821a, the middle outer reel 821b, and the right outer reel 821c) are rotated while being aligned. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be driven separately, like the inner reel 811, for example.

Next, the effect contents of the special reach 3 effect (pseudo variable effect) will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents of the decorative symbol display device in the pseudo variable effect. In this control example, during the dynamic display period (during the variable display period) for dynamically displaying the display symbol for indicating the one-time lottery result of the special symbol, it is as if the lottery result is displayed a plurality of times. It is configured to execute the pseudo-variable effect that is shown in the figure.

In this pseudo variation effect, during one dynamic display period, the re-variation effect of causing the display symbol to be stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) and then to start changing again is configured to be executed a plurality of times. The larger the number of times this re-variation effect is executed, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot.

Here, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 using the liquid crystal display device, for example, by displaying the number of re-variation effects (pseudo consecutive times) performed during the pseudo-variation effect on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, Although it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example does not have a liquid crystal display device, and the number of re-variation effects executed during the pseudo-variation effects for the player. There is a problem that it is difficult to inform the (pseudo consecutive number) in an easy-to-understand manner.

Therefore, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is changed every time the re-variation effect is executed to notify the player of the number of times the re-variation effect has been executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in this control example, each time the re-variation effect is executed, the displacement member 670 is configured to be variable so that the display area of the decorative pattern display device 800 is narrowed, and each time the re-variation effect is executed. , The number of effective lines in the display area is reduced. With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the effective line to be watched by the player, and thus it is possible to prevent the process of stopping and displaying the combination of display symbols corresponding to the jackpot from being overlooked. ..

As shown in FIG. 114A, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a displacement member 670. Further, a lightning bolt LED 671 which is a light emitting means composed of an LED lamp is arranged at four corners of the variable display device unit 80. The first lightning bolt LED 671a is located on the lower left side of the variable display device unit 80 and the second lightning bolt is located on the upper left side. The LED 671b, the third lightning LED 671c is provided on the upper right side, and the fourth lightning LED 671d is provided on the lower right side. In this control example, when the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed at the corresponding position of each lightning LED 671, the first special line L1 to the fifth special line L5 that are special effective lines are formed, and the fifth special line L5 is formed. By stopping the special symbol R6 (a symbol imitating a black star), each inner reel 811 is configured to be re-rotated (so-called pseudo variable effect).

Specifically, the rotation (fluctuation) of each inner reel 811 is started corresponding to the change of the special symbol, the combination symbol R3a is stopped at the upper stage and the lower stage of the left inner reel 811a, and then the upper stage of the right inner reel 811c. And when the combination symbol R3b is stopped in the lower stage, the four lightning LEDs 671 are turned on, and the first special line L1 to the fourth special line L4 are formed. Then, in that state, the rotation speed of the inner reel 811b is gradually reduced, and when the special symbol R6 is stopped and displayed on the fifth special line L5, the first special line L1 to the fifth special line L5 are predetermined. That is, the specific display symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 114(a)), and the displacement member 670 changes in the direction of narrowing the display area of the inner reel 811 (see FIG. 114(b)). Each inner reel 811 is changed again (rotated) (the first pseudo change effect is executed).

When the first pseudo variation effect is executed, the display area of the inner reel 811 becomes narrower than usual because the displacement member 670 is changed, so that the number of effective lines of the display symbol is 5 lines (S1 to S3 and It decreases from V1, V2) to 3 lines (see FIG. 114(b)). In the present control example, the displacement members 670 are arranged above and below the variable display device unit 80, and the displacement members 670 are variably operated so as to cover the display area of the inner reel 811, thereby narrowing the display area of the inner reel 811. Since it is configured, the effective lines in the left-right direction (fourth line S4, fifth line S5) formed in the display area during the first pseudo-variable effect are different from the first line S1 to the third line S3. Formed in position.

Specifically, the fourth line S4 is formed between the first line S1 and the second line S2 (see FIG. 110(a)), and the second line S2 and the third line S3 (see FIG. 110(a)). ) And the fifth line S5 is formed. By changing the position where the effective line of the display symbol is formed in accordance with the size of the display area set in the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration in which the display area of the inner reel 811 is variable in this way, the game is played. The display pattern can be stopped and displayed in a display mode that is easy for the user to understand.

Although a detailed description is omitted, the reel MPU 114a that controls the drive of the inner reel 811 receives a command including information indicating the currently activated line type from the audio lamp control device 113, and Based on the configuration, the stop position of the display symbol is controlled. Therefore, in the configuration in which the position where the effective line of the display symbol is formed (vertical position) can be changed, the display symbol can be stopped and displayed at an appropriate position.

In addition to the configuration described above, for example, a detection unit (sensor) for detecting the actual variable position of the displacement member 670 is provided, and the reel MPU 114a determines the effective line formation position based on the detection result of the detection unit. It may be configured to determine and determine the stop position of the display symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of commands (information amount) output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and to determine the actual position of the displacement member 670, the displacement Even when the member 670 is not operating normally and is abnormal (at the time of failure), the display symbol can be stopped in an appropriate display mode.

In this control example, when the size of the display area is changed by changing the displacement member 670 during the pseudo variation effect, the position where the effective line of the display symbol is formed is changed according to the size of the display area. However, the displacement member 670 is not limited to this, and the displacement member 670 is in the initial position (see FIG. 114A), that is, normally 5 effective lines (S1 to S3 and V1, V2( 110(a)) In the formed state, only the effective line forming position may be variably set so that the second line S2 and the third line S3 become effective lines.

Returning to FIG. 114(b), the description will be continued. During the first pseudo variation effect (special reach 3), a maximum of two display areas where the display symbols (see FIG. 108) printed on each inner reel 811 are visible are formed. In this state, it is not possible to form an effective line in an oblique direction, so that two effective lines (fourth line S4 and fifth effective line S5) are partially formed on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c. The position to be set is set as the stop position of the display symbol. Then, in the inner reel 811b, in addition to the positions forming a part of the above-mentioned two effective lines (fourth line S4, fifth effective line S5), the position where the fifth special line L5 is formed is the stop of the display symbol. Set as a position.

That is, during the first pseudo-variable effect, the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c execute the variable display (two-frame variation) for stopping and displaying the display symbol at two positions, and the inner reel 811b displays the symbol. Is configured to perform variable display (three frame variation) for stopping and displaying at three positions.

Thus, even if the display areas of the inner reels 811 are the same size, by varying the number of positions at which the display symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display mode for each inner reel 811 can be changed. , It is possible to provide the player with a novel production. Also, the number of frames of the variable display, that is, the number of positions that makes the player think that the display symbol will stop by slowing down the fluctuation speed while the display symbol is varying, the number of positions at which the display symbol can be stopped and displayed. It is possible to make the player easily understand at which position the display symbol stops in the current variable state of the displacement member 670 by making the display symbol different.

In addition, in the present control example, the lightning LED 671 and the combination symbol R3 are combined as described above, so that the lightning bolt runs toward the position where the fifth special line L5 is formed (see FIG. 114(a)). ), so that the player can easily pay attention to which display symbol is stopped and displayed on the newly formed effective line, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other You may comprise so that it may become a symbol or a pattern.

Further, in the present control example, a new effective line is formed by combining the display pattern printed on the inner reel 811 and the light emitting means (lightning LED 671) arranged in the variable display device unit 80. However, in addition to this, for example, when a specific display symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific position while a movable accessory for decoration is positioned at a specific position, a new effective line is formed. It may be configured. In addition, the display symbol may be stopped and displayed first, and then a new effective line may be formed when the light emitting means (lightning LED 671) emits light. In this way, a display symbol that can be displayed in a variable manner and an element other than the display symbol are combined so as to satisfy a predetermined condition to form a new effective line, so that the player grasps the lottery result of the special symbol. When paying attention, not only the variable display mode of the display symbol but also the light emitting mode of the light emitting means and the movable mode of the decorative movable accessory, so that the player is prevented from getting tired of the game early. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the display content of the display area of the inner reel 811 during the second pseudo variation effect will be described. When the special symbol R6 is stopped and displayed on the fifth special line L5 during the first pseudo variation effect described with reference to FIG. 114(b), the second pseudo variation effect is executed and the displacement member 670 is moved. The display area of the inner reel 811 is changed toward a direction in which the display area is narrowed, and each inner reel 811 starts changing (rotating) again. During the second pseudo variation effect, the display area of the inner reel 811 is reduced to one display symbol, and only one effective line of the display symbol (second line S2) is formed.

Then, the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c are in the reach state in which the red 7 symbol R2 for indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit is stopped and displayed, and the player is in the middle reel The variable display is performed in which only the type of display symbol that is stopped and displayed in 811b is watched.

Next, a flow of operation contents of various devices while the pseudo variation effect (special reach 3) is being executed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a timing chart showing the operation contents of various devices during the pseudo continuous production (during the pseudo variation production). As shown in FIG. 116, when the pseudo variable effect (special reach 3) is executed, various devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600, displacement member 670) provided in the variable display device unit 80. , Lightning LED 671) is configured to be driven at a predetermined timing.

Specifically, first, each inner reel 811 rotates in accordance with the timing when the variation of the special symbol is executed, and first, the left inner reel 811a stops control so that the left combination symbol R3a stops at a specific position. After that, the inner right reel 811c is stop-controlled so that the right combination symbol R3b is stopped at a specific position. After that, the lightning LED 671 is turned on, and four effective lines (first special line L1 to fourth special line L4) are formed. When the special symbol R6 of the inner reel 811b is stopped on the fifth special line L5 that is effectively determined in the state where the first special line L1 to the fourth special line L4 are formed (FIG. 114(a ))) The first chance is established, and the pseudo-variable effect continues.

When the first chance is established, each inner reel 811 starts changing again, and the displacement member 670 moves from the first position, which is the initial position, to the second position (the area on the display surface of the inner reel 811 is the first position). (The position becomes narrower than that), and a variable display state in which there are three effective lines is formed (see FIG. 114(b)). In this state, regardless of the stop display mode of the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c, an effect for attracting attention is executed only if the special symbol R6 stops on the fifth special line L5. Here, when the special symbol R6 is stopped on the fifth special line L5, finally, each inner reel 811 starts changing again, and the displacement member 670 is changed from the second position to the third position ( See FIG. 115).

When the displacement member 670 is changed to the third position, the number of effective lines becomes one (the second line S2), and both the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c reach the jackpot winning symbol (third symbol). The red 7 symbol R2 is stopped and displayed so as to be in the state (see FIG. 115). As shown in FIG. 116, the upper limit of the effect display time to be executed corresponding to the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be long, and the effect is executed while the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the effect display. ..

In this control example, using the period in which one special symbol variation is executed, the pseudo variation effect described above, that is, the effect of varying the effective symbol row in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed is executed. Although it is configured, it may be configured to execute the effect of varying the effective symbol row over a plurality of special symbol variations as a configuration other than that.

In this case, for example, based on the winning information command set in the prefetching process (see S513 of FIG. 132) executed by the main control device 110 described later with reference to FIG. 132, the special symbol after the next change It is preferable to determine the lottery result in advance and set the effect (continuous effect) so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol variations based on the result of the advance determination. With this configuration, it is possible to stop and display the lottery result of the special symbol a plurality of times during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed, so the special symbol executed at any timing for the player It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the continuous effect has been executed in association with the variable display of.

In addition, in the present control example, the pseudo variable effect is executed so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol is gradually decreased, but the player can be changed by changing the effective line of the third symbol. It may be configured to provide a new variable display effect, for example, it may be configured to execute the pseudo variable effect so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually increases.

In this control example, when the pseudo variation effect is executed, the more the number of re-variations increases (the longer the variation time that is set), the higher the possibility that the jackpot is won. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the reach display is performed in a state where the number of pseudo stops of the third symbol during the pseudo variable effect is a predetermined number, it is highly possible that the jackpot is won. It may be configured to. As a result, in the period from the execution of the pseudo-variable effect to the end of the pseudo-variable effect, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while always having an expectation about the jackpot.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
First, the content of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 126. First, FIG. 117 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 executes main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variable display device unit 80, and lottery of display result in the second symbol display device. ..

Further, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction. In this control example, the payout control device 111 is part of the sub control device and various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 in one direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout control device is not limited to this. Various commands may be bidirectionally transmitted so that the command from 111 can be received by main controller 110.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 135) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65 is an axis. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the right side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and controls to them via the input/output port 205. Send a signal.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, and turns on and off lights in the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamps 34, and the 7-segment display unit 1600) 227. This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the variable display device unit 80 that performs output and variable effect (variable display). A drive motor KM (inner reel drive motors KM1a to 1c, outer reel drive motors KM2a to 2c, displacement member drive motors KM3a to 3c) for driving various devices provided in the variable display device unit 80 is driven. Is. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 in which a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data are stored, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the drive motor KM, and the frame button 22 are connected to the input/output port 225.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the variable display device unit 80 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and based on the determined display mode. The drive control of the various drive motors KM and the light emission control of the 7-segment display unit 1600 are executed. Further, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the display mode of the variable display executed by using the variable display device unit 80 is changed. And various devices such as changing the light emission mode of the lamp display device 227 in the reach state, and changing the target (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600) for performing variable display. Change the command content for.

Although not shown, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to receive the detection result of the detection means for detecting the drive result of each drive motor KM. The type of the symbol display that is stopped and displayed can be determined based on the received detection result of each detection unit. With this, it is determined whether or not the display mode determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display mode actually stopped and displayed match. If they do not match, an error command is set and an error notification is given. It is configured to run. As a result, it is possible to prevent the variable display that is uncomfortable for the player from being executed.

Since this control example has different variable display modes, for example, when it is determined that a problem occurs in the operation content of the inner reel 811, the variable display mode that does not use the inner reel 811 (for example, the outer reel 811). 821 and a variable display mode using the 7-segment display unit 1600) may be performed. Accordingly, even if a problem occurs in one variable display mode, it is possible to cause the player to perform the variable display without causing any discomfort. Further, in this case, the changing display mode of the switching destination may be changed according to the set game state, or the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) to set the change mode. Is also good.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described. In the main control device 110, special symbols (first symbol) lottery, ordinary symbols (second symbol) lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, etc. It performs 10 main processes. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 118, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display control condition in the variable display device unit 80. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform settings and the like.

For the special symbol lottery and the condition setting of the display control in the first symbol display device 37 and the variable display device unit 80, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the purpose, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A random number counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the random number counter C4 per second. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

For example, each counter is updated at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 137). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b each including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are adjusted in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. Are stored respectively. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas is normally filled with spheres. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through the ball entrance (through gate) 66.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 137).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is stored. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 120(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the per first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number which is the big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period of a low probability state of a special symbol) and a high probability of a high probability of being a special symbol jackpot than that low probability (special It is divided into two types: for the period when the symbol has a high probability state). That is, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 120(a)) is composed of a first random number table for low probability and a first random number table for high probability, and is included in each table. The number of random numbers used as jackpots is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first random number table 202a for low probability of special symbols and the first random number table 202a for high probability of special symbols are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is out of alignment, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. Become.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first per random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there is one random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is the first per random number table 202a for low probability. (See FIG. 120(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 400, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/400".

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value "0 to 9" is the first random number table 202a for high probability (Fig. 120(a ) Reference). In this way, at the time of high probability of special symbols, the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 10. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of special symbols is "1/40".

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and is provided in the ROM 202 together with the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 120(b)). Specifically, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 39", the big hit A (16R probability variation big hit) is selected, and when it is "40 to 79", the big hit B (16R). The short-time jackpot) is selected, and when it is “80 to 99”, the jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot) is selected.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot types set in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 120(b)) are three types of big hit A, big hit B, and big hit C, but not limited to this, four kinds. The above jackpot type may be configured to be selected, or two or less types, for example, only one type of jackpot type may be selected. Further, the jackpot type of the special symbol 1 and the jackpot type selected respectively for the jackpot of the special symbol 2 and the proportion may be set to be different.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects a stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the variable display device unit 80, and after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the reach symbol "disengagement reach". Two stop (effect) patterns (for example, a range of 90 to 99) and "completely missed" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is stored.

From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability time and a special symbol for low probability time, and a range of random number values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the special symbol, or the like.

For example, in the high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not unnecessarily selected, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability. Is selected, and it becomes easy to select “completely off”. In addition, in the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 79, which is narrow and for low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the variable display device unit 80 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 137) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 121) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. ing.

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 121(a), the variation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 121(b)) and a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 121(c)). And at least the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 121(d)). In addition, when the latent probability state (probability change time shortening state) is set as the game state, the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is referred to, and when the time saving state is set as the game state, it is removed. The (variable) variation pattern table 202d3 is referred to.

First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. As the variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value for each fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, "0 to 50" is used for the variation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds), "51 to 179" is used for the variation patterns of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds). ), the variation patterns “180 to 198” are set as the determination values of the variation type counter CS1. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting the variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big jackpot, hits the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set. It is selected from the use variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 121C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The (normal) variation pattern table for deviation 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. If the special symbol lottery result is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete disconnection is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", disconnection reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, short deviation (7 seconds) having a relatively short fluctuation time and long deviation (10 seconds) having a long fluctuation time are set. "0-98" is set for the short deviation (7 seconds) and "99-198" is set for the long deviation (10 seconds) as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

For the out-of-range reach, "0-149" for various out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), "150-197" for various out-of-range super reach (60 seconds), and out-of-range special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal game state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-regular (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type selection counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

121D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is out when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is different from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 described above.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete disconnection is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out of the normal gaming state is set to be low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variation time of the deviation from increasing at the time of the probability change and the increase in the period until a big hit occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is delayed during the probability variation game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot and the player feels bored.

As described above with reference to FIG. 121(b) to FIG. 121(d), normal reach (30 seconds), super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are jackpot wins for special symbols. In the present control example, the content of each variation pattern table is defined such that the larger the variation pattern having a longer variation time, the higher the expectation of the jackpot.

Then, when a variation pattern indicating normal reach (30 seconds), super reach (60 seconds), or special reach (90 seconds) is set, a variation pattern command to that effect is sent to the voice lamp controller 113. The reach effect is set based on the variation pattern command output and received by the voice lamp control device 113 side. Here, in this control example, a plurality of reach effect modes are prepared, and for example, among the inner reels 811, the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c have the same display symbol (blue 7) on the activated line. The design reach effect mode in which the symbol R1 or the red 7 symbol R2) is stopped and displayed, the combination reach effect mode in which the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed in a specific position, and the lightning LED 671 is turned on, and the outer reel 821 is rotated. It has a rotating reach effect mode.

That is, from the main controller 110, only the command indicating that the reach effect is to be executed and the variable display period is output as the variable display effect set on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the audio lamp control device 113 is output. The side is configured to select which reach effect mode to set as the reach effect mode to be executed this time.

Then, when setting the reach effect mode to be executed this time in the voice lamp control device 113, the current game state, the result of the special symbol lottery, the presence/absence of an operation on the frame button 22 by the player, a randomly obtainable value It is configured to be set based on (value of the production counter) and the like. With this configuration, since various reach production modes can be provided to the player, the reach production can be executed at various timings in the execution process of the variable display production. Can prevent you from getting tired of playing early.

In this control example, the content of the reach effect mode to be executed this time is set at the timing of receiving the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, that is, at the start timing of the new special symbol variation. , But not limited to this. For example, the stop display mode (stop appearance) of the left inner reel 811a for which variable display is stopped may be first determined, and the reach effect mode to be executed this time may be set according to the determination result. With this configuration, it is possible to change the timing for setting the reach effect mode. Further, the timing for setting the reach effect mode can be different from the timing at which the variation of the special symbol is started, that is, the timing at which the execution processing is concentrated in the pachinko machine 10, so that various processing of the pachinko machine 10 can be performed. It is possible to suppress a situation where a large load is temporarily applied.

In addition, as a production (so-called gaze production) for ending the special reach 3 (see FIGS. 114 and 115), which is a pseudo-variable production, at an intermediate stage of the production, for example, this time the lottery result is out, and the variation pattern In the case of "normal reach" in which the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as, the short gaze effect in which the fluctuation display ends without the first chance being established is executed, and the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set as the fluctuation pattern. In the case of "super reach", it may be configured to execute the medium gaze effect in which the first chance is established and the second chance is not established.

By executing such a gambling effect, it is possible to execute the same effect mode as the pseudo variable effect even when the change time of 90 seconds is not set, so that the first half of the pseudo variable effect is given to the player. It is possible to make it easy to experience the part, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game without experiencing at least part of the pseudo-variable effect.

Furthermore, for example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big jackpot and the variation pattern of the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set, the jackpot of the special symbol is achieved at the timing when the second chance in the pseudo variable effect can be established. You may comprise so that the combination of the display symbols (3rd symbol) for showing having won may be stopped and displayed. As a result, after the first chance has been established, the production of whether or not the second chance is established (production of whether or not the special symbol R6 is stopped on the fifth special line), or the blue 7 symbol The effect contents can be set so that any one of the effects in which the R1 and the red 7 symbols R2 are in the reach state is executed. Therefore, regardless of which effect content is set, the player can be expected to win the jackpot, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, for example, when a variation pattern having a variation time of 60 seconds is set, after the first chance is established (see FIG. 114(a)), an effect for establishing the second chance ( 114(b)) may be skipped and an effect (skip effect) for executing the final stage (see FIG. 115) of the pseudo-variable effect may be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect. It should be noted that, even in an effect mode other than the special reach 3, it may be configured to execute a gratuit effect or a skip effect corresponding to the length of the set variation time.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process, and acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 66. , And is stored in the normal symbol reserve sphere storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that normally wins the design is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 120(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. , When the second random number table (see FIG. 120(c)) matches the value of the random number that is a winning number, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second random number table is for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which a normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability that the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher than the low probability (of a normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for a period of time saving state), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

As shown in FIG. 120(c), at the time of low probability of a normal symbol, there are 24 random number values that are hits of the normal symbol, and the range thereof is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot for a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is within the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 140 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In addition, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the second winning opening 140 is opened only for “0.2 seconds×1 time”, The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds×2 times”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random number values that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 140 is opened “×1 second×2 times”. In this way, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display is very short as “30 seconds→3 seconds” as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and the release period of the second winning opening 140 is further increased. Is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, so that the ball easily enters the second winning port 140. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second hit random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the second winning opening 140 is opened for "1 second x 2 times", but the opening time The number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 137).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main controller 110, the jackpot lottery and the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variable display device unit 80 are set according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 119, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described. As described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least the first per random number table 202a, the first per type selection table 202b, the second per random number table 202c, and the variation pattern table 202d. Since the contents of each table provided in the ROM 202 are as described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 119(b), a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved sphere number. Counter 203d, special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e, normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, time saving medium counter 203h, big hit flag 203i, time saving flag 203k, counter buffer 203y, It has at least the other memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1), and one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) The respective values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first Among the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

Then, in the main controller 110, when the special symbol is selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having the smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data is shifted only for the reserved areas (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) and each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired in accordance with the starting winning, immediately the original special symbol jackpot drawing is performed. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the lottery for the original special symbol is performed, based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to the start winning, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is performed. Predicting will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. In addition, the various information includes hit/fail, stop type, and variation pattern.

Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp controlling device 113 extracts the winning/prohibiting, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the special symbol 1 of the RAM 233 or The special symbol 2 is stored in the prize information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol.

In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From this, various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is predicted. In addition, this prediction (look-ahead) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or probability variation gaming state) at the time when the variation corresponding to the starting winning is started. .. Thereby, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning can be accurately predicted.

The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second winning opening 140 (special symbol 2), and the above-described special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a has the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1). ) Is changed to the second winning opening 140 (special symbol 2), only detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) like the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 66, and the acquired data is available in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. When data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserve ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, like the case of the other reserved areas The shift processing is performed to pack the data of No. 1 into the reserved area having the area number smaller by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, the variable display (variable display device unit) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64. This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed at 80 up to four times. This special symbol 1 hold sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time the ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of spheres of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 1 1 They are added (see S504 in FIG. 131). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 128).

The value of this special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding sphere number command (see S211 in FIG. 128, S505 in FIG. 131). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the holding ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball count counter 203d is changed. The value of the sphere itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of spheres of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual sphere of the variable display suspended by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, it can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the number of holding balls command, and the display holding device for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 each time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the holding sphere number pattern on the variable display device unit 80 based on the holding sphere number notified by the display holding sphere number command.

The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of holding balls of the second winning opening 140 (special symbol 2). This special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d only in that the first winning hole (special symbol 1) is changed to the second winning hole 140 (special symbol 2). Since the other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted. The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is incremented by 1 in the process of S510 of FIG. 131, and is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 128). Also, the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S206 of FIG. 128, S511 of FIG. 131). reference).

The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a maximum of 4 times the number of holding spheres (standby number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere in the through gate 66. Is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the sphere passes through the through gate 66 and the number of spheres for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 ( (See S804 in FIG. 127). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 of FIG. 133).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S803 of FIG. 134: No).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation state of a special symbol (high probability state of a special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol. If the value of the probability variation flag 203g is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). This probability variation flag 203g is set to an initial value of OFF, and in the jackpot control process, the start timing of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) or the jackpot C (2R probability variation with short short no jackpot) (jackpot game If it is determined that it is the end timing), it is set to ON (see S1214 in FIG. 138). Then, in the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 129), the game state is referred to for determining whether or not the state is a probability variation state (see S302 in FIG. 129), and is turned off when the next jackpot game is started. It is set (see S1202 in FIG. 138).

Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 129, S208) is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 129, S208), the value of the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if the value is ON, based on the first random number table 202a for high probability, special symbol lottery is performed. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation flag 203g is OFF, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

In this control example, the timing for setting the probability variation flag 203g to ON is the start timing (big hit) based on the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) or the jackpot C (2R probability variation with short short no jackpot) in the jackpot control process. Although it is set as the game end timing), it may be set so that the lottery for the special symbol executed after the jackpot is finished can be performed with a high probability state, for example, it is set to ON at the timing when the ending effect of the jackpot game is finished. It may be configured to do, and if the condition for executing the first special symbol lottery after the jackpot game is completed, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON before the special symbol lottery is executed. It may be configured to.

In addition, the timing of setting the probability variation flag 203g to OFF is assumed to be when the jackpot game is started, but is not limited to this, for example, a display symbol (second symbol) showing that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. It may be configured to be turned off at the timing when is stopped and displayed.

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time saving state. When the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol. This hour saving medium counter 203h is set to 100 when the big hit B (16R hour short big hit) is being executed at the start timing of the ending effect (that is, the end timing of the big hit game) by the big hit control processing (see FIG. 138). See S1215). Then, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not the time is usually shortened in the symbol variation process (see S708 of FIG. 133), in the special symbol variation process, one is subtracted each time the variation time elapses. (See S205 in FIG. 128). When the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is greater than 0 and the above-described probability variation flag 203g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state and the time reduction state of the special symbol.

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203i is turned on, the jackpot game in which the variable winning a prize device 65 is set to the open state is executed by the jackpot control process (FIG. 138, S1104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The time saving flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special time saving state (high probability state of a normal symbol), and if the value of the time saving flag 203k is on, the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol. If the value of the time saving flag 203k is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a special symbol (a low probability state of a normal symbol). When the initial value of the time saving flag 203k is set to OFF, and it is determined in the jackpot control process that it is the start timing (end timing of the jackpot game) of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot). , Are set to on (see S1216 in FIG. 138). Then, in the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 129), the game state is referred to for determining whether or not the state is a probability variation state (see S302 in FIG. 129), and is turned off when the next jackpot game is started. It is set (see S1202 in FIG. 138).

As described above, in the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), both the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203k are set to ON, and the probability variation game and the time saving game are given. On the other hand, in the jackpot C (2R probability variation with time shortening no jackpot), although the probability variation flag 203g is set to on, the time saving flag 203k remains off, and the latent probability game state in which only the probability variation game is given is provided.

Here, the latent probability game state (probability change state of the special symbol) is set to a high probability that the lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 is a big hit, It is difficult for the player to determine whether the current game is a normal game or a latent probability game unless it is indicated by changing the staging mode that the game is in the latent probability game state. On the other hand, in the time saving game, it is easy to determine whether it is a normal game or a time saving game because the number of times of opening and the opening time of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 are changed. Is.

Therefore, the player can easily recognize that it is a probability variation game when a time saving game is given together with the probability variation game based on the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) (when the probability variation game state is set). If only a certainty variation game is given based on the big hit C (2R certainty variation with or without short time jackpot), it becomes difficult to recognize that it is a certainty variation game (so-called latent probability variation state). As a result, the player needs to guess whether the game state is the normal game or the probability variation game, and the interest of the player can be improved.

The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 201. The stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the computer and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the work area (work area) that stores the values of various flags and counters, I/O, etc. Have

The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is cut off by the main process (see FIG. 137), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 136). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 135) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. In the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, an outer reel operation table 222c, an inner reel operation table 222d, a symbol operation table 222e, a special effect scenario table 222f, and a symbol group storage area 222g are stored. ing.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is already known, and therefore will be briefly described. However, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, roughly changes the variation pattern command. More detailed variation content is determined from the variation pattern selection table 222a based on the content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.)). Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation content instructed from the main control device 110, one fluctuation mode is determined from a plurality of types by lottery.

Here, with reference to FIG. 123, description will be given based on the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in this control example. FIG. 123A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of 222a in the variation pattern selection table in this control example. In this control example, in addition to the lottery result or the determination result of the special symbol, if the set variation pattern (variation time) is a long period (long period), refer to the dedicated variation pattern table, and the third symbol The variable display mode is set.

Next, the contents of the long-variation fluctuation pattern table 222a3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123(b) is a schematic diagram in which the contents stipulated in the long-variation fluctuation pattern table 222a3 are schematically designated. As shown in FIG. 123, the variation pattern table for long variation 222a3 is the type of variation time (for example, 60 seconds or 90 seconds) set in the special symbol variation this time, and the lottery result of this special symbol variation, The effect mode is set based on the currently set operation scenario (operation pattern) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223j.

The outer reel operation table 222c is a data table in which the operation contents of the outer reel 821 are stored. In this outer reel operation table 222c, a plurality of operation scenarios corresponding to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 are set, and the operation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern set in the variation display setting process (see S2213 in FIG. 145) are set. The operation scenario to be performed is determined.

In the operation scenario determined here, the operation content (motor data) of the outer reel drive motors KM2a to 2c is set in association with the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p, and the operation control process (see S2211 in FIG. 149). Each time the outer reel control process (see S3002 of FIG. 150) is executed, the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p is updated (see S3102 of FIG. 150), and the corresponding motor data is set (see S3104 of FIG. 150). ). The drive of each outer reel drive motor KM2a to 2c is controlled by the motor MPU based on the motor data set here.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present control example, the dynamic display is made to correspond to the variable display of the special symbol, that is, until the display symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the third symbol). In addition to (variable display of symbols), as an effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol, an effect display for driving the outer reel 821 and the inner reel 811 is configured to be executed.

That is, it is possible to switch between the case where the display symbol printed on the display surfaces of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 is used as the third symbol and the case where it is used as the effect symbol for effect. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which variable display mode (motion display mode) is for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, and it is possible to provide a game with a surprising effect. ..

Further, in one dynamic display executed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display mode for showing the third symbol is also configured to be switched. More specifically, for example, when a variation pattern in which a variation time of 60 seconds is set as a variation pattern of a special symbol is set, the display pattern printed on the inner reel 811 for the first 30 seconds is set. It is configured to be used as the third symbol, and the display symbol printed on the outer reel 821 is used as the third symbol for the last 30 seconds. As a result, it is possible to set a variation display mode that is difficult for the player to predict, and it is possible to provide a more surprising game.

In the present control example, any of the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, and the 7-segment display unit 1600 is configured to be in the variable display mode for displaying the third symbol, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, a light emitting means (display means) composed of a plurality of LEDs may be provided at a specific position of the game board 13, and the light emitting means (display means) may be used to execute the variable display of the third symbol. .. As a result, all of the variable display modes using the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, and the 7-segment display unit 1600 can be used as the variable display modes for effects, so that it is possible to execute effects with a higher degree of freedom. , The production effect can be enhanced. Further, during the variable display period of the special symbol, the light emitting means (display means) described above is used to notify that the special symbol is being variable displayed, and only when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the inner reel 811, The outer reel 821 or the 7-segment display unit 1600 may be used to stop and display the third symbol.

The inner reel operation table 222d is a data table in which the operation content of the inner reel 811 is stored. In this inner reel operation table 222d, a plurality of operation scenarios corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 are set, and correspond to the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation display setting process (see S2213 of FIG. 145). The operation scenario to be performed is determined.

In the operation scenario determined here, the operation content (motor data) of the inner reel drive motors KM1a to 1c is set in association with the value of the inner reel operation counter 223q, and the operation control process (see S2211 of FIG. 149). Each time the inner reel control process (see S3003 in FIG. 151) is executed, the value of the inner reel operation counter 223q is updated (see S3202 in FIG. 151), and the corresponding motor data is set (see S3204 in FIG. 151). ). The drive of each outer reel drive motor KM1a-1c is controlled by the motor MPU based on the motor data set here.

The symbol operation table 222e is an operation of each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600, displacement member 670) provided in the variable display device unit 80 according to the set game state or game condition. It is a data table in which the operation information referred when setting the initial state (operation pattern) of the aspect is stored. The pachinko machine 10 of the present control example sets a plurality of variable display modes (operation display modes) for indicating the special symbol lottery result (for example, a variable display mode using the inner reel 811 and a variable display mode using the outer reel 821). Mode, or any one of the variable display modes using the 7-segment display unit 1600) can be set). Then, when the variable display mode to be executed is made different by setting different game states, for example, it is necessary to position various devices in the initial state corresponding to the changed variable display mode. Since the symbol operation table 222e stores the initial state (operation pattern) of various devices corresponding to each variable display mode, drive control executed for each device when the variable display mode is changed is performed. Can be executed accurately.

Further, in the symbol operation table 222e, each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, etc.) provided in the variable display device unit 80 is used to perform a special effect even if the variable display mode is not variable. The 7-segment display unit 1600 and the displacement member 670) are configured to perform special motion control, and the symbol motion table 222e stores the initial state (motion pattern) of the special effect.

In addition, when a special jackpot jackpot is won and a jackpot game is executed, each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display portion 1600, displacement member 670) provided in the variable display device unit 80. ) Is used to execute the jackpot effect, and the symbol operation table 222e also stores the initial state (action pattern) of the jackpot effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 124, the contents stored in the symbol operation table 222e will be specifically described. As a game state, a normal state, or an operation pattern when a latent state is set, The reel 811 (the left inner reel 811a, the inner inner reel 811b, the right inner reel 811c) is defined as operable (indicated by “◯” in FIG. 124), and the outer reel 821 (the left outer reel 821a, the inner outer reel 821b, the right outer reel 821). The reel 821c) is defined as a first area (denoted as "first" in FIG. 124) formed of a transparent member, and the 7-segment display unit 1600 (left 7-segment display unit 1600a, middle 7-segment display unit 1600b, right) is defined. The 7-segment display unit 1600c) is defined as non-display (indicated by “x” in FIG. 124), and the displacement member 670 (the left displacement member 670a, the middle displacement member 670b, the right displacement member 670c) is in the first position (most open). The state (see FIG. 114(a))) and the prescribed operation pattern (first operation pattern) are stored.

When this first operation pattern is selected, the rotating operation of the inner reel 811 is executed in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the display symbol printed on the inner reel 811 is stopped and displayed as the third symbol. (See FIG. 110(a)).

Next, the inner reel 811 (the left inner reel 811a, the middle inner reel 811b, the right inner reel 811c) can be operated as the operation pattern when the time saving state or the probability variation state is set as the game state (in FIG. 124). The outer reel 821 (the left outer reel 821a, the inner outer reel 821b, and the right outer reel 821c) is defined as a second area (indicated as “second” in FIG. 124) in which the light emitting area 822 is formed. The 7-segment display unit 1600 (the left 7-segment display unit 1600a, the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b, the right 7-segment display unit 1600c) can be operated (indicated by “○” in FIG. 124), and the displacement member An operation pattern (second operation pattern) that defines 670 (the left displacement member 670a, the middle displacement member 670b, the right displacement member 670c) as the first position (the most open state (see FIG. 114(a))) is stored. ing.

When the second operation pattern is selected, the variable display of the 7-segment display unit 1600 is executed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the 7-segment display unit 1600 (FIG. 111). (See (a)). In this control example, the inner reel unit 810 operates even when the second operation pattern is set. That is, the inner reel unit 810 is configured to operate even when the second area of the outer reel 821 is displayed and the player cannot visually recognize the rotating state of the inner reel 811.

With such a configuration, for example, in the case where a problem occurs in the 7-segment display unit 1600 and the display mode of the 7-segment display unit 1600 makes it impossible to notify the lottery result of the special symbol without a sense of discomfort, The outer reel 821 is rotated so that the player can visually recognize the inner reel 811. It is possible to stop and display the lottery result by using the inner reel 811.

Returning to FIG. 124, the description of the contents stipulated in the symbol operation table 222e will be continued. In the state where the first motion pattern is set as the motion pattern, the content of the special reach (first special performance) executed when the first effect condition is satisfied is defined as the motion pattern “motion 3”.

In this "Operation 3", only the inner and inner reels 811b of the inner reels 811 can be operated, "○" is set, each outer reel 821 is set to the first position, and the left 7-segment display unit 1600a of the 7-segment display unit 1600 is set. And the right 7-segment display unit 1600c can be displayed, and the left displacement member 670a and the right displacement member 670c of the displacement member 670 can be variably operated in the first position, and the middle displacement member 670b can be variably operated in the range of the first position to the third position. The operation content is specified. When this operation pattern “operation 3” is set, the effect (special reach 1) described above with reference to FIG. 112 is executed.

Further, in the state where the first motion pattern is set as the motion pattern, the content of the special reach 2 (second special performance) executed when the second performance condition is satisfied is defined, and the first motion is defined as the motion pattern. The content of the special reach 3 (third special effect) executed when the third effect condition is satisfied in the state where the pattern is set is defined. In addition, "operation 6" is defined as an operation pattern corresponding to the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game.

In the special effect scenario table 222f, the operation control content for each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600, displacement member 670) when the special effect is executed is defined in association with the elapsed time. This is a data table that stores the operation control content corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223i, which is set when the special effect is executed and is regularly updated.

Next, the contents of the special effect scenario table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special effect scenario table 222f. As shown in FIG. 125, in the special effect scenario table 222f, various devices (inner reel 811, outer reel) when special effects (reach) 1 to 3 executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example are executed. 821, 7-segment display unit 1600, displacement member 670), the operation content is defined corresponding to the elapsed time (value of the scenario counter 223i). Since the scenario counter 223i is configured to update the counter value every 1 millisecond as described later, the scenario is actually defined in the special effect scenario table 222f in millisecond units. In FIG. 125, the scenario is defined in seconds (S units) for convenience of explanation.

First, in the special effect (reach) 1, a special effect scenario having an effect period of 60 seconds (60S) is associated and defined, and can be set when a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set. In this special effect (reach) 1, each inner reel 811 starts to rotate at the timing when the remaining variation time is 60 seconds, that is, the timing when the special symbol variation is started, and each outer reel 821, each inner reel 811. An operation scenario is defined in which the turning state is positioned in the first region (first position) so that the player can visually recognize it, and the displacement member 670 is positioned in the first position.

After that, the left inner reel 811a is stopped at the timing of the remaining fluctuation time of 55 seconds, the right outer reel 821c is stopped at the timing of the remaining fluctuation time of 50 seconds, and the middle inner reel 811b is stopped at the timing of the remaining fluctuation time of 40 seconds. Stop, that is, all the inner reels 811 are once stopped and displayed, and the 7-segment display unit 1600 is all turned on. Then, the left 7-segment display portion 1600a and the right 7-segment display portion 1600c are displayed with a pattern imitating "7" at the timing of the remaining variation time of 35 seconds, and the middle variation reel is displayed at the timing of the remaining variation time of 34 seconds. 811b is changed again (see FIG. 112). Then, the operation scenario is defined so that the inner reel 811b stops at the timing when the remaining fluctuation time is 5 seconds.

In this way, when various operation controls are executed for a plurality of devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600, displacement member 670), operation scenarios for each device are specified in advance. By doing so, the special effect can be smoothly executed.

The symbol group storage area 222g is data that stores information for limiting the symbol types (“0” to “9”) that can be selected when the display symbols to be stopped and displayed on the 7-segment display unit 1600 are set. In the area, a display symbol to be stopped and displayed is set using the symbol type included in the set symbol group.

The symbol group storage area 222g is a storage area in which a symbol group referred to when the stop display mode of the third symbol is set is stored. Here, the contents of the symbol group storage area 222g will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the symbol group storage area 222g.

As shown in FIG. 126, three symbol groups (symbol groups A to C) are defined in the symbol group storage area 222g, and each symbol group has a different number. Specifically, the symbol group A has numbers "0, 1, 7", the symbol group B has numbers "2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9", and the symbol group C has numbers "0. The numbers “9” are stored in association with each other.

In this symbol group storage area 222g, the time saving state is set as the game state, and the display mode of each stopped symbol when the variable display of the third symbol using the 7-segment display unit 1600 (see FIG. 111) is executed It is used when setting. As described above, in the present control example, only one segment (light emitting region 822) forming the seven segments is formed in a different form, and the light emitting region 822 is visible to the player even when the other segments are turned off. It is formed as an easy segment.

Therefore, in this control example, in order to suppress misidentification of the player, it is configured to execute a process of setting a stop symbol mode, and the symbol group storage area 222g is used in the process.

Returning to FIG. 122(b), the description will be continued. FIG. 122B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. In this RAM 223, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a remaining short time count counter 223g, A specific remaining period flag 223h, a scenario counter 223i, an effect counter 223j, a game state storage area 223k, an operation mode storage area 223m, a stop symbol storage area 223n, a returning flag 223l, a power off flag 223y, and other memory area 223z are provided at least. Has been.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (first area to fourth area for special symbol 1, first area to fourth area for special symbol 2), Winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From the, various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the prize information command is received, various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) notified by the prize information command is extracted as the prize information, and the prize information is changed to the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is four areas of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) or the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) (first area to fourth area). ), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, similarly to the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d of the main control device 110, the variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the variable display device unit 80). That is, it is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the special symbol 1 held in the main controller 110 up to 4 times at the maximum.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of balls to be held in the variable display is added by the ball entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of spheres is subtracted, a reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere number counter 223b (see S2308 in FIG. 142). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b is used to display the reserved sphere number pattern in the variable display device unit 80. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. The value of the counter 223b is configured to be notified to the player using a dedicated display means.

Further, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, holds the number of holding spheres (waiting number) of the variation effect of the special symbol 2 held in the main control device 110 at maximum 4 It is a counter that counts up to times. With the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223c, the number of reserved spheres is added by entering the second winning opening 140, and a special symbol 2 different from the display of the reserved sphere number symbol of the special symbol 1 on the dedicated display means. The only difference is that it is used for displaying the number of reserved balls, and the other points are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, based on the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, and the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c, the operation content to be output to the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 is changed. You may comprise, for example, you may provide the special sound and light emission mode performed only when both the number of reservation balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have reached the upper limit. As a result, it is possible to enthusiastically allow the player to play the game in order to store the reserved balls.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON in the fluctuation pattern reception process executed when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2302 in FIG. 142), and the fluctuation display in the variable display device unit 80 is performed. Is turned off when the setting is made (see S2602 in FIG. 145). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, the device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600) that executes the variable display of the third symbol is specified based on the received display variation pattern command, and the corresponding MPU ( Display control is executed using the segment MPU 114a and the reel MPU 114b).

The stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2305 in FIG. 142), and turned OFF when the stop type is set (FIG. 145). S2609). When the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the fluctuating effect is displayed so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed in the variable display device unit 80. Control.

In this control example, various devices controlled by the display control device 114 (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600) are used to change the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol described above. In addition to the display, a variable display for suggestive effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol and a variable display for big hit effect executed during the big hit game are configured to be executable. The variable display for suggestive effect is a variable display command for suggestive effect, which is set for a device other than the device that is the target of the third symbol variable display when the display variation pattern command is set by the voice lamp control device 113. Is executed by the display control device 114.

Also, when the jackpot effect variation display is received by the display jackpot start command set by the voice lamp control device 113, it is executed based on the contents included in the command. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of devices capable of executing the third symbol variation display, the device for which the third symbol variation corresponding to one special symbol variation is not executed is used to execute the suggestive effect variation display. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which device is executing the third symbol variation, and it is possible to provide a surprising game.

In addition, in the device in which the display symbol is printed in advance such as the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821, the display symbol is the third symbol based on the display variation pattern command set by the voice lamp control device 113. Since the pattern used as and the pattern used as the effect design for suggestion effect can be switched, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game.

The remaining time reduction counter 223g is a counter for measuring the number of special symbol fluctuations until the time reduction state ends. The remaining short time count counter 223g indicates that the short time state has been set in the state setting process (see S2317 in FIG. 144) executed in the command determination process (see S2212 in FIG. 142) of the voice lamp control device 113. If it is determined that the status command for the display has been received (S2506 of FIG. 144: Yes), a value of 100 is set (S2507 of FIG. 144), and in the variable display setting process (see S2606 of FIG. 145), the display change After setting the pattern command, 1 is subtracted (see S2606 in FIG. 145).

Then, in the variation pattern selection process (see S2603 in FIG. 146), when the current value is referred to and it is determined that the value is 5 or less (S2709: Yes in FIG. 146), it is possible to execute during the time saving state. The remaining number display processing (see S2710 of FIG. 147) for displaying the remaining number of remaining special symbol fluctuations (remaining shorter number of times) is executed, and the remaining shorter number of times is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 1600 (FIG. 111(b. )reference).

That is, this control example is configured to notify the player of the remaining short time count when the remaining short time count reaches 5 during the time saving state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation where the time saving state is suddenly ended without giving any notice to the player. Further, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the remaining number of hours saved is displayed immediately after the time saving state is set and it is difficult to grasp the stop display content of the third symbol.

In the present control example, the period in which the remaining short time count is displayed is a period in which the remaining short time count is 5 or less, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the remaining short time count may be 10 or less. Further, it is not necessary to continuously display the remaining time reduction number, and for example, it may be configured to display when the remaining time reduction number is a multiple of 10. Further, in this control example, the remaining short time count is always displayed during the period for displaying the remaining short time count, but it may be configured to determine by lottery whether or not to display the remaining short time count. Alternatively, the player may operate the frame button 22 to select whether or not to display the remaining short time count.

The specific remaining period flag 223h is a flag for indicating whether it is a period for displaying the remaining short time count during the time saving state, and is set to ON when it is the period for displaying the remaining short time count. is there. The specific remaining period flag 223h is set to ON when the remaining number display process (see S2710 of FIG. 147) is executed (see S2801 of FIG. 147), and when the value of the remaining short time count counter 223g becomes 0. It is set to OFF (see S2806 in FIG. 147).

Further, it is referred to in the stop symbol setting process (see S2608 in FIG. 153) for setting the stop display mode (stop symbol) of the third symbol (see S3406 in FIG. 153), and it is determined that it is set to ON. In that case (S3406 of FIG. 153: Yes), a stop symbol using a numerical value different from the displayed numerical value of the remaining time reduction number is set (see S3408 of FIG. 153).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the stop display mode of the third symbol (stop pattern) and the display mode showing the remaining short time count from being the same display mode, so to the player, It is possible to inform the information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the information indicating the remaining short time count in an easy-to-understand manner.

The scenario counter 223i is a counter that is referred to when determining the timing at which operation control is performed on each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, displacement member 670) of the variable display device unit 80, and variable display setting. In the variation pattern selection process (see S2603 of FIG. 146) executed in the process (see S2213 of FIG. 145), when the operation scenario (production scenario) to be executed this time is set (see S2707 of FIG. 146), the setting is performed. A value corresponding to the performed operation scenario (production scenario) is set (see S2708 in FIG. 146).

The set value is subtracted (see S3005 of FIG. 149) in the operation control process (see S2211 of FIG. 149) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 141), When it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i is larger than 0 (see S3001 in FIG. 149), the operation control content for each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, displacement member 670) included in the variable display device unit 80 Referenced to set.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 125, the operation scenario (effect scenario) defines the operation control content corresponding to each device in association with the value of the scenario counter 223i. 149) (refer to S2211) and the value of the scenario counter 223i at the time of execution and the currently set operation scenario (production scenario) are determined, and the operation control content to be executed in this processing is determined. Set the operation command (motor data) according to the operation control content. Then, in the command output process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2202 in FIG. 141), the operation command is output to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 responds to each device based on the content of the received operation command. Perform an action.

In this control example, when an operation scenario (production scenario) is set, a value corresponding to the time of the operation scenario (production scenario) is set in the scenario counter 223i, and the value of the scenario counter 223i is set every 1 millisecond. It is configured to subtract. That is, when a 30-second operation scenario (production scenario) is set, "30000" is set as the value of the scenario counter 223i, and the scenario counter 223i is executed every time the operation control process (S2211 of FIG. 149) is executed. Is configured to be subtracted by 1, but any configuration capable of discriminating the progress of the operation scenario may be used. For example, a time measuring means for measuring the passage of time after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. A difference between the time information stored in the storage means and the time information stored in the storage means and the current time information measured by the time measuring means. May be calculated, and the progress of the operation scenario (production scenario) may be determined based on the calculation result.

Further, in this control example, the operation control contents of the plurality of devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, displacement member 670, etc.) included in the variable display device unit 80 are collectively defined by one operation scenario (production scenario). By doing so, the operation contents of the plurality of devices are configured to be less likely to be misaligned, but the invention is not limited to this, and the operation scenario (production scenario) is defined for each device, It may be configured to provide a dedicated scenario counter for each operation scenario. With such a configuration, by combining a plurality of operation scenarios, it is possible to increase the number of operation control patterns using a plurality of devices included in the variable display device unit 80.

The effect counter 223j is a counter used in the voice lamp control device 113 for selection of various effects (variation pattern, notice effect, etc.) and various lottery, and is 0 in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 141). It is repeatedly updated in the range from 1 to 198 (not shown).

The game status storage area 223k is a data area for storing information indicating the current game status included in various status commands output from the main controller 110, and on the voice lamp controller 113 side. It is used when determining the currently set gaming state. In the present control example, the main control device 110 is configured to set a state command indicating the current game state each time a different game state is set, and each time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Since the state command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the state command is set, the current game state can be reliably determined on the side of the voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, the game state storage area 223k of the present control example has an area for storing the currently set game state and an area for storing the previously set game state, For example, just before the jackpot game is over (during the jackpot game), the game state at the time of jackpot winning can be configured to be determined, and the jackpot is won in the state where the time saving state is set, and after the jackpot is over again. It is possible to set different production modes depending on whether the time saving state is set or when the jackpot is won in the state where the normal state is set and the time saving state is set after the jackpot is over.

The returning flag 223l is a flag for indicating that the reel operation confirmation process is currently being executed after the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the reel operation confirmation process is being executed. .. The returning flag 223l is set to ON when the reel operation confirmation process (see S2013 in FIG. 140) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 139) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (FIG. 140). If the outer reel 821 moves to the second position (S2104 of S140), (S2102: Yes of FIG. 140), it is set to OFF (S2113 of FIG. 140).

When it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (10 seconds) has elapsed from the execution of the reel operation confirmation process to the detection of the movement of the outer reel 821 to the second position (S2105 of FIG. 140), It is determined whether or not the returning flag 223l is set to ON (S2103 in FIG. 140). This returning flag 223l is determined that the outer reel 821 has not reached the second position even though 10 seconds have elapsed since the reel operation confirmation process was executed (S2105: Yes in FIG. 140), When the error command is set (S2107 in FIG. 140), it is set to OFF. Further, it is also set to OFF when the reel operation confirmation process is normally executed (see S2113 in FIG. 140).

The operation mode storage area 223m stores information for determining which the current operation mode (operation pattern) is. As for the operation mode, if the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability state, "action 1" is stored, if the time saving state is the probability variation state, "action 2" is stored, and if the special reach 1 is in progress, " “Action 3” is stored, “action 4” is stored if the special reach 2 is in progress, “action 5” is stored if it is in the special reach 3, and “action 6” is stored if it is a big hit. .. Each operation mode (operation pattern) is set with reference to the symbol operation table 222e.

In the present control example, various devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600, displacement member 670) arranged in the variable display device unit 80 according to the operation mode stored in the operation mode storage area 223m. ), the operation mode (initial mode (initial position) until execution of operation control and presence/absence of operation control target) is configured to be different.

A holding unit (backup unit) that can hold the information indicating the operation mode stored in the operation mode storage area 223m even when the power is off may be provided. Accordingly, even after the power failure is restored, it is possible to set an appropriate operation mode for the various display device units 80.

The stop symbol storage area 223n is a storage area for temporarily storing the display mode of the set stop symbol. In the stop symbol storage area 223n, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag is set to ON in the variable display setting process (see S2213 in FIG. 145) (S2607 in FIG. 145: Yes), the stop is executed. Information indicating the stopped symbol set in the symbol setting process (see S2608 in FIG. 153) is stored.

In this control example, the time saving state is set as the game state (the operation pattern (operation mode) is "operation 2"), and the predetermined condition is displayed in the state in which the 7-segment display unit 1600 is performing the variable display of the third symbol. When (the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations (remaining shortened times) for which the time saving state is set is 5 times or less), the 7-segment display unit 1600 is configured to display the remaining shortened times.

In this way, in the state of displaying the remaining short time count, if the display pattern showing the same number as the stop symbol of the third symbol (a symbol imitating a numeral) and the value indicating the remaining short time count is displayed, There is a problem that it is difficult to understand whether the displayed display mode is for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol or for indicating the remaining short time count. Therefore, in the present control example, when it is in a state of displaying the remaining short time count, a process of controlling the stop symbol of the third symbol (a symbol imitating a numeral) to be different from the value indicating the remaining short time count is performed. It is executed, and the stop symbol set in this process is stored in the stop symbol storage area 223n.

The outer reel operation counter 223p is a counter that is referred to when determining a period for giving an operation instruction to the outer reel 821, and is an outer reel control process (S3002 of FIG. 150) of the operation control process (see S2211 of FIG. 149). When the value of the scenario counter 223i indicates that it is the timing to operate the outer reel 821 in the operation scenario (when the outer reel operation table is set), a value (END indicating the period during which the outer reel 821 is operated. Data) is set (S3107 in FIG. 150).

While the outer reel movement table 222c is set, the value of the outer reel movement counter 223p is incremented by 1 (see S3102 in FIG. 150) in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 141), and after the addition. It is referred to when determining whether the value has reached the END data (see S3103 in FIG. 150). Then, the operations of the outer reel drive motors KM2a to 2c are controlled based on the reference result of S3103 of FIG.

The inner reel operation counter 223q performs the processing of setting and referring to the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p in which the target is changed from the outer reel 821 to the inner reel 811, and the counter value is further set. The difference is that the outer reel control process (see S3002 in FIG. 150) is changed to the inner reel control process (see S3003 in FIG. 151). Since the other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the present control example, the operation scenario is managed based on the value of the scenario counter 223i, and when the operation scenario becomes the timing to operate any of various devices, the operation target device is set to the operation target device. Is configured to operate a dedicated counter. In this way, it is divided into a main counter (scenario counter 223i) for managing a large operation flow and a sub-counter (outer reel operation counter 223p, inner reel operation counter 223q) for managing the operation of each device. As a result, the number of items managed by the main counter can be reduced, so that the scenario counter 223i that is frequently executed can be simplified.

Further, for example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to manage only the counter corresponding to the main counter and the display control device 114 to manage the counter corresponding to the sub-counter. While reducing the processing load of 113, the operations of various devices can be centrally managed and the operations of various devices can be synchronized.

The power-off flag 223y turns on the power-off flag 223y when the main control device 110 detects a power-off and a power-off command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command. The setting is made, and the power-off process is executed (S2217 in FIG. 141). Then, in the startup process (FIG. 139) of the voice lamp control device 113, when the power-off flag 223y is on, the work area of the RAM is cleared and the data read process is executed, and the power-off flag 223y is set to off. (S2010 in FIG. 139). As a result, the game information saved by the data storage process when the power is turned off can be used again by the data reading process in the startup process when the power is restored, and the game can be continuously executed. You can

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 142) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 127 to 138. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (at an interval of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a regular process that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present control example, When each reaches 399, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the variable display device unit 80 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the winning (starting prize) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 128 to 132.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the sphere passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66. Through-gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134. After the through-gate passage processing is executed, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the variable display device. It is a process for controlling the variable display (variation time) of the third symbol performed in the unit 80.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the variable display device unit 80 is showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

In other words, in this control example, a new special symbol fluctuation occurs until the jackpot game ends (until the ending period of the jackpot game ends) after the stop display indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot is executed. Configured to not start. Thereby, a new special symbol fluctuation is started during the big hit game, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot concentrate on the big hit game.

Not limited to the configuration of this control example, for example, during the period during which the stop display indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is being executed, or during the ending period of the jackpot game, a new special symbol fluctuation May be set as a period in which it can be started, or may be set as a period in which a new special symbol variation can be started even during a jackpot game. Thereby, the number of executions of the special symbol variation can be increased.

If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (variable display in the special symbol) (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (that is, whether or not there is a reserved storage of the special symbol 2) (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e indicating the value of the holding ball number command (special figure 2 holding ball number command) is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 137) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are extracted from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c are respectively stored.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0 (that is, there is no holding ball of the special symbol 2) (S204: No), the special The value (N1) of the symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (that is, the holding sphere of the special symbol 1 is stored) or not (S209). When the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (N1) is 0 (the holding ball of the special symbol 1 is not stored) (S209: No), the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2 Since there are no holding balls in both cases, this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is subtracted (S210), and is changed by calculation. A special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d value (N1) indicating a holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

In the process of S208, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 129. Then, this process is completed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S213). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the variation time has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S214), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S213, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S213: Yes), the stop setting processing is executed (S215), and this processing ends. The stop setting process (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 128) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and special Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding sphere storage area 203b, a lottery for "special symbol jackpot" or "out of special symbol" (judgment) It is a process for determining a condition (for example, variation time) relating to the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed by the one symbol display device 37A, 37B and the variable display device unit 80.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. , The respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability is changing (S302). In the process of S302, it is determined whether or not the current probability is currently changing by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON.

If it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S302: Yes), the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the per-random number table (see FIG. 120(a)) for high probability are used. Based on the jackpot determination value, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 set in the first random number table (see FIG. 117(a)) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these hits. If you do, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value as the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random number values may be used. By configuring in this way, the random number value determined to be out of the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of the big hit random number value is set to the same, but it is not limited thereto, it is determined as a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol The number of random number values may be set differently. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can make you expect big jackpots.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the probability change is not in progress (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability game state), the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 Based on the value and the first hit random number table for low probability (see FIG. 120(a)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table for low probability. As a random number value for the special symbol jackpot, one of "0" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value for this hit match, the jackpot of the special symbol It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

And the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304, it is determined whether it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), the jackpot. The display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (any one of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C). In addition, the jackpot type is set as the stop type in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the variable display device unit 80. Specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table. In the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number value is any one of "0 to 39" is the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), which is one of the values "40 to 79". In this case, the jackpot type is jackpot B (16R short-time jackpot), and if it is any of "80 to 99", the jackpot type is jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot).

Next, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot (the jackpot variation pattern) is determined from the variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 121) based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S307). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern for big hits is determined using the big hit fluctuation pattern table 202d1. Then, the process proceeds to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when the lottery result of the special symbol this time is determined to be out of the special symbol (S305: No), a display state at the time of disengagement corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). ). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of disengagement is determined according to the set game state. Specifically, when the current game state is the normal state or the latent state, the variation pattern is determined by using the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 121(c)), When the current game state is the probability variation state or the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined by using the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 121(d)). Then, the process proceeds to S310.

In the present control example, the special symbol lottery result and the variation pattern table which is different according to the set gaming state are used to determine the variation pattern, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, different variation patterns may be determined according to the current number of reserved balls. Further, in the present control example, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, it is configured to set the variation pattern using the same variation pattern table, regardless of the set gaming state. , Not limited to this, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern is determined by using a different variation pattern table according to the set gaming state and the stored number of reserved balls. It may be configured.

In this control example, the same variation pattern table (displacement (normal) variation pattern table 202d2) is used when the normal state is set as the game state and when the latent probability state is set. Is configured as follows. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the player from ascertaining whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent state based on the determined variation pattern.

Incidentally, different from the configuration of this control example, for example, a variation pattern table corresponding to each gaming state is provided, and a variation pattern table used during a normal state (variation pattern table for normal) and a latent state state The variation pattern table used for the latent accuracy variation pattern table may be configured to be slightly different from the content defined by, and specifically, the normal variation pattern table and the latent accuracy variation may be configured. The selectable variation pattern types (variation time) may be unified with the pattern table, and the selection ratio of each variation pattern may be different. With such a configuration, the player cannot predict the current gaming state from the determined variation pattern type, but the current gaming state can be predicted by the selection ratio of the determined variation pattern type. it can. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variation pattern (outgoing variation pattern) of the special symbol variation executed a plurality of times.

Further, the special variation pattern type (variation time) that is determined only when the latent probability variation pattern table is used may be selected with a low probability (for example, 1%). This allows the player to recognize the current game state only when the special variation pattern type is determined. Therefore, for special symbol fluctuations that are executed when the special symbol lottery result is out of the way, it is possible to provide a privilege advantageous to the player (information capable of grasping the current gaming state), which makes the game interesting. Can be improved.

In the process of S310, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern is set (S310), a stop type command is set (S311), and then this process is ended and the special symbol is set. Return to fluctuation processing.

Next, the stop setting processing (S215) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the stop setting process (S215). This stop setting process (S215) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 128) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127).

In the stop setting process (S215), first, stop display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S261). The display mode of the stopped symbol stopped at this time is preset by the special symbol variation start process (S208) of FIG. 129 (see S306 and S308 of FIG. 129).

In the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and in the case of the big hit B, the red LED is turned on and the big hit C is given. In some cases, the yellow LED is turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped. Note that the lighting color is not limited to the above-described LED display color and lighting mode, and may be another lighting mode as long as it is a lighting mode capable of identifying the type of jackpot and the variation state.

After the processing of S261 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process However, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S262). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S262: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S263), the jackpot start is set (S264), and then the process of S265 is performed.

On the other hand, in the process of S262, if the result of the lottery this time is out (not a big hit) (S262: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S269). .. When it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is not 1 or more (0) (S269: No), the process proceeds to S265. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour/hour counter 203h is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S269: Yes), the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S270), and the process proceeds to S265. In the process of S265, a stop command is set (S265), and this process ends.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 130, when the variation time of the special symbol elapses, the process corresponding to the result of the special symbol variation of this time is configured to be executed immediately, but not limited to this. For example, the process of S262 may be executed after a predetermined time (predetermined stop display period) has elapsed after the stop display of the first symbol display device is set (see S261 in FIG. 130). good. In other words, the special symbol fluctuation start processing is configured to stop and display the special symbol at the timing when the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined, and maintain the stop display for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Is also good. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player easily understand the special symbols that are stopped and displayed.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 131, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127) to determine whether or not there is a ball winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process of the values when there is a start winning.

When the start winning process (S105 of FIG. 131) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting prize) (S501). Here, the entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (the number N1 of variable display holdings in the special symbol 1) is acquired (S502). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

Then, whether there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S501: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S503: No), the process proceeds to S507.

On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S501: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d changed by calculation is set to the holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) (S505).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 137) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S505, the RAM 203 is set to the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. The special symbol 1 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S506). In the process of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing of S507 to S512, the same processing as the processing of S501 to S506 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 140. With respect to the winning of the second winning opening 140, the only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed, and the other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When it is determined that the ball has not won the second winning opening 140 in the process of S507 (S507: No), the prefetch process is executed after the process of S512 (S513). Then, this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the prefetching process (S513), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 of FIG. 131), executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S513).

In this prefetching process (FIG. 132, S513), first, it is determined whether there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (S601). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (S601; No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (S601: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is a probable change (S602), and the gaming state. Is a certain change (S602: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 120(a)) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. In the process of S602, if the game state is not a certain change (S602: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 120(a)) (S604), and S605 Move on to processing. In the processing of S605, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the processing of S603 and S604 is set (S605), and this processing is ended. In the pre-reading process (S513), not only the present embodiment, but also the type of the variation pattern to be selected (out-reach, super-reach, special reach, etc.) is discriminated and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the winning information command. You may comprise so that it may notify.

Further, in the present control example, the prefetching process is executed when the ball is won at the first winning opening 64 and when the ball is won at the second winning opening 140, but in either case You may comprise so that only a pre-reading process may be performed, for example, a pre-reading process is performed only when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 corresponding to the special symbol 2 in which the special symbol variation start process is preferentially executed. It may be configured to do so.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device, and the first incidental to the second winning opening 140. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 520.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 133), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S701). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit, the opening and closing control of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning port 140 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. It is included in the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the processing of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

Next, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol (S708). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit (S709). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the variable display device unit 80 is a display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711.

In the process of S709, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, Usually, it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 120(c)).

In the process of S708, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 and the low value. Based on the second random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, Usually, it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 120(c)).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S710 or S711, it is determined whether it is a normal symbol hit (S712), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S712: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S713). In the processing of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S714), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S714: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S715). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even if the hit of the normal symbol is the same as the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol. , The number of times of opening the first electric accessory 520 and the opening time are set.

In the process of S715, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the second winning opening 140 The opening period of the first electric accessory 520 associated with is set to 1 second, the number of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the processing of S717, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the first electric auditors product 520 that accompanies the second winning port 140. Is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

In the process of S712, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S712: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S718). In the processing of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

In the processing of S719, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S719), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S719: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal time saving state of the symbol (S719: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is ended. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the release period of the second winning port 140 is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 140.

In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S722). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the processing of S722, if the variation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S723). In the process of S723, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. By the process of S723, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 137) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S713 or the processing of S718, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the regular symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the regular symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 133) is the regular symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S724). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the first electric auditors product 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 is set (S725), and this processing is ended. When the opening/closing control start of the first electric auditors product 520 is set by the process of S725, when the electric auditors product opening/closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 137) is executed next, The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 127), and it is determined whether or not the ball normally passes through the symbol starting opening (through gate) 66, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process (S107 in FIG. 134), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

Whether the ball does not pass through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S801: No), or even if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S803: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66 (S801: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the number of reserved balls counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. In the area (S805), and this processing ends. In the process of S805, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt process described above is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1001). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if it is not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power-off has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S1012 in this case as well.

If the power failure information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut down, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S1012. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the processing of S1114 of the main processing (FIG. 137). Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial values, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S1005: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S1007: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup processing will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each processing of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 137), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is output to the sub side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 127) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 128) and the start winning award process (see FIG. 131) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the reserved ball number command. Further, by this external output processing, the variable pattern command, the stop type command and the like necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the variable display device unit 80 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 131) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or specified. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening) 65a is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127). The details of the jackpot control process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 133), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 129), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, until the variation time elapses after the variation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, every time the main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 129) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, The variation display being executed in 37B is ended, and in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 129), the stop symbol (first symbol) is the first symbol display device 37A. , 37B is stopped (lighted).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 133), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 133), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is terminated, and in the display mode set by the process of S713 or the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 133), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display). ) Do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1109). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101 and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1109: No), during the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1108, if the information on the occurrence of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 135 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1112 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1113). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of S1108 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. It can be started from the process of S1101. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1101 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initialization process (S1001). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1101 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control processing (S1104) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 137), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1104 of FIG. 138), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201). Specifically, the process of S264 of the stop setting process (see FIG. 130) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1201, when the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1201: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203k are turned off (S1202), the opening command is set (S1203), and the present process is terminated. To do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1204). As the jackpot of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the variable display device unit 80 are displaying the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol), and the jackpot of the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the game is included. In the process of S1204, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1204: No), this process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit (S1204: Yes), the process of S1205 is executed. In the process of S1205, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1205). In the process of S1205, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning a prize device 65 is opened (S1206), and a new start is performed. A round number command indicating the number of rounds is set (S1207), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1205, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1205: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1208). If the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1209), and then this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1208, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1210). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed after 15 rounds and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is a ball throwing time, has elapsed. Is determined as. When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1210: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is turned off (S1211), and the ending command is set (S1212). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is A or C (S1213). In the process of S1213, if the jackpot type is not A or C (S1213: No), 100 is set to the hour/hour counter 203h (S1217), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1213, if the jackpot type is A or C (S1213: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is turned on (S1214), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is A (S1215). If the jackpot type is not A (S1215: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1215, if the jackpot type is A (S1215: Yes), the time saving flag 203k is turned on (S1216), and then this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 155. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, with reference to FIG. 139, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing at S2217 (see FIG. 141) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time. ) Is determined during the execution of () (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 141, when the voice lamp controller 113 receives the power-off command from the main controller 110 (S2214: Yes in FIG. 141), the power-off processing of S2217 is executed. The power-off processing in progress flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing in-process flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2217 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S2002: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off in S1514 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S2217 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S2217, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage areas of the entire range of the RAM 223 are checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the variable display device unit 80. May be.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S2217 is executed (see S2217 of FIG. 141). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S2217 is executed, the process of S2008 with the power-off flag 223y turned on is the moment when the startup process this time is performed. This is the case after the occurrence of a general power failure and in the state in which the execution of the power-off processing in S2217 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), and the power-off flag 223y is set to OFF (S2010). , The initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2011). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110. After that, interrupt permission is set (S2012), a reel operation confirmation process is executed (S2013), and the process proceeds to the main process. Details of the reel operation confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 140.

On the other hand, the process of S2008 with the power-off flag 223y turned off is that the startup process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S2004 to S2006 is performed and the process of S2008 is performed. Or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2009, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2011, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2011), and then interrupt permission is set. (S2012), the reel operation confirmation process is executed (S2013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that skipping the clearing process of S2009 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004 when the process of S2008 is passed through the processes of S2004 to S2008. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Here, with reference to FIG. 140, a reel operation confirmation process (S2013), which is one process in the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reel operation confirmation processing (S2013). In the reel operation confirmation process (S2013), a process for confirming whether the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 operate normally when the power is turned on is executed.

In the reel operation confirmation processing (S2013), first, the outer reel unit 820 is moved to the second position (non-transparent area) (S2101). Here, by moving the outer reel unit 820 to the non-transmissive area (second position), it is possible to make the operation confirmation processing of the inner reel, which is executed later, invisible. Next, the outer reel unit 820 determines whether or not it is detected at the origin position of the second position (S2102). When it is determined that the origin of the outer reel unit 820 has not been detected (S2102: No), the returning flag 223l is on, that is, is the outer reel unit 820 moving to the origin of the second position? It is determined whether (S2103). When it is determined that the returning flag 223l is not on (S2103: No), the returning flag 223l is set to on (S2104), and the process returns to S2102.

Returning to the processing of S2102, it is determined whether the outer reel unit 820 is detected at the origin of the second position (S2102). However, if it is determined that the outer reel unit 820 is not detected at the origin of the second position (S2102: No), it is determined whether the returning flag 223l is set to ON in the process of S2104 (S2103). .. When it is determined that the returning flag 223l is set to ON (S2103: Yes), the returning flag 223l is set to ON, that is, after the returning of the outer reel unit 820 is started for a predetermined time. It is determined whether (10 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S2105). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the return (S2105: No), the process is returning, and the process returns to S2102. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the recovery (S2105: No), an error command for notifying an abnormality of the outer reel unit 820 is set (S2106), and the power is cut off. Loop infinitely until. The abnormality of the outer reel unit 820 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output sound to notify the abnormality of the outer reel unit 820, or the variable display device unit 80 may display an error message.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2102, when it is determined that the outer reel unit 820 is detected at the origin position of the second position (S2102: Yes), the operation confirmation processing of the inner reel unit 810 is then executed (S2107). .. Next, it is determined whether or not the operation confirmation process of the inner reel unit 810 in S2107 is completed (S2108). When it is determined that the operation confirmation process of the inner reel unit 810 is not completed (S2108: No), the process of S2108 is looped until the operation confirmation process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation confirmation process of the inner reel unit 810 has been completed (S2108: Yes), it is determined whether or not the normal operation of the inner reel unit 810 has been confirmed in the process of S2107 (S2109). When it is confirmed that the operation of the inner reel unit 810 is normal (S2109: Yes), the inner reel unit 810 is moved to the initial removal symbol row (S2110), and then the outer reel unit 820 is moved to the first position ( The process moves to the transparent area) (S2111), and this processing ends.

As described above, after confirming the normality of the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810, each reel is configured to be moved to the initial position, so that the start-up process (see FIG. 139) is completed immediately. There is an effect that the game can be started. On the other hand, in the processing of S2109, when an operation abnormality of the inner reel unit 810 is found (S2109: No), an error command indicating an operation abnormality of the inner reel unit 810 is set (S2112), and this processing ends. .. The abnormality of the inner reel unit 810 is notified by the display lamp 34 like the outer reel unit 820. The sound output device 226 may output sound to notify the abnormality of the inner reel unit 810, or the variable display device unit 80 may display an error message.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started, or since the process of S2201 this time has been executed (S2201), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2201: No), the process proceeds to S2212 without performing the processes of S2202 to S2211. In the process of S2201, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S2202 to S2212, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S2212 and the variable display setting processing of S2213 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S2213 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S2201 (S2201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2203 to S2213 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2202). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2208 described later is set (S2203), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2204). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen.

In addition, at the time of recovery from power failure due to power failure or the like, a game-based performance permission command that was being executed at the time of power failure is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113 by the startup process (see FIG. 136) of the main controller 110. .. The voice lamp control device 113 creates a display variation pattern command in the power-on notification process (S2204) based on the reception of the production permission command including that the special symbol is changing, and the display control device Send to 114. In the display control device 114, this variation start command is determined by the simple command determination processing (see FIG. 118(b)), and the variation display for power-on is executed based on the variation pattern based on the received command (FIG. 82(b) or (c)). Since the display variation pattern command created here is for executing simple variation display as described above, it is simpler than that selected in the variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 146) described later. It is something. As a result, the processing load for creating the display variation pattern command can be reduced, and it is possible to notify the player that the power is on with good response when the power is restored.

In addition, in this control example, in addition to the variable display using the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, the variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600 can be executed. Therefore, when the power is turned on, whichever device is used for the variable display, the variable display for the power-on may be executed by the variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600. As a result, it is not necessary to execute the reel operation that consumes more electric power due to the motor operation after the power is turned on, so that it is possible to suppress a sudden increase in the amount of electric power used. Further, even if the timing (remaining period) until the variable display is stopped is unknown, the third symbol to be stopped and displayed by using the 7-segment display unit 1600 can be changed to an arbitrary third symbol at the stop timing. It can be made easier.

Furthermore, after the game-based production permission command executed at the time of power-off is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the startup processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 136), it is executed based on the production permission command. A stop command for stopping the variable display is transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display stop command to the display control device 114 based on the reception of the stop command. In the display control device 114, it is determined that the display stop command has been received by the simple command determination process (see 118(b)), and the display mode based on the received command is displayed at power-on (FIG. 82(b)). Or (see (c)) is stopped.

Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the variable display device unit 80 is supplied with power. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to the process of S2205 without the notification by the power-on notifying process.

In the process of S2205, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the retained quantity display updating process is executed (S2206). In the customer waiting production process, the display mode of the variable display device unit 80 is an initial mode (for example, a mode in which the displacement member 670 is changed to the fourth position) when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time. The setting for switching to No. is performed, and the setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b is performed.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2207). This frame button input monitoring/production process corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed by monitoring the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S2208), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S2209). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the variable display device unit 80. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the variable display device unit 80, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S2209, effect execution management processing is executed (S2210). In the production execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the segment display device 600 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The ramp edit process of S2208 is executed based on the time set in this effect execution management process. The sound edit/output processing of S2209 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the variable display device unit 80.

After the performance execution management processing, operation control processing for controlling the operation of the reel and the displacement member is performed (S2211). Details of this operation control process (S2211) will be described later with reference to FIG. 149.

After executing the operation control process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S2212). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 142.

Next, the process proceeds to S2213. In the process of S2213, the variable display setting process is executed (S2213). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the variable display device unit 80. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 145.

When the variable display setting process (S2213) is finished, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2214). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2214 (S2214: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S2216), and the power-off process is executed (S2217). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S2218), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2214 (S2214: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2215), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2215: No), the process returns to S2201 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2215: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the variable display device unit 80 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the command determination processing (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2212). This command determination process (S2212) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 is determined. ..

In the command determination process (S2212), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area, analyzed, and analyzed by the main control device 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S2301). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S2301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2302), the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command received this time (S2303), and this processing ends. .. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 145) described later is executed. Then, the variable display device unit 80 is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, when the variation pattern command is not received (S2301: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S2304). When the stop type command is received (S2304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2305), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2306), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 145) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S2304: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2307). When the reserved ball count command is received (S2307: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball count command is the special map 1 reserved ball count command or the special map 2 reserved ball count command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol), and the special symbol 2 holding ball of the main control device 110 The value of the number counter 203e (the number of times of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2308). Further, in the process of S2309, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c that have been updated are respectively set to the display holding sphere command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values. After the processing of S2308 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (starting winning), or the special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is broken, every time the start winning is detected or every time the special symbol is drawn, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the process of S2308. The value of the number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol of the main controller 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e, at the time of detection of the start winning or the lottery of the special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223c of the voice lamp controller 113 Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S2308 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the variable display device unit 80.

In the process of S2307, when the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S2307: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2309). In the process of S2309, when it is determined that the prize information command has been received (S2310: Yes), the prize information based on the received prize information command (the special symbol lottery result, etc.) is stored in the prize information storage area 223a. (S2310), the process ends.

On the other hand, when the winning information command has not been received (S2309: No), it is determined whether or not the command regarding the big hit has been received (S2311). In the process of S2311, when the command related to the big hit is received (S2311: Yes), the big hit related process is executed (S2311), and the present process is ended. Examples of commands for jackpots include an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command. Further, as the processing corresponding to the received command regarding the jackpot, for example, there is processing for setting a display opening command, a display round number command, and a display ending command.

Here, with reference to FIG. 143, a jackpot-related process (S2312), which is one process in the command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing (S2312). The jackpot-related processing is for performing processing for causing the variable display device unit 80 to perform an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main controller 110 is executed. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from is executed.

In the jackpot-related processing (S2312), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received in the command determination processing (S2212) has received a jackpot start command (S2401). When a jackpot start command is received (S2401: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S2402), and this processing ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the variable display device unit 80.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2401: No), it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S2403). When the round number command is received (S2403: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S2404), and this processing is ended. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number-of-rounds command, the display-number-of-rounds command is set based on the received number-of-rounds command. In order to reduce the capacity of command data transmitted from the control device 110, when the configuration for transmitting the information indicating that a new round is started from the main control device 110 as a round update command, the audio lamp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the 113, a round number storage counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and based on the value of the round number storage counter, the voice lamp control device 113 side outputs the current round. The number may be calculated and the display round number command may be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2403, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S2403: No), it is determined whether the ending command is received (S2405). When it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2405: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2405: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S2406), and the gaming state after the jackpot is read from the gaming state storage area 223k (S2407). Next, the operation pattern corresponding to the information read in the process of S2407 is determined from the symbol operation table 222e (S2408). Specifically, after the jackpot is over, the time saving or the probability variation state is set, so the operation 2 is determined as the operation pattern from the symbol operation table 222e (see FIG. 124). Next, the variable display device unit operation corresponding to the operation mode determined in the process of S2408 is set (S2409), and this process ends.

In the present control example, as described above, the segment display device 600 provides a display mode in the probability change or the time saving state (see FIG. 110(b)). Since the fluctuation time in the time saving state is set to 1 second or 2 seconds, if the operation pattern is set after the jackpot ends, the outer reel unit 820 is set in the player's visual recognition area from the start to the end of the fluctuation. There may be a problem that the two areas 821a1 to 821c3 cannot be switched. In the present control example, by setting the operation pattern of the variable display device unit during the ending, the outer reel unit 820 can be switched by the end of the jackpot, and the problem can be suppressed.

It returns to FIG. 142 and continues description. When it is determined in the process of S2311 that the command regarding the big hit has not been received (S2311: No), it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S2313). In the process of S2313, when it is determined that the stop command is received (S2313: Yes), the variable display stop process that is being executed is executed (S2314), and the display stop command is set (S2315). This process ends.

The display stop command set by the process of S2315 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is stored in the command output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221. , To the variable display device unit 80. Upon receiving the display stop command, the variable display device unit 80 stops the variation effect that is being executed in the display mode based on the stop type set by the stop type command.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2313, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2313: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (S2316). In the processing of S2316, when it is determined that the status command is received (S2316: Yes), the status setting processing is executed (S2317), and the processing is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 144, the state setting process (S2317) which is one process in the command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the state setting process (S2317). In the state setting process (S2317), a process for extracting the current game state from the command received from the main control device 110 and setting the operation mode of the variable display device unit 80 is executed.

In the state setting process (S2317), first, the current game state is extracted from the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 in the command determination process (S2212) (S2501). Next, using the symbol motion table 222e, the symbol motion corresponding to the current game state is set (S2502). The operation mode of the inner reel 811 is set (S2503), and the operation mode of the outer reel 821 is set (S2504). Next, the operation mode of the 7-segment display unit 1600 is set (S2505). In this control example, as shown with reference to FIG. 124, the operation modes of the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, the 7-segment display unit 1600, and the displacement member 670 differ depending on the corresponding game state, and therefore the processes of S2503 to S2505. In, each operation mode is set.

Next, it is determined whether the received status command is a command indicating a shift to the time saving status (S2506). When it is determined that the command indicates the shift to the time saving state (S2506: Yes), the remaining time shortening counter 223g is set to 100 (S2507), and the process proceeds to S2508. On the other hand, in the processing of S2506, when it is determined that the received state command is not the command indicating the shift to the time saving state (S2506: No), the current game state is stored in the game state storage area 223k (S2508). , This process ends.

It returns to FIG. 142 and continues description. When it is determined that the status command is not received in the process of S2316 (S2316: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S2318). ), and returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the variable display device unit 80, the command is changed. The command is set so as to be transmitted to the unit 80.

Next, referring to FIG. 145, the variable display setting process (S2213) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S2213). The variable display setting process (S2213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is mainly performed to execute the variable effect in the variable display device unit 80. The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the control device 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2601). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2601: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the processing of S2607 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2602), and then the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is set. A variation pattern selection process for selection is executed (S2603).

Here, the details of the variation pattern selection processing (S2603) will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S2603). In this variation pattern selection process, a variation pattern type corresponding to the effect mode is selected based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 and the effect counter 223j counted by the voice lamp control device 113. is there.

In the variation pattern selection process, first, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2701), and it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of this time is a long variation (S2702). In the process of S2702, when it is determined that the current change is a long change (S2702: Yes), the effect counter acquired in the process of S2701 is acquired from the long change change pattern table 222a3 (see FIG. 123(b)). Based on the value of 223j, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command received in the process of S2303 of the command determination process (S2212) is determined (S2703). In the process of S2703, by setting the variation pattern table for long variation, it is possible to perform the variation display according to each production period of the special reach 1 to 3. Next, the process proceeds to S2707.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2702 that it is not a long fluctuation (S2702: No), it is determined whether or not the current game state is in the time saving (S2704). In the process of S2704, when it is determined that the current game state is in the time saving period (S2704: Yes), the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command received in the process of S2703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 142). Based on the type and the effect counter 223j, the corresponding variation pattern is selected from the probability variation short and medium time variation pattern selection table 222a2 (S2705), and this processing ends. Based on the variation pattern selected here, it is set as a variation pattern command for display in a variation display setting process described later (see S2604 in FIG. 145).

On the other hand, in the processing of S2704, when it is determined that the current game state is not in a short time (S2704: No), the corresponding variation pattern is changed to the normal variation based on the extracted variation pattern type and the effect counter 223j. The pattern is selected from the pattern selection table 222a1 (S2706), and the process proceeds to S2707. In this way, by performing the processing of the variation pattern selection processing (S2603), it is possible to perform variation display according to each production period (production mode).

Next, a production scenario corresponding to the variation pattern determined in any of the processing of S2703, S2705, and S2706 is set (S2707), and the value of the scenario counter 223i is set based on the set production scenario (S2708). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining short time count counter 223g is 5 or more (S2709). When it is determined that the value of the remaining short time count counter is 5 or more (S2709: Yes), the remaining count display processing is executed (S2710), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2709, when it is determined that the value of the remaining short time count counter 223g is less than 5 (S2709: No), this processing is directly terminated.

Here, details of the remaining number display process (S2710) will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the remaining number display processing (S2710). The remaining number display process (S2710) is a process executed in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 146) described above, and is a process for setting a command for displaying the remaining short time count on the segment display device 600.

In the remaining number display process (S2710), first, the specific remaining period flag 223h is set to ON (S2801). Next, the value of the remaining short time counter 223g(n) is read (S2802). Next, the value of n-1 is calculated (S2803). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of n-1 calculated in the process of S2803 is 0 (S2804). When it is determined that the value of n−1 is 0 (S2804: Yes), the display count command indicating “END” is set as the display mode of the count display period (1S) (S2805), and the specific remaining period is set. The flag 223h is set to off (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2808. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of N-1 is not 0 in the process of S2804 (S2804: No), the display mode of the number display period (1S) is "n-1" calculated in the process of S2803. A display count command indicating a value is set (S2807), and the process proceeds to S2809.

In this control example, as described above, the remaining number of shortened time is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 1600 from the time when the fluctuation of the time saving state is stopped to the time when the next fluctuation starts (see FIG. 111(b)). .. When the remaining short time count is n, the remaining short time count is displayed after the change of the n-th variation is stopped, and thus the number obtained by subtracting 1 from n is the remaining short time count. In the present control example, the remaining short time count is displayed after the fluctuation stops, but the remaining short time count may be displayed before the fluctuation starts.

After the processing of S2806 or S2807 is executed, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern received this time is read (S2808). Next, in the process of S2808, it is determined whether the read fluctuation time is 1 second (S2809). When it is determined that it is 1 second (S2809: Yes), a process of rewriting the determined variation pattern into a shortening variation pattern is executed (S2810). On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 1 second in the process of S2809 (S2809: No), this process is directly terminated.

Returning to FIG. 145, the description will be continued. When the process of S2603 ends, a display variation pattern command for notifying the variable display device unit 80 is generated based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S2603, and the command is transmitted to the variable display device unit 80. (S2604). In the variable display device unit 80, by receiving the display variation pattern command, the variable display device unit 80 performs the variable display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, The display control of the variation effect is started. When the process of S2604 is completed, next, the notice selection process for setting the notice effect based on the hit/miss determination result according to the current effect mode is executed (S2605).

Here, the details of the notice selection process (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the advance notice selection processing (S2605). The notice selection process (S2605) is a process executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 145) described above, and is a process for setting the notice effect based on the winning/decision determination result according to the current effect mode.

In the notice selection process (S2605), first, the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2901), and it is determined whether or not the current game state is in a time saving period (S2902). In the processing of S2902, when it is determined that the current game state is in the time saving period (S2902: Yes), the result of the determination of whether each of the reserved balls is stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the value of the effect counter 223j. On the basis of the above, the time saving medium time notice effect which is the time notice effect for the time saving effect period is selected (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2907.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2902, when it is determined that the current game state is not in a short time (S2902: No), the result of the hit determination of each holding ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the effect counter 223j. Based on the value, the normal notice effect which is the notice effect of the normal effect period is selected (S2905), and the process proceeds to S2906.

In the process of S2905, it is determined whether or not the normal notice effect selected in the process of S2904 is the notice effect of the shutter rotation (S2905). In the process of S2904, when it is determined that the selected normal notice effect is the notice effect of the shutter rotation (S2905: Yes), the shutter notice scenario is set (S2906), and the process proceeds to S2907.

On the other hand, in the process of S2905, when it is determined that the selected time advance notice effect is other than the shutter rotation notice effect (S2905: No), the process of S2906 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2907. To do.

When the process of S2903, S2905, or S2906 is completed, a display notice command indicating the selected notice effect is set (S2907), and this process is ended. The display advance notice command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 and is changed in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display device unit 80. When the variable display device unit 80 receives the display preview command, the variable display device unit 80 displays a preview effect corresponding to the command on the variable display device unit 80.

Returning to FIG. 145, the description will be continued. When the process of S2605 is finished, the value of the remaining short time count counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S2606), and then it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2607). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2607: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2607: Yes), the stop symbol setting process is executed (S2608).

Here, with reference to FIG. 153, the stop symbol setting process (S2608) which is one process in the variable display setting process (S2213) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the content of the stop symbol setting process (S2608). The stop symbol setting process (S2608) executes a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device unit 80 based on the current game state.

In the stop symbol setting process (S2608), first, the current game state is read from the game state storage area 223k (S3401). The game state storage area 223k is set in the process of S2508 of the state setting process (see FIG. 144). Next, in the process of S3401, it is determined whether or not the read current game state is in the time saving period (S3402). When it is determined that the current game state is not in the time saving period (S3402: No), the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3409.

Here, with reference to FIG. 154, the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403) which is one process in the stop symbol setting process (S2608) will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403). In the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403), when the current game state is normal, a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device unit 80 is executed.

In the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403), first, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S3501). Next, the stop symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area 223n is read (S3502). Next, based on the read stop symbol (previous stop symbol) and the current variation, a display range in which stop display is possible is set (S3503). Next, the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set from the display range in which stop display is possible (S3504), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 153, the explanation is continued. In the process of S3402, when it is determined that the current game state is in the time saving period (S3402: Yes), it is determined whether or not this change is a hit change (S3404). When it is determined that the variation this time is a variation (S3404: Yes), the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using the symbol group C in the symbol group storage area 222g (S3405), and S3409. Process shifts to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current variation is not a hit variation (S3404: No), it is determined whether the specific remaining period flag 223h is on (S3406). When it is determined that the specific remaining period flag 223h is ON (S3406: Yes), the value of the value (n) of the remaining short time counter 223g is read (S3407). Next, the stop symbol of the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b is made different from the value of n-1, and the stop symbol is set using the symbol group B in the symbol group storage area 222g (S3408).

In this way, by setting the stop symbol and the remaining short time count to be different in the process of S3408, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the stop symbol and the remaining short time count. Next, the set stop symbol is stored in the stop symbol storage area 223n (S3409), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3406, when it is determined that the specific remaining period flag 223h is not on (S3406: No), the time saving stop symbol setting process is executed (S3410), S3409 is executed, and this process is ended. ..

Here, with reference to FIG. 155, the time saving stop symbol setting process (S3410) which is one process in the stop symbol setting process (S2608) will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving stop symbol setting process (S3410). The time saving stop symbol setting process (S3410) executes a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the segment display device 600 when the current game state is during time saving.

In the time reduction stop symbol setting process (S3410), first, the information in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S3601). Next, it is determined whether or not the information read in the process of S3601 has hit information (S3602). When it is determined that there is no hit information in the read information (is out) (S3602: Yes), the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using the symbol group B in the symbol group storage area 222g ( S3603).

As described above, the symbols “2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9” are stored in the symbol group B of the symbol group storage area 222g (see FIG. 126), and these numerical symbols are , When the display by the 7-segment display unit 1600 is executed, all the patterns are displayed using the light emitting area 822. In the present control example, since the variation result is displayed as the display mode by the 7-segment display unit 1600 during the time saving, the outer reel 821 is set in the player's visual recognition area. Then, the light emitting area 822 is also used to show a display mode in 7-segment. However, even if the light emitting area 822 is not emitting light, the player can recognize the light emitting area 822, and thus there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly recognize it as a variation result. In the present control example, when the variation result of the deviation is shown, the player can clearly recognize the symbol by selecting the symbol using all the light emitting areas 822. In addition, in the present control example, the deviating symbol is configured to use the symbol that uses the light emitting area 822 without fail, but it may be configured not to use the symbol indicating the previous variation result.

In the process of S3604, when it is determined that the next variation is a hit (S3604: Yes), the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using the symbol group A in the symbol group storage area 222g (S3605). ). In the symbol group A of the symbol group storage area 222g, numerical symbols of "0, 1, 7" are stored (see FIG. 126). As described above, in the present control example, when the variation result of the deviation is shown during the time saving, the pattern in which the light emitting area 822 is always used is displayed, but when the variation result of the hit is shown, the light emitting area is 822 is configured not to emit light. With such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the deviating symbol and the winning symbol, and it is easy for the player to recognize.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the next variation is not hit (S3604: No), the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using the symbol group C in the symbol group storage area 222g (S3606), and the book The process ends.

Returning to FIG. 145, the description will be continued. After executing the stop symbol setting process (S2608), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2609), and a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type. Then, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2610). In the variable display device unit 80, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is displayed in the variable display device unit 80 as a stop display, The stop display of the variable effect is controlled.

Next, details of the operation control processing (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the operation control process (S2211). The operation control process (S2211) is executed in the above-described main process (see FIG. 141), and is a process for controlling the variable display device unit 80 according to the current effect mode.

In the operation control process (S2211), first, it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223i is larger than 0 (S3001). When it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S3001: No), it is not the timing to control the variable display device unit 80, and thus the present process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3001 that the value of the scenario counter 223i is larger than 0 (S3001: Yes), the outer reel control process is executed (S3002).

Here, the details of the outer reel control process (S3002) which is one process in the operation control process (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the outer reel control process (S3002). The outer reel control process (S3002) executes a process for controlling the outer reel 821 according to the current effect mode.

In the outer reel control process (S3002), first, it is determined whether or not the outer reel operation table 222c is being set (S3101). When it is determined that the outer reel operation table 222c is being set (S3101: Yes), the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S3102). Next, it is determined whether the set data is END data (S3103). When it is determined that the set data is not the END data (S3103: No), the motor data corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223j is set (S3104), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3103, when it is determined that the set data is the END data (S3104), the outer reel operation table setting area is reset (S3105), and the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3101, when it is determined that the outer reel operation table 222c is not being set (S3101: No), it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223i is a value indicating the operation start of the outer reel unit 820. (S3106). When it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i is a value indicating the operation start of the outer reel unit 820 (S3106: Yes), the value of the operation counter corresponding to the operation content is set (S3107), and this processing ends. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3106 that the value of the scenario counter 223i is not a value indicating the start of the outer reel operation (S3106: No), the present process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 149, the description will be continued. After executing the outer reel control process (S3002), the inner reel control process (S3003) for controlling the inner reel unit 810 is executed. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the inner reel control process (S3003). The inner reel control process (S3202) is different from the above-described outer reel control process (S3002 in FIG. 150) only in that the target of the process is changed from the outer reel unit 820 to the inner reel unit 810. Omit it.

After executing the inner reel control process (S3003), the displacement member control process (S3004) is executed. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing details of the displacement member control process (S3004). The displacement member control process (S3004) is different from the above-described outer reel control process (FIG. 150) only in that the displacement member 670 is changed, and the detailed description thereof is omitted. After the displacement member control process (S3004) is executed, the value of the scenario counter 223i is decremented by 1 (S3005), and this process is terminated.

In this control example, the variable display device unit 80 is configured to be controlled in the order of the outer reel unit 820, the inner reel unit 810, and the displacement member 670, but the control order may be changed.

In the first control example, the 7-segment display unit 1600 displays a pattern (third symbol) imitating a number (0 to 9), but the 7-segment display unit 1600 (emission of the outer reel 821) is used. You may comprise so that the pattern which imitated an alphabet or a character may be displayed using the segment of the area|region 822). In this case, for example, the displacement member 670 is changed to a position (fourth position) that covers the entire display surface of the inner reel 811 while the variable display is being performed using the inner reel 811, and the displacement member 670 moves to the fourth position. Each outer reel 821 is positioned in the second area (area having the light emitting area 822) while being in the position, that is, during a period in which the player cannot visually recognize (difficult) the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. When the displacement member 670 returns to the initial position (first position), the variable display effect using the 7-segment display unit 1600 is executed, and three 7-segment displays are performed. From the left side of the section 1600, by displaying symbols that imitate "S", "E", and "G", the fact that the variable display of the third symbol is executed on the 7-segment display section 1600 in the middle of the variable display effect is played. The variation start display mode for notifying the person may be displayed, and then the variation display effect using the 7-segment display unit 1600 may be executed.

Thus, in addition to the variable display of the third symbol, the 7-segment display unit 1600 is used for explaining the contents of the effect and notifying the game state, that is, a plurality of display means (inner reel 811, Outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600), by using the display means that does not display the third symbol, by using to notify the player of information about the game other than the lottery result of the special symbol, fluctuation Since the amount of information that can be notified to the player during the display effect can be increased, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game even when the liquid crystal display device is not used.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 198. In the first control example described above, the variable display device unit 80 as the display means for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol, that is, the reel display by the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821 and the segment display by the 7-segment display unit 1600. The pachinko machine 10 used has been described. On the other hand, the second control example is different in that a third symbol display device 81 using a liquid crystal display is used as a display unit for displaying the result of lottery of special symbols.

Furthermore, the second control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the sound output control of the pachinko machine 10 has been described in detail. Specifically, in the second control example, the tempo (BPM (beat per minute)) of the fluctuation sound (BGM) output during the variable display of the special symbol (during the variable display of the third symbol) can be changed. The stop sound of the third symbol is made variable in accordance with the tempo of the reproduced fluctuating sound (BGM).

In this way, by variably setting the stop sound of the third symbol in correspondence with the BGM reproduced at different tempos, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the fluctuating sound and the stop sound of the third symbol, and the effect of the effect Can be increased.

First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 156, the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above in place of the variable display device unit 80 provided in the central portion of the game board 13. The difference is that a third symbol display device 81 is provided. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158. FIG. 157 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. The second control example is different from the above-described first control example in the configuration of the device that receives various commands output from the voice lamp control device 113. Specifically, it is different in that various commands set by the voice lamp control device 113 can be output to the third symbol display device 81. The other configurations are the same as those in the above-described first control example, and the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the display control device 1140 of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 158. FIG. 158 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. 158, the audio output device 226 is connected so as to be able to receive the data (various commands) output from the audio lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 158, the audio output device 226 is equipped with the MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 301 has a built-in RAM 303, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing various control programs executed by the MPU 301.

The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input port 305 and the audio synthesis unit 306. When a command for designating audio data is received from the audio lamp control device 113 to the audio output device 226, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input port 305 and the bus line 304. Also, the voice data designated by the voice lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel of the voice synthesizing unit 306 corresponding to the voice type. For example, voice data corresponding to BGM is output to CN1, voice data corresponding to a stop sound is output to CN2, and voice data corresponding to a warning sound is output to CN3.

The voice synthesizing unit 306 is configured by a known voice synthesizing LSI that outputs the synthesized voice data input to each channel to the amplifier unit 307 as synthesized voice data. The synthesized voice data is amplified by the amplifier unit 307 and input to the speaker unit 308. This allows the speaker unit 308 to output various sounds designated by the sound lamp control device 113.

In the second control example, the number of channels of the voice synthesizing unit is set in correspondence with the voice data output from the voice lamp control device 113. However, the number of channels is not limited to this, and, for example, a plurality of types of voice data may be used. (For example, the jackpot game voice data and the stop sound voice data) may be output through the same channel. In this case, a plurality of audio data output to the same channel may be set as audio data that cannot occur at the same timing. With this configuration, the number of channels included in the audio output device can be reduced, so that the product cost can be reduced.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. At least a voice file storage area 302a is provided in the ROM 302 of the MPU 301 of the voice output device 226.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. At least a voice file storage area 302a is provided in the ROM 302 of the MPU 301 of the voice output device 226.

The audio file storage area 302a is a storage area in which audio files (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, etc. are stored. When the output of various audio data is instructed by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio file corresponding to the effect is read from the audio file storage area 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesis unit 306.

Specifically, in the audio file storage area 302a, music data (BGMA, BGMB) regarding music (BGM) and stop sound data (stop sound A, stop sound B) regarding stop sound are stored. In this control example, it is possible to execute the music (BGM) with different tempos. When different tempos are set for the same music, the same music data is used and The processing for varying the data reproduction speed is executed (see S9211 in FIG. 196). With such a configuration, it is not necessary to store the music data corresponding to each tempo, so that the storage amount of the audio file storage area 302a can be reduced.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. As shown in FIG. 158, the RAM 303 includes at least a music data group storage area 303a, a music pointer 303b, a maximum value storage area 303c, and a music timer 303d.

The music data group storage area 303a is a storage area for storing a voice file (music data group) corresponding to a voice (BGM, stop sound, etc.) to be reproduced. By reproducing the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b, one music composition is reproduced. In this music data group storage area 303a, a command (voice BGM command) output to instruct reproduction of music from the voice lamp control device 113 or reproduction of stop sound of display symbol (third symbol) When a command (voice stop sound command) output for instructing is received, a music data group corresponding to the music instructed by the command is read from the audio file storage area 302a and stored ( See S9205 and S9210 in FIG. 196).

Further, in this control example, a music data group (audio file) is stored for each type of audio to be reproduced. That is, the audio file used when playing the BGM and the audio file used when playing the stop sound are configured to be separately stored, and the audio to be played is output for each read audio file. It is configured to do. Then, each audio file is output to a different channel.

The music pointer 303b is a pointer for indicating which data in the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a is being reproduced. This music pointer 303b is set to a value of "00H" when the reproduction of the music is instructed (the BGM command for voice is received) (see S9212 in FIG. 196). Along with this, the reproduction of the BGM audio data corresponding to the pointer value “00H” is set.

In this control example, a plurality of pointer values are set for one music piece. For example, “A melody”, “B melody”, “rust 1”, “rust 2” of one music piece is set. , Etc., and the pointer value is set. This makes it possible to easily change the location where the reproduction of a specific music piece is started, depending on the value of the pointer initially set.

Note that, for example, when playing a song, the value of the song pointer 303b that is initially set, the update order of the song pointer 303b, the variation time of the special symbol to be set, the set gaming state, You may make it variable according to the lottery result of a special symbol. As a result, when the same music is reproduced, from which part the music is reproduced, or according to the arrangement content of the music (for example, the arrangement for shifting from "A melody" to "Chorus 1"), Since the game contents can be suggested to the player, the player can be interested in the sound output from the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, when the reproduction of the stop sound according to the stop timing of the third symbol is instructed (the stop sound command for voice is received), the pointer value corresponding to the timing at which the stop sound is reproduced is set. (See S9206 of FIG. 196).

The value of the music pointer 303b is updated by 1 each time the reproduction of one music data set in the music data group storage area 303a is completed. Further, when the value of the music pointer 303b is the maximum value set for each music type and the pointer value is further updated, the value is updated to "00H". That is, when the music is played to the end, the music is played again from "A melody".

The maximum value storage area 303c is a storage area for temporarily storing the maximum value of the music pointer 303b. Therefore, when the music data group is stored in the music data group storage area 303a and the reproduction of music is set, the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music to be reproduced is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c. The maximum value of is set in advance (see S9207 and S9212 in FIG. 196).

The music timer 303d is a timer for measuring the reproduction time of the music data being reproduced. The timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the music data is set in the music timer 303d every time the reproduction of new music data is set. The reproduction time of each music data is defined in the music data group storage area 303a in association with the type of music data. While the music is being reproduced, it is determined whether or not the reproduction time has elapsed based on the value of the music timer 303d. Although illustration is omitted, the music timer 303d is updated regularly (for example, every 1 millisecond).

In the second control example, the number of channels of the voice synthesizing unit is set in correspondence with the voice data output from the voice lamp control device 113. However, the number of channels is not limited to this, and, for example, a plurality of types of voice data may be used. (For example, jackpot game voice data, stop sound voice data) may be output through the same channel. In this case, a plurality of audio data output to the same channel may be set as audio data that cannot occur at the same timing. With this configuration, the number of channels included in the audio output device can be reduced, so that the product cost can be reduced.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the game ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed on the first symbol display device 37 by using it as a trigger. It Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 14-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 1140, which will be described later, for example, three symbols of upper, middle and lower symbols. The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are laterally scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 159. 159 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, FIG. 159 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 159(b) is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9". Each main symbol is constructed by imitating the numbers "1" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from "1" to "9" on the rear symbol imitating an animal.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, if the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and after the variable display ends, the jackpot is hit. Are configured to occur. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 159(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and about 3/4 of the upper side is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. About 1/4 of the lower side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

In the main display area Dm, the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows L1, L2, L3 are displayed. In each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled in the left and right direction cyclically for variable display. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in three rows of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol columns L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as valid lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, a diagonal line to the lower right and a diagonal line to the upper right in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the active lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1, the lower symbol row L3, and the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot). It is possible to suppress oversight. If a combination of big hit symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this control example) is aligned on the activated lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the disengagement and there is a reserved ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, in the state where there is no holding ball, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a ball newly enters either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (customer waiting demo screen) indicating that the game is not executed is displayed. It is rare that a player does not enter the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 even though the player has continuously shot the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In many cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), because the player quits the game, and the pachinko machine 10 is not playing the game at all. .. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed, the third corresponding to the new winning. The variable display of the symbols is executed.

The sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. .. In this control example, while the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the ball is the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. When winning a prize, the number of entered balls is reserved up to a maximum of four times in each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and the sub display area Ds. It is also shown in the small area Ds1 of. The number of holding symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds allows the player to clearly recognize the number of holding balls whose variable display is currently held. In this control example, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be held, and the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the number of holding balls of the second special symbol can be held for the player. In order to easily grasp, the display mode of the first reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the display mode of the second reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol are displayed differently. It is configured to do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159(b), an example of display contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 159(b), a total of nine main symbols and sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three main symbols and a part of the sub symbols are displayed in groups of three. The lottery results of special symbols are shown. Further, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol showing the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed in the upper central portion of the main display region Dm. In this small area Dm1, variable display of three third symbols in a simple mode configured by only the numbers of "1" to "9" is executed. Even in this small area Dm1, the big hit is started by stopping and displaying the three third symbols composed of the same numbers.

In this way, in the third symbol display device 81 in the present control example, the variable display with a high effect of showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the five effective lines (V1 to V5) using the entire surface of the main display area Dm ( The main fluctuation display) and the fluctuation display (sub-variation display) that is executed smaller than the main fluctuation display in the small area Dm1 of the main controller 110 are configured to be executed. Thereby, for example, even if the decorative movable member provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is moved to a position that covers the display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is executed in the small area Dm1. By the sub-variable display, the player can be surely informed of the special symbol lottery result.

Further, for example, the reach state in the main variation display (part of the combination of the third symbol for indicating that the jackpot is won in a state where the variation of two symbol columns out of the three symbol columns is stopped is displayed. In this case, even when the main variation display is temporarily turned off in order to largely change the mode of the effect executed in the main display area Dm, only the sub variation display of the small area Dm1 is left. , It is possible to let the player know that the special symbol is currently being displayed in a changing manner.

Although the display position of the small area Dm1 is fixed above the central position of the main display area Dm in this control example, the position where the small area Dm1 is formed may be variable. In this case, it is preferable that the decoration movable member is configured to be movable according to whether or not the decorative movable member is movable and the effect mode executed in the main variation display. Further, the size of the small area Dm1 may be variable, or a period during which only the sub-variation display or the main variation is executed may be provided.

In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the first reserved symbols simulating a bird's face are displayed in the same number as the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, and the second reserved symbols simulating an egg are second. The same number as the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed. At the start of the variable display based on the holding balls corresponding to each of the reserved symbols, an effect of entering the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1 is executed. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball has started. In the small area Ds1, the reserved design sometimes performs a special action or another character appears to give a notice effect.

In this control example, the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 is configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

The display control device 1140 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (variation). (Production) and continuous notice production are controlled. Here, details of the display control device 1140 will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 1140. The display control device 1140 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. .. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 1140 is a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure. The same applies to the following), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Note that, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead of storing the data, the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 1140 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a line on a plurality of pages continuously, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 1140 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands that form the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 1140, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 1140 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data blocks. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in the one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 is the first program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 1140 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 1140 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 1140. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and also designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231 a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231 a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, all the control programs are not stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 1140 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 1140 can be immediately started.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a moves the instruction pointer 231a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various kinds of processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 180) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 180) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 1140, and by using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 166) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 causes the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored according to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 1140, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 1140. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

In addition, when the display control device 1140 draws an image using image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 1140 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 gives an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. Note that the storage source final address may be replaced by the data size of the image data to be transferred.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred to the storage source end address.

Thereby, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and the third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed by the main control device 110 in a variation effect when a ball entry into is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 180).

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 shows that the display control device 1140 is turned on immediately after the power is turned on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

When the display control device 1140 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 1140 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 161(a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 1140 shows in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on variation image of a “○” symbol is displayed at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” is displayed as shown in FIG. 161(c). At the same position as the symbol, the power-on variation image of the "x" symbol is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the variation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is "a big hit of the special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 161(b) is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is "a deviation of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 161(c). The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 1140 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a winning is detected at the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, , The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 161(b) and 161(c) are alternately displayed. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display it on the three-symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the variation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the variation effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is given to the third symbol display device 81. Can be instantly displayed in.

Returning to FIG. 160, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 162, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the back image will be described. FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 162(a) shows “ 162(b) is shown for the back surface A corresponding to the "town stage", and for the back surfaces B-D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "empty stage", respectively. .. In addition, FIG. 163 shows the rear surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As for the rear images corresponding to the respective rear faces A to D, as shown in FIG. 162, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while horizontally scrolling the image from left to right.

The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the positions a and a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smooth. The back image is scrolled by a simple connection.

When the change of the rear surface type is determined based on the rear surface type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to the “town stage”, the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, or the “empty stage”, the MPU 231 causes the corresponding rear surface to change. First, the position between the position a and the position a′ of the image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a′. Therefore, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 81 so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, the back surface image on the back surface E is, as shown in FIG. 163, with the passage of time, in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→... It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back surface E is an image of a mountain rising over the island, an image of a sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island, with the displayed position fixed, the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky spread over the mountain changes with time.

When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, the rear surface image shown in FIG. 163(a) is displayed as the initial rear surface image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 163(a), an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue with the passage of time, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 163(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 163(b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black over time, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 163(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 163(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 163(a) is returned to, and the back images of FIGS. 163(a) to 163(c) are displayed again on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 162(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the town stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while displaying the "town stage" which is the initial stage, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the "town stage" that is frequently displayed is displayed. By making all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 1140 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the “forest stage”, the back surface C corresponding to the “river stage”, and the back surface D corresponding to the “empty stage” are, as shown in FIG. 162(b), a partial area of the back surface. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Also, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 163(a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 163(a) and 163(b) excluding FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up processing of the above.

Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images be made resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a′ (or the range of FIG. 163(a) to (b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between FIGS. 163(a) and (b) in FIG. 163) including the initial position is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. However, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, when the change of the stage is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 can be stored. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while doing. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

In addition, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surfaces B to D, the range from the position a to the position b is changed from left to right by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b′ to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b′ to the position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface E displays the images of FIGS. 163(a) and (b) using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 163(a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 163(b) to 163(c) and 163(c) to (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while the operation is being performed. The range of (b) to (b) is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 163(b)-(c) and 163(c)-(a) is normally used while the images of FIGS. 163(a)-(b) are displayed. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the images of FIGS. 163(a) and 163(b) and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 163(b) to (c) and 163(c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the back image. be able to.

It should be noted that, on the back surfaces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in the sub image dedicated sub area provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 160) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back-side image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back-side image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back-side image can be displayed reliably.

Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b′ and the position b. Image data to be duplicated is stored. Then, by the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the positions c and d is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a′ is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. To do. As a result, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 81 so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 160, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 159(b)) with the numbers “1” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. R. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 can be used. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the occurrence of the ball in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the main symbols to which the numbers "1" to "9" are not attached are also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "youth" and "female" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character symbol area 235e. Accordingly, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 1140 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but rather the character of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the symbol area 235e, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 1140 is notified by an error command. Also, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 1140 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 1140 receives an error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 1140 causes the error message of the resident video RAM 235 to be based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even when the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined for each sub area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing among the sub areas provided from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area in which the image data should be stored. Accordingly, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while developing the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes the process of displaying the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. R.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. R. After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are stored in every one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 1140 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 1140 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110, and, for example, a variable effect and an opening effect. Display data tables corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the out is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A to F. In either case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpot types are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 is now in a special gaming state and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not attached, is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table for one variable effect pattern, that is, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table of the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2,...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, a character used for various effects such as a boy image or characters, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back surface type which is information for specifying the type of the back image. This rear surface type is one of the rear surfaces A to E corresponding to the stage selected from the player (one of the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage”). Information that specifies whether to display any one or a rear image different from the rear images A to E is described. The back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed.

When it is specified by the back surface type to display one of the back surfaces A to E, the MPU 231 specifies a back surface image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target, Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type May be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

Further, the position information is, in accordance with the rear surface type, drawing of an image based on the information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating whether or not) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

For the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

Since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbol. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the number attached to the symbol and displaying the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Also, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is currently performed, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the third symbol is displayed at high speed, since the third symbol is invisible to the player, during that time, the symbol offset information of the variable effect stop symbol that was previously performed is displayed. Even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted by switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the data table The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 166) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 1140, according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 1140 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 1140, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data of the sprite (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which the transfer is started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponds to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 165). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data that means that is defined (corresponds to the address “0002H” in FIG. 165).

As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address Is included.

It should be noted that "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, like the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 165, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data that should be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is selected. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 166) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 165, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. To execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 1140 displays display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 161(a) to 161(c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag that indicates. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 180) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 180). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 192(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 182(b)), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 of FIG. 182(b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 182(b)) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 182(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 183 to 187) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 189 to 191) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 192(a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Performs resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 192(b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 166), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instructions for the is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 166) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 166) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

Thus, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed (FIG. 182(b )), the pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 191) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list described later. (Refer to FIG. 166), and at the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to start the transfer is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 1140, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing is always stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 166, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, reserved ball count symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 167 described later, various sprites for creating a vertical scroll display screen (vertical scroll display data group) and a horizontal scroll display screen (horizontal scroll display data group). ) Is created, and a drawing list corresponding to various sprites for creating a display screen (common display data) commonly used in vertical scroll display and horizontal scroll display is created. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to scaling processing according to the magnification rate, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semitransparency according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, combined processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of another image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold ball number pattern). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character The detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2,..., Error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Here, in the drawing list of this control example, as shown in FIG. 166, the sprite to be drawn first becomes the sprite related to the vertical scroll display data group, then the sprite related to the horizontal scroll display data group, and finally the common display data. It is configured to be a sprite. Then, the rear image of the horizontal scroll display data group (the image arranged on the rearmost side of the horizontal scroll display data group) is an image of the vertical scroll display data group created on the rear side of the rear image. It is set so that people cannot see it.

As a result, when the horizontal scroll display is being executed, the vertical scroll display formed on the back side of the display data related to the horizontal scroll display is not displayed. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the player visually recognizes the vertical scroll display, the horizontal scroll display data group is executed by performing a process (transparent process) in which all the sprites of the horizontal scroll display data group are transparently displayed. The vertical scroll display formed on the rear side of the display is configured to be visually recognized by the player.

In this way, by constantly drawing a plurality of variable display modes and varying the variable display mode to be displayed so that the player can visually recognize it depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to make it colorful for the player. Since such a variable display mode can be provided, the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, since a plurality of variable display modes are always created, even if the variable display mode is configured to be variable according to the operation of the player, the variable display mode can be smoothly changed. ..

Further, in the present control example, as described above, the common display (for example, the reserved ball symbol display) that is commonly displayed is performed both when the vertical scroll display is executed and when the horizontal scroll display is executed. Since it is formed on the frontmost side, the common display can be executed without being influenced by other display data (regardless of the presence/absence of the transparent processing for the horizontal scroll display data).

In this control example, the data for vertical scroll display and the data for horizontal scroll display are configured to be completely independent to create a drawing list. For sprites that can be shared (for example, effects), write that information only in the display data on the front side (horizontal scroll side), and when changing the scroll direction, draw the sprite (for example, draw effects). Only the display position coordinates of the sprite) may be changed to a value corresponding to the scroll direction. As a result, the amount of sprites in the entire drawing list can be reduced.

As described above, in the present control example, as the variable display mode for displaying the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (one liquid crystal display), vertical scroll display and horizontal scroll display can be set, By configuring so that the image data for displaying each variable display mode is created in parallel, even when it is not determined which variable display mode is to be displayed at the start of the variation of the third symbol ( For example, even when changing the variable display mode to be displayed based on the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player during the variable display of the third symbol), it is possible to smoothly change the variable display mode. However, in addition to this, it is also possible to use a configuration capable of smoothly varying the variable display mode by creating image data relating to a plurality of variable display modes in parallel.

Further, in the present control example, different variable display modes can be executed without changing the display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but like the first control example described above, the third control example A display area shielding means (for example, a movable part) that covers a part of the display area of the display means for varying the symbols (third symbol display device 81 in the second control example) so that it is difficult for the player to see. Objects, a light guide plate, an organic EL), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific variation pattern is set), the display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed and changed. The variable display mode may be set corresponding to the display area.

In this way, when the size of the display area in which the third symbol is variably displayed is changed and the variable display mode corresponding to the changed display area is set, the third symbol is set in the same direction. Even if the variable display mode to be changed is set corresponding to the display area, it is possible to make the player think that a different variable display is being executed, so that it is easier to reduce the amount of sprites in the entire drawing list. You can

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets the time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 182(b ) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 of FIG. 189). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 180) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to the one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite are always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 193). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 193). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. This can prevent wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and can reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 1140 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 194).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237, in parallel with the drawing process, reads previously drawn drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and, together with the drive signal, the image to the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 182(b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. R.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. R. After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are stored in every one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Next, the content of image display in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various images created based on the drawing list. As shown in FIG. 167, in this control example, one display image is created by superimposing images (layers) in the order of the types shown in the drawing list described with reference to FIG. 166. In the foremost side (player side), a common display data group (common layer group) for displaying common information such as a reserved ball number pattern and an error pattern is formed, and a horizontal scroll display data group is formed in the back. (Horizontal scroll layer group) is formed, and the vertical scroll display data group (vertical scroll layer group) is formed on the innermost side.

Further, the transparent processing (processing of making all color information colorless) is configured to be performed on all images belonging to the horizontal scroll layer group. According to the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, normally, the back image formed at the innermost position of the horizontal scroll layer group is used to create an image on the deeper side than that, that is, for vertical scrolling. Performing a transparent process on all the images belonging to the horizontal scroll layer group when the player does not visually recognize various displayed images and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the player operates the frame button 22). This allows the player to visually recognize the vertical scroll display that is displayed on the back side (rear side) of the horizontal scroll layer group.

Next, the contents of the display screen during the effect executed by the third symbol display device will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen using the variable display layer 1 (horizontal scroll layer group), and FIG. 168(b) is a variable display layer 2 (vertical scroll layer). It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display screen using (group).

In the present control example, as shown in FIG. 159(b), normally, the third symbol is variably displayed by horizontal scroll display, and during horizontal scroll display, as shown in FIG. 159(a). It is configured to variably display the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol by using the five effective lines (V1 to V5).

In the horizontal scroll display, when the reach state (so-called double reach state) is activated on the activated lines V4, V5 (see FIG. 168(a)), when the player operates the frame button 22, the switching flag 223aa Is set to ON, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the vertical scroll display shown in FIG. 168(b). As shown in FIG. 168(b), in the vertical scroll display, only one effective line is configured to be displayed, and the main symbol imitating the numbers “2” and “3” in the horizontal scroll display. The display is switched from the double reach state of to the reach state of only the number "3".

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, it is more advantageous for the player that the main symbols that imitate the odd-numbered figures become the jackpots than the jackpots that the even-numbered main symbols become the jackpots. The jackpot is configured to be easy to hit, and as shown in FIG. 168(a), during horizontal scroll display, the player does not know which main symbol will be the jackpot until the timing when the main symbol is stopped. Although it was exciting, it is possible to inform the player that it is easy to win an advantageous jackpot by switching to the vertical scroll display shown in FIG. 168(b), which gives a sense of security. Can be given.

In this way, by switching to a variable display with different scroll directions, and by varying the number of effective lines of the main symbol, the content of the variable display corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol can be varied to make the player bored. It is possible to provide a game that does not come. In this control example, different scroll directions are provided to reduce the number of effective lines to provide different variable display modes. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the scroll directions are different, By doing so, the number of effective lines may be increased. In this case, it is preferable that the reach state be achieved by switching to the vertical scroll display even though the reach state is not in the normal horizontal scroll display. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with a sense of expectation for a big hit until the variable display is completed.

Further, in this control example, the method of satisfying the switching condition for switching the scroll direction is defined as the player operating the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a specific variation pattern When set, it may be configured to switch without fail, or the player may operate the frame button 22 so that the scroll direction does not change.

In addition, in the present control example, since the display control device 1140 is configured to create both the horizontal scrolling variable display image and the vertical scrolling variable display image, the switching condition is set at any timing. Even if it is established, the scroll direction can be immediately switched, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, as a variation pattern for showing the lottery result of one special symbol, a variation pattern for horizontal scroll display and a variation pattern for vertical scroll display are set to form a display image. Although configured, but not limited to this, for example, when the main symbol indicating a big hit is stopped and displayed in one scroll display, the main symbol indicating a big hit is stopped and displayed in one scroll display The screen may be continuously displayed, and the effect image of the big hit game may be displayed on the other scroll display side. With such a configuration, at any timing during the jackpot game, by operating the frame button 22 and switching the display screen, the jackpot symbol of this time can be easily confirmed.

Further, in the gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the scrolling display for indicating the result of the lottery of the first special symbol is performed on one scroll display, and the scrolling of the other is performed. The display may be configured to perform a variable display for showing the result of the lottery of the second special symbol.

In this control example, when the display screen showing the variable display is switched, the configuration in which the changing direction of the third symbol is switched is used, but if the variable display mode for showing the result of the jackpot lottery to the player is different. As long as it is a configuration to notify by doing so, it is not limited to the configuration of this control example, for example, a variable display for showing the jackpot lottery result with a combination of three symbols on one display screen, The other display screen may be configured to show the lottery result of the jackpot only in the stop display mode of one symbol, and in one display screen, a variable display mode imitating a reel is executed and in the other display screen, A variable display mode imitating 7 segments may be executed.

Furthermore, in the present control example, a configuration capable of displaying two display screens in one liquid crystal display device is used. The device may be variably operated to switch to different variable display modes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, an aspect of the fixed stop sound of the special symbol in the second control example will be described. As will be described later, in the second control example, two types of BGMA and BGMB are set as the BGM output during the period when the special symbol is changed. In the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the voice effect counter 223ab, which will be described later, at the timing when the special symbol starts changing (the timing when the change pattern command is output from the main control device 110 and received by the voice lamp control device 113). Is acquired, and the type of BGM is determined by the acquired value and the lottery result (win or miss) of the special symbol. As the type of BGM, not only the content of BGM (BGMA, BGMB) but also the tempo of BGM is determined.

In the present embodiment, even if the same BGM is used, it is possible to make the player feel as if various BGMs are being output by changing the output tempo, and it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired of the game early. .. Furthermore, by changing the tempo of the BGM, even when the fluctuation display (dynamic display) is performed with the same fluctuation pattern, different fluctuation patterns are executed depending on the tempo of the BGM output accordingly. It can be reminiscent, and the variation of special symbols can be felt in various ways.

Here, as the variation of the special symbol, mainly, after the variation display (scroll display) of all the symbol rows of the symbol is started, the symbol is scroll-displayed at high speed, and then in the order determined in advance by the variation pattern. Each symbol sequence is sequentially displayed from the high-speed scroll state to the low-speed scroll display state and then stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the example configured with three columns of symbols, from the state in which the left, middle, and right symbol columns are scroll-displayed at high speed, the left symbol column becomes a low-speed scroll state, and then the right symbol. After the low-speed scroll state in the order of the column and the middle symbol column, the left symbol column is stopped and displayed, the right symbol column is stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol column is stopped and displayed. After that, the left, middle, and right symbols that have been stopped are in a swing fluctuation state (a state in which they are slightly displayed vertically at a predetermined cycle) indicating that the symbols are temporarily stopped. The confirmation stop display (still display) is performed based on the reception of the confirmation command output from the control device 110.

Here, a sound effect called a symbol stop sound (for example, darn) for notifying the player that the symbols are stopped and displayed is output at the timing of stop display from the state where each symbol row is scrolled and displayed. It is output separately from BGM. With this, it is possible to inform the player that the symbols have been stopped in an easy-to-understand manner, and to the player what kind of determination result the combination of symbols stopped and displayed in each symbol row will be. You can expect it.

However, as in this control example, by using various types of BGM or changing the tempo of the BGM, the state or tempo and the stop sound of the symbol output at the timing of the symbol stop of the BGM that has been output However, there is a possibility that the music does not match and the player feels uncomfortable. Specifically, although the BGM has a fast tempo, by outputting a symbol stop sound with a slow tempo, the BGM and the stop sound do not match, giving a feeling of strangeness as a variation effect of the special symbol, or a special It is conceivable that the BGM that has been output at the timing when the symbol stops may become a bad BGM due to the stop. Further, in this control example, the variation period of the special symbol (variation period of the variation pattern) is variously set, but the BGM to be output is repeatedly output music (song or phrase) shorter than that period. , Is configured to output music in a required output period. With such a configuration, at the stop timing of the symbol, the BGM being output is not necessarily the timing at which the BGM is output well, and the player is likely to feel uncomfortable.

Here, in this control example, the type of the stop sound to be output is changed and set according to the tempo and type of the BGM being output, and the stop sound is output. As a result, it is possible to output a stop sound of a symbol according to the tempo and type of the BGM, and it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player at the symbol stop timing.

Referring to FIG. 169, an example in which tempo 120 (BPM 120) of BGMA is selected as the BGM output when variation pattern A (12 seconds) is executed and an example in which tempo 80 (BPM 80) is selected are shown. The stop sounds that are output will be described in comparison with each other. In the variation pattern A, the left symbol row is stopped after 8 seconds from the variation start, the right symbol row is stopped after 10 seconds, and the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed after 12 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 169, the BGMA (tempo 120) is composed of BGM in which four quarter notes are played in one bar of 2 seconds, and the one bar is controlled to be repeatedly output. In BGMA (Tempo 120), one quarter note is output every 0.5 seconds (one quarter note is played every 0.5 seconds). In the BGMA (tempo 120), the stop sound A is set to be output as the stop sound. In the stop sound A, a stop sound of eighth notes is output at the tempo 120 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the stop sound B is composed of a voice "Doo, Doo", and is output in total for about 0.5 seconds. Here, in BGMA (tempo 120), as shown in FIGS. 169(a) and 169(b), at the timing of 8 seconds from the start of fluctuation, the output of the quarter note indicated by α1 is actually started. However, since it is the output timing of the stop sound, the stop sound A is output without outputting the sound. In this way, actually, the output of the BGM of the stop note A is stopped at the timing when the sound corresponding to the quarter note is output by the BGMA (tempo 120). Since the start is started, the player can be made to feel that the stop sound A is output at the timing when the sound is actually output, and the discomfort can be reduced. Similarly, at the right symbol row stop timing of 10 seconds from the start of variation, the stop sound A is output at the timing when the quarter note indicated by α2 is output by BGM, and the middle symbol row stop timing of 12 seconds from the variation start. Then, the stop sound A is output at the timing at which the quarter note indicated by α3 is output.

In this way, in the BGMA (tempo 120), the music of a short measure of 2 seconds is repeatedly output, so that the player remembers the music pattern early and is conscious of the type of the sound to be output next. However, at the symbol stop timing, the stop sound A is output in synchronization with the output timing of the sound set in the BGM, so that it is possible to suppress the problem that the break of the BGM becomes worse. After the stop sound A is output at the stop timing of the left symbol and the right symbol, the output of the BGM is configured to be output according to the passage of that time. Specifically, the BGM reproduction process is continued even when the symbol is stopped, and the output channel of the BGM is set to mute during the period in which the stop sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 169(c), in BGMA (tempo 80), the same one-bar configuration content as in BGMA (tempo 120) is output so as to be played in 3 seconds. At the stop timing of 8 seconds from the start of fluctuation, in the BGMA (tempo 80), it is not the timing at which a new note is output, but the timing at which the note set before that is continued. In BGM of BGMA (tempo 80), the timing corresponding to the new note (β1) is actually output after 8.25 seconds from the start of fluctuation. Here, in BGMA (tempo 80), as shown in FIG. 169(c), a stop sound B composed of triplets is output based on the left symbol stop timing of 8 seconds from the start of fluctuation. Has been done. Since the stop sound B is output at the tempo 80, a sound of a new note is output 0.25 seconds later, and a sound corresponding to a new note is output 0.25 seconds later. With such a configuration, the sound corresponding to the note in the stop sound B is output at the output timing corresponding to the note of β1 that should have been output 8.25 seconds after the start of fluctuation in the BGMA (tempo 80) ( Since the output of the triplet (second note) is executed, even if the sound that should have been output by BGMA (tempo 80) is not output by the output of stop sound B, at that timing by stop sound B Since the sound is output, it is possible to suppress the discomfort felt by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169(c), in the stop sound B output at the stop timing of the right symbol row 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the timing at which the sound in the stop sound B is output (the third in the triplet) The output timing of the sound corresponding to the note β2 output 10.5 seconds after the start of fluctuation of BGMA (tempo 80) coincides with the output timing of BGMA (tempo 80) and stop sound B. It is possible to match with and it is possible to suppress the player's discomfort. Furthermore, at the stop timing of the middle symbol sequence after 12 seconds from the start of fluctuation, the output timing of the note in BGMA (tempo 80) and the output timing of the stop sound B match, which makes the user feel uncomfortable about the stop sound being output. Can be suppressed.

As described above, even when the BGM tempo is changed and output, the stop sound corresponding to the change in the tempo is selected and output. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the BGM and the stop sound do not match. Further, even when the BGM tempo is flexibly changed and played back by lottery or the like, the stop sound is converted and output according to the change of the tempo, and the stop sound is set so that the tempo becomes the reference tempo. If so, the stop sound can be easily output.

Further, in the present control example, the lottery ratio of the tempo of the BGM selected according to the lottery result is set to be variable, so that the BGM of the tempo that is easily selected in the case of winning is output, and the player is judged whether or not it is winning. It can be expected that the result is a hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 170, regarding the output contents of various voices with respect to a variation pattern B (18-second variation) in which a variation time different from the variation pattern A (12-second variation) described with reference to FIG. 169 is set. Explain. 170(a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the fluctuation pattern B (18-second fluctuation), and FIG. 170(b) shows each of the cases where the BGMA is reproduced for the fluctuation pattern B. FIG. 170(c) is a timing chart schematically showing sound output timing, and FIG. 170(c) is a timing chart schematically showing output timing of each sound when BGMB is reproduced with respect to the variation pattern B. is there.

As shown in FIG. 170(b), when the fluctuation pattern B having a fluctuation time of 18 seconds is set, the stop timing of each symbol row is set at a timing different from that of the fluctuation pattern A having a fluctuation time of 12 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 170(a), the left symbol row is stopped after 14 seconds have passed from the fluctuation start, the right symbol row is stopped 16 seconds after the fluctuation starts, and the middle symbol row is stopped 18 seconds after the fluctuation start. Is set to. In addition, the stop timing of each symbol row is set corresponding to each variation when the variation time is different, or when the effect mode to be executed is different even if the variation time is the same, The stop timing shown in FIG. 170(a) is just an example. Further, the order of stopping the symbol row and the interval for stopping each symbol row are also set according to the effect mode to be executed. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be stopped at the same time, or a game. The operation may be stopped based on the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) by the person.

According to the example shown in FIG. 170(b), the timing at which each symbol row stops is different from the example shown in FIG. 169(b), but like the example shown in FIG. 169(b), It is possible to output (reproduce) the stop sound A (8th note with beam) in accordance with the stop timing of each symbol row.

In this way, by setting the type and tempo of the stop sound to be output (reproduced) in accordance with the stop timing of the symbol sequence, based on the content (rhythm) of the reproduced BGM and the reproduction speed (tempo), Since it is possible to reproduce a stop sound that matches both the timing of beating with the BGM during reproduction and the stop timing of the symbol sequence, a player can feel a sense of unity and produce a sound. Can be provided, and there is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170(c), the type of the stop sound is determined in accordance with the content (rhythm) of the BGM to be reproduced, and then the tempo of the stop sound is changed, whereby the stop sound is changed. The reproduction timing (timing to beat) may be configured to coincide with both the timing to beat with the BGM being reproduced and the stop timing of the symbol row.

Also, as shown in FIG. 170(c), when the timing at which the BGM beats and the timing at which the stop sound beats are completely matched, both voices may be output. In this case, only when it is determined that there is a slight difference between the timing at which the BGM beats and the timing at which the stop sound beats, the mute processing for muting the BGM sound is executed. Just configure it. As a result, only when the timing at which the BGM beats and the timing at which the stop sound beats are completely matched, the emphasized voice can be output without impairing the rhythm of the voice being reproduced, and thus the player In contrast, the fact that the symbol has stopped can be emphasized and notified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 170(c), the BGMB is configured to repeatedly reproduce a rhythm using triplet notes of eighth notes instead of quarter notes for BGMA. As a stop sound (stop sound B) corresponding to, a stop sound composed of one triplet (a note in which a period (1 beat) in which a quarter note outputs a sound is divided into three equal parts and beats three times) Is set.

Then, the stop sound B is reproduced at the timing when the left symbol row stops (14 seconds after the start of fluctuation), and the beats β1 and β2 of the BGMB overlapping with the stop sound B (γ1, γ2) are set to mute. To do. Note that, according to the example shown in FIG. 170(b), it is determined that the output timings of the beat next to the BGM beat β2 and the beat next to the stop sound B beat γ2 completely match. , A voice is output (emphasized output) for any beat. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the left symbol row has stopped in accordance with the tempo of BGMB in an easy-to-understand manner.

Similarly, at the timing when the right symbol row stops (16 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the beats β3 and β4 of BGMB that overlap the beats γ3 and γ4 of the stop sound B are set to mute (mute), and the beats between them are set. Emphasize output. Finally, when the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed (when the variable display period ends), the BGM reproduction ends at the timing when the variable display period ends, but is set according to the type of BGM. Since the output of the stop sound B (triplet) is output after the end of the variable display period, that is, during the fixed period, it is as if the BGM is being reproduced even after the end of the variable display period. Can be made

In this control example, the BGM reproduction is started based on the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol, and the BGM reproduction is ended at the fluctuation stop timing (determination period arrival timing). As a result, since the reproduction position of the BGM at the variation start timing of the special symbol can be made constant at all times, at the variation start timing of the special symbol, the stop timing of each symbol row and the type of BGM being executed can be easily determined. It is possible to simplify the process for setting the stop sound, but as a configuration other than this, a configuration in which a specific BGM is always loop-reproduced is used regardless of the change situation of the special symbol. May be. In this case, at the variation start timing of the special symbol, means for determining the stop timing of each symbol row corresponding to the variation pattern set this time, and means for determining the reproduction position of the BGM being reproduced at the start of variation of the special symbol Is provided, and the type of stop sound may be set after determining the reproduction status of the BGM near the stop timing of each symbol row.

In addition, the type of BGM may be changed or the tempo of BGM may be changed while the special symbol is changing. In this case, the timing for setting the type of stop sound is not at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, but a predetermined time when the stop timing of each symbol row arrives (the BGM cannot be changed again before the stop timing arrives) It is sufficient to execute the processing for determining the type and tempo of the BGM being reproduced before (about a period of time). This makes it possible to smoothly cope with a sudden change in BGM.

Furthermore, for example, when the number of holding balls determination means for determining the number of holding balls of the special symbol, and the determination result of the determination means, when it is determined that the number of holding balls is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more), In a pachinko machine configured to easily set a fluctuation pattern in which a shorter fluctuation time is set than when it is determined that the number is less than a predetermined number, the tempo of the BGM to be reproduced is changed according to the number of reserved balls, specifically, May be configured such that a BGM with a fast tempo is easily set when the number of reserved balls is large.

In addition, in the present control example, the type of the stop sound that is output as voice corresponding to the stop timing of the third symbol is selected from the predetermined data defined in the stop sound selection table 222ab. However, without being limited to this, for example, BGM discrimination means for discriminating the tempo or rhythm of the BGM to be reproduced may be provided, and the stop sound may be generated according to the discrimination result of the BGM discrimination means. In this case, for example, a beat set as a stop sound is set according to the rhythm of BGM (for example, a stop sound of 2 beats and a stop sound of 3 beats), and the stop sound set according to the tempo of BGM is reproduced. The process of setting the speed may be executed. In addition, the output period of the stop sound may be changed according to the determination result of the BGM determining means.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the stop sound and the BGM overlap at the stop timing of the third symbol, the stop sound is configured to be output with priority over the BGM, but other configurations It is also possible to use, for example, a win/loss determination means for determining the lottery result of the special symbol this time, and a variable means for varying the setting of the voice output when the determination result of the win/loss determination means is a big hit. When the setting of the voice output is changed by the changing means, the BGM may be output with priority over the stop sound. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the stop sound from being output at the timing when the stop sound is always output, that is, at the stop timing of the third symbol. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is different from the normal one and has a strange feeling.

In this control example, in order to output only one voice when the stop sound and the BGM overlap, a process for muting the other voice is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured to synthesize and output the respective duplicated voices, and in this case, it is preferable to provide a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not to synthesize the duplicated voices in accordance with the lottery result of the special symbol. This allows the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol depending on whether or not the overlapping voices are synthesized.

In addition, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, a time keeping means (for example, RTC) having a backup power source capable of continuously measuring the present time is provided, and the time keeping means allows the predetermined time (for example, noon). ) Is timed, in the pachinko machine 10 provided with a time effect executing means capable of executing a specific time effect, one stop sound is selected from a stop sound group corresponding to BGM reproduced during the time effect. May be configured to be set. In this case, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 having the same specifications are installed side by side, the stop sounds set from the same stop sound group are different between the adjacent pachinko machines 10. The stop sound to be set may be different according to the number.

With this configuration, it is possible to simultaneously reproduce the same BGM for a plurality of pachinko machines 10 depending on the time effect, and to correspond to the same BGM and to have different modes (for example, scale, rhythm, Since the stop sound of (tempo, period) can be reproduced by the adjacent pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a realistic audio effect that is difficult to realize with a single pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the variation time (variation pattern) of different length is set according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol or the lottery result of the special symbol, the third symbol is displayed until the first predetermined period elapses. When each fluctuation pattern is configured to perform high-speed fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation that cannot stop and display the third symbol), and then execute low-speed fluctuation (low-speed fluctuation that can stop and display the third symbol) on the third symbol The configuration is such that the variation pattern is set so that the low-speed variation period is constant regardless of the length of the variation time that is set, and then the above-described stop sound and BGM processing is executed. You may. In this case, it is preferable that the BGM for the low speed fluctuation is determined at the timing of switching from the high speed fluctuation to the low speed fluctuation, and the type of the stop sound is determined based on the determined BGM.

By configuring in this way, even when it is possible to set a fluctuation pattern having a plurality of different fluctuation times, the stop timing of the third symbol can be made common, so the stop sound and BGM are set. The processing can be simplified.

In addition, in this control example, the processing targeting the BGM and the stop sound is described as the plurality of sounds output from the pachinko machine 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output timing and the output of other sounds are not limited thereto. The mode may be adjustable. Specifically, the type of voice (operation sound) output when the frame button 22 is operated is changed according to the type of BGM being played back, or is matched with the timing of the beat of the BGM being played back. Alternatively, the output timing of the operation sound may be adjusted, or the abnormal sound indicating the abnormality of the pachinko machine 10 may be set as the abnormal sound beat at a timing different from that of the sound being reproduced. It may be configured to be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the beat of the abnormal sound from being absorbed by the beat of the BGM being reproduced by the pachinko machine 10 and to prevent the abnormal sound from being missed.

<About electrical configuration of main controller in second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172. The second control example is different from the above-described first control example in that a variation pattern 2 table 202aa is used instead of the variation pattern table 202d, and is otherwise the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 2 table 202aa will be described with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern 2 table 202aa. As shown in FIG. 172(a), the variation pattern 2 table 202aa is provided with a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern 2 table 202aa1 with respect to the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 121) of the first control example described above. Are different. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern 2 table 202aa1 is set as a probability variation state where the special symbol is shortened variation as a game state, a time saving state is set, and a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of play is selected. This is a data table that is referred to in this case and defines a variation pattern of different variation time based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 and the determined stop type.

Here, with reference to FIG. 172(b), the contents of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern 2 table 202aa1 will be described. FIG. 172(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the deviation (probability change) variation pattern 2 table 202aa1. As shown in FIG. 172(b), when the stop type for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is "completely out" and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 190", "Short deviation (12 seconds)" is selected, and in the range of "191 to 198", "Disconnection (18 seconds)" is selected. When the stop type is "reach" and the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 190", "various normal reach (30 seconds)" is selected and "191 to 197" is selected. It is stipulated that "various super reach (60 seconds)" is selected and "198" is selected "special reach (90 seconds)".

Here, when “short deviation (12 seconds)” or “disconnection (18 seconds)” is selected, the BGM and stop sound setting processing described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170 is executed. .. In addition, in the above-mentioned FIG. 169 and FIG. 170, the setting process of the BGM and the stop sound when the lottery result of the special symbol is out has been described as an example, but in the case where other fluctuation patterns are set. The same setting process is executed.

When various fluctuation patterns are selected with reference to the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern 2 table 202aa1, a fluctuation pattern command for indicating the fluctuation pattern is set, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 like other commands. To be done. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, it sets the effect mode to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the received variation pattern command.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174, an electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, the target (device) for which the variable display of the third symbol for which the voice lamp control device 113 performs operation control is executed is different. Specifically, in the above-described first control example, the variable display device unit 80 is used to variably display the third symbol, whereas in the second control example, the third symbol display device 81 is used to change the third symbol. The difference is that the three symbols are variably displayed.

Here, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. As illustrated in FIG. 173(a), the ROM 222 of the second control example is different from the ROM 222 of the first control example described above in the outer reel operation table 222c, the inner reel operation table 222d, the symbol operation table 222e, and the special effect. The difference is that the scenario table 222f and the symbol group storage area 222g are deleted, and the BGM type selection table 222aa and the stop sound selection table 222ab are added. Further, it is different in that the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 222a are associated with various effect modes displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that the specific contents (contents indicating the presentation mode) defined in the variation pattern selection table 222a are the same as those of a well-known gaming machine using a liquid crystal display device, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The BGM type selection table 222aa is a data table for selecting the BGM reproduced during the variable display of the third symbol executed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. Here, the contents of the BGM type selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the BGM type selection table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 174(a), in the present control example, different BGM types (BGMA, BGMB) based on the special symbol lottery result (winning/absence determination result) and the acquired value of the sound effect counter 223ab, and , Different tempos (BPM80, BPM120) are selected.

Specifically, when the hit/no hit determination result is “hit (big hit)” and the value of the voice effect counter 223ab is in the range of “0 to 69”, “BGMA (BPM120)” is selected as the BGM. In the range of “70 to 89”, “BGMA (BPM80)” is selected, and in the range of “90 to 99”, “BGMB (BPM120)” is selected. doing.

Then, if the result of the hit/miss determination is “out” and the value of the voice effect counter 223ab is in the range of “0 to 89”, “BGMA (BPM80)” is selected and the range of “90 to 99” is selected. If so, “BGMA (BPM 120)” is selected.

That is, in the second control example, the BGM type and the tempo to be reproduced during the variable display are configured to be different according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Specifically, BGM (BGMB (BPM120)), which is selected only when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and BGM (BGMA), which is easier to select when the special symbol lottery result is a big win (BPM120)) is provided. With this configuration, the player can predict the lottery result of the special symbol this time based on the BGM reproduced during the variable display of the special symbol (during the variable display of the third symbol), and thus the game It is possible to make the person interested in not only the presentation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 but also the voice output from the voice output device 226.

Further, in the present control example, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, BGM having a faster tempo is more easily selected. As a result, the player's feeling of uplifting can be enhanced. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, the remaining period of the time saving state is determined as an element when selecting the BGM, and the selection ratio of the BGM type is changed based on the determination result. Specifically, when it is determined that the remaining time period (remaining short time count) is 10 times or more, the BGM having a slow tempo is configured to be easily selected. ) Is less than 10 times, it is configured such that a BGM with a fast tempo is easily selected. As a result, it is possible to audibly inform the player that the time saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is approaching. In addition, by making the selection ratio of the BGM type different according to the remaining short time count, for example, when a fast-paced BGM is selected in a state where the remaining short time count is large, this special symbol lottery is a big hit. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Further, since it is possible to perform common processing with the tempo of BGM selected according to the remaining number of hours saved and the tempo of BGM selected according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the processing of the voice lamp control device 113. The load can be reduced.

In this control example, the BGM type and the reproduction speed (tempo) are selected according to the special symbol lottery result and the remaining time in the time saving state, but other configurations may be used. For example, the table for selecting the type of BGM and the table for selecting the tempo of BGM may be different, and any element may be selected from each table according to different conditions. As a result, the BGM to be reproduced is determined by combining the elements selected from each table, so that the BGM can be diversified. In this case, the player can operate the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) so that the BGM type can be selected, and the BGM tempo can be variably selected depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. ..

Further, in the present control example, it is configured that the tempo of the BGM is likely to be faster when the big hit is won, but it is sufficient if the player can predict the lottery result of the special symbol according to the tempo of the BGM, and vice versa. The BGM having a slow tempo may be easily reproduced. Further, in the present control example, a specific tempo is selected as the tempo of the BGM to be reproduced, but the tempo may be changed during the reproduction of the BGM. In this case, for example, the BGM is reproduced at a common tempo until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the BGM is reproduced, and thereafter, the BGM is reproduced according to the reproduction speed of the selected BGM. It is better to configure it. With this configuration, it is possible to make the lottery result unpredictable by voice immediately after the start of the special symbol variation, so that the player is interested in various effects during the special symbol variation. You can

Further, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display information for indicating the type of BGM currently executed and the reproduction speed (tempo). As a result, the player can visually recognize the information about the sound that is currently being reproduced, so that a more easy-to-understand game can be provided.

The stop sound selection table 222ab is a data table for selecting the type of voice (stop sound) reproduced in accordance with the stop timing of the third symbol executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, the type of stop sound is configured to be different according to the type and reproduction speed of the BGM reproduced during the special symbol variation, or the variation pattern that is set. Thereby, the stop sound corresponding to both the variable display effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the BGM output from the voice output device 226 can be reproduced, and the display effect is displayed. It is possible to enhance the sense of unity with the sound effect.

Here, the contents of the stop sound selection table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. 174(b). FIG. 174(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stop sound selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 174(b), in this control example, different stop sounds are generated according to the BGM type selected using the BGM type selection table 222aa and the variation pattern (symbol stop timing) set this time. It is configured to be selected.

Specifically, when the BGM type is “BGMA (BPM120)”, the symbol stop timing is stopped at any of timing A (see FIG. 169(a)) and timing B (see FIG. 170(a)). The sound A (8th note with beam) is selected (see FIG. 169(b)), and in the case of “BGMA (BPM80)”, the symbol stop timing is timing A (see FIG. 169(a)), timing B In any of (see FIG. 170(a)), the stop sound B (triplet) is selected (see FIG. 169(c)), and in the case of "BGMB (BPM120)", the symbol stop timing is timing A. The stop sound B (triplet) is selected at both the timing B (see FIG. 169(a)) and the timing B (see FIG. 170(a)).

Returning to FIG. 173(b), the description will be continued. FIG. 173(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The RAM 223 of the second control example is different from the RAM 223 of the first control example described above in a specific remaining period flag 223h, a scenario counter 223i, a returning flag 223l, an operation mode storage area 223m, a stop symbol storage area 223n, and an outer reel. The difference is that the motion counter 223p and the inner reel motion counter 223q are deleted and a switching flag 223aa and a sound effect counter 223ab are provided. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The switching flag 223aa is a flag for indicating that the switching condition for switching the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is satisfied, and is set to ON when the switching condition is satisfied. Specifically, in the present control example, when the game state is on standby, by operating the frame button 22, the scroll mode of the third symbol executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 It is configured to be switchable, and is turned on when the switching condition is satisfied based on the operation of the frame button 22 in the standby state (when the frame button operation for changing the scroll mode is executed). Is set to, when a change pattern command of the special symbol fluctuation is received in a state where the switching flag 223aa is set to ON, that is, when executing a new special symbol fluctuation, a switching command for switching the scroll mode Is set.

In this way, in this control example, when the operation for changing the scroll mode is performed during the standby of the game state, the variable display in which the scroll mode is changed is executed from the special symbol change executed thereafter. I am configuring. In this control example, the scroll mode is variable even when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the specific variable display (when the player operates the frame button 22), but in this case, Since the scroll mode is changed immediately after the frame button 22 is operated, the switching flag 223aa is never turned on.

It should be noted that a switching means for counting the elapsed time after the ON state of the switching flag 223aa is provided, and the switching flag 223aa is set when the timing means measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). May be configured to be turned off. As a result, even if the player who was playing the game before stops the game by performing an operation for turning on the switching flag 223aa when stopping the game, the next player is changed in the scroll mode. It is possible to suppress the situation of playing a game. Moreover, you may comprise so that the information for showing the scroll mode currently set may be displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 on standby.

The voice effect counter 223ab is a counter used when the BGM type is selected in the voice lamp control device 113, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99 in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 141). (Not shown).

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the contents defined in the ROM 302 and the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 will be described. 175(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 302 of the audio output device 226, and FIG. 175(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226. Is.

Regarding the contents of the audio file storage area 302a defined in the ROM 302, and the music data group storage area 303a, the music pointer 303b, the maximum value storage area 303c, and the music timer 303d defined in the RAM 303, Since it has been described above with reference to FIG.

The confirmation flag 303e is a flag for indicating that a command for indicating that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed has been received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a command for indicating that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed. Is set to ON when the message is received (see S9217 in FIG. 196). Then, in the voice setting process (see S9002 in FIG. 198), it is referred to at the end timing of the music data being reproduced (S9403 in FIG. 198), and when set to ON (S9403 in FIG. 198: Yes). , Is determined to be normal and is set to OFF (S9404 in FIG. 198). On the other hand, if it is set to OFF in the process of S9403, the process of configuring the value of the music pointer to 00H is executed again (see S9405 of FIG. 198).

That is, in this control example, the music data is set in advance according to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that is set, and the special symbol is definitely displayed at the reproduction end timing of the music data, that is, the end timing of the fluctuation time. When it is determined that the confirmation command indicating is received, and when it is determined that the confirmation command is not received, that is, even if the predetermined variation time has elapsed, if the special symbol variation has not ended When the determination is made, the music is loop-played. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation where only the reproduction of the music ends first when the variation of the special symbol does not end due to a defect, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. ..

<Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, control of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 179. The points that are changed from the first control example will be described, and the same control will not be illustrated and described.

FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. In the variation display setting process 2 (S2263), the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 145: S2603) is changed to the variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653) in contrast to the variation display setting process (FIG. 145: S2213) in the first control example. The difference is that the voice setting process (S2651) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 177, the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S2653), which is one process in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S2263) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of this variation pattern selection processing 2 (S2653).

In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653), the content of the detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, and if the switching flag 223aa is set to ON (from vertical scrolling to horizontal Timing for switching from scrolling or horizontal scrolling to vertical scrolling) Processing for outputting a command required for the switching setting is executed.

In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653), first, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2701), and the obtained value of the effect counter 223j and the type of the extracted variation pattern (variation type corresponding to the variation pattern command ) And the variation pattern 2 table 202aa is used to determine the variation pattern (S2751). Then, it is determined whether the switching flag 223aa is on, and if the switching flag 223aa is on (S2752: Yes), the display switching command and the voice switching command are set (S2753). If the current setting is vertical scrolling, a display switching command and a voice switching command for instructing to change to horizontal scrolling are set. On the other hand, if the current setting is horizontal scrolling, a display switching command and a voice switching command for instructing to change to vertical scrolling are set respectively. In the process of S2752, when it is determined that the switching flag 223aa is off (S2752: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the voice setting process (S2651), which is one process in the variable display setting process 2 (S2263), will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of this voice setting processing (S2651). In the voice setting process (S2651), the type of BGM to be output during the change of the special symbol is determined, and the process of determining the stop sound type of the special symbol is executed according to the determined BGM type.

In the voice setting process (FIG. 178: S2651), the value of the voice effect counter 223ab is acquired (S3701). The BGM type is determined from the BGM type selection table 222aa (see FIG. 174(a)) based on the acquired value of the voice effect counter 223ab and the determination result (the determination result of the special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command) (see FIG. 174(a)). S3702). A voice BGM command corresponding to the selected BGM type is set (S3703). The stop timing of each symbol row is extracted (analyzed) from the current variation pattern (S3704). Based on the determined BGM stop type and each symbol row stop timing, the stop sound type is determined from the stop sound selection table 222ab (see FIG. 174(b)) (S3705). A voice stop sound type command corresponding to the determined stop sound type is set (S3706). Voice commands necessary for other effects and the like are set (S3707), and this processing ends.

In this way, since the BGM type is determined based on the hit determination result, it is possible to predict the hit determination result at an early stage by the output BGM, and to have an expectation of winning.

In this control example, the BGM type of the special symbol that changes based on the result of the winning/decision determination is determined by the lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. The background may be set in advance and determined by lottery, and the BGM corresponding to the background may be selected. In such a configuration, for example, a background in the morning and a background in the evening are set, BGM with a fast tempo is output in the background in the morning, and BGM with a slow tempo is output in the background in the night. With such a configuration, it is possible to output the BGM having the impression matched with the background even with the same BGM.

In this control example, the same BGM is set at different tempos, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different BGMs are output at different tempos, and stop sounds are set according to the tempos. It may be configured as follows. Furthermore, it is configured to set and output a plurality of BGMs during the fluctuation of 1, so that the stop sound is selected and output according to the tempo of the BGM output at the stop timing of the symbol. You may comprise.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (S2257) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (S2257). In the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (S2257), the state of the pachinko machine 10 when the frame button 22 is operated (standby (standby) or specific effect is being executed (W reach reach display mode) Middle)), the processing for switching and setting the settings for switching between vertical scrolling and horizontal scrolling is executed.

In the frame button input monitoring/production process 2 (FIG. 179: S2257), first, it is determined whether an operation on the frame button 22 has been detected (whether the frame button 22 has been operated (whether the frame button 22 has been operated) (S3801). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3801: Yes), it is determined whether the state of the pachinko machine 10 is standby (standby) (S3802). When it is determined that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the standby state (S3802: Yes), the switching flag 223aa is set to ON (S3803), and this processing ends.

Here, when the switching flag 223aa is set to ON, when the variation of the special symbol is newly started from the standby state, the settings of vertical scroll and horizontal scroll are switched and changed. Accordingly, when the player plays the game, the player can play the game in a scroll direction that matches the player's preference.

On the other hand, in the process of S3802, when it is determined that the standby state is not in progress (S3802: No), it is determined whether the specific effect is being executed (S3804). Here, the specific effect indicates an effect period in which the special symbol is displayed in the W reach display mode in the variation pattern that is the W reach. The specific effect is not limited to the W reach and may be another effect.

In the process of S3804, when it is determined that the specific effect is being executed (S3804: Yes), if the current setting is vertical scroll, a display switching command for instructing to change to horizontal scroll. , And a voice switching command are set (S3805). On the other hand, if the current setting is horizontal scrolling, a display switching command and a voice switching command for instructing to change to vertical scrolling are set respectively. Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific effect is not being executed (S3804: No), the other frame button process is executed (S3705), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3801, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S3801: No), this processing ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device 1140 in Second Control Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 194. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 1140 will be described with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 1140 is powered on from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

If all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 1140 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR flash memory 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, as in the present embodiment. Is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, and therefore, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the first flash memory of the NOR flash memory 234d to be read. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 1140 can be immediately started.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 1140 is executed so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 1140 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and the fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 does not operate. However, even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 1140 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c. , A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 180). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 180) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 sets the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the work storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, the NOR flash memory 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory. Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR flash memory 234d having an extremely small capacity, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. can do.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 181, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 include all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the present invention is not limited to this. The predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot processing that should be processed subsequent to the processing of S6102. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. Alternatively, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and thus reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which is possible after the boot process can be started earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 180. When the boot process is completed, the initialization process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, “OFF” or “0” is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by checking whether the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included, and the image controller 237 follows the transfer instruction so that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 192(a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the transfer to the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 192(b)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 161 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)). The determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 182(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 182(b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, like the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or a person related to the hall, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 1140 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation efficiency of the operation check is prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In the display control device 1140 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the start instruction of the variation effect is given from the main controller 110 by the voice lamp controller. When it is through 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining resident image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes the infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140 will be described. FIG. 182(a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(b). FIG. 182(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored according to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 182(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so not the power-on image but the normal effect image is the third symbol. In order to display on the display device 81, the command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then the display image setting process (S6351) is executed.

In the command determination processing (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is analyzed, and the processing according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when it is determined to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 183 to 187.

In the display image setting process (S6351), when the switching command is received in the command determination process (S6302), a process for transmitting the image information of the variable display layer 1 is executed. Details of the display image setting process (S6351) will be described later with reference to FIG. 188.

After the display image setting process (S6351) is executed, the display setting process (S6303) is then executed. In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. The content of is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191.

After the display setting process is executed, next, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the rear image after the change is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305). The drawing list shown in FIG. 166 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 1140 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As the counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hits A to F, front/rear outreach, reach other than front/rear outreach, complete detachment) is dealt with. The stop type table and the stop type counter to be compared are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: YES), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 183 to 187, details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described. First, FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 183, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (S6451). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (S6451: Yes), the invalid flag 233k is set to ON (S6452), and the process returns to S6401.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no display switching command (S6451: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 184(a). FIG. 184(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command judgment processing is performed. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, in reality, fluctuations longer than the set display data table are set. Even if the main control unit 110 has instructed the time-varying change effect, as will be described later, after the change effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control unit 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6504 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted to specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S6502 The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the above table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 183. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 184(b). FIG. 184(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any one of the jackpots A to F, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside, and complete out) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned on. (S6603) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of a change at a distance of several seconds or more, so that no two or more display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit" is displayed, and the player may misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "special big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the “special symbol jackpot”, the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 183, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409) and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 185(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process is a process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Then, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 183, the description will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display round number command is displayed. If there is a use round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 185(b). FIG. 185(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S6801). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6802).

Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the number-of-rounds command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 183, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the displaying ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 183, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the back image change command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 187(a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command process is a process for executing a process corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). .. Then, among the bits of the back surface image discrimination flag provided for each back surface image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S7002. ..

Further, in the task process (S6304), if it is specified that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image specified in the display data table, the back surface image determination flag set in S7102. From that, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored in the RAM. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, the player does not receive more than one back image change command within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some commands may change due to the influence of noise, and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7102, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. It is also possible to extract any one back image change command and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 183. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6416), and there is an error command. If (S6416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 187(b). FIG. 187(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, of the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S7102), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process (S6303), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202 is determined, and the error is detected. The processing is executed so that the warning image corresponding to the type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the processing of S7202, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly understand the occurrence status of the error.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 183. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6418) and the process returns to S6401.

In the processing of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), and the processes of S6402 to S6418 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. While extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 184(a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 184(b)), which are the processing corresponding to the respective commands, the other commands are Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 184(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the details of the above-described display image setting process (S6351) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140 will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the display image setting process (S6351).

In the display image setting process (S6351), first, it is determined whether an invalid flag (not shown) is set to ON (S7151). This invalid flag is set to ON in the process of S6452 when it is determined in the command determination process (S6302) that the display switching command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. In the processing of S7151, if it is determined that the invalid flag is set to ON (S7151: Yes), the image information of the horizontal scroll display data among the variable display data set in the display data table buffer. Is rewritten into transparent information (S7152), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the invalid flag is off (S7151: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140 will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 189, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations that are set to ON The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task process (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, etc. are set for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 189. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. In this pointer updating process, the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that the pointer 233f is incremented by one each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S7403), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404). Next, the processing proceeds to S7405.

In the process of S7405, the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S7405), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S7505, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S7406), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, for example, when the variable display data table is set, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 189, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) forming the image is specified based on the rendering contents developed in the process of S7206 together with the warning image previously developed, and for each sprite, Various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). When the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S7209: No), the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d because the finalized display effect has not yet been produced and the finalized display effect is to be produced. The data is set (S7210), and then the Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the last stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 1140, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7215, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so that a fixed time has elapsed from the end of the fixed display effect. After that, processing for displaying the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the display data table for demonstration is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set in the.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 182(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the production time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends. The process of setting the display data table that defines that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140 will be described. First, FIG. 192(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described with reference to FIG. 192(b). FIG. 192(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting processing (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, after the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing is not completed (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Further, as a result of the processing in S7601, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the processing proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the resident target image data is not transferred. A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the processing in S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 of FIG. 182(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 of FIG. 182(b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 183 to 187) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 189 to 191) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) (see S7501: No in FIG. 192(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 1140 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose reading speed is slow at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 1140. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (see FIG. 192(a), S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140 will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (see FIG. 189, S6303) executed previously. The information described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data in the process of S7702 (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after the image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237, and when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the processing in S7706 that the transfer processing is not completed (S7706: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S7708), the sprite image data indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S7707: No), then it is determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S7709). If the back image change flag is not on but on (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S7710), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (usually The leading address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the processing of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7713 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 1140 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S7713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transfer here). The sub address provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal image transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

As described above, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the process indicated by the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the stop type information to be displayed is the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, if the back image of the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140 will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 166) is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). A parameter necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing is associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image for one frame, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is set to the detail for each sprite. As the detailed drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 182(b)) is executed, the drawing process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame will be replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed every 20 milliseconds while the drawing processing of the image for one frame is performed.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Output Device 226 in Second Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 198. In the second control example, the voice command set by the voice lamp control device 113 is output to the voice output device 226 by the command output process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S 2202 in FIG. 141), and the voice output device 226. Is configured to output voice data corresponding to the received voice command.

In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113 that can receive the command for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110, various display commands to be output to the display control device 1140, and the voice By setting various voice commands to be output to the output device 226, a plurality of effect modes for indicating the special symbol lottery result (effect display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) The (visual display mode) and the effect voice mode (audible voice mode) output from the speaker via the voice output device 226 can be centrally set. Therefore, when a plurality of effect modes are executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the execution timing of each effect mode, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

In this control example, the visual display mode and the auditory voice mode described above are used as a plurality of effect modes for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is not limited to this. With respect to the special symbol, any effect may be executed as long as it shows the result of the lottery result. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand operating the operation handle) or an olfactory effect mode for stimulating the player's olfaction is used. The special symbol lottery result may be suggested or notified to the player. As described above, by appropriately combining a plurality of types of effect modes, and configured to execute one effect, it is possible to set various effect modes that are executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of this main processing.

When the main process of the voice output device 226 is executed, first, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S9001). The details of this command determination processing (S9001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 196, but when various voice commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 are received, the received voice commands are made to correspond. The processing for outputting the sound is performed. After the processing of S9001, the audio setting processing for reproducing the audio data and updating the value of the music pointer is executed (S9002). Details of the voice setting process (S9002) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S9002 ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 303 (S9003). If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S9003 (S9003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S9005), and the power-off process is executed (S9006). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S9007), and then the process is infinitely looped.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S9003 (S9003: No), it is determined whether the RAM303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM303 (S9004), and the RAM303 is destroyed. If not (S9004: No), the process returns to S9001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (S9004: Yes), the process is looped indefinitely to stop the execution of the subsequent processes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 195(b), a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 195(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing. This command interrupt process (see FIG. 195(b)) is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S9101), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process described later, and the process according to the read command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196, the command determination process (S9001) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 195(a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination processing (S9001). In this command determination processing (S9001), control according to the type of various commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the command determination processing (S9001), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new unprocessed command in the command buffer area (S9201). If it is determined that there is no new unprocessed command (S9201: No), the command The determination process is ended and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an unprocessed new command (S9201: Yes), a new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S9202), and then the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area is processed. The command types of all the commands are analyzed (S9203).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a voice stop sound command that outputs a voice (stop ON) at the timing of stopping each third symbol (S9204), and the voice stop is performed. When it is determined that there is a sound command (S9204: Yes), the sound file (stop sound data group) corresponding to the stop sound notified by the command is read from the sound file storage area 302a of the ROM 302 and read. The voice file (stop sound data group) is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9205). Next, a value corresponding to the timing at which the stop sound is reproduced is set to the value of the music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the stop sound data is set to the music timer 303d (S9206).

When the processing of S9206 is completed, then, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a this time is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9207), and voice synthesis is performed. The reproduction of the stop sound data is set in the CN (channel) 2 of the unit 306 (S9208), and the process proceeds to S9209.

On the other hand, in the process of S9204, when it is determined that the voice stop sound command is not included in the commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S9204: No), or the process of S9208 described above is executed. In this case, next, it is determined whether or not the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 includes a voice BGM command (S9209). In the processing of S9209, when it is determined that there is a voice BGM command (S9209: Yes), the voice file (music data group) corresponding to the music indicated by the received voice BGM command is read from the voice file storage area 302a. Then, the read audio file (music data group) is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9210).

When the process of S9210 is completed, then, the reproduction speed corresponding to the tempo of the BGM indicated by the received voice BGM command is set (S9211). Next, "00H" is set to the value of the music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the BGM data is set to the music timer 303d (S9212). Next, BGM correction processing (S9213) is executed.

Here, in this control example, even if the same BGM is reproduced, the tempo of the reproduced BGM can be made different. Specifically, the audio file storage area 302a corresponds to a song with a standard tempo (for example, BPM (Beat Per Minute) 80, that is, a tempo at which quarter notes execute 80 beats per minute). Of the standard tempo read out from the audio file storage area 302a, and the tempo corresponding to the information (tempo information) indicating the tempo included in the BGM command for music that has been received this time. Therefore, the reproduction speed of the audio data is variable.

In this way, different tempos can be set by varying the playback speed of the audio files stored in the storage unit (audio file storage area 302a), so that the same music with different tempos can be set. It is possible to eliminate the need to store the file in the storage means (audio file storage area 302a).

Here, with reference to FIG. 197, the BGM correction process (S9213) which is one of the processes in the command determination process (S9001) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. In the BGM correction process (S9213), a process of creating a corrected audio file is executed when the output periods of the BGM and the stop sound overlap. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the contents of the BGM correction processing (S9213).

In the BGM correction process (S9213), first, the audio file of the stop sound data stored in the music data group storage area 303a is read (S9301). The stop sound data read in the process of S9301 is stored in the process of S9205 of the command determination process (S9001 of FIG. 196). Next, a voice output period (period in which the stop sound is reproduced) is extracted from the read voice file (S9302), and the voice output period of the extracted stop sound data and the voice output period of the BGM data are compared (S9303). .. Next, in the processing of S9303, as a result of comparing the stop sound data and the BGM data, it is determined whether or not there is an overlapping period in which the audio output periods overlap (S9304). When it is determined that the stop sound and the BGM have an overlapping period (S9304: Yes), a corrected audio file in which the BGM data corresponding to the overlapping period is corrected to mute is created (S9305), and the music data group storage area is created. The BGM audio file stored in 303a is rewritten to the corrected audio file created in the process of S9305 (S9306), and the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9304, when it is determined that there is no overlap period between the sound output periods of the stop sound data and the BGM data (S9304: No), it is not necessary to create the corrected sound file, and thus this process is ended. ..

As described above, in this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the BGM (song, tempo) corresponding to the special symbol variation, and sets the stop sound corresponding to the set BGM mode. Is configured. As a result, even when the tempo of BGM is changed, the stop sound corresponding to the tempo can be reproduced. Further, when the timing of stepping the beat of the set BGM (timing to beat) and the stop timing of the third symbol executed corresponding to the special symbol variation do not match, as a type of stop sound, a reproduction period Sets a long stop sound, and is configured to set a stop sound that beats at both the timing of beating the set BGM beat and the stop timing of the third symbol. With such a configuration, even when the tempo of the BGM is changed, the stop sound corresponding to both the set tempo of the BGM and the stop timing of the third symbol can be reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to set an effect mode in which the sound and the display that do not give the player a feeling of strangeness are combined, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the present control example, in the audio output device 226, an audio file of a stop sound reproduced in accordance with the stop timing of the third symbol, and an audio file of BGM reproduced corresponding to the special symbol variation, It is configured such that it can be set separately, and when playing back the set audio files, the BGM audio is set to mute for the portions where the audio playback timings overlap.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the BGM sound and the stop sound sound are output at the same time and the volume is partially increased. Further, even when the timing of beating the BGM beat and the timing of beating the stop sound are slightly different (for example, 0.05 seconds), it is possible to reproduce the sound without making the player feel uncomfortable. ..

Returning to FIG. 196, the description will be continued. After the BGM correction processing (S9213) is executed, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a this time is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9214). The reproduction of BGM data is set to CN1 of the voice synthesis unit 306 (S9215), and the process returns to S9201.

On the other hand, in the process of S9209, when it is determined that the voice BGM command is not received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S9209: No), it is determined whether or not there is a voice confirmation command (S9216). If it is determined that there is a voice confirmation command (S9216: Yes), the confirmation flag 303e is set to ON (S9217), and the process returns to S9201.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9216, when it is determined that there is no voice confirmation command (S9216: No), it is determined whether or not there is a voice switching command (S9218). When it is determined that there is a voice switching command (S9218: Yes), the voice file data is switched and set (S9219), and the process returns to S9201. On the other hand, in the process of S9218, when it is determined that the voice switching command has not been received (S9218: No), the process according to the other command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S9214). , The process returns to S9201. In the processing of S9214, if the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is, for example, a command for instructing the reproduction of a sound effect, the reproduction of the sound effect of the type designated by the command is set. Further, if the command is an instruction to reproduce the warning sound, the reproduction of the warning sound of the type designated by the command is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, the details of the audio setting process (S9002) executed in the main process (see FIG. 195(a)) by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the voice setting process (S9002).

In this voice setting process (see FIG. 198), first, it is determined whether or not BGM is being reproduced (S9401). If it is determined that BGM is not being reproduced (S9401: No), a single sound effect is generated. It means that a warning sound or the like is being reproduced or that no sound is being output, and there is no possibility of switching to another sound data during the reproduction of the sound, so this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9401, if it is determined that the BGM is being reproduced (S9401: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the music data being reproduced (S9402). That is, it is determined whether the value of the music timer 303d has become 0, and when it is determined that it is not the reproduction end timing of the music data (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has not become 0) (S9402: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9402, when it is determined that the end timing of the music data being reproduced has come (that is, the value of the music timer 303d becomes 0) (S9402: Yes), the music data is reproduced. In the data group storage area 303a, a process for setting the reproduction of the music data next to the music data that has been reproduced this time is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the confirmation flag 303e is set to ON (S9403). When it is determined that the confirmation flag 303e is on (S9403: Yes), the confirmation flag 303e is set to off (S9404), and the process proceeds to S9406. On the other hand, if it is determined that the confirmation flag 303e is not on (S9403: No), the value of the music pointer 303b is updated to 00H (S9405).

That is, normally, the value of the music timer 303d corresponding to the BGM is set in accordance with the change stop timing of the special symbol, and the BGM is also stopped at the timing when the change of the special symbol stops. However, due to the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10, when the voice lamp control device 113 cannot receive the stop command for indicating the fluctuation stop of the special symbol output from the main control device 110, the confirmation flag 303e is set to ON. The BGM is played back from the beginning without doing so. Thereby, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is not stopped (when the command for indicating that the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped cannot be received), it is possible to suppress the problem that only BGM is stopped first. You can

Next, in the processing of S9406, it is determined whether or not the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value (data stored in the maximum value storage area 303c) corresponding to the current music data group (S9406). ).

In the processing of S9406, when it is determined that the value of the music pointer 303b does not match the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9406: No), 1 is added to the value of the music pointer 303b. Then, the process is updated (S9407), and the process proceeds to S9409. On the other hand, in the processing of S9406, when it is determined that the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9406: Yes), the value of the music pointer 303b is set to " 01H” (S9408), and the process proceeds to S9409. By the processing of S9408, the value of the music pointer 303b is updated, so that the music can be reproduced in a predetermined order.

<Regarding another example of the second control example>
Next, another example of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 199. This different example is different from the above-described second control example in that the variable display device unit 80 used in the above-described first control example is provided in place of the third symbol display device 81. The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in this another example is a combination of the configuration of the first control example and the configuration of the second control example described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the present modification, the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 is changed in accordance with the operation control of the inner reel 811 described in the first control example, according to the set tempo of BGM. .. In this way, by varying the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 in accordance with the tempo of the BGM to be reproduced, it is possible to execute a realistic effect by the sound and the rotation status of the inner reel 811. Specifically, the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 is increased as the BGM tempo increases.

Here, the contents of the voice setting process 3 (S2671) executed in this another example will be described with reference to FIG. 199. This voice setting process 3 (S2671) is the BGM determined from the BGM type selection table 222aa with respect to the voice setting process (see S2651 of FIG. 178) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the second control example described above. The type tempo (BPM) is determined (S3751), and when it is determined that the determined BGM tempo (BPM) is 120 (S3751: Yes), a high speed is set as the reel rotation speed (S3753), and the determination is made. When it is determined that the tempo (BPM) of the generated BGM is not 120 (that is, 80) (S3751: No), a low speed is set as the reel rotation speed (S3752). Since the other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description will be omitted.

With such a configuration, in order to suggest the special symbol lottery result to the player, the drive control is made to correspond to the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 with respect to the BGM determined using the BGM type selection table 222aa. It is possible to enhance the effect.

In addition, in the above-described another example, the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 is configured to be changed according to the set BGM, but the operation content other than the inner reel 811 is changed according to the set BGM. It may be configured to.

The operation at the time of starting the rotation of the inner reel 811 so that the timing at which the player grasps the tempo of the BGM executed this time is the same as the timing at which the player grasps the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 executed this time. It may be configured to execute the control. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player grasps the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 before the BGM is reproduced, and thus grasps the current lottery result.

Further, in this another example, the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 is made variable in accordance with the set tempo of BGM, but other operation control may be performed on the inner reel 811. Well, for example, according to the type and tempo of BGM, the rotation of the inner reel 811 may be temporarily stopped, the rotation speed may be temporarily increased or decreased, and the rotation direction may be temporarily changed. May be. With such a configuration, it is possible to achieve an effect with a set BGM by using not only the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 but also the rotation mode.

Further, in this another example, a configuration is used in which the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 of the variable display device unit 80 used in the above-described first control example is varied in accordance with the set BGM tempo. Besides, for example, the variable display speed of the 7-segment display unit 1600 and the variable display speed of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be changed.

Further, in this another example, the changing speed (the rotation speed of the inner reel 811) of the third symbol (the symbol that is variably displayed to show the special symbol lottery result) is changed in accordance with the set BGM tempo. Although configured, there is a problem that it is difficult to stop the predetermined stop symbol of the third symbol by changing the changing speed of the third symbol.

Therefore, with respect to the above-mentioned problem, for example, it may be configured to set the stop display mode of the third symbol based on the information in which the changing speed of the third symbol is changed. This makes it possible to display a stop symbol corresponding to the set variation speed of the third symbol, so that variation display can be executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. Moreover, as another countermeasure, when stopping the plurality of third symbols and displaying the lottery result of the special symbols by the combination of the plurality of stopped third symbols, the timing for stopping each third symbol is set. You may comprise so that it may determine corresponding to the fluctuation speed of the set 3rd symbol. Furthermore, the changing speed of the third symbol during high speed fluctuation is set to a low speed, and the third symbol is stopped in a predetermined stop display mode by continuing the fluctuation of the third symbol for a predetermined period at a low changing speed. It may be configured as follows.

In the first control example described above, a plurality of display means (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600) capable of variably displaying identification information (third symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol are provided, The display areas of the plurality of display means (areas visible to the player) are arranged so as to overlap with each other, and various operation modes of the display means are switched to set various variable display modes. .. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with various variable display modes, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing early.

In the first control example, a display unit (inner reel 811, outer reel 821) using a medium on which the third symbol is printed in advance and a display unit (7 segment display unit 1600) using seven segments are provided. Although it is used, any other structure may be used as long as it is a display means capable of displaying the third symbol to the player, for example, the liquid crystal display used in the second control example described above. The third symbol display device 81 may be used as one of the display means, or by irradiating the transparent acrylic plate with a mark for indicating a specific display mode with light from the side, a specific display A display unit using a light guide plate that allows the player to visually recognize the aspect or a display unit using an organic EL may be used as one of the display units. Further, as in the second control example described above, a plurality of image layers may be created for one liquid crystal display and the image layers to be actually displayed may be switched.

Further, in the above-described first control example, the display means for executing the variable display of the third symbol is switched according to the game state to be set, so that the variable display mode being executed is grasped. This allows the player to easily understand the currently set game state. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display mode may be set so that the player cannot easily understand the currently set game state.

In the first control example described above, the double reel structure in which the reel type display means is arranged in an overlapping manner is used, and with respect to the outer reel (the side closer to the player's viewpoint) of the double reel structure (outer reel 821). , A reel (inner reel 811) provided on the inner side of the double reel structure is formed with a region (first region) where the player can visually recognize and a region (second region, third region) which is difficult to visually recognize, When performing the variable display of the third symbol by using the reel 811, the outer reel 821 is variably operated to the first area, and when the variable display of the third symbol is performed by using the outer reel 821, It is configured to be executed using the second area and the third area of the outer reel 821.

This makes it possible to easily set a plurality of variable display modes by using the double reel structure. Further, in the present control example, since the variable display mode of the third symbol is set by using both reels of the double reel structure, it is possible to set more variable display modes, and the effect is produced. Can be increased.

In the present control example, in addition to the reel display by the double reel structure described above, the player is informed of the lottery result of the special symbol by the 7-segment display using the segment display device 600. Thereby, the player can be informed of the special symbol lottery result in more various display modes, and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, in this control example, the display method of the symbol (third symbol) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example displays the special symbol lottery result in a reel stop mode, unlike the conventional gaming machine which displays the special symbol lottery result using the liquid crystal screen. Is configured. In such a gaming machine, information other than the lottery result of the special symbol is used by using a liquid crystal screen like a conventional gaming machine, for example, continuous production in which the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher as it continues (for example, pseudo continuous production). Since there is no display area for notifying the player of the information indicating the number of times of execution, there is a problem that it is difficult to clearly inform the player of the process for continuous production. On the other hand, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is operated to change the display area visible to the player so that the player is informed of the process for continuous production (the number of executions of continuous production). I am configuring. As a result, even with a pachinko machine 10 that does not have a liquid crystal display device, the player can easily recognize the process of continuous production.

In this control example, the configuration for notifying the player of the continuous production process by changing the display area of the reel display is used, but the configuration of other configurations is used to inform the player of the continuous production process. You may comprise so that it may notify. Specifically, the color of the reel display (the color of the backlight that illuminates the reel display surface) can be changed or the sound effect during the reel operation can be changed according to the number of times the continuous production is executed. It may be configured.

Further, in this control example, in the pachinko machine 10, when the above-described continuous effect is executed, the display area of the reel display is gradually narrowed according to the number of times the continuous effect is executed. With such a configuration, the smaller the display area of the reel display for the player, the higher the expectation of the jackpot can be made, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand gaming machine. ..

In addition, by operating the displacement member 670 to narrow the display area of the reel display, the number of symbols stopped and displayed in the display area (the number of effective lines displaying the combination of symbols for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol) ) Is reduced, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol.

In the first control example, the time (variation time) from when the special symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed is varied according to the set game state. Specifically, in the gaming state where the special symbol lottery is likely to be executed (time saving state, probability variation state), it is easy to set a short variation time in order to increase the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed per unit time. In the gaming state where the lottery of symbols is difficult to be executed (normal state), a long variable time is easily set in order to reduce the period in which the lottery of special symbols is not performed (the period when the special symbols are not changed). doing.

In this control example configured in this manner, the speed of changing the third symbol displayed in the display area in the gaming state (normal state) in which a long variation time is likely to be set is slow (for example, 0.2 seconds) reel display To execute a 7-segment display with a high speed (for example, 0.05 seconds) for changing the symbol displayed in the display area in a game state (probably changing state, time saving state) in which a short fluctuation time is easily set. I am configuring. Thereby, even when a plurality of display methods with different variable speeds of the third symbol are used, the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is surely stopped and displayed after the lapse of a predetermined variation time. Can be made.

In this control example, during the dynamic display period (during the variable display period) for dynamically displaying the display symbol for indicating the one-time lottery result of the special symbol, it is as if the lottery result is displayed a plurality of times. It is configured to execute the pseudo-variable effect that is shown in the figure.

In this pseudo variation effect, during one dynamic display period, the re-variation effect of causing the display symbol to be stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) and then to start changing again is configured to be executed a plurality of times. The larger the number of times this re-variation effect is executed, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot.

Here, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 using the liquid crystal display device, for example, by displaying the number of re-variation effects (pseudo consecutive times) performed during the pseudo-variation effect on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, Although it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example does not have a liquid crystal display device, and the number of re-variation effects executed during the pseudo-variation effects for the player. There is a problem that it is difficult to inform the (pseudo consecutive number) in an easy-to-understand manner.

Therefore, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is changed every time the re-variation effect is executed to notify the player of the number of times the re-variation effect has been executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in this control example, each time the re-variation effect is executed, the displacement member 670 is configured to be variable so that the display area of the decorative pattern display device 800 is narrowed, and each time the re-variation effect is executed. , The number of effective lines in the display area is reduced. With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the effective line to be watched by the player, and thus it is possible to prevent the process of stopping and displaying the combination of display symbols corresponding to the jackpot from being overlooked. ..

In this control example, using the period in which one special symbol variation is executed, the pseudo variation effect described above, that is, the effect of varying the effective symbol row in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed is executed. Although it is configured, it may be configured to execute the effect of varying the effective symbol row over a plurality of special symbol variations as a configuration other than that.

In this case, for example, based on the winning information command set in the prefetching process (see S513 of FIG. 132) executed by the main control device 110 described later with reference to FIG. 132, the special symbol after the next change It is preferable to determine the lottery result in advance and set the effect (continuous effect) so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol variations based on the result of the advance determination. With this configuration, it is possible to stop and display the lottery result of the special symbol a plurality of times during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed, so the special symbol executed at any timing for the player It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the continuous effect has been executed in association with the variable display of.

In addition, in the present control example, the pseudo variable effect is executed so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol is gradually decreased, but the player can be changed by changing the effective line of the third symbol. It may be configured to provide a new variable display effect, for example, it may be configured to execute the pseudo variable effect so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually increases.

In this control example, when the pseudo variation effect is executed, the more the number of re-variations increases (the longer the variation time that is set), the higher the possibility that the jackpot is won. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the reach display is performed in a state where the number of pseudo stops of the third symbol during the pseudo variable effect is a predetermined number, it is highly possible that the jackpot is won. It may be configured to. As a result, in the period from the execution of the pseudo-variable effect to the end of the pseudo-variable effect, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while always having an expectation about the jackpot.

Further, in the present control example, a new effective line is formed by combining the display pattern printed on the inner reel 811 and the light emitting means (lightning LED 671) arranged in the variable display device unit 80. However, in addition to this, for example, when a specific display symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific position while a movable accessory for decoration is positioned at a specific position, a new effective line is formed. It may be configured. In addition, the display symbol may be stopped and displayed first, and then a new effective line may be formed when the light emitting means (lightning LED 671) emits light. In this way, a display symbol that can be displayed in a variable manner and an element other than the display symbol are combined so as to satisfy a predetermined condition to form a new effective line, so that the player grasps the lottery result of the special symbol. When paying attention, not only the variable display mode of the display symbol but also the light emitting mode of the light emitting means and the movable mode of the decorative movable accessory, so that the player is prevented from getting tired of the game early. can do.

In this control example, when the remaining short time count is less than 5, the player is notified of the remaining short time count using 7-segment. As a result, it is possible to notify in advance of the period until the gaming state that is advantageous to the player (time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state) is ended, so that the time saving state suddenly ends and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to suppress giving.

In addition, in this control example, during the variable display period of the special symbol, first, the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 110(a)), and then the remaining time saving count is displayed. It is configured to be done. Then, so that the display symbol showing the same number as the number displayed as the remaining time reduction number is not displayed in the 7-segment displaying the remaining time reduction number, the display symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is set. I am configuring.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the display mode of the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol and the remaining short time count display indicating the remaining short time count different, so that the remaining time count for the player is shortened. The number of times can be reliably notified.

Further, in this control example, after the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is not necessary to display the remaining short time count display indicating the remaining short time count, that is, the special symbol big hit is won. If you do, because it is configured to set the display symbol regardless of the numerical value of the number of remaining time shortened to be displayed next, set the mode of the display symbol for indicating that you have won the jackpot without restriction You can Therefore, it is possible to set the display mode of the display symbol which is stopped and displayed according to the privilege (the size of the number of prize balls or the game state set after the big hit game end) given by the big hit.

In addition, in the present control example, as shown in FIG. 111(b), the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b is used to display the remaining time saving count, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the left 7 It is also possible to use the segment display unit 1600a or the right 7 segment display unit 1600c to display the remaining time reduction count. In this case, for example, if the left 7-segment display unit 1600a that is first stopped and displayed is used to display the remaining short time count, the game is performed with the remaining short time count displayed next being grasped in advance. By doing this, as the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the left 7-segment display section 1600a, when the same numerical value as the remaining short time count displayed next is stopped and displayed, the lottery result of this time is a big hit. It can be grasped in advance. In addition, the 7-segment display unit 1600 that displays the remaining time reduction count may be appropriately changed.

Further, as will be described later in detail, in this control example, the variable display of the special symbol and the remaining short time count display are configured to be displayed within one variable display period (including the symbol fixing time). In addition, the remaining short time count display is executed for a certain period (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the set variation time of the special symbol. Therefore, for example, when the variation time of the set special symbol is 2 seconds, the variation display of the special symbol of 1.5 seconds is performed regardless of whether or not the remaining short time count display is executed, and then 0.5 seconds. Although the remaining time short time display is executed, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 1 second, it is determined whether or not the remaining time short time display is executed, and if the remaining time short time display is not executed, it is 1 second. In contrast to executing the special symbol variation, if it is in the state of performing the remaining short time display, the shortening variation of 0.5 seconds is executed as the special symbol variation, and then the remaining short time display of 0.5 seconds is performed. Is configured to run. With this configuration, it is possible to perform both the variable display of the special symbol and the short remaining time display within one variable display period of the special symbol.

In the present control example, as described above, the variable display of the special symbol and the short remaining time display are both performed during one variable display period of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of It may be configured to execute the remaining short time display so as to stride over the special symbol variation. In this case, for example, the special symbol variable display is executed for a fixed time regardless of the set variable time, and the remaining time which is the difference between the period during which the variable display is executed and the set variable time is shortened. It is advisable to set it as the time for displaying the number of times. As a result, the variable display mode of the special symbol can be made constant, a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided, and the pattern of the variable display mode can be simplified. Can be reduced.

In addition, the display lower limit time for executing the remaining short time display is set, and the remaining time which is the difference between the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the set variation time is a predetermined time (for example, 0 .5 seconds), the remaining short time display may be executed over the period in which the next special symbol variation is executed. With this configuration, the player can be surely ascertained about the number of remaining time reductions. However, in this case, the variation of the special symbol is started while the remaining short time display is being executed, which makes it difficult for the player to grasp that a new special symbol variation is started. There is a problem. Therefore, the player is notified that the special symbol variation is started by blinking the area (in the example of FIG. 111(b), the left light emitting area 822a of the left inner reel 811a) which is not used for the remaining short time display. Alternatively, the player may be notified that the special symbol variation is started by changing the emission color of the display mode of the remaining short time display (the display mode imitating “4” in FIG. 111(b)). It is good to configure. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a new special symbol variation has been started while the remaining short time display is being executed.

When the above-described processing is executed, the following configuration may be specifically provided in the voice lamp control device 113. First, the variation time extraction means for extracting the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation from the information included in the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and the variation of the third symbol within the variation time of the special symbol variation. Setting means for setting the third symbol variation display time for executing the display and the remaining short time display time for executing the remaining short time display, the third symbol variation display time set by the setting means, and the variation time extraction means extracts. The calculation means for calculating the difference between the fluctuation patterns (change time), the lower limit judgment means for judging whether the time calculated by the calculation means is less than or equal to a predetermined lower limit time (for example, 1 second), and the lower limit judgment means. When it is determined that the remaining short time count display is not completed within the current fluctuation pattern period, the continuation flag is set to ON when it is determined that the time is equal to or less than the lower limit fluctuation time.

Then, the continuation flag is configured to be turned off at the timing when the remaining short time count display is finished, and in the state where the continuation flag is set on, that is, the remaining short time count display is executed. When a new variation pattern is set, it may be configured to set a variation start display mode for indicating that a new symbol variation is executed during the remaining short time count display.

Further, the setting means is configured to set a plurality of different times as the time to display the remaining short time count display, and even if the shortest remaining time is set among the plurality of different times, the remaining short time count display indicates the current variation pattern period. The continuation flag may be set to ON when it is determined that the end is not completed. Further, in the case where the time saving state is set, the third symbol variable display time set by the setting means is configured to be different depending on whether the remaining short time display is executed or not. When displaying the number of times, it may be configured so that the shorter third symbol variable display time is set more easily than when not displaying.

Further, in this control example, in the variation time of the special symbol, the period during which the special symbol is variably displayed (symbol variation period) and the period during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol fixing period) are included and described. However, the symbol variation period of the special symbol and the symbol determination period may be divided and controlled without being limited to this. In this case, for example, the remaining short time display period is set in advance to be the same as the symbol finalization period, and the third symbol variation display time that is longer than the symbol variation period is set, or the remaining short time display period is set. Is set in advance so that it is longer than the symbol fixing period, and when it is determined that the remaining short time count display cannot be executed during the symbol fluctuation period, it indicates that it does not end within this fluctuation pattern period Alternatively, the continuation flag may be set to ON.

In the present control example, when the variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600 (variable display by 7 segments) is executed, the symbol display mode for showing the third symbol is variably displayed, Without being limited to this, it is possible to variably display while changing the display mode (for example, the display mode in which only one segment is lit among the seven segments) different from the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. It may be configured to. With this configuration, when the 7-segment display unit 1600 is repeatedly turned on and off at high speed during the variable display of the third symbol, the particular third symbol is stopped and displayed by the afterimage of light. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a person is misunderstood.

In addition, as a variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600, the player visually recognizes a high-speed variable display period during which the player cannot visually recognize the individual symbol display modes that are variably displayed, and the individual symbol display modes that are variably displayed. Easy low speed fluctuation display period is set, and the high speed fluctuation display period is variably displayed in a display mode different from the third symbol, and the low speed fluctuation display period is variably displayed in a symbol display mode showing the third symbol. You may do it. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the sudden stop of the third symbol while suppressing the erroneous recognition that the third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the afterimage of light during high-speed fluctuation. ..

In the second control example described above, the tempo (BPM (beat per minute)) of the fluctuation sound (BGM) output during the variable display of the special symbol (during the variable display of the third symbol) is configured to be variable. The stop sound of the third symbol is variable according to the tempo of the fluctuation sound (BGM) to be reproduced.

In this way, by variably setting the stop sound of the third symbol in correspondence with the BGM reproduced at different tempos, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the fluctuating sound and the stop sound of the third symbol, and the effect of the effect Can be increased.

In the above-mentioned second control example, even if the same BGM is output, the tempo to be output can be varied so that the player can feel that various BGMs are being output, and the game gets tired early. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, by changing the tempo of the BGM, even when the fluctuation display (dynamic display) is performed with the same fluctuation pattern, different fluctuation patterns are executed depending on the tempo of the BGM output accordingly. It can be reminiscent, and the variation of special symbols can be felt in various ways.

Further, even when the BGM tempo is changed and output, the stop sound corresponding to the change in the tempo is selected and output, so that it is possible to suppress the problem that the BGM and the stop sound do not match. Further, even when the BGM tempo is flexibly changed and played back by lottery or the like, the stop sound is converted and output according to the change of the tempo, and the stop sound is set so that the tempo becomes the reference tempo. If so, the stop sound can be easily output.

Further, in the present control example, the lottery ratio of the tempo of the BGM selected according to the lottery result is set to be variable, so that the BGM of the tempo that is easily selected in the case of winning is output, and the player is judged whether or not it is winning. It can be expected that the result is a hit.

In the second control example described above, the visual display mode and the auditory voice mode described above are used as a plurality of effect modes for indicating the special symbol lottery result, but the present invention is not limited to this. It suffices to execute an effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery to the player. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand operating the operation handle) or an olfactory effect mode for stimulating the player's olfaction is used. The special symbol lottery result may be suggested or notified to the player. As described above, by appropriately combining a plurality of types of effect modes, and configured to execute one effect, it is possible to set various effect modes that are executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example,
Once you hit the jackpot, you can increase the expected jackpot value until the jackpot situation occurs multiple times (for example, twice or three times), including that. May be implemented as Alternatively, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. In addition to pachinko machines, arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines,
The game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever with a coin inserted and a symbol effective line is determined, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, and is caused by the operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button), or
After a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed, and a predetermined game value is given to the player on condition that the combination of the identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one. A slot machine for generating a special game”, in which case coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of game media.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever,
For example, due to the operation of the stop button, or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and the predetermined symbol value at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. A special game is given to give the player a large amount of balls to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Concept of the invention with the winning opening unit 500 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member that has a guide surface for guiding the game ball into the ball entrance and is displaceable, the guide member is , A pair of projecting portions projecting from the guide surface and formed so as to be able to come into contact with a game ball rolling on the guide surface, the pair of projecting portions having a game ball along the guide surface. A gaming machine A1 which is arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the guided direction.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance through which a game ball can enter, and a guide member that has a guide surface for guiding the game ball into the ball entrance and is displaceable. ing. Examples of the guide member include, for example, a pair of wing members which have a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the entrance and which are arranged so as to sandwich the entrance and whose base end side is rotatably supported. In this case,
JP 03-164598 A discloses a technique in which a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface of one wing member and a second groove is provided on the entire guide surface of the other wing member. According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions,
Even when the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) on the guide surface of one wing member and the guide surface of the other wing member, the respective game balls are directed in different directions (one on the glass plate side and the other on the other side). It can be biased to the game board side). Therefore, each of these game balls can be smoothly inserted into the entrance. However, the conventional technique described above has a problem that the game ball cannot be sufficiently biased. In addition, a game ball that has entered from one side of the guide member may pass through the guide surface and pass through from the other side of the guide member. In this case, the game ball does not enter the ball entrance, so There was a problem that the interest was lost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the guide member is provided with a pair of projecting portions projecting from the guide surface and capable of contacting the game ball rolling on the guide surface. Since the installation portion is arranged along the guide surface in a position orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided, the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surface is brought into contact with the protruding portion. By doing so, such a game ball can be surely biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the entrance.

Further, the pair of projecting portions are arranged at different positions along the guide surface in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided, so that the game ball entering from one side of the guide member is projected. Can be brought into contact with the part. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball entering from one side of the guide member from passing through the guide member. As a result, the player's interest can be improved by allowing the game ball to enter the ball entrance.

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members that are disposed with the ball inlet port sandwiched therebetween and have a base end side rotatably supported, and the pair of wing members approach or separate the tip end side. By being rotated in the direction in which the game ball is passed, a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass or an open state in which the game ball can pass is formed, and the pair of projecting portions project from the respective guide surfaces of the pair of wing members. A direction in which the protruding portion of one of the pair of blade members and the protruding portion of the other blade member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. A gaming machine A2, which is arranged in different positions.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members which are disposed with the ball inlet opening interposed therebetween and whose base end side is rotatably supported. The installation portion projects from the respective guide surfaces of the pair of blade members, and the projection portion of one blade member and the projection portion of the other blade member of the pair of blade members are arranged along the guide surface. Since the game balls are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which they are guided, the game balls that are guided (rolled) by the guide surface are brought into contact with the projecting portion to ensure such game balls. Can be biased. as a result,
The ball can be smoothly inserted into the ball entrance, and the ball can be prevented from clogging.

Further, the projecting portion on one wing member and the projecting portion on the other wing member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface (the direction from the front end side to the base end side of the wing member). By arranging at different positions in the direction in which the game ball that has entered the guide surface of the one wing member reaches the guide surface of the other wing member, such a game ball in the other wing member It can be brought into contact with the protruding portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the guide surface of the one wing member from passing through the guide surface of the other wing member. As a result, the player's interest can be improved by allowing the game ball to enter the ball entrance.

In the gaming machine A2, the projecting portion is projected from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the wing member.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the projecting portion is projected from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than to the tip end side of the wing member, and thus is guided to the guide surface. It is possible to secure a region in which the game ball can roll before it abuts the projecting portion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the rolling speed of the game ball by that amount and smoothly enter the ball entrance.

In addition, the projecting portion is projected from the projecting surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the wing member, so that the course of the game ball that is biased by abutting the projecting portion is a ball entrance. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from returning to the pre-biased path before reaching the front (end of the guide surface). That is, it is possible to easily send the game ball from the guide surface to the ball entrance in the biased state.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the guide surface is formed with a first region that is continuous from the tip end side to the base end side of the wing member, and is not in contact with the game ball guided in the first region. The protrusion is formed to have a size, and the first area of the guide surface of one of the pair of blade members and the first area of the guide surface of the other blade member are the same. A gaming machine A4, which is arranged at different positions along a guide surface in a direction orthogonal to a direction in which a game ball is guided.

According to the gaming machine A4, in the gaming machine A2 or A3, the guide surface is formed with a first region that is continuous from the front end side to the base end side of the wing member, and is not included in the game ball guided in the first region. Since the protruding portion is formed with a size that makes contact, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface rolls in the first region, it is possible to avoid the rolling speed of the game ball from decreasing. You can smoothly enter the entrance.

In this case, the first area of the guide surface of one of the pair of blade members and the first area of the guide surface of the other blade member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. When the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) in the first area of the guide surface of the one wing member and the first area of the guide surface of the other wing member, since the positions are arranged in different directions. However, each of these game balls can be biased in different directions, and can be smoothly entered into the entrance.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a base member that rotatably supports the wing member is provided, and the base member includes a restriction portion that abuts the wing member and restricts rotation of the wing member, A game machine A5, wherein the protruding portion of the wing member is brought into contact with the restriction portion of the base member.

According to the gaming machine A5, in any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a base member that rotatably supports the wing member is provided, and the base member contacts the wing member to restrict the rotation of the wing member. Since the protruding portion of the wing member is provided in contact with the restricting portion of the base member, the damage of the wing member can be suppressed. That is, since the protruding portion is a portion protruding from the wing member (guide surface), the portion of the wing member having a relatively high rigidity can be used as a stopper for abutting against the restricting portion of the base member. As a result, damage to the wing member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A5, the side surface of the protruding portion is formed substantially flush with the side surface of the wing member on the base end side, and in the closed state, the side surface is substantially flush with the side surface of the wing member on the base end side. A gaming machine A6, wherein a side surface of the protruding portion formed is brought into contact with at least a restriction portion of the base member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the protruding portion has its side surface formed substantially flush with the side surface on the base end side of the wing member, and in the closed state, the base end side of the wing member. Since the side surface of the protruding portion that is formed substantially flush with the side surface of the base member is in contact with at least the regulating portion of the base member, the portion (side surface of the protruding portion) far from the rotation shaft is located at the regulating portion of the base member. Can be brought into contact with
The reaction force input to the wing member from the regulation unit can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the wing member can be suppressed. Further, for example, as compared with the case where the protruding tip end surface of the protruding portion is brought into contact with the restricting portion of the base member, the restricting portion of the base member can be separated from the ball entrance, and the flow to the ball entrance can be increased. It is possible to secure a space that serves as a road. In addition to the side surface of the protruding portion, the side surface of the wing member on the base end side may be in contact with the restriction portion of the base member. In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced and the damage to the wing member can be further suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, an intervening wall located between the facing portions of the projecting portion in the closed state is provided, and the pair of wing members is such that the projecting portion is not formed when viewed in the rotation axis direction. The game machine A7 is characterized in that the facing distance of the guide surface in the area to be made is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the facing distance of the protruding portion is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Here, the pair of wing members are arranged at a position where the facing distance between the guide surfaces in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the game ball so as not to sandwich the game ball. In this case, when the projecting portion is projected from the guide surface, the pair of wing members are arranged further apart by the projecting height of the projecting portion so that the game ball is not sandwiched between the projecting portions. The need arises, and the space required for disposing the pair of wing members increases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A6, the game machine A7 is provided with an intervening wall located between the facing portions of the projecting portion in the closed state, and the pair of wing members is provided with a rotary shaft In the directional view, since the facing interval of the guide surfaces in the region where the protruding portion is not formed is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, the facing interval of the protruding portion is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball, The space required for disposing the pair of wing members can be suppressed.

That is, in the state where the game ball is guided (rolled) on the guide surface, even if the pair of wing members start to close (even when the transition to the closed state is started), the intervening wall is provided between the opposing protruding portions. By being located, the game ball can be discharged from between the facing portions of the projecting portion, and the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the projecting portions.
The game sphere discharged from the facing portion of the projecting portion by the intervening wall is located between the facing faces of the guide surfaces in the area where the projecting portion is not formed. Since it is made larger than the diameter of, the game ball is not caught. As a result, the facing interval of the protruding portions can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the space required for disposing the pair of wing members can be suppressed. In other words, the pair of wing members can be arranged in a space equivalent to the space required for disposing the conventional product in which the protruding portion is not projected on the guide surface.

In the gaming machine A7, in the opened state, the upper surface of the intervening wall is positioned below the lower end of the guide surface in the gravity direction and above the lower end of the ball entrance in the gravity direction. Gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, in the open state, the upper surface of the intervening wall is located below the lower end of the guide surface in the direction of gravity and above the lower end of the ball entrance in the direction of gravity. Since it is located, the game ball guided by the guide surface can be sent to the upper surface of the intervening wall, and the upper surface of the intervening wall can be rolled to enter the ball entrance.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one of the pair of blade members is arranged at a position forming the closed state and the timing of the other blade member being arranged at a position forming the closed state. A gaming machine A9, which is characterized by different timing.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one of the pair of blade members is arranged at the position forming the closed state and the other blade member are Since it is arranged at a position where the closed state is formed, it is difficult to sandwich the game ball between the pair of wing members (guide surfaces), and the facing interval between the pair of wing members can be narrowed accordingly. Therefore, the space required for disposing the pair of wing members can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member has a posture in which the guide surface faces the entrance, and a closed position in which the game ball cannot enter the entrance, and a posture in which the guide surface is the upper surface. The guide surface of the guide member is rotatably formed between an open position that allows the game ball that rolls over the guide surface to the entrance side of the ball entrance to enter the ball entrance. It is formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the ball entrance, and the pair of projecting portions are arranged at positions sandwiching the ball entrance in a front view. Along with the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface), the game machine A10 is arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal thereto.

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is set in a position where the guide member is retracted below the ball entrance, a closed position in which the game ball cannot enter the ball entrance, and a position where the guide surface is the upper surface. The guide surface of the guide member is formed so as to be slidable between an open position that allows the game ball to roll into the entrance and project to the front side of the entrance. It is formed to have a width that is equal to or larger than the width of the entry opening, and the pair of protruding portions are arranged at positions sandwiching the entry opening in a front view. A gaming machine A11, which is arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to a width direction (a direction in which a game ball is guided along the guide surface).

According to the gaming machine A10 or A11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the guide member has a guide surface of the guide member having a width equal to or larger than the width of the entrance. Formed,
The pair of projecting portions are arranged at positions sandwiching the ball entrance in a front view, and the positions are made different in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). Since they are arranged, the game balls guided (rolled) on the guide surface are brought into contact with the projecting portions, whereby the game balls can be surely biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the entrance.

Further, the one protruding portion and the other protruding portion are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the width direction of the guide member (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). When the game ball enters the guide surface of the guide member from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be brought into contact with either one of the pair of projecting portions. Therefore, one side in the width direction (
Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the game ball entering from the other side) from passing through the guide surface of the guide member and flowing out from the other side in the width direction of the guide surface of the guide member. As a result, the player's interest can be improved by allowing the game ball to enter the ball entrance.

<Concept of the invention with the winning opening unit 500 as an example>
A ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members arranged with the ball entrance sandwiched between them, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the pair of wing members to open or close them. And, when the pair of wing members is opened by the driving force of the driving means, the pair of wing members is arranged at an allowable position that allows the game ball to enter the ball inlet, and the pair of wing members is driven by the driving force of the driving means. In a gaming machine provided with a restricting means arranged at a restricting position for restricting entry of a game ball into the ball entrance when the wing member is closed, the state in which the pair of wing members is closed or the pair. The game machine B1 is characterized in that the restricting means is formed so as to be maintained at the restricting position in a state where the wing member is opened from the outside.

Here, a game ball is formed so that the game ball can enter the ball, a pair of wing members that are arranged with the ball in between, and a driving force is applied to the pair of wing members to open or close the ball. Drive means for
When the pair of wing members is opened by the driving force of the driving means, the pair of wing members is closed by the driving force of the driving means while the pair of wing members is arranged at the allowable position for allowing the game ball to enter the ball entrance. There is known a gaming machine provided with a restricting means arranged at a restricting position for restricting the entrance of the game ball into the ball entrance (for example, JP 2011-172833A).

According to this gaming machine, when the pair of wing members is opened by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is arranged at the allowance position, so that the game ball that has passed between the pair of wing members enters the ball entrance. You can enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members is closed by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is arranged at the restricting position. Therefore, when the pair of wing members is forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball enters the ball entrance. It is possible to regulate the entry.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated,
For example, since the restricting means can be displaced from the restricting position to the allowing position after forcibly opening the pair of wing members from the outside, the effect of restricting illegal entry of the game ball into the ball entrance is obtained. There was a problem that it was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the arrangement of the restricting means is formed so as to be maintained at the restricting position when the pair of wing members is closed or the pair of wing members is opened from the outside, the restriction is performed. The means can be suppressed from being displaced to the allowable position. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate that the game ball is illegally entered into the entrance.

In addition, the restriction position for restricting the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance means that it is sufficient if the game ball can be stopped at a predetermined position. That is, when a ball entrance and a passage through which the game ball flowing from the ball entrance passes through are connected to the ball entrance, the restricting position by the restricting means (position for stopping the game ball) is more than the ball entrance. It may be upstream, or may be downstream from the entrance (that is, in the middle of the path flowing from the entrance and passing through the passage). In the latter case, the regulation position by the regulation means may be upstream of the detection means with respect to the detection means (detection sensor) provided in the middle of the passage for detecting the passage of the game ball. May be downstream.

The gaming machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, and the transmission mechanism slides between the open slide position and the closed slide position by the driving force of the drive means. A slide transmission member and a slide displacement of the slide transmission member to an open slide position to rotate to an open rotation position to open the pair of wing members and a slide displacement of the slide transmission member to a closed slide position to close the wing member. A rotation transmission member that is rotated to a rotation position to close the pair of wing members, the regulation means is disposed on the slide transmission member, and the regulation is performed when the slide transmission member is slid and displaced to the open slide position. When the slide transmission member is slid to the closing slide position, the regulating means is arranged in the regulation position, and the slide transmission member is arranged in the closing slide position. When the rotation transmission member is arranged at the open rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, so that the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is restricted. A gaming machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, when the rotation transmission member is arranged at the open rotation position with the slide transmission member arranged at the closed slide position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member. By engaging with and, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is regulated, so that it is possible to easily regulate that the game ball is illegally inserted into the ball inlet.

That is, when the pair of closed wing members are forcibly opened from the outside, the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position while the slide transmission member is located at the closed slide position. In this state, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, so that the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is regulated, so that the regulation means can be maintained at the regulation position (the regulation means is allowed. It is possible to suppress unauthorized displacement from the outside to the position). As a result, even if the pair of wing members is forcibly opened from the outside and the game ball is passed through between the pair of wing members, the restriction means restricts the game ball from entering the ball entrance. it can.

In the gaming machine B2, one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member is provided with a sliding groove and the other is provided with a sliding protrusion, and the sliding protrusion is slid along the sliding groove. As a result, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted, the rotation transmission member is rotated, and the slide protrusion is engaged with the inner wall surface of the slide groove, thereby opening the slide transmission member. A game machine B3 characterized in that slide displacement to a slide position is restricted.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member is provided with a sliding groove and the other is provided with a sliding protrusion, so that the sliding protrusion slides. By sliding along the moving groove, the slide displacement of the slide transmitting member is transmitted, the rotation transmitting member is rotated, and the slide protrusion is engaged with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, so that the slide transmitting is performed. Since the slide displacement of the member to the open slide position is restricted, it is possible to reduce the size and make it difficult to release the restriction.

That is, a means for restricting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position can be formed by utilizing the slide groove and the slide protrusion for transmitting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the rotation transmission member for rotation. Since it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another location, the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, by adopting a structure in which the sliding projection is engaged with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally access the engaging portion from the outside.
The restriction (engagement) can be made difficult to be released.

The gaming machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, and the transmission mechanism slides between the open slide position and the closed slide position by the driving force of the drive means. A slide transmission member and a slide displacement of the slide transmission member to an open slide position to rotate to an open rotation position to open the pair of wing members and a slide displacement of the slide transmission member to a closed slide position to close the wing member. A rotation transmission member that is rotated to a rotation position to at least close the pair of wing members, the regulating means is disposed on the rotation transmission member, and the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position. When the rotation transmitting member is rotated to the closing rotation position, the regulating means is arranged at the regulating position, the slide transmitting member is arranged at the closing slide position, and the rotation is performed. When the transmission member is arranged in the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, whereby rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position is restricted. A gaming machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, in the state in which the slide transmission member is arranged in the closed slide position and the rotation transmission member is arranged in the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are Since the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position is restricted by engaging with, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from illegally entering the ball entrance.

That is, from the state in which the pair of wing members are closed, for example, the pair of wing members is forcibly forcibly opened from the outside or the rotation transmission member is directly operated to rotate the rotation transmission member to the open position. Even if you try to do, by engaging the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member,
Since the rotation of the rotation transmitting member to the open rotation position is restricted, the restricting means can be maintained at the restricting position (that is, the restricting means can be prevented from being forcibly displaced from the outside to the allowance position). As a result, it is possible to regulate the illegal entry of the game ball into the entry slot by the regulation means.

In the gaming machine B4, a protrusion that protrudes from one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member, and an engagement portion that is formed on the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member so as to be engageable with the protrusion. A gaming machine B5, characterized in that the projecting portion is projected along a direction of slide displacement of the slide transmission member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, a protrusion protruding from one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member and the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member engageable with the protrusion. Since the protrusion is projected along the direction of slide displacement of the slide transmission member, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member is utilized to engage the protrusion and the engagement portion. And the release of the engagement can be switched, and the structure can be simplified.

The engagement portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member) with which the projection portion can come into contact, and a hole or a recess into which the projection portion can be inserted (slide transmission member or rotation transmission member). It may be a hole drilled in one of the members or a recess recessed therein. That is, it suffices that the rotation of the rotation transmitting member to the open rotation position can be regulated by bringing the protrusion into contact with the engaging portion. In this case, the engaging portion is preferably a hole or a recess. Since the protruding portion is inserted into the engaging portion, the space required for disposing the protruding portion can be suppressed and the size can be reduced, and since the protruding portion is inserted into the engaging portion, the protruding portion can be externally attached. This is because it can be shielded from the outside, and it is possible to make it difficult to illegally access the protruding portion from the outside.

In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the open rotation position, and is opened toward the closed rotation position. A gaming machine B6, comprising: a closing-side abutment portion that abuts and closes the pair of wing members when the game machine B6 is closed.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmitting member serves as an opening side contact portion that abuts and opens the pair of wing members when rotated toward the open rotation position. , A closing-side abutting portion that abuts and closes the pair of wing members when rotated toward the closing rotation position, so that the pair of wing members can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside, Unauthorized access from outside to the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member can be made difficult.

That is, when the wing member is displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening, the closing side contact portion of the rotation transmitting member is pressed by the wing member, and the rotation transmitting member tries to rotate toward the open rotation position.
In this case, according to the present invention, the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position can be restricted by the engagement of the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member, so that the displacement of the wing member is brought into contact with the closing side of the rotation transmission member. It can be regulated by the department. That is, the wing member can be restrained from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members from being forcibly opened from the outside, and it is difficult to make an unauthorized access to the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member from the outside.

The gaming machine B4 or B5 is provided with an urging means for urging the pair of wing members in the closing direction, and the rotation transmission member contacts the pair of wing members when rotated toward the open rotation position. A gaming machine characterized in that the pair of wing members are closed by the urging force of the urging means when the rotation transmitting member is rotated toward the closed rotation position. B
7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the gaming machine B7 includes a biasing means for biasing the pair of wing members in the closing direction, and the rotation transmitting member is rotated toward the open rotation position. And an opening-side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of wing members, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of wing members is closed by the urging force of the urging means. When the pair of wing members are forcibly released from the outside, the pair of wing members are not brought into contact with the rotation transmitting member, and it is possible to avoid the external force due to the forced opening being applied to the rotation transmitting member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of blade members, the rotation transmission member, or the slide transmission member from being damaged.

The urging means includes a spring (a urging member for urging the pair of wing members in the closing direction by an elastic recovery force).
(A torsion spring or a coil spring), a magnet for urging the pair of wing members in the closing direction by an attractive force, and the like.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, a detecting means for detecting a game ball entered in the ball entrance is provided, and the restricting means has the restricting position downstream from the detecting means, and A gaming machine B8 characterized by restricting a game ball at a position where it can be detected by the detecting means.
..

According to the gaming machine B8, in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the gaming machine B8 is provided with a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball entered in the ball entrance, and the restricting means has a restricting position downstream of the detecting means. At the same time, since the game ball is regulated at a position where it can be detected by the detection means, for example, when the wing member is forcibly opened and the game ball is illegally flown in through the ball entrance, the detection means detects the game ball. It is possible to continue the state. Therefore, it is possible to detect that the game ball has been illegally flown in by determining whether the detection by the detection means has continued for a predetermined time or longer.

<About the concept of the invention with the decorative pattern display device 800 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotatably formed first reel and a rotatably formed second reel which is arranged substantially concentrically inside the first reel, the first reel is a cylinder A second outer wall having a cylindrical shape and a first side wall projecting radially inward from one axial side of the first outer peripheral wall, the second reel having a cylindrical shape and an outer surface thereof. A second outer peripheral wall that faces the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall at a predetermined interval, and a second outer peripheral wall that projects radially inward from one axial side of the second outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall is the inner surface of the first side wall. And a second side wall facing each other at a predetermined interval, and a standing portion is erected from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall to the other. Machine C1.

Here, a rotatably formed first reel and a rotatably formed second reel which is arranged substantially concentrically inside the first reel are provided (that is, a double reel structure is provided). A gaming machine (provided) is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-230693). There is also known a technique of removing dust adhering to the display surface of the reel by cleaning the reel by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and following the rotation of the rotating member. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-28241).

However, the double reel structure has a problem that cleaning is difficult. That is,
In the double reel structure, it is not possible to secure a space for disposing the rotating brush described above between the outer reel (first reel) and the inner reel (second reel), and therefore, the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel and the inner reel The outer peripheral surface of the reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first reel is a cylindrical first outer peripheral wall,
A first side wall projecting radially inward from one side of the first outer peripheral wall in the axial direction, the second reel is formed in a cylindrical shape, and its outer surface is spaced apart from the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall by a predetermined distance. And a second side wall, which extends radially inward from one axial side of the second outer side wall and whose outer surface faces the inner side of the first side wall at a predetermined interval. Since the erected portion is erected from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall or the outer surface of the second side wall to the other, the erected portion is provided between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. By being displaced in the circumferential direction, wind pressure is generated, and by utilizing this wind pressure, air can flow between the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall. Accordingly, the dust can be removed by the air flow, and the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be cleaned. That is, the double reel structure facilitates cleaning.

In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2, wherein the first side wall and the second side wall are formed to have an annular shape in the axial direction and have a surface continuous in the circumferential direction.

Here, when an opening is formed in at least one of the first side wall and the second side wall, or when a part in the circumferential direction is partially divided, the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall are separated from each other. The wind pressure generated by displacing the standing portion in the circumferential direction between the openings escapes from the opening and the divided portion, and the wind pressure is weakened, and the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall are correspondingly reduced. It becomes difficult for the air between to flow.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the first side wall and the second side wall are formed to have an annular shape as viewed in the axial direction and have a surface continuous in the circumferential direction. It is possible to increase the wind pressure generated when the standing portion is displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. Therefore, the air between the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be easily made to flow accordingly. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the circumferential displacement of the standing portion between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall is utilized to utilize the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the second outer peripheral wall. The air between the outer surface and the outer surface can be easily made to flow.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first reel includes a first support wall that is rotatably supported in the center and supports the first side wall, and the second reel is rotatably supported in the center. A gaming machine C3, comprising a second support wall that is supported and supports the second side wall, and an opening is formed in at least one of the first support wall or the second support wall.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, an opening is formed in at least one of the support wall supporting the first side wall and the second support wall supporting the second side wall. The air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall is exhausted to the outside through the opening, or the air is externally discharged between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. Can inhale. That is, the flow resistance of the air can be reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be made to flow (outflow or inflow) more easily. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the circumferential displacement of the standing portion between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall is utilized to utilize the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the second outer peripheral wall. The air between the outer surface and the outer surface can be easily made to flow.

In the gaming machine C3, when the standing portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the other of the first reel or the second reel A game machine C4, wherein the opening is formed at least in the first support wall or the second support wall.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, when the standing portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the first reel or Since the opening is formed at least in the other first support wall or the second support wall of the second reel, it is possible to easily exert the effect of reducing the flow resistance by exhausting or sucking air through the opening. .. That is, when one of the first reel and the second reel, in which the standing portion is erected, is rotated, the other opening in which the opening is formed is stopped so that the air flowing through the opening is prevented. flow(
The resistance of (exhaust gas or intake air) can be reduced.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the standing portions are erected at radially different positions on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall, respectively. C5
..

In the gaming machine C5, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the inner surface of the first side wall and the second surface
Since the erected portions are erected on the outer surface of the side wall at different positions in the radial direction, the inner surface of the first side wall and the inner surface of the first side wall are irrespective of whether the first reel or the second reel is rotated. Wind pressure can be generated by displacing the standing portion in the circumferential direction between the outer surface of the two side walls. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall in the effect by rotating the first reel or the second reel.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed to be light-transmissive, and a plurality of symbols are formed on the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel. A gaming machine C6, which is arranged along the circumferential direction, wherein the standing portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel.

According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed to be light-transmissive, and the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel. Since the plurality of symbols are arranged in the circumferential direction, the player can visually recognize the variation of the symbols due to the rotation of the second reel via the first reel. In this case, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel, that is, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel whose rotation frequency is larger than that of the first reel. In the effect by rotating the first reel or the second reel, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
A substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means is mounted and a transmissive member that transmits the light emitted from the light emitting means are provided, and the transmissive member is formed in a curved shape, and the plurality of light emitting means are the transmissive members. A gaming machine D1 arranged along a curve, wherein the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Here, a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means is mounted and a transmissive member that transmits the light emitted from the light emitting means are provided, and the transmissive member is formed in a curved shape, and the plurality of light emitting means are curved in the transmissive member. A gaming machine arranged along the line is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-106672). In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals in the front view of the transmissive member. That is, the curved lines (arcs) formed by the plurality of light emitting means are equally spaced along the direction of the line segment (string) connecting both ends. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem in that the distribution of heat generated by the light emitting means is uneven because the distance between adjacent light emitting means is narrowed in some of the plurality of light emitting means. Therefore, heat is likely to concentrate on some of the light emitting means, and the life is likely to be shortened.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the distance between the adjacent light emitting means in each light emitting means can be made constant, and the heat distribution of the light emitting means is distributed. Can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from concentrating on a part of the light emitting means and improve the life of each light emitting means.

In the gaming machine D1, a reflecting member that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting unit toward the transmitting member is provided, and the reflecting member includes a plurality of division screens divided corresponding to the plurality of light emitting units. The gaming machine D2, wherein the partition widths of the plurality of partition screens in the front view of the transparent member are set to be substantially the same.

Here, when the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction) along the curve of the transmissive member, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at unequal intervals in the front view of the transmissive member. The Rukoto. That is, in the front view of the transmissive member, a region having a narrow space between the light emitting means and a region having a wide space are formed. Therefore, the distribution of the light amount becomes non-uniform along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, a reflecting member that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member is provided, and the reflecting member corresponds to a plurality of light emitting means. Since the division widths of the transmissive members of the plurality of division screens in the front view are set to be substantially the same, the light amount of each division screen visually recognized in the front view of the transmission member is substantially the same. Can be the same. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means can be made uniform.

In the gaming machine D2, the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, the gaming machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, so that, for example, compared with the case where the light emitting surface is circular, Since the diffusivity can be secured (light can be emitted in a wider angle), the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in one division screen.

The light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encapsulates the LED chip. Therefore, the light-emitting surface having a rectangular shape in front view means that the front-view shape of the encapsulating resin (the front-view shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin) is rectangular.

In the gaming machine D3, at least a part of the plurality of light emitting means is arranged such that one side of the light emitting surface is arranged along a tangential direction of a curved shape of the transparent member.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, at least a part of the plurality of light emitting means is arranged so that one side of the light emitting surface is along the tangential direction of the curved shape of the transparent member. The light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily diffused uniformly along the curve of the transmissive member. As a result, it is possible to make the distribution of the amount of light that is visually recognized through the transmissive member uniform.

In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the division screen is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the transmissive member and is recessed on the side away from the back surface of the transmissive member, and the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is the transmissive surface. A gaming machine D5, which faces a facing portion of a member and the section screen.

According to the gaming machine D5, in any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the division screen is formed as a curved surface facing the back surface of the transmissive member and concave toward the side separated from the back surface of the transmissive member, and the light emitting surface of the light emitting means. Since the space between the transparent member and the partition screen faces each other, the substrate can be arranged in a posture orthogonal to the transparent member. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the unit including the transmissive member, the substrate, and the reflective member can be increased. In this case, since the division screen is arranged in such a manner as to surround the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the light emitting means from the direction orthogonal to the traveling direction of the light, the light reflected on the division screen is transmitted to the back surface of the transmissive member. It can be made to enter uniformly. As a result, it is possible to make the distribution of the amount of light that is visually recognized through the transmissive member uniform.

In the gaming machine D5, the reflecting member is provided with a continuous surface that is continuous with the section screen and faces the light emitting surface of the light emitting means, and the continuous surface is convex toward the light emitting surface of the light emitting means. A gaming machine D6, which is formed as a curved surface that becomes

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D5, the reflecting member has a continuous surface that is continuously provided on the section screen and faces the light emitting surface of the light emitting means, and the continuous surface is the light emitting means. Since it is formed as a curved surface that is convex toward the light emitting surface, the light reflected by the continuous surface can be uniformly incident on the back surface of the transmissive member. As a result, it is possible to make the distribution of the amount of light that is visually recognized through the transmissive member uniform.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
A rotating body that is rotatably formed, and a plurality of rotating cylinders are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals; and a decoration member that is disposed along the plurality of rotating cylinders and at least a part of which has a light-transmitting property. A substrate disposed on the rear side of the decorative member and having a plurality of light emitting means mounted thereon, the substrate being arranged in a posture in which a surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the rear surface of the decorative member. The gaming machine provided is provided with a reflecting member that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member, the gaming machine E1.

Here, a plurality of rotatable drums that are rotatably formed and arranged side by side at a predetermined interval, and a plurality of rotatable drums that are disposed along the plurality of rotatable drums and have at least part of them light-transmissive. The decorative member and a substrate provided on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted are provided, and the substrate is arranged in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. A game machine to be installed is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-5927). According to this gaming machine,
Not only can the space between the rotating drums be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also the pattern of the decorative member can be formed (displayed) on the surface of the decorative member by the light of the light emitting means transmitted through the decorative member. It is possible to perform an effect that the player visually recognizes integrally with the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the substrate is arranged in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member, the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently reflected on the back surface of the decorative member. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of rendering is insufficient. On the other hand, if the decorative member (the area excluding the pattern) is enlarged while the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means is small, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the reflecting member for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decoration member is provided, the posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decoration member is provided. Even when the substrate is provided, it is possible to widen the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means can be increased by that amount, and the effect can be enhanced. Further, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means can be made larger, the area excluding the pattern can be made smaller, so that a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum can be formed.

In the gaming machine E1, the decoration member is formed on the front side with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum, and is formed by extending the outer edge to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum in front view. Characteristic gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is located on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum and extends the outer edge to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum in front view. Since it is formed by being extended, the axial end surface of the rotating drum can be easily shielded from the player (hard to be visually recognized). Further, since the pattern of the decorative member formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light emitting means and the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum can be brought closer to each other, the decorative member and the rotating drum can be The feeling can be easily formed.

In the gaming machine E2, the reflecting member connects the surface of the board on which the light emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member, so that the area of the board on which the light emitting means is mounted and the pattern on the decorative member are A gaming machine E3, which surrounds a region to be formed, and a back surface of the reflecting member is inclined in a direction away from an axial end surface of the rotating drum as it goes from the decoration member to the substrate.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the reflecting member connects the surface of the board on which the light emitting means is mounted and the rear surface of the decorative member to the area where the light emitting means is mounted on the board. Surrounding the area in which the pattern in the decorative member is formed, the back surface of the reflective member,
Since it is inclined in a direction away from the axial end face of the rotating body as it goes from the decorative member to the substrate, the size of the pattern formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light emitting means is ensured and the rear surface of the decorative member is secured. Can be brought close to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum, and the rotating drum can be made to enter the back side of the decorative member (the rotating drum can be brought close to the substrate). As a result, the axial end surface of the rotating drum can be easily shielded from the player (hard to be visually recognized), and a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum can be easily formed.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the light emitting means is mounted on both surfaces of one side and the other side of the board.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, since the light emitting means is mounted on both the one side surface and the other side surface of the board, the light emission mounted on the one side surface Different patterns can be independently formed (displayed) on the decorative member depending on the light emitted from the means and the light emitted from the light emitting means mounted on the other surface.

In this case, the number of substrates arranged between the rotating drums arranged side by side can be one. Therefore, the space required for disposing the substrate can be suppressed, and accordingly, the rotating drum can be pushed into the back side of the decorative member (the rotating drum can be brought close to the substrate). As a result, the axial end surface of the rotating drum can be easily shielded from the player (hard to be visually recognized), and a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum can be easily formed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
A gaming machine provided with a first displacing member and a second displacing member which are arranged so as to be opposed to each other and are displaceable in directions approaching or separating from each other, and displaceable in the same direction with opposing sides abutting each other. In the base member, the base member, and the first displacement member and the second member on the base member.
A first support mechanism and a second support mechanism that respectively support the displacement member so that the displacement member can be displaced, and a support mode of the first support mechanism is biased to one side of an opposite side of the first displacement member, Of the second displacing member which is in contact with one side of the opposite side of the second opposite side of the second displacing member opposite to the other side of the opposite side.
A game machine F1 in which a support mode of the second support mechanism is biased to one side of an opposing side of the displacement member.

Here, the first displacing member and the second displacing member which are arranged so as to be opposed to each other and are formed so as to be displaceable in respective directions approaching or separating from each other and displaceable in the same direction with the opposite sides being in contact
A game machine provided with a displacement member is known (for example, JP 2013-106844 A).
.. According to such a gaming machine, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are brought close to the position where the opposite sides come into contact with each other, so that the object located on the back side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member (for example, , The liquid crystal display device and the effect member) and by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the direction in which they are separated from each other, the shielding is released in accordance with the displacement, and the object can be viewed. Can be performed. In addition, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced in the same direction (for example, reciprocal displacement in one direction and the other direction) in a state where the opposite sides are in contact with each other, thereby maintaining the shielding of the target object. It is also possible to perform an effect (an effect that focuses on the operation of releasing the shielding) before the shielding is released.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to bring the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact with each other due to the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance of the constituent members, and between the opposing sides. There is a problem that a gap may be formed in the. If a gap is formed between the opposite sides, the player can visually recognize the target object on the back side through the gap, and the effect of production is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, a base member and a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism for displaceably supporting the first displacement member and the second displacement member on the base member, respectively,
The support mode of the first support mechanism is biased to one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member, and is opposite to the other side of the opposing side of the second displacement member that abuts on one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member. Since the support mode of the second support mechanism is biased to one side of the opposing side of the second displacement member which is the side, when the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, The support mode of the support mechanism and the support mode of the second support mechanism can be biased to the opposite sides (sides rotated by 180° with the center of one side and the other side of the opposing sides as the center of rotation). Thereby, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

Here, as a mode in which the support state is biased to one side, for example, one side and the other side have different rigidity of the component members (dimension, number of components, material, etc. of the component members), one side and the other side Driving force (for example, size, transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) transmitted from one side to another side, the connection state of component members between one side and the other side (for example, the number of connecting portions, Different amount of tapping, etc., easiness of displacement to the other side between one side and the other side (biasing force received from the biasing means, gravity,
Examples are those having different displacements (resistance during sliding or rotation), combinations of these, and the like.

Therefore, when the support state is biased to one side due to the rigidity of the constituent members, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism are arranged such that the side with high rigidity (low side) is the side with low rigidity (high side) of the opponent. ) Can be met. Therefore, in a state in which the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism respectively push (move forward) the opponent on the side with high rigidity, On the side of low rigidity, it is possible to form a state of receiving (retracting) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F1, the first supporting mechanism includes a first driving unit that generates a driving force, a pair of first connecting members that connects the first displacement member to the base member, and a pair of the first connecting members. A first driving means for transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the
A second drive mechanism for generating a driving force; and a pair of second couplings for coupling the second displacement member to the base member. Members,
A game machine characterized by comprising a second one-side transmission member and a second other-side transmission member which respectively transmit the driving force of the second drive means to the pair of second connecting members and which are configured differently from each other. F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes a first driving unit that generates a driving force, and a pair of first coupling members that couple the first displacement member to the base member. A first one-side transmission member and a first other-side transmission member, which are configured to respectively transmit the driving force of the first driving means to the pair of first coupling members and have different configurations, and the second support mechanism includes: Second driving means for generating a driving force, a pair of second connecting members for connecting the second displacement member to the base member, and transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the pair of second connecting members, respectively. Since the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission member having different configurations are provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap is formed between the opposing sides. It can suppress being formed.

That is, in a state where the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism are, for example, on the side with a large driving force or the transmission timing of the driving force. It is possible to form a state in which the opponent is pushed in (advanced) on the front side, and the opponent is accepted (retracted) on the side with a small driving force or the transmission timing of the driving force on the latter side. as a result,
The opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

Here, as an aspect in which the first one-side transmission member and the first other-side transmission means (the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission means) are configured to be different from each other, for example, the rigidity of the configuration member (configuration Examples are those that differ in the dimensions, number of materials, materials, etc. of the members, those in which the connecting states of the constituent members (for example, the number of connecting parts, the amount of rattling of the connecting parts, etc.) are different, and combinations of these. To be done. That is, due to the difference in these configurations, the magnitude and timing of transmission of the driving force to be transmitted are different, and the support modes of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism are biased to one side.

In the gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, one end side is connected to the first displacement member or the second displacement member, and the other end side is the base member. A gaming machine F3, which is rotatably supported coaxially with the gaming machine F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is the first displacement member or the second displacement member. Since the other end side is connected to the base member and is rotatably supported by the base member coaxially and rotatably, the first displacing member and the second displacing member are reciprocally moved in the same direction while abutting their opposing sides. At this time, even when utilizing the bias of the support mode, it is possible to easily maintain the state where the opposite sides are in contact with each other.

In the gaming machine F3, at least one of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is provided with an elastic body formed of a rubber-like elastic material, and the first displacing member and the second displacing member are opposed to each other. A game machine F4, wherein the elastic body is interposed between the first connecting member and the second connecting member in a state of being elastically compressed in a state of abutting.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, at least one of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is provided with an elastic body made of a rubber-like elastic material, and the first displacing member is provided. In the state where the opposite sides of the second displacement member are in contact with each other, the elastic body is interposed between the first coupling member and the second coupling member in an elastically compressed state. When the second displacement member reciprocates in the same direction while abutting the opposite sides thereof against each other, even when utilizing the bias of the support mode, it is possible to easily maintain the state where the opposite sides are in contact with each other.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first supporting mechanism is a first generating a driving force.
Drive means, a pair of first connecting members that are driven by the first driving means and connect the first displacement member to the base member, and a first biasing force that applies different biasing forces to the pair of first connecting members, respectively. 1 one side urging member and a 1st other side urging member, The said 2nd support mechanism is the 2nd drive means which generate|occur|produces a drive force, and the said 2nd displacement while being driven by the 2nd drive means. A pair of second connecting members for connecting the member to the base member, and a second one-side biasing member and a second other-side biasing member that apply different biasing forces to the pair of second connecting members, respectively. A gaming machine F5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is driven by the first driving means that generates a driving force, and is driven by the first driving means.
A pair of first connecting members for connecting the displacement member to the base member, and a first one-side biasing member and a first other-side biasing member that apply different biasing forces to the pair of first connecting members, respectively. Second
The support mechanism includes a second driving unit that generates a driving force, a pair of second connecting members that is driven by the second driving unit and connects the second displacement member to the base member, and the pair of second connecting units. Since the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member that apply different biasing forces to the members are provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the opposing sides can be easily attached. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between each other.

That is, in a state in which the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism respectively push in the opponent (advance forward) on the side having a large biasing force. ), the side with a small biasing force can form a state of accepting (retracting) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

The first one-side biasing member and the first other-side biasing member may have the same configuration.
That is, the biasing forces applied to the pair of first connecting members may be different from each other by different positions where the biasing forces are applied or different elastic deformation amounts. The same applies to the second one side biasing member and the second other side biasing member.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first supporting mechanism is a first generating a driving force.
Driving means, a pair of first connecting members that are driven by the first driving means and connect the first displacement member to the base member, and apply a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members. The second supporting mechanism is driven by the second driving means, and the second displacing member is connected to the base member. A gaming machine F6, comprising a pair of second connecting members and a second biasing member for applying a biasing force to one of the pair of second connecting members.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is driven by the first driving means that generates the driving force, and is driven by the first driving means.
The first support member includes a pair of first connection members that connect the displacement member to the base member, and a first biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of first connection members. And a pair of second coupling members that are driven by the second driving unit and couple the second displacement member to the base member, and one of the pair of second coupling members. Since the second biasing member that applies a force is provided, it is possible to easily bring the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposing sides.

That is, in a state in which the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism respectively push the opponent on the side to which the biasing force is applied ( Along with moving forward, it is possible to form a state of receiving (retracting) the opponent on the side where the biasing force is not applied. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F3 or F4, one leg is formed as a torsion spring and one leg is connected to the first connecting member, and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the first displacing member is connected to the second connecting member.
A first torsion spring for applying an urging force in a direction in which the first displacement member is brought closer to the displacement member, and the first coupling member is rotated in a direction in which the first displacement member is brought closer to the second displacement member. At least one of a connecting position between one leg of the torsion spring and the first connecting member or a connecting position between the other leg of the first torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion. Amusement machine F7.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3 or F4, one leg is formed as a torsion spring and one leg is connected to the first connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member.
Since the first torsion spring that applies the urging force in the direction in which the displacement member approaches the second displacement member is provided, when the first displacement member is displaced in the direction in which the displacement member approaches the second displacement member, the first connecting member The driving force of the first driving means required to rotate the can be assisted by the biasing force of the first torsion spring. Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member is displaced from the retracted position separated from the second displacement member to the contact position where it abuts against the second displacement member from the stopped state, the displacement can be smoothly started. it can.

In this case, as the first connecting member is rotated in the direction of bringing the first displacing member closer to the second displacing member, the connecting position of one leg of the first torsion spring and the first connecting member or the first torsion spring Since at least one of the connecting positions of the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the distance from the winding portion to the position where the force acts becomes longer, so that the first displacement member is closer to the second displacement member. It is possible to weaken the biasing force in the direction of making it. Therefore, for example, when stopping the first displacement member that is brought close to the second displacement member, the displacement can be surely stopped, so that damage due to a collision can be suppressed. Further, the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a state where the opposite sides are in contact with each other.
When the displacement member is reciprocally displaced in the same direction, the driving force required for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed, so that the displacement speed of the reciprocal displacement can be increased and the effect of production can be improved.

A direction in which one leg is formed as a torsion spring and one leg is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member in the gaming machine F7 so that the second displacing member approaches the first displacing member. A second torsion spring that applies a biasing force to the second displacement member, and one leg of the second torsion spring as the second coupling member is rotated in a direction to bring the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member. At least one of the connection position between the second connection member and the second connection member or the connection position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion.

According to the gaming machine F8, the second torsion spring has the same effect as the first torsion spring in the gaming machine F7. Particularly, when the first displacing member and the second displacing member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction in a state where the opposite sides are in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed in both, so that it is particularly effective. Become. Further, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are at the same height (arranged at the position in the gravity direction), and the contact position between them is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the gravity direction and the distance between them is large. The configuration of the gaming machine F8 is particularly effective when the position to be moved (retracted position) is the lowest position (or the highest position) in the gravity direction.

In the gaming machine F7, the first displacing member is brought closer to the second displacing member by displacing upward in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7, the first displacing member is brought closer to the second displacing member by the upward displacement in the gravitational direction. The urging force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member upward in the gravity direction can be increased as the position thereof is increased (that is, in the direction of displacing the first displacement member upward in the gravity direction as the first displacement member is positioned upward in the gravity direction Can weaken the bias).

Therefore, when the first displacement member is displaced (raised) from the stopped state upward in the direction of gravity, the displacement (elevation) can be started smoothly and the raised first displacement member is stopped. In this case, the displacement can be surely stopped not only by the action of gravity but also by weakening the urging force. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage due to the collision with the second displacement member.
On the other hand, when stopping the first displacing member that is displaced (lowered) downward in the direction of gravity, the urging force is strengthened, and the urging force opposes the action of gravity to continue the downward movement. be able to. As a result, the first displacement member can be reliably stopped.

In the gaming machine F9, a direction formed as a torsion spring in which one leg is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacing member is separated from the first displacing member. A second torsion spring for applying a biasing force to the second displacement member, and the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by upward displacement in the direction of gravity, and the second displacement member is the first displacement member. As the second connecting member is rotated in the direction of approaching the second
At least one of a connecting position of one leg of the torsion spring and the second connecting member or a connecting position of the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion. Gaming machine F10.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F9, one leg is formed as a torsion spring and one leg is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member is A second torsion spring for applying a biasing force in a direction of separating from the first displacement member;
Since the displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by the upward displacement in the gravity direction, when the second displacement member is displaced in the direction away from the first displacement member, that is, the second displacement member is moved in the gravity direction. When it is necessary to displace (raise) against the above, the driving force of the second drive means required to rotate the first connecting member can be assisted by the biasing force of the second torsion spring.
Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the second connecting member is rotated in the direction of bringing the second displacing member closer to the first displacing member, the connection position between one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the second torsion spring Since at least one of the connecting positions of the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member due to the increase in the distance from the winding portion to the force acting position. It is possible to weaken the urging force in the direction (the direction of upward movement in the direction of gravity). Therefore,
For example, when the first displacing member and the second displacing member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction while the opposite sides are in contact with each other, the driving force necessary for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed, and thus the displacement speed of the reciprocal displacement can be reduced. Can be increased, and the effect of production can be improved.

<Characteristic G group> (independent drum before the drum)
When the determination means capable of executing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means, In the gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting an advantageous privilege to the player, the identification information is composed of a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols, and the gaming machine is the symbol. A gaming machine G1 characterized by having a dynamic displacement means for dynamically displacing a row, and a switching means for switching operation contents dynamically displaced by the dynamic displacement means.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a medium on which identification information (design) for showing the jackpot lottery result is printed in order to perform an effect display for showing the jackpot lottery result on the game board surface. A game machine provided with a display device (for example, a reel-type display device, a belt-type display device) capable of performing variable display by rotating (for example, a reel or a belt) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-144675). Publication). The above-mentioned gaming machine informs the player of the result of the jackpot by actually operating the medium on which the design is printed, so that the player can be interested in the variable display. However, the variable display can be executed only in a predetermined display mode (a display mode in which the printed pattern is only displayed), and the variation in the effect display becomes poor, so that the player can play the game. There was a problem of getting tired early. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the enjoyment of the game is improved by diversifying the variation display in the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the operation content in which the symbol row is dynamically displaced is switched by the switching means, it is possible to switch various effects by the dynamic displacement of the symbol row, and the player gets tired of the game early. This has the effect of suppressing the inconvenience.

In the gaming machine G1, the identification information is composed of a first symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols and a second symbol row which can be arranged on the front side or the rear side of the first symbol row. That is, the dynamic displacement means is for displacing the direction in which the first symbol row is dynamically displaced and the direction in which the second symbol row is dynamically displaced, in different directions, and the switching means is A gaming machine G2, characterized in that the operation content is switched by switching the visible state of the first symbol row and the second symbol row.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the visual recognition state is switched by the switching means, so that the player can switch between the first symbol row and the second symbol row to be visually recognized. There is an effect that the enjoyment of the game can be improved by showing the dynamic displacement that causes displacement in different directions.

In the gaming machine G1, the first symbol row is arranged on the rear surface side of the second symbol row, and the second symbol row has a transmissive portion that makes the first symbol row visible. The game machine G3 is formed, wherein the switching means changes the position of the second symbol row so as to change the operation content visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the visible state of the first symbol row and the second symbol row can be changed by changing the position of the visible transmission part, and various displays can be made. There is an effect that can be done.

In either the gaming machine G2 or G3, a plurality of the first symbol rows are arranged, and when the plurality of symbol rows are stopped, the determination result is notified by the combination of the symbols of the respective symbol rows. It is configured, the second symbol row is configured by one symbol row, and the determination result is notified by one symbol when the symbol row is stopped. A gaming machine G4 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, the number of symbol rows is different between the first symbol row and the second symbol row, so that the player is provided with a different determination result notification mode. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic H group> (Drum in normal time, 7 segment in short time)
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and dynamic displacement means for dynamically displacing the identification information displayed on the display means, In a gaming machine having a privilege imparting unit that imparts a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display unit, a plurality of different game states can be displayed. A settable game state setting means, and a dynamic displacement mode determination means for determining a mode dynamically displaced by the dynamic displacement means corresponding to the game state set by the game state setting means, Having, the identification information is configured by a plurality of different symbols, and shows the determination result by combining the plurality of different symbols, the dynamic displacement means, by the game state setting means When one gaming state is set, the plurality of different symbols are dynamically displaced by displacing them in a predetermined order, and when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that it can be dynamically displaced by displacing from one symbol to another arbitrary symbol among the plurality of different symbols.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a medium on which identification information (design) for showing the jackpot lottery result is printed in order to perform an effect display for showing the jackpot lottery result on the game board surface. A game machine provided with a display device (for example, a reel-type display device, a belt-type display device) capable of performing variable display by rotating (for example, a reel or a belt) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-144675). Publication). The above-mentioned gaming machine informs the player of the result of the jackpot by actually operating the medium on which the design is printed, so that the player can be interested in the variable display. However, since only the variable display according to the order of the printed symbols can be executed, the player can easily predict the result of the game (the identification information (the symbol) that is stopped and displayed), and the player There was a problem of getting tired of the game early. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in playing the game.

According to the gaming machine H1, since it is produced that the displacement contents of the symbols are different depending on the game state, it is possible to switch between the case where the symbol type to be displaced next can be predicted and the production where prediction is difficult, and the player There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine H1, the identification information is composed of a symbol row in which the plurality of different symbols are arranged and a display symbol in which a part of the plurality of different symbols is lit and displayed. Displacement means, in the first game state, for dynamically displacing the symbol row, in the second game state, the display symbol is dynamically displaced by controlling lighting. A gaming machine H2.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the symbol row is dynamically displaced in the first gaming state, and in the second gaming state, the display symbol is dynamically displaced by controlling lighting. , In the second game state, there is an effect that it can be dynamically displaced in a short time, and an effect for a short time can be performed.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the dynamic displacement mode determining means has a longer dynamic period when the first gaming state is set than when the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine H3, characterized in that the dynamic displacement mode is configured to be easily determined.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, in the first gaming state, a dynamic period that is longer than the second period can be easily determined. Therefore, by using a long dynamic display period, There is an effect that the dynamic displacement of the symbol can be easily notified to the player.

<Feature group I> (variable display area size)
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect, an effect means having an effect execution area in which an effect is executed by the effect execution means, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the specific effect is executed In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means, variable means for varying the effect execution area, and variable control means for varying the effect execution area by the varying means in correspondence with the effect to be executed. A gaming machine I1 characterized by the above.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a medium on which identification information (design) indicating the jackpot lottery result is printed in order to perform an effect display for showing the jackpot lottery result on the game board surface ( For example, a game machine provided with a display device (for example, a reel type display device, a belt type display device) capable of performing variable display by rotating a reel or a belt has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-144675). Gazette). The above-mentioned gaming machine has been capable of making the player interested in the variable display, but since it actually drives and controls the device to perform the variable display, There is a problem that it is difficult to change the presentation mode of the variable display as compared with the conventional game machine used, and it is not possible to improve the interest of the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in playing the game.

According to the gaming machine I1, since the effect execution area is variable corresponding to the effect to be executed, the effect being executed can be discriminated also by the effect execution area, and the effect being executed can be easily understood. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine I1 has a performance period determining means for determining a performance execution period to be executed by the performance executing means, and the performance executing means has a plurality of consecutive performance execution periods determined by the performance period determining means. The gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a continuous effect in which the effect to be performed is executed, and the variable control means changes the effect execution area in accordance with the number of times of execution of the continuous effect. I2.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1, the effect execution area is changed corresponding to the number of times of continuous effect execution, so that it is possible to identify the number of times of continuous effect execution by the effect execution area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played easily.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, there is a determination means capable of executing determination, and the effect execution means dynamically displays a plurality of symbol rows in which a plurality of different symbols are arranged in a combined display, and then stops the display. It is configured that the determination result by the determination means can be shown by a combination of the symbol strings stopped and displayed on the activated line, and the activated line corresponds to the effect execution area being varied by the varying means. The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that it is set by increasing/decreasing.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the number of effective lines is increased/decreased according to the effect executed by the effect executing means, so that the player can expect various wins. There is an effect that it can be held and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic J group> (Direction to create an effective line)
When the determination means capable of performing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means In the gaming machine having a privilege imparting means for imparting a privilege advantageous to the player, the identification information is configured to be able to show the determination result by combining a plurality of symbols, and After the dynamic display of a plurality of symbols, a dynamic display means capable of stopping and displaying the plurality of symbols in a combination for indicating the determination result on a predetermined effective line, and a specific condition is satisfied. In this case, the gaming machine J1 is characterized by comprising a valid line setting means capable of setting a specific valid line different from the valid line.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of identification information (designs) for showing the jackpot lottery result are printed in order to perform an effect display for showing the jackpot lottery result on the game board surface. A display device (for example, a reel type display device, a belt type display device) capable of performing variable display for rotating a medium (for example, a reel or a belt) is provided, and a plurality of pieces of identification information stopped and displayed at a specific display position ( There has been proposed a gaming machine that informs the player of a lottery result of a jackpot by a combination of (patterns) (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-144675). In the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the specific display position where the identification information (symbol) is stopped and displayed in order to show the lottery result of the jackpot is fixed, the result of the game to the player (the identification information (stopped and displayed) ( (Pattern)) is easily predicted, and there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game early. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which has an increased interest in playing the game.

According to the gaming machine J1, when the specific condition is satisfied, a specific effective line different from the predetermined effective line is set by the effective line setting means, so that the determination result specific to the predetermined effective line is obtained. In addition to the display of the symbol for indicating, it is possible to expect that the specific condition is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine J1, in addition to the plurality of symbols, it has a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol, the effective line setting means, the symbol display means, and a part of the symbols of the plurality of symbols. A game machine J2, wherein a specific effective line is set as the establishment of the specific condition when a specific combination is obtained as a result of the combination.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, a specific condition is satisfied by the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. Therefore, the gaming machine J2 is interested in other than the symbols displayed on the predetermined effective line. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine J2, the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is configured such that dynamic display is started when a specific symbol among the plurality of symbols is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine J3 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J2, the dynamic display is started when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved by expecting the stopped display of the specific symbol. There is an effect that you can.

In the gaming machine J3, the symbol display means is configured to dynamically display the symbol by switching between a lighting state and a non-lighting state.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J3, the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is dynamically displayed by switching between a lighting state and a non-lighting state, so a plurality of rotations can be made in a short time. There is an effect that it can be displayed as a target.

<Characteristic K group> (7-segment display, hourly display)
When the determination means capable of performing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to a player, a game in which a specific game state in which the judgment by the judgment means is easily executed can be set until a specific condition is satisfied. A state setting means, and an informing means for informing the player of information corresponding to the remaining period until the specific condition is satisfied by using at least a part of the identification information, A gaming machine K1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a display means (7-segment control) for executing lighting control and extinguishing control for seven segments in order to perform an effect display for showing a jackpot lottery result on a game board surface. A game machine provided with a display device has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-11180). In a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal display, it is possible to set a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a time saving state) for a predetermined period, and the remaining period during which the time saving state can be set is displayed on the liquid crystal display. A game machine having (for example, a function for displaying the number of remaining short times) has also been proposed. By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine equipped with the 7-segment display device can only inform the player of information using the seven segments, so that the gaming machine equipped with the conventional liquid crystal display can be used for the gaming machine. Since the amount of information that can be notified is reduced, for example, there is a problem that it is difficult to notify the player of the number of remaining time reductions described above. Further, if a dedicated display means for displaying the remaining short time count is provided, there is a problem that the cost for manufacturing the gaming machine increases. An object of the present invention is to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player by making it possible to notify the remaining short time count by using a 7-segment display device that performs an effect display for showing the result of a lottery in the above-mentioned gaming machine. And

In the gaming machine K1, the display means has a 7-segment display unit, and the identification information is configured by a symbol displayed by the 7-segment display unit, the gaming machine K2.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, after dynamically displaying the identification information, a dynamic display means for stopping and displaying in a mode for indicating the determination result, and a period for dynamically displaying the identification information on the dynamic display means A dynamic display period determining means for determining, and a gaming machine K3.

In the gaming machine K3, after the identification information is stopped and displayed, until the next dynamic display of the identification information is started, a regulation period for regulating the dynamic display of the identification information is set. A gaming machine K4, characterized by comprising a period setting means.

In the gaming machine K3, after the temporary display is performed in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means in a mode for indicating the determination result by the identification information, the mode is displayed from the mode indicating the determination result. A gaming machine K5 characterized by being displayed by switching to a mode showing information.

<Characteristic L Group> A determination unit that can perform determination that changes the number of effective lines by rotating the shutter, a display unit that displays identification information indicating the determination result by the determination unit, and a display unit specific to the display unit In the gaming machine having a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the determination result is displayed, the identification information is obtained by combining a plurality of symbols. It is configured to be able to show the determination result, and after dynamically displaying the plurality of symbols, stop and display the plurality of symbols with a combination for showing the determination result on a predetermined effective line. A gaming machine L1 having a dynamic display means capable of performing.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a medium on which identification information (design) is printed to show the jackpot lottery result in order to perform an effect display on the game board surface to show the jackpot lottery result. A game machine provided with a display device (for example, a reel-type display device, a belt-type display device) capable of performing variable display by rotating (for example, a reel or a belt) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-144675). Publication). The above-mentioned gaming machine informs the player of the result of the jackpot by actually operating the medium on which the design is printed, so that the player can be interested in the variable display. However, the variable display can be executed only in a predetermined display mode (a display mode in which the printed pattern is only displayed), and the variation in the effect display becomes poor, so that the player can play the game. There was a problem of getting tired early. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the enjoyment of the game is improved by diversifying the variation display in the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine L1, after dynamically displaying a plurality of symbols, it is possible to stop and display a plurality of symbols with a combination for showing a determination result on a predetermined effective line. It is possible to have it, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L1 has a variable member capable of changing the size of the display area of the display means, and the effective size of the display area is changed by changing the variable member. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that the number of lines is increased or decreased.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, since the effective line is increased or decreased by changing the variable member, the expectation for a specific determination result is changed by changing the variable member. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic M group> (The BGM (stopping sound) when the design is stopped is defined as a sharp BGM (stopping sound))
A gaming machine comprising: a determination means capable of executing determination, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to a player when the determination result executed by the determination means is a predetermined determination result, Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and dynamic display mode setting for setting the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means Means, at least a voice output means capable of outputting voice during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means, and a voice type for setting the type of voice output by the voice output means Setting means, wherein the audio type setting means sets the audio type according to a stop timing of the identification information included in the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting means. A gaming machine M1 characterized in that

Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine uses a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on a game board surface to perform an effect display for showing a lottery result of a jackpot and corresponds to the effect display. There was one that played back the sound. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which the player can set a desired sound by providing a function of allowing the player to adjust the volume of reproduced sound (for example, JP-A-2016-73432). .. By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine can adjust the volume of the reproduced sound, but cannot adjust the output timing of the reproduced sound. The timing to be emphasized (for example, the timing at which a part of the identification information for showing the jackpot lottery result is stopped and displayed) is different from the timing at which the reproduced voice is emphasized and output (timing to beat). There was a problem that it would end up. In this way, if the emphasis timing of the effect display is different from the emphasis timing of the voice, it becomes difficult to inform the player of the timing to be watched among the effects executed, so that it is visually difficult There is a problem that the effect (effect display) and the auditory effect (voice output) cannot be executed as an effect with a sense of unity. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which further improves the interest of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine M1, since the type of voice can be set according to the stop timing of the identification information, it is possible to output the voice matched with the stop timing of the identification information, and the player can feel the sense of incongruity. The effect is that it can be set.

In the gaming machine M1, the dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol rows formed from a plurality of identification information, and the dynamic display mode setting means is different from the plurality of symbol rows. A dynamic display mode for stopping display at a timing is set, and the voice type setting means sets the same voice type at each timing at which the plurality of symbol strings are stopped and displayed. Gaming machine M2.

According to the gaming machine M2, it is possible to output the same type of sound in accordance with a plurality of stop timings set by the dynamic display mode setting means. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a lively experience.

In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the voice output unit is capable of outputting a second voice different from the voice set by the voice type setting unit, and the voice set by the voice type setting unit. , Output timing discriminating means for discriminating the output timing of the second voice, and correction means for correcting the output mode of the second voice based on the discrimination result of the output timing discriminating means. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine M3, the output mode of the second voice can be corrected based on the determination result of the output timing of the voice output based on the stop timing of the identification information and the output timing of the second voice. There is an effect that the voice output based on the stop timing of can be output with priority over the other voices.

In the gaming machine M3, the correction unit causes the output timing determination unit to output the second voice when the output timing of the voice and the output timing of the second voice overlap within a predetermined period. A gaming machine M4 characterized by being prohibited.

According to the gaming machine M4, when the voice output in synchronization with the stop timing of the identification information overlaps with another voice, the output of the other voice is prohibited, so that the output is performed in accordance with the stop timing of the identification information. There is an effect that the player can easily hear the played sound.

In the case where the gaming machine M4 has a volume adjusting unit capable of adjusting the volume of the voice output by the voice outputting unit or the second voice, and the output of the second voice is prohibited by the correcting unit. The game machine M5 is characterized in that the sound volume of the second sound is adjusted by the sound volume adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine M5, since the player can preferentially hear the first voice only by adjusting the volume corresponding to the second voice, the processing of the correction means can be simplified. is there.

The gaming machine M6 according to any one of the gaming machines M3 to M5, wherein the second sound is a song continuously output at least during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines M3 to M5, music is output as the second sound during the dynamic display period of the identification information, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. There is.

In the gaming machine M6, the output timing determining means determines the timing at which the voice is output and the timing of the beat of the song, the gaming machine M7.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M6, the timing at which the sound is output and the timing of the beat of the music are determined by the output timing determination means, so that the sound output from the audio output means is appropriate. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the voice type setting means sets the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting means when the determination result of the determination means is the predetermined determination result. The game machine M8 is for setting the type of the sound output at a timing different from the stop timing of the identification information included in.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result, the output timing of the sound is intentionally changed from the stop timing of the identification information. Since it is possible to shift, it is possible to inform the player of a game result that is advantageous to the player with a feeling of strangeness, and it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game.

<Characteristic N group> (Changing drum scroll speed depending on BGM with different tempo)
A gaming machine comprising: a determination means capable of executing determination, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to a player when the determination result executed by the determination means is a predetermined determination result, Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and dynamic display mode setting for setting the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means Means, at least a voice output means capable of outputting voice during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means, and a voice type for setting the type of voice output by the voice output means The dynamic display mode setting means includes a setting means and a voice type determining means for determining the type of the voice set by the voice type setting means. A gaming machine N1 characterized in that the dynamic display mode of the identification information is set differently.

Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine uses a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on a game board surface to perform an effect display for showing a lottery result of a jackpot and corresponds to the effect display. There was one that played back the sound. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which the player can set a desired sound by providing a function of allowing the player to adjust the volume of reproduced sound (for example, JP-A-2016-73432). .. By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine can adjust the volume of the reproduced sound, but cannot adjust the output timing of the reproduced sound. The timing to be emphasized (for example, the timing at which a part of the identification information for showing the jackpot lottery result is stopped and displayed) is different from the timing at which the reproduced voice is emphasized and output (timing to beat). There was a problem that it would end up. In this way, if the emphasis timing of the effect display is different from the emphasis timing of the voice, it becomes difficult to inform the player of the timing to be watched among the effects executed, so that it is visually difficult There is a problem that the effect (effect display) and the auditory effect (voice output) cannot be executed as an effect with a sense of unity. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which further improves the interest of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine N1, the dynamic display mode can be changed based on the discrimination result of the voice type discriminating means, so that the dynamic display mode which does not give a feeling of strangeness to the voice output by the voice output means is set. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is natural to the player.

In the gaming machine N1, the voice type setting means is configured to be able to set at least a first voice type and a second voice type having a faster tempo than the first voice type as the voice type. The dynamic display mode setting means sets the dynamic display speed of the identification information differently according to the tempo of the voice type set by the voice type setting means. ..

According to the gaming machine N2, the dynamic display speed can be changed in accordance with the tempo of the voice output from the voice output means, so that the output voice and the set dynamic display mode have a sense of unity. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the voice type setting means sets the voice type based on the determination result of the determining means.

According to the gaming machine N3, it is possible to make the player predict the determination result of the determination means according to the type of the output voice, so that the player can be interested in the aspect of the output voice. effective. Furthermore, since the dynamic display mode is set in accordance with the audio type set based on the determination result of the determination unit, there is an effect that the determination result of the determination unit can be easily predicted.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, stop display mode setting means for setting a stop display mode of the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means is provided, and the dynamic display mode setting means is configured to determine the voice type. A first dynamic display mode set based on the determination result of the means, and a second dynamic display for stopping and displaying the identification information dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode in the stop display mode. A mode and at least the following are set: A gaming machine N4.

According to the gaming machine N4, even if the dynamic display mode according to the set voice type is set, the identification information can be surely stopped and displayed in the stop display mode set by the stop display mode setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be notified of the determination result of the determination means in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine N4, the dynamic display mode setting means sets the dynamic display speed of the second dynamic display mode based on the dynamic display speed set as the first dynamic display mode. A gaming machine N5 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine N5, the identification information can be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode set by the stop display mode setting means even if the dynamic display speed is set according to the set voice type. There is an effect that the player can be easily informed of the determination result of the means.

<Characteristic O group> (derivation of control to make BGM (stopping sound) at the time of design stop good BGM (stopping sound))
A gaming machine comprising: a determination means capable of executing determination, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to a player when the determination result executed by the determination means is a predetermined determination result, Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and dynamic display mode setting for setting the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means Means, at least a voice output means capable of outputting voice during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means, and a voice type for setting the type of voice output by the voice output means Setting means, wherein the voice type setting means sets the type of the voice according to information included in the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting means. A gaming machine O1 characterized by.

Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine uses a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on a game board surface to perform an effect display for showing a lottery result of a jackpot and corresponds to the effect display. There was one that played back the sound. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which the player can set a desired sound by providing a function of allowing the player to adjust the volume of reproduced sound (for example, JP-A-2016-73432). .. By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine can adjust the volume of the reproduced sound, but cannot adjust the output timing of the reproduced sound. The timing to be emphasized (for example, the timing at which a part of the identification information for showing the jackpot lottery result is stopped and displayed) is different from the timing at which the reproduced voice is emphasized and output (timing to beat). There was a problem that it would end up. In this way, if the emphasis timing of the effect display is different from the emphasis timing of the voice, it becomes difficult to inform the player of the timing to be watched among the effects executed, so that it is visually difficult There is a problem that the effect (effect display) and the auditory effect (voice output) cannot be executed as an effect with a sense of unity. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which further improves the interest of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine O1, since it is possible to set the type of voice according to the set dynamic display mode, it is possible to output a voice that matches the dynamic display mode, and the player will not feel uncomfortable. There is an effect that can be set.

<Characteristic P group> (BGM at the time of the symbol stop is matched by making the tempo of the song the same, and the stop sound is set according to the tempo of the song and the symbol stop timing)
A gaming machine comprising: a determination means capable of executing determination, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to a player when the determination result executed by the determination means is a predetermined determination result, Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and dynamic display mode setting for setting the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means Means, at least a voice output means capable of outputting voice during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means, and a voice type for setting the type of voice output by the voice output means Timing at which the setting means, the voice type determination means for determining the type of the voice set by the voice type setting means, and the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting means satisfy a predetermined display condition And a specific voice setting unit for setting a specific voice output by the voice output unit based on the determination result of the timing determination unit and the determination result of the voice type determination unit. A gaming machine P1 characterized by the following.

Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine uses a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on a game board surface to perform an effect display for showing a lottery result of a jackpot and corresponds to the effect display. There was one that played back the sound. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which the player can set a desired sound by providing a function of allowing the player to adjust the volume of reproduced sound (for example, JP-A-2016-73432). .. By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine can adjust the volume of the reproduced sound, but cannot adjust the output timing of the reproduced sound. The timing to be emphasized (for example, the timing at which a part of the identification information for showing the jackpot lottery result is stopped and displayed) is different from the timing at which the reproduced voice is emphasized and output (timing to beat). There was a problem that it would end up. In this way, if the emphasis timing of the effect display is different from the emphasis timing of the voice, it becomes difficult to inform the player of the timing to be watched among the effects executed, so that it is visually difficult There is a problem that the effect (effect display) and the auditory effect (voice output) cannot be executed as an effect with a sense of unity. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which further improves the interest of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine P1, the specific voice can be set based on the discrimination result of the timing discriminating means and the discrimination result of the voice type discriminating means. Therefore, the dynamic display of the identification information and the output voice It is possible to set a specific voice corresponding to any of the above, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

In the gaming machine P1, the dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol rows formed from a plurality of identification information, and the dynamic display mode setting means is different from the plurality of symbol rows. A game is characterized in that a dynamic display mode for stopping display at a timing is set, and the timing discriminating means discriminates a timing when the symbol row stops as a timing satisfying the predetermined display condition. Machine P2.

According to the gaming machine P2, since the specific voice can be set in accordance with the timing when each symbol row is stopped, the specific voice suitable for the dynamic display mode to be executed can be set, and the effect of production is enhanced. The effect is that you can.

In the gaming machine P2, the voice type setting means sets any one voice type from a plurality of voice types with different timings of the beats of the output voices, and the voice type determining means is the voice type determining means. A gaming machine P3, characterized in that the timing of beats of the voice type set by the voice type setting means is determined.

According to the gaming machine P3, the specific voice can be set in accordance with the timing of the beat of the voice output from the voice output means.

In the gaming machine P3, the specific voice setting means sets a specific voice with a beat corresponding to the timing determined by the timing determination means and the timing of the beat of the voice type determined by the voice type determination means. A gaming machine P4 characterized by setting the above.

According to the gaming machine P4, the beat corresponding to the stop timing of each symbol row and the beat timing of the voice is set as the specific voice, so that the specific voice that is output gives a sense of unity with the dynamic display mode and the voice. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine P4 has a specific voice storage unit that stores a plurality of the specific voices in advance, and the specific voice setting unit sets the specific voice corresponding to the voice type set by the voice type setting unit to the specific voice. A gaming machine P5 characterized by being read from a storage means and set.

According to the gaming machine P5, by storing the specific voice corresponding to the voice type in the specific voice storage means in advance, it is possible to simplify the process when setting the specific voice.

In the gaming machine P5, the specific voice storage means stores a plurality of specific voices having different beat intervals of the specific voice.

According to the gaming machine P6, since the specific voice can be set in accordance with the interval between the stop timing of the symbol row and the timing of the beat of the voice, the characteristic voice can be easily set.

In the gaming machine P5 or P6, the specific voice storage means stores a plurality of specific voices having different output period lengths.

According to the gaming machine P7, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the specific voice is output for an unnecessarily long period from occurring by changing the length of the period in which the specific voice is output.

In any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then fixedly displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It becomes a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the final identification information is specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine K2 according to any one of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift sphere but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine K3 according to any one of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused game machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a performance to notify the player of the judgment result when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, and the judgment result is notified to the player. However, if the result of the hit determination is a hit, there is one in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, further interest in the game has been demanded as an effect for suggesting the result of the hit determination.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the player.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a performance executing means capable of executing a performance, a performance means having a performance executing area in which a performance by the performance executing means is executed, and the specific performance is provided. A privilege giving means for giving a benefit to the player when executed, a varying means for varying the effect execution area, and the effect execution area corresponding to the effect to be executed. And a variable control unit that is changed by the changing unit.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and has a production period determination means for determining a production execution period executed by the production execution means, and the production execution means is the production period. It is configured to be able to execute a continuous effect in which a plurality of continuous effects are executed within the effect execution period determined by the determining means, and the variable control means executes the effect corresponding to the number of times the continuous effect is executed. The area is variable.
The game machine of the technical idea 3 is a game machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, and has a determination means capable of executing a determination, and the effect execution means has a plurality of symbol rows in which a plurality of different symbols are arranged. It is configured to be able to show the determination result by the determination means by the combination of the symbol lines stopped and displayed on the activated line after the combined display is dynamically displayed, and the activated line, It is set by increasing or decreasing in response to the effect execution area being changed by the changing means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance, a performance means having a performance executing area in which a performance by the performance executing means is executed, and a case where the specific performance is executed. A privilege giving means for giving a benefit to the player, and a varying means for varying the effect execution area, and the effect executing area by the varying means corresponding to the effect to be executed. And a variable control means for varying.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exhibited. That is, it has a production period determination means for determining the production execution period to be executed by the production execution means, the production execution means, a plurality of continuous production within the production execution period determined by the production period determination means. The continuous effect to be executed is configured to be executable, and the variable control means changes the effect execution area according to the number of times of execution of the continuous effect.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exhibited. That is, it has a determination means capable of executing the determination, and the effect execution means dynamically displays a plurality of symbol arrays in which a plurality of different symbols are arranged in a combined display, then stops the display, and displays the stop on the activated line. It is configured to be able to show the determination result by the determination means by a combination of each of the symbol strings that have been set, and the effective line is increased or decreased in correspondence with the effect execution area being changed by the changing means. Is done.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
80 Variable display unit (display means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
S305 judgment means S2211 dynamic display hand stage

Claims (1)

Determination means capable of executing determination,
Display means for displaying identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means,
If the identification information for indicating particular the determination result to the display unit is displayed, the privilege granting means advantageous benefits to the player is given, in closed and gaming machine,
A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information in a predetermined operation pattern ,
A variable unit capable of changing between a first state and a second state different from the first state;
Variable control means capable of executing variable control for varying the variable means based on a predetermined variable pattern,
The gaming machine is
As an effect pattern for indicating the determination result of the determination means, the operation pattern of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means. It is possible to determine an effect pattern including at least based on the determination result of 1 of the determination means,
It is possible to make the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit more difficult to visually recognize when the variable unit is in the second state than when the variable unit is in the first state,
The game machine characterized in that the variable control means can change the variable means in a variable manner included in the effect pattern even when the identification information is not dynamically displayed .